JP2019058339A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized in display means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a decorative drawing pattern display device 208. The decorative drawing pattern display device 208 can display conversation performance displays. One of the conversation performance displays is a word balloon display f1, and another one of the conversation performance displays is a word balloon display f2. In the conversation performance displays, the word balloon display f2 is displayed later than the word balloon display f1. Display means displays a moving animation of the word balloon display f1 and a moving animation of the word balloon display f2. A moving direction of the word balloon display f1 in the moving animation of the word balloon display f1 is different from a moving direction of the word balloon display f2 in the moving animation of the word balloon display f2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 274

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed type game machine, and a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, a game console provided with display means such as a liquid crystal display device is widely known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

The above purpose is
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as "first moving animation"),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation”),
The direction in which the first balloon display moves in the first movement animation is a direction different from the direction in which the second balloon display in the second movement animation moves.
It is achieved by the game stand characterized by.

  According to the present invention, a game console characterized by display means can be realized.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop symbol form of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of an item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 2 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 3 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 4 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 5 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 6 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation concerning Example 7 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is a figure showing an example of screen transition when various menus are chosen on a menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 8 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 9 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 10 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 11 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 12 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 13 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 14 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 15 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 16 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 17 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 18 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 3 in time series. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the first embodiment in time series. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the second embodiment in time series. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to a modification of the second embodiment in time series. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the third embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the fourth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the fifth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to a modification of the fifth embodiment in time series. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a specific presentation shown in FIG. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 45. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of false continuation production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a specific presentation shown in FIG. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of a false rendition. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button continuous hitting operation production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button continuous hitting operation production. It is a figure showing gradually about an example of reservation continuation notice generation performed during a big hit game. It is a figure showing gradually about other examples of reservation continuation notice generation performed during a big hit game. It is a figure showing gradually about other examples of reservation continuation notice generation performed during a big hit game. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of button continuous hitting operation production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 65. (A) is a figure which shows another example of a decorative symbol, (b) is a figure explaining the combination of the symbol used as the eye of a chance of a prior notice. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of an effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 68. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of an effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of an effect performed in a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a specific presentation shown in FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 72. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of a false rendition. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. It is a figure shown gradually about other examples of button production. (A) is a figure shown about the other example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment, (B) is other than the pseudo link effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment It is a figure shown about the example of. It is a figure showing an example of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which used the chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the aspect of a change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing the other example of button production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord has taken action on the variation icon h0. It is a figure showing some examples in which navi character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action on fluctuation icon h0. It is a figure which shows the several example from which the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the several example in which the navigation character YM is raising the action of multiple times with respect to the fluctuation icon h0 in one time of the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 166, in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions to the fluctuation icon h0 in one fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of icon change production. It is a figure which shows the several example in which the navigation character YM is taking action with respect to a pending | hold icon in multiple times in one time of the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 169, in which the navigation character YM has taken a plurality of actions with respect to the hold icon in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the several example in which the navigation character YM has taken action with respect to the pending | holding icon in multiple times of the variable display of the decorative symbol several times. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 171, in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the plural times of variable display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of an icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decorative symbol performed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of the ninja of a default display mode takes action with respect to a pending | holding icon. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of the red ninja is taking action with respect to a pending | holding icon. It is a figure which shows an example of selection of an icon change advance notice display, and an aspect change. 177 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 177 and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 178 and another example of effects. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 179. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation in which timer advance presentation production and frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation in which timer advance presentation production and frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 52 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 21 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a supporting machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the conversation production which used the balloon display.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail.

<< First Embodiment >>
<Overall configuration>
First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side. The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At substantially the center of the game area 124, a decorative symbol display device 208 having a display area R1 is disposed. The display area R1 may be the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but in the present embodiment, it is a partial area. In the lower right area of the game board 200, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, and a first special symbol holding lamp 218 The second special symbol hold lamp 220 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). Display area R1 is divided into four display areas of left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c and effect display area 208d, and left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b and right symbol The display area 208c can display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d can display an image used for effect.

  Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and is formed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are formed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and from the low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs in the gaming state It lights up when the high probability state is set, and turns off when the high probability state changes to the low probability state.

  In the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a meter increase entrance 227, a common drawing start opening 228, a first special drawing start opening 230, and a second special drawing start opening 231 and 232 and variable winning openings 234 and 235 are provided. In the case of the present embodiment, the first special view start opening 230 and the second special view start opening 231 are provided in the start opening unit U1. The starting opening unit U1 constitutes a passage unit that distributes the game balls entered from the upper part to the first special view starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 231. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are provided in the variable winning opening unit U2. The number, positions, and the like of the meter increase entrances 227 according to the present embodiment are not limited to this example, and, for example, two or more meter increase entrances 227 may be provided. It may be arranged at other places in the game area 124, a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning openings 234, 235) and a starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 231, 232) may have the same function as the meter increase entrance 227.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper tray 126. While discharging, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special view start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the common view start port 228. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing member 232a which can be opened and closed on the right, and while the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and it is won a common drawing variation game, a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of a ball into the second special view starting port 231 or 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper tray 126. While discharging, the special figure fluctuation game by the 2nd special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 231 or 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 has a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. A ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The variable winning opening 235 is also provided with an openable / closable mechanism, and it is impossible to enter the ball during closing, and for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. This may result in a V prize.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction conversion members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting is made. After guiding the ball that did not win in the mouth to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out port 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (1st special view start opening 230, 2nd special view start opening 231, 232) or do not win any winning opening or start opening, or only pass the common view start opening 228 To reach the out port 240.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower bowl fullness A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 and a display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common view display device 210 Drive control circuit 326 and display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the common view holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the high certainty lamp 222, etc.) The drive circuit 330 is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, shielding device sensor 430 and chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 which outputs a detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 434 (displaying an image on the symbol display device 208) Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten kinds of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown as a stop symbol form in symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure (a), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  In the figure (c), there are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. At step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command representing that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step SA15, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step SB03, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not detected) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (this processing does not detect an abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  At step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  At step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  At step SB13, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding number of holding storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit 318 Acquires the value from the register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and acquires the value from the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When there is a winning on the second special view start opening 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter of the random number generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 Acquires a value from the value storage register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as a special figure 2 win random number value and acquires a value from a special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

  In step SB23, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 5A, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, 普If the ratio fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB27 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB29), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step SB31). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step SB33, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  At step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  At step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, and setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption upon power recovery is saved as return data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SC01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, at step SC01, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. At step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. At step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step SC07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data according to pressing of the chance button. In step SC13, when there is a command to VDP 434 among the effect data read out in step SC09, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step SC15, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step SC17, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step SC19, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step SC09, the setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to step SC03.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. At step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SE01 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first secondary control unit main processing, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step SC13 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  At step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step SF05, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, at step SG01, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step SG03, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05. In step SG05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. At step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step SG07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command is performed from the ROM 506, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step SG11, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. At step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, update processing or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Type of item>
Next, types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a generic term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the item according to the present embodiment is largely divided into two types: custom item and non-custom item. It can be different. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. The non-custom item is an item that can not be modified (customized) in the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine 100, but the player is given a predetermined profit.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give the item to the player when an item giving condition set for each item is satisfied. When the custom item is given, the player performs the setting operation of the given custom item by using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 19 (q) etc.) described later, thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. , Voice, functions, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to their own preferences. Also, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain predetermined benefits (eg, benefits for the player such as a notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, for example, the item grant condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the user's preference. In addition, when the item grant condition of item D (hold pedestal custom 1), item E (hold pedestal custom 2) or item F (hold pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, a pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) at 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed below the hold icon) according to the user's preference.

  In addition, when the item giving condition of “heat” is satisfied and the item is given, the player is notified by the notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)”. Can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a hit or a high possibility of a hit). In addition, when the item grant condition of "superheat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is "super heat (very high expectation)" is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a big hit, or that the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, the meter increase presentation and the item assignment presentation will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 described with reference to FIG. 3, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (in this example, , 10) gauges (ticks) are displayed, and one sphere is inserted into the meter increase entrance 227, and the meter gauge is turned off (reduced) one by one each time it enters (details are described Later).

  By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine whether the number of balls entering the meter increase entrance 227 or the gauge of the meter is full (predetermined value for the meter increase entrance 227). It becomes possible to grasp whether a number (in this example, ten balls) has entered. In addition, the aspect of meter increase presentation is not limited to this example, For example, even if one sphere lights at every entrance into the entrance for meter increase 227 and enters, one gauge of the meter is lit (increased). Good.

  Further, the item giving effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the giving of the item, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number of opening ports 227 for meter increase (this example) Then, it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied when 10 spheres have entered), and using the decorative symbol display device 208, an indication is given that an item is given, the type of the item concerned, etc. Perform (details will be described later). By executing such an item giving effect, the player can grasp that the item has been given, the type of the item, and the like. In addition, the item giving condition and the aspect of the item giving effect are not limited to this example, for example, the number and type of already acquired items may be displayed, or the item is special (rare item May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  The first embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. The gaming state shown in FIG. 11 (a) is a state (during symbol variation) in which the special game variation game is being executed. Also, in this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, and the number of special figure 2 variation games is 3 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 6 by the display of six reserve icons PI. Is displayed, nine gauges are extinguished, and one gauge GG is lit. With the meter increase effect, nine spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (one more sphere It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 11 (c). After performing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter is performed By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 11 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 11 (e) to FIG. 11 (g). Animation display is performed to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 11 (h), information on an item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 11 (i), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, description of item A) (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  The state shown in FIG. 11 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, when the information on the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item giving effect, the button is displayed for the period shown in FIG. Make a presentation.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item application effect by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display regarding the item application effect or the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is made to overlap at least a part of the display of the display and the decoration of the design. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not disturbed, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the item By temporarily reducing the visibility of the presentation effect, the presentation effect may be able to be enhanced.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG capable of performing a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set an acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and an appearance of a chance button 136 effective for accepting an operation are simulated. The image of the button and the character image prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, PUSH), and the appearance of the left and right keys whose reception of the operation is effective among the up, down, left and right direction keys (not shown) An operation valid period display TG including a button image BG2 and a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 11 (l) in the state where the option of “Yes” is temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 11 (m) By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the “Yes” selection has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  In the state shown in FIG. 11 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item giving effect after resumption, FIG. 11 (n) to FIG. 11 (p) are triggered by the fact that a specific selection (in this example, selection to set an acquired item) is made from a plurality of options in the button effect. After displaying an animation that moves from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the image including the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of "during item A setting" instead of the character display CD1, it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition during the SP (super) reach change (the gauge of the meter becomes full). In this embodiment 2, over the period shown in FIG. 12 (a) to FIG. 12 (b), the variation game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol variation to the SP reach variation, and the subsequent FIG. 12 (c) to FIG. In addition to the SP reach fluctuation, the SP reach effect is executed over the period shown in FIG.

  During one such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 12 (d), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights up as shown in FIG. 12 (e). After performing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 12 (f), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the effect modes of the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those of the above-described embodiment 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item grant is performed by displaying the display regarding the item grant effect in front of the display regarding the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIG. 12 (h) to FIG. 12 (q). At least a part of the display relating to the rendering is overlapped with the display relating to the SP reach rendering and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item giving effect is not impeded, so that the information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the SP reach effect and the meter can be improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  Further, at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed by displaying the variation display of the decoration symbol in front of the display regarding the item giving effect over the period shown in FIG. 12 (k) to the same figure (o). Is overlapped with at least a part of the display regarding the item giving effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol is not impeded, it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game and also temporarily recognize the visibility of the item giving effect. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the velocity.

  Furthermore, over the period shown in FIG. 12 (l) to FIG. 12 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display for the SP reach effect and the item imparting effect. Thus, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol overlap at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item imparting effect. With such a configuration, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the visibility of the button effect will not be disturbed, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variation game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to perform, there may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect or the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the third embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 3 is an example which starts an item provision effect based on that item provision conditions were satisfied (due that the gauge of a meter became full) during non-pattern fluctuation (during stop display of a symbol). The gaming state shown in FIG. 13A is a state in which the variation game of the special drawing is not executed (during non-symbol variation). In this example, there is no special figure fluctuation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations for special figure 1 fluctuation game is 0, the number for special figure 2 fluctuation game is 0, It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such non-design fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights up as shown in FIG. 13 (c). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 13 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the effect mode of the meter increase presentation after that, an item provision presentation, and a button presentation are the same as the said Example 1 except being in SP reach change, while attaching the same code | symbol in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item is provided by displaying the display related to the item giving effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIG. 13 (j) to FIG. (M). At least a portion of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbol is There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item giving effect is started during the symbol change based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the non-pattern change (during stop display of the symbol). This is an example of During the non-design fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (a), as shown in FIG. 14 (b), one ball enters the entrance for 227 for increasing the meter, and in the following FIG. 14 (c), it lights up A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 14 (c), based on the ball entering the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) In the subsequent FIG. 14 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such a symbol change, as shown in FIG. 14 (f), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 14 (g). After performing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 14 (h), instead of the display of the meter, the character display CD2 of "full" is performed By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 14 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present embodiment, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 14 (i) to FIG. 14 (k). An animation display is performed to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and information about an item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule as shown in FIG. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 14 (m), the item image IG including the character display of "Heat" is displayed. In this item image IG, an item giving condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure fluctuation game is “hot (high expectation)” (the special figure fluctuation game has a winning result of It indicates that it is a hit, or that the possibility of a hit is high.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14 (n), the item giving effect is ended and the SP reach is started. As described above, if the display related to the item giving effect is deleted before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not disturbed, so the progress of the fluctuation game is accurately made to the player. It may be possible to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of reservations is full. This is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 15A is a state (during symbol variation) in which the variation game of the special figure is being executed. In this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, the number of special figure 2 variation games is 4 It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 7 by the display of seven reserve icons PI. Is displayed, and 6 gauges are turned off and 4 gauges GG are turned on. 6 spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (the 4 spheres are It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 15 (c). A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 15 (c), as shown in FIG. 15 (d), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230), and continues as shown in FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the lower display area of the screen, the number of reserved special game variations (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) increases from 7 to 8 and becomes full by the display of eight reserve icons PI Is shown.

  In this example, the meter increase effect is shifted to the increase mode when the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) becomes full (8 in this example). Configured. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 15F is a state in which the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 15 (g), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. Perform meter increase effect to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (i), when one ball further enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 15 (j), the one gauge which has been lit is extinguished. By doing this, a meter increase effect is realized in which all 10 gauges go out, and the right to erase another gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. The meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and thus the same in FIG. While attaching a code | symbol, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this example, the example shows transition to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation while the number of reservations is full. It may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the condition of is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter can be carried over to the next game, but it is configured not to carry over The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the sixth embodiment in time series.

  In the sixth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving two types of custom items). The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, and then FIG. 16 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of item names (in this example, item A and item B) IN1 and IN2 and descriptions of items (in this example, descriptions of item A and item B (content in the figure) Is omitted)) Display IT1 and IT2. In addition, three or more types of items may be provided in the item provision effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 16 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button effect according to the present example, a selection display SG capable of specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and reception of the operation are effective. Among the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (in this example, PUSH) prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136, the operation acceptance is effective among the up, down, left, and right direction keys not shown. And an operation effective period display TG including a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right key) is effective. .

  As shown in FIG. 16 (m), when the selection operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 16 (l) in a state where the option of “item A” is temporarily selected during such button effects In addition, by highlighting the option of “item A”, it is informed that the selection of “item A” has been confirmed (that item A has been selected to be set among acquired item A and item B). Do.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16 (n), the button effect is ended, and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item giving effect after resumption, FIG. 16 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, the item A is selected from the acquired item A and item B). (N) to (p), an animation is displayed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed while being moved from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display region After that, instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", by performing the character display CD3 of "during item A set", it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the seventh embodiment in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving custom items and non-custom items). Note that the meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 17 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, in FIG. 17 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description of the item (in this example, the description of item A (content is omitted)) display of IT1 Display the item image IG including the display of the character of "Heat". Note that the non-custom item to be assigned in the item assignment effect may be another non-custom item (for example, change in hold, model explanation 1 to 3, lost or the like) described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 17 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. The subsequent item giving effect and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 17 and the description thereof is omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in time series, and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 18 (a) using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen whose display is started when, for example, a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-symbol variation, and in the present example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment Display the top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen capable of selecting various menus is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in the present example, the right key) or the third operation means (in the present example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or the brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) or the fifth while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When the operation of the operation means (in this example, the down key) is received, the display of a luminance adjustment screen such as the various lamps 418 and the decorative symbol display device 208 etc. capable of adjusting the luminance is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step and the meter display is suggested to indicate that the volume is increased by one. If the operation of the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is decreased by one step Run. When the operation of the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display is performed to indicate that the brightness is increased by one step. When the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the down key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one step is executed Do.

  Furthermore, when it is detected that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed while displaying the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demonstration screen is started, and the symbol variation display is performed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 18B is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to the present example is composed of four menus of effect customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and return to the demo screen, and when each menu is selected, the effect customization screen and the mobile terminal It is configured to transition to a linked service screen, an initialization confirmation screen, and a demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-symbol variation shown in FIG. 19A, the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is received as shown in FIG. 19C while the demonstration screen is displayed, the display of FIG. 19D is performed. The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19 (e), during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted, so that FIG. 19 (f) is displayed. As shown, while the luminance is lowered by one step, the meter display indicating that the luminance is lowered by one is executed, and as shown in FIG. 19 (g), the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key 161c). Since the operation of (a) is accepted, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is increased by one step is executed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19I, since the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness adjustment screen is replaced. The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19 (j) is started. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 (k), while the display of the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the operation of the second operation unit (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 19 (l). As such, the meter display is executed to indicate that the volume has been lowered by one step and the volume has been decreased by one step.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19 (l) is displayed, the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 19 (m) is started. Since the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is received as shown in FIG. 19 (n) while the demonstration screen is displayed, the menu screen shown in FIG. 19 (o) The display of has started.

  Subsequently, in the state where the menu of effect customization is temporarily selected on this menu screen, as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. , The display of the effect customization screen has been started. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19 (r), while the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 19 (q) is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. The display of moving the light display to the next selectable item (in this example, the item P) is performed, and with the item P temporarily selected, as shown in FIG. 19 (t), the first operation is performed. Since the operation corresponding to the means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character display of "setting item P" is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208 By doing, it is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal linked service screen>
FIG. 18C is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal-linked service screen according to the present embodiment is configured of six menus of trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the portable terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 20B, the display of the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20B is started, and this portable terminal interlocking service is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, after the trial play screen display shown in FIG. 20 (b1-1) is started, new registration is selected on this trial play screen The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 20 (b1-2) is started.

  When a menu for password input is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b 2), the password as shown in FIG. 20 (b 2-1) and FIG. 20 (b 2-1-1) The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, the display of a screen notifying a password input error as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1-2) On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of a screen notifying the completion of the password input as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1-3) is started.

  When the data storage menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b3), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-1) is started, and this confirmation screen is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-2) is started, and “Exit” is selected while this two-dimensional code display screen is displayed. In this case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-2-1) is started.

  Further, when the menu of data clear is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b4), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b4-1) is started, and this confirmation screen When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b4-1-1) is started. When the quick start menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b5-1) is started, When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (display of the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 21 (a) is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-pattern variation. Also, in this example, there are no special figure fluctuation games being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special drawing 1 fluctuation games is 0, and the number of special drawing 2 fluctuation games is 0 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 21 (c), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 21 (b) while such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. After performing the meter increase effect that all the ten gauges go out by turning off the one gauge that has been lit, as shown in Fig. 21 (d), "full" instead of the meter display By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and therefore the same in FIG. Although the code is attached and the description is omitted, the display related to the item giving effect is in front of the display on the demonstration screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 21 (n). By making it display in, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen), the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Operation related to the button effect (in this example, setting of the item acquired by the player than the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment)) Operation) to be received with priority.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the operation relating to the button effect (this example Then, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the player has received an operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 21 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when the) is displayed, the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the In addition, even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the demonstration screen (top menu screen The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation related to (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection, volume adjustment, or luminance adjustment) is accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 9>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the ninth embodiment in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals as in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIG. 22 (e) to FIG. 22 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display on the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the player The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 22 (n) (the timing when the menu effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the operation on the menu screen (in this example, the operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the user has received a menu selection operation such as a mobile terminal interlocking service.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the tenth embodiment in time series.

  In the present embodiment 10, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 is displayed. This is an example of The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed in front of the display relating to the volume adjustment over the periods shown in FIG. 23 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment, the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in the present example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the player) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 23 (n) (the timing at which the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example) A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for performing the volume adjustment has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / example 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment in time series.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition (that the gauge of the meter is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 20 is displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. While the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed in front of the display relating to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIG. 24 (g) to FIG. By displaying at least a part of the display related to the item giving rendering, at least a part of the two-dimensional code is made to overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Moreover, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) Configured.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received an operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 24 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation by the chance button 136 is received at timing (1), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ( In this example, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation (an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the twelfth embodiment in time series.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item using a production customization screen after having done. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed in front of the display on the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIG. 25 (e) to FIG. 25 (o). Then, at least a portion of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the effect customizing screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. Temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen may improve the effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, so An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set in the effect customization screen) It is composed of

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customizing screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired by the person is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 25 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set in the effect customization screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example In the effect customization screen, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation of determining the item to be set is accepted.

  Also, in this example, with the option “Yes” being temporarily selected during the button effect, as shown in FIG. 25 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 25 (m) Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item is not performed immediately, and as shown in FIG. 25 (q) to (u), the menu screen is displayed again. When the portable terminal interlocking service screen is selected in and the presentation customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 25 (v), the item acquired in the item giving presentation (in this example, the item A) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item immediately by operation in button production after having done.

  The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the above-described Example 12, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 26 and their description is omitted. 26) When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received as shown in FIG. 26 (l) in a state where the option “Yes” is provisionally selected during the button effect shown in FIG. As shown in (m), by highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). If an item is acquired while the presentation customization screen is displayed, item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the presentation customization screen as shown in FIG. 26 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (display of the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 is displayed. After that, the point to set the item using the effect customization screen is the same as the embodiment 12 described using FIG. 25. However, in this example, the effect customization screen is placed in front of the display regarding the item giving effect By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item application effect (in this example, all the gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, since the visibility of the effect customization effect is not impeded, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item imparting effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the Note that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured not to overlap at least a part of the display related to the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 15 starts an item provision presentation based on that an item provision condition was satisfied during the display of the presentation customization screen demonstrated using FIG.18 and FIG.19 (that the gauge of the meter became full). This is an example in which the item provision effect is continued even if the symbol variation display is started while the effect customization screen is being displayed. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the twelfth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 28 (l), during the item provision effect shown in FIG. 28 (k), the ball entered the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) In the following FIG. 28 (m), the symbol variation display is started but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item giving effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not inhibited.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 16>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixteenth embodiment in time series.

  This embodiment 16 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 11 in that the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, the item is displayed across two changes of the change and the next change.

  Specifically, after the variation ends during execution of the item giving effect shown in FIG. 29 (k) and stop display of the symbol is performed, as shown in FIG. New fluctuation game is started based on. Then, the button effect is continued also in the next symbol change following the symbol change in which the item giving condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 29 (m), based on the pressing operation of the chance button 136 being accepted, the button effect , The item giving effect is resumed, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. As in this example, if it is possible to display items across a plurality of symbol variations, the item giving effect is not interrupted with stopping or starting symbol variations, and the player's willingness to play the game May be able to last. In addition, the symbol variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient, and it is not necessary to be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
A meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described next with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in time series.

  The embodiment 17 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 11 in that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. Same as 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the ball's entry into the meter increase entrance 227 during execution of the item assignment effect, and the meter increase effect is executed when the ball entry is detected. ing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (k), during the execution of the item assignment effect shown in FIG. 29 (j), since the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 is detected, the following FIG. As shown in), during the display of the item by the item giving effect, the meter increase effect to advance the gauge of the meter is started. If it is possible to increase the meter while the item is displayed as in this example, it may be possible to further increase the player's willingness to play the game. In addition to enabling the increase of the meter during the display of the item, the establishment of the item grant condition may be possible (the gauge of the meter may be full), In this case, the right to give the item may be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 18>
A meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described next with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the mini game is executed based on the establishment of the item provision condition during symbol variation (the gauge of the meter becomes full), and the item provision effect is started after the mini game is over. Do. FIG. 31 (e) shows a state where the mini game has been started. In this example, the display area in which the gauge of the meter is displayed is enlarged, and it is configured to execute the lottery in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the lottery according to the present embodiment may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation, the player's selection operation The result may be predetermined regardless of. In addition, the "x" sign of the result of Amidaki is off, the image imitating a capsule is the acquisition of an item, the letter of E means that the item of E is acquired, and the letter of E is reached Is configured to give notice of the items to be earned. In addition, when the design and color of the image imitating a capsule are different from normal, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be a plurality of types of mini games, and the type of items may vary depending on the type of mini game The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Ami-dakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. With the configuration as in this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored of the period from the satisfaction of the item grant condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 1>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the first modification will be described using FIG. FIG. 32: is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for increasing meter 227” is used as a trigger for the effect of increasing the meter, but the present invention is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of the ball may be used as a trigger for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (a) to FIG. 32 (b), the meter increases when the ball enters the starting opening (in the present example, the first special view starting opening 230) during non-pattern variation. The effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 32 (c) to FIG. 32 (e), the ball entered the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) during symbol variation. In the case, a meter increase effect may be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 32 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 of the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 of the second display mode based on the pre-reading result of the change game In this case, the meter increase effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 32I to FIG. 32L, the meter increase effect may be performed when the pseudo link is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 32 (m) to (o), even when an operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, even if the meter increase effect is executed Good, as shown in FIG. 32 (p), meter increase effect may be executed when reach is executed, or SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 32 (q) The meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 32 (r), the meter increase effect may be executed when the advance notice (in this example, the display of the character image of the princess) is executed. .

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 33: is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 2 in time series.

  The point that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) is displayed while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the operation regarding volume adjustment is performed (in this embodiment, even if the display regarding volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display regarding button effects). An operation relating to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation for adjusting the volume.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 33 (d) during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. As shown in e), after executing the meter increase effect of turning off all the 10 gauges by turning off one of the gauges that were on, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), on the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank” instead, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the entrance hole 227 for meter increase, and the item provision condition is satisfied. To inform

  The state shown in FIG. 33 (g) is a state in which the item providing effect has been started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIGS. 33 (g) to (i). An animated display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 33 (j), information regarding items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 33 (k), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, the description of item A) (The contents are omitted)).

  In this example, at least a part of the display of the volume control screen is displayed by displaying at least a part of the display of the volume control screen by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display of the volume control screen. Some overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impeded, information on volume adjustment can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing it.

  Further, in this example, the display related to volume adjustment is displayed on the front side than the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 33 (n), the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) When the operation of is received, the display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” is executed during the button effect without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” during the button effect is performed without executing the processing of lowering the volume by one step.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted in a state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button effect, the button effect is ended, and then FIG. s) After performing animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD 1 of “item not set”, the character display CD 3 of “during item A setting” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third modification will be described. FIG. 34: is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for meter increase 227” is regarded as the condition for the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this and “the entrance to the inlet for meter increase 227 is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of a sphere may be used as the satisfaction condition of the item assignment. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to (c), the cumulative number of balls entering the variable winning hole 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls obtained during the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example) , And an item may be given if it exceeds 10000 spheres, or as shown in FIG. 34 (d) to FIG. An item may be assigned when the operation is accepted in the order of the key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

<Setting reflected display (Example 1)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the first embodiment in time series. In FIGS. 35 to 41, which will be used in the following description, various displays are shown in chronological order in alphabetical order ((a), (b), (c),...). The intervals are not constant.

  In this example, during the period during which the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the first gaming state, after the item giving condition is satisfied and the item is given to the player, the effect after the display switching (after the screen transition) By displaying the setting reflection display HD indicating an item for which setting has become possible on the customization screen CD, the player is assured that the setting has been reliably reflected (that the new setting has been accepted by the game console). This is an example in which

  Here, as the "first gaming state", when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, a normal state, a demonstration effect, a non-power support, a non-time medium, a non-probability state, a non-big hit state etc. When the gaming machine is a slot machine, the normal state, demonstration, non-AT, non-BB, non-RB, non-RT, non-CT, low probability state, etc. may be mentioned. In this example, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and the setting reflection display HD is displayed during short time. In the second gaming state (details will be described later in <Setting reflection display (second embodiment)>) more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the same setting reflection display HD as in this example is performed. It is also good.

  In addition, as the “item grant condition”, the ball GG of the meter is full due to the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. As a result, the gauge GG of the meter becomes full, or that a predetermined special effect has been performed a specified number of times, or a predetermined mission (for example, double reach, triple reach, mini-game Achievement of victory, one or more or all of a plurality of types of item grant conditions being met, winning of a lottery using random numbers, game balls and game medals, etc. The number of payouts has reached a predetermined number, and in the case of a gaming machine being a slot machine, the fact that a specific symbol combination is complete, an internal winning (or winning) for a specific combination, etc. may be mentioned. Examples of the later as well). In this example, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine and the ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, an item is awarded to the player when the gauge GG of the meter is full.

  More specifically, the meter increase effect is performed in the periods shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d). In this meter increase effect, an effect of turning off the gauge GG one by one each time a ball enters the meter increase entrance 227 is performed.

  Also, during the period shown in FIG. 35 (e) to FIG. (G), an image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule based on that the item application condition is satisfied (the gauge GG of the meter is full). After displaying an animation of moving from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the image in stages, as shown in FIG. After the animation display in which the information on the item appears from the display, as shown in FIG. 6I, as the information on the item, the display IN of the item name (in this example, item J) and the description of the item (in this example) , IT of the description of the item J (the content is omitted in the figure)).

  Also, during the periods shown in FIG. 35 (j) to FIG. 35 (m), button effects are performed. In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG capable of performing a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set an acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and an appearance of a chance button 136 effective for accepting an operation are simulated. The image of the button and the character image prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, PUSH), and the appearance of the left and right buttons whose reception of the operation is effective among the up, down, left and right direction keys (not shown) An operation valid period display TG including a button image BG2 and a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right buttons) is valid is performed.

  During such a button effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (k), when the pressing operation of the right button 161a is received, the option of "No" is temporarily selected. Also, in the state of this temporary selection, as shown in FIG. 35 (l), when the pressing operation of the determination button (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, as shown in FIG. By highlighting (highlighting) the option of “,” it is informed that the selection of “No” has been confirmed (that the selection not to set (set) the given item is made).

  As shown in FIG. 35 (o), after the button effect is finished based on the acceptance of the pressing operation of the determination button (chance button 136) in the period shown in the subsequent FIG. When the pressing operation of the right button 161a is received twice, display switching (screen transition) of the effect customization screen CD is performed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 35 (p), a setting reflection display showing an item (in this example, item J) which can be newly set on the effect customization screen CD after the display switching (after the screen transition) By displaying the HD (in this example, the display of the item name "Item J" and the display of the character string "NEW"), the setting is reliably reflected (the new setting is accepted by the game console), The player is notified that the settable items have increased.

  As in this example, the part (setting reflection display HD) corresponding to the setting of the display IN of the item name reflected on the effect customization screen CD is configured to be displayed after the effect customization screen CD is transitionally displayed. For example, it may be possible to confirm that the setting has been reflected after being transitionally displayed, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest. By reflecting the setting, it is possible to notify the player that the setting has been reliably reflected, to give the player a sense of security, and to maintain the player's willingness to play. is there.

  The display mode of the setting reflection display HD is not limited to this example, and for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (p ′), even if decoration of the setting reflection display is performed by enclosing the display of the item name with the effect image The setting reflection display may be decorated by shading the item name as shown in the figure (p ′ ′).

<Setting reflected display (Example 2)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the second embodiment in time series.

  In this example, the item granting condition is satisfied and the item is awarded to the player during the period in which the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state described above. Setting is reflected by displaying the setting reflection display HD showing items which can be set anew over a plurality of times of symbol variation display after being set (new setting by the game console) Is an example of notifying the player of the fact that

  In this example, although the example of displaying the setting reflection display “over multiple symbol variation display” will be described, the setting reflection display may be displayed “over multiple rounds in the big hit game” When the gaming machine is a slot machine, for example, “across multiple games” may be displayed as a setting reflection display. Further, even in the case of displaying the setting reflection display “for a plurality of times of symbol fluctuation display”, there may be a period (for example, an execution period of the SP reach effect) in which the setting reflection display is not displayed.

  Here, as the "second game state", when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, power support, time in a short time, a definite change state, a big hit state and the like can be mentioned, and in the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine , AT, BB, RB, RT, CT, high probability state, and the like. In this example, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and the setting reflection display HD is displayed during a short period of time. Note that, in the first gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state, the setting reflection display HD similar to this example may be performed.

  In this example, the effect customization screen CD is displayed, which allows the player to select a tune that can be set by the player during the entire second game state shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to (l). If a pressing operation of the up button 161c or the down button 161d is received while the effect customization screen CD is displayed, it is possible to switch music, and the player can use a plurality of types of music that can be set. You can choose your favorite song. In the case where a special effect (for example, SP reach effect) or a display (for example, an error display) is performed in the second gaming state, the effect customization screen CD may be temporarily hidden. Further, the number of tunes that can be set by the player is not limited to a plurality of tunes, and only one tune may be used, or only a specific tune may be selected according to the gaming state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 36A, the player selects the music B, and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the next music C displayed below the music B is displayed. Is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music C is output from the speaker. In addition, when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is received, the display of the music B may be immediately switched to the display of the music C, or after the movement animation for moving the display of the music B upward, the display of the music C is performed. You may switch to

  In the periods shown in FIG. 36 (d) to FIG. 36 (e), since the predetermined mission (double reach) is achieved while displaying the effect customization screen CD, a display MC (in this example, notifying mission achievement) , Displaying an image including the character string “double reach achieved” and displaying an item name to be provided IN (in this example, displaying an image including the character string “music D”) Then, the music D) is given to the player.

  From the display area at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD at the lower right while displaying the item name IN reduced in stages in the period shown in the subsequent FIGS. 36 (f) to (g) After the animation display to be moved is performed, as shown in (g) of the figure, the setting reflection display HD (in which the music D is newly settable) is displayed instead of the music A in the effect customization screen CD. In this example, the setting is surely reflected (the new setting is accepted by the game console) by setting the display of the music "Song D" and the display of the character string "NEW". Informing the player that the item has increased.

  As in the present example, if there is a case where the effect customization screen CD is displayed in a state that is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to customize the effect setting in a certain state to allow the player to In some cases, it is possible to achieve the intended effect and improve the player's interest. Also, by reflecting the setting, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has been reflected reliably, to give the player a sense of security, and to maintain the player's willingness to play the game. There is a case.

  In this example, the setting reflection display is performed by switching the display of the music A to the display of the music D for which setting has become possible anew, but with an animation in which the display of the music A is gradually erased A moving animation may be simultaneously performed to move the display of the music D from the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD. If such an animation is performed, it may be possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In FIG. 36 (i), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the subsequent figure (j) is a state where the next symbol variation display is started. In the present example, the effect customization screen CD is displayed across a plurality of times of symbol variation display, and, for example, as shown in FIG. The next music D currently displayed is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music D is output from the speaker.

  As in this example, by displaying the effect customization screen CD over a plurality of continuous variable displays, the effect setting can be customized over a plurality of changes, the convenience can be improved, and the player's interest can be improved. There are times when you can.

<Setting reflected display (Modified example of Example 2)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to a modification of the second embodiment in time series.

  In this example, a setting non-display (in this example, a symbol of “?” In this example) indicating that there is music that can not be selected (set) by the player is displayed as in the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. It is different. In addition, "setting not possible display" is not limited to this example, for example, symbols such as "x" and "***" may be used, and a combination of a character string such as "music *" and a symbol may be used. It may be.

  Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 37A, the player selects the music B, and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the setting disabling display (“?” Displayed on the lower side of the music B on the effect customization screen CD) The display including the symbol is selected and highlighted, but since the music that can not be set is selected, the music is not changed, and the BGM corresponding to the previous music B is continuously output from the speaker .

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to (e), since the predetermined mission (double reach) is achieved during the display of the effect customization screen CD, a display MC (in this example, notifying the mission achievement) , Displaying an image including the character string “double reach achieved” and displaying an item name to be provided IN (in this example, displaying an image including the character string “music D”) Then, the music D) is given to the player.

  As a result of the addition of the item (music D), as shown in FIG. 37 (g), in the effect customization screen CD, the music D for which setting can be newly made in place of the display including the symbol "?" By displaying the setting reflection display HD (in this example, the display of the music "Song D" and the display of the character string "NEW"), the setting is reliably reflected (the new setting is accepted by the game console) ), And informs the player that settable items have increased.

  As in the present example, if there is a case where the effect customization screen CD is displayed in a state that is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to customize the effect setting in a certain state to allow the player to In some cases, it is possible to achieve the intended effect and improve the player's interest. Also, by reflecting the setting, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has been reflected reliably, to give the player a sense of security, and to maintain the player's willingness to play the game. There is a case.

  In FIG. 37 (i), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the subsequent figure (j) is a state where the next symbol variation display is started. In the present example, the effect customization screen CD is displayed across a plurality of times of symbol variation display, and, for example, as shown in FIG. The next music D displayed below the display including the symbol is selected and highlighted, and BGM corresponding to the music D is output from the speaker.

  As in this example, by displaying the effect customization screen CD over a plurality of continuous variable displays, the effect setting can be customized over a plurality of changes, the convenience can be improved, and the player's interest can be improved. There are times when you can. In addition, by displaying the setting disabling display over a plurality of continuous variable displays, it is possible to always check the setting state, and it may be possible to enhance the convenience of the player.

<Setting reflected display (Example 3)>
Next, setting reflection display according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the third embodiment in time series.

  In this example, the display of the setting impossible display (in this example, the symbol of "?" In this example) indicating that there is music which can not be selected (set) by the player is described with reference to FIG. The same as the modification example, but the applied music when the music applied by the establishment of the item application condition (in this example, the mission is achieved) matches the music highlighted at the time of the application of the item. Is different in that the setting reflection display HD is performed to display as a newly set music.

  Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 38A, the player selects the music B, and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the setting disabling display (“?” Displayed in the lower part of the music B on the effect customization screen CD) The display including the symbol is selected and highlighted, but since the music that can not be set is selected, the music is not changed, and the BGM corresponding to the previous music B is continuously output from the speaker .

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 38D to 38E, since the predetermined mission (triple reach) is achieved during the display of the effect customization screen CD, a display MC (in this example, for notifying the mission achievement) , Displaying an image including the character string “triple reach achieved” and displaying an item name to be given IN (in this example, displaying an image including the character string “music C”); Then, the music piece C) is given to the player.

  As a result of the addition of the item (music C), as shown in FIG. 38 (g), the display of the highlighted music on the effect customization screen CD (in the present example, the setting impossible display including the symbol "?" By displaying the setting reflection display HD (in this example, the display of the music of "Song C" and the display of the character string "NEW") in place of the music C that has become available for setting. The setting is reliably reflected (a new setting is accepted by the game console), and the player is notified that the items that can be set have increased, and the BGM corresponding to the music C is output from the speaker.

  As in the present example, if the display of the highlighted music in the effect customization screen CD becomes the setting reflection display HD indicating that the music has been reflected, it is easy for the player to confirm that the setting is reflected. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved. Also, by reflecting the setting, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has been reflected reliably, to give the player a sense of security, and to maintain the player's willingness to play the game. There is a case.

<Setting reflected display (Example 4)>
Next, setting reflection display according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In this example, during the period during which the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the second gaming state, after the item giving condition is satisfied and the item is given to the player, a plurality of symbol variation displays are performed, The point of displaying the effect customization screen CD is the same as that of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 36, but an item which can be newly set in the effect customization screen CD after display switching (after screen transition) Is different in that the setting reflection display HD is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 39A, the player selects the music B, and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), the next music C displayed below the music B is displayed. Is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music C is output from the speaker.

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 39D to 39E, since the predetermined mission (SP reach) is achieved during the display of the effect customization screen CD, the display MC (in this example, for notifying the mission achievement) , Displaying an image including the character string “SP reach achieved” and displaying an item name to be provided IN (in this example, displaying an image including the character string “music E”) Then, the music piece E) is given to the player.

  From the display area at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD at the lower right while the display IN of the item name is gradually reduced in the period shown in FIGS. 39 (f) to (g). The animation display to be moved is performed, but here, as shown in FIG. 6H, in the effect customization screen CD, the setting reflection display indicating the music piece E for which setting can be newly made is not displayed. There is.

  In the following FIG. 39 (i), the symbol variation display is stopped, and in the same FIG. 39 (j), the next symbol variation display is started. In this example, while the effect customization screen CD is displayed across a plurality of times of symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in), the setting disabling display (display including the “?” Symbol) displayed below the music C is selected and highlighted, and the setting disabling display (including the “?” Symbol Under the display), display a setting reflection display HD (in this example, the display of the music "Song E" and the display of the character string "NEW") showing the music E which has become available for setting. The setting is reliably reflected (a new setting is accepted by the game console), and the player is notified that the settable items have increased.

  As in this example, the part (setting reflection display HD) corresponding to the setting of the display IN of the item name reflected on the effect customization screen CD is configured to be displayed after the effect customization screen CD is transitionally displayed. For example, it may be possible to confirm that the setting has been reflected after being transitionally displayed, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest. By reflecting the setting, it is possible to notify the player that the setting has been reliably reflected, to give the player a sense of security, and to maintain the player's willingness to play. is there.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is further received, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the lower side of the setting impossible display including the symbol “?” The next music piece E displayed on the screen is selected, and the setting reflection display HD showing the music piece E that has been newly set (in this example, the display of the music piece "Song E" and the character string "NEW" B) is highlighted and BGM corresponding to the music E is output from the speaker.

<Setting reflected display (Example 5)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In this example, during the period in which the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the second gaming state, after the item giving condition is satisfied and the item is given to the player, the item which can be set anew is available. The point of displaying the setting reflection display HD shown is the same as the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 36, but includes a main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and a sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b. , In the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a, a display MC for notifying mission achievement and a display IN of the item name to be given, and an effect customization screen CD displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b Is different in that the setting reflection display HD indicating items which can be newly set is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), the player selects the music B by using the effect customization screen CD displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b, and the BGM corresponding to the music B is from the speaker It is in the state of being output. In the periods shown in FIGS. 40 (b) to 40 (c), since a predetermined mission (double reach) is achieved while displaying the effect customization screen CD, the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a , The display MC notifying the mission achievement (in this example, the display of an image including the character string of "double reach achieved") and the display of the item name to be given IN (in this example, the character string of "music D") While displaying the image, the player gives an item (in the present example, music D) to the player.

  During the periods shown in FIGS. 40 (d) to (e), while the display IN of the item name is displayed in a stepwise manner, the display area of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a is divided into sub-liquid After displaying an animation to move to the display area of (display means) 209b, the effect customization displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b as shown in (e) to (g) of FIG. On the screen CD, setting is displayed by displaying a setting reflection display (in this example, display of the music of “music D” and display of a character string of “NEW”) indicating music D that has become possible to set. Is surely reflected (new setting is accepted by the game console), and the player is notified that the settable items have increased.

  As in the present example, if the effect customization screen CD is displayed on at least one of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209 a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209 b, an effect is displayed on one of the two displays. By displaying the setting display, the effect setting display can be made easy to view and set, and in some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In the animation for moving the display IN of the item name, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the display IN of the item name includes the display area of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and the sub liquid crystal (second The display means straddling the display area of (display means) 209b can make the player pay attention to the setting reflection display.

<Setting Reflection Display (Modification of Embodiment 5)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing various displays including setting reflection display according to a modification of the fifth embodiment in time series.

  The present embodiment is the same as the fifth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 40 in that the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209 a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209 b are provided. Second display means) In the effect customization screen CD displayed on the display 209b, a display MC notifying mission achievement and a display IN of the item name to be given are displayed, and a setting reflection display showing an item for which setting can be newly made The points to be displayed are different.

  Specifically, in the period shown in FIG. 41 (b) to FIG. 41 (c), since a predetermined mission (double reach) is achieved while displaying the effect customization screen CD, the sub liquid crystal (second Display means) In the effect customization screen CD displayed on the display 209b, a display MC (in this example, a display of an image including a character string of "double reach achieved") notifying the mission achievement and a display IN of the item name to be given In the example, while displaying an image including the character string of "music D", an item (in the present example, music D) is given to the player.

  During the period shown in FIGS. 40 (d) to (e), on the effect customization screen CD displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b, an animation that causes the display IN of the item name to be gradually reduced and displayed After the display, as shown in (e) to (g) of the figure, the setting reflection display showing the music D which has become able to be newly set (in the present example, the display of the music “music D” By displaying the character string "NEW", the player is notified that the settable items have increased.

  As in the present example, if the effect customization screen CD is displayed on at least one of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209 a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209 b, an effect is displayed on one of the two displays. By displaying the setting display, the effect setting display can be made easy to view and set, and in some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41 (d) to FIG. 41 (e), in the effect customization screen CD, if it is a setting reflection display HD indicating that a portion overlapped with the display IN of the item name is reflected. The player can easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest. Also, by reflecting the setting, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has been reflected reliably, to give the player a sense of security, and to maintain the player's willingness to play the game. There is a case.

<Invention 1>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a first effect setting display, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a second effect setting display; and the first effect setting display Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 36 and 37), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. 37 (e) or 37 (e), when the item name display IN (music D) indicating that the item is given is displayed, and the second effect setting display is displayed, The second effect setting on the first effect setting display The setting of the display is reflected (for example, as shown in FIG. 36 (g) and FIG. 37 (g), the setting reflection display HD indicating the music D for which setting can be newly made is displayed), and the normal state (for example, If the game machine is a pachinko machine, during demonstration effects, during non-power support, during non-hourly, during non-probability states, during non-big-hit conditions, etc., when the game machine is a slot machine, during demonstration effects, non-AT Medium, non-BB, non-RB, non-RT, non-CT, low probability, etc. In a certain advantageous state (eg, when the game console is a pachinko machine), power support during, short, medium and short The first effect setting display is displayed in AT, BB, RB, RT, CT, high probability state, etc., when the gaming machine is a slot machine, such as a definite change state, a big hit state, etc. Game console (hereinafter referred to as "invention 1") It is there).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1, by reflecting the setting of the second effect setting display on the first effect setting display, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has been reliably reflected. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of security, and the player's willingness to play can be sustained. In addition, the effect setting in a certain state can be customized, and the effect in a certain state can be made the effect intended by the player, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, the setting of the first effect setting display may be a setting that can be selected in the certain state (for example, BGM that can be selected in the middle of time). With such a configuration, the player may be able to enjoy a special feeling in a certain state, and the interest of the player may be further improved.

<Invention 2>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a first effect setting display, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a second effect setting display; and the first effect setting display Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 36 and 37), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. 37 (e) or 37 (e), when the item name display IN (music D) indicating that the item is given is displayed, and the second effect setting display is displayed, The second effect setting on the first effect setting display The setting of the display is reflected (for example, as shown in FIG. 36 (g) and FIG. 37 (g), the setting reflection display HD indicating the music D which can be newly set is displayed), and a plurality of consecutive In the gaming machine, the first effect setting display may be displayed over the variable display (hereinafter, may be referred to as “invention invention 2”).

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect of the present invention, by reflecting the setting of the second effect setting display on the first effect setting display, it is possible to notify the player that the setting has been reliably reflected. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of security, and the player's willingness to play can be sustained. In addition, the effect setting can be customized over a plurality of changes to improve the convenience, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  The setting of the second effect setting display reflected in the first effect setting display may be a setting that can be selected in the next and subsequent variable display. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after the variable display, and it may be possible to further improve the player's interest.

<Invention 3>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a first effect setting display, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a second effect setting display; and the first effect setting display Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 40 and 41), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. 40 (c) or FIG. 41 (c), a display IN (music D) of an item name indicating that an item is given, when the second effect setting display is displayed, The second effect setting on the first effect setting display The setting of the display is reflected (for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (e) and FIG. 41 (e), the setting reflection display HD indicating the music D which can be newly set is displayed), and the display means A first display (for example, main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41) and a second display (for example, sub liquid crystal (second display means) shown in FIG. 209b), and the first effect setting display is displayed on at least one of the first display and the second display. A game console (hereinafter referred to as "invention 3") There is

  According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, so that the player can be notified that the setting has been reliably reflected. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of security, and the player's willingness to play can be sustained. In addition, by displaying the first effect setting display on one of the two displays, the first effect setting display can be made easy to view and set easily, and the player's interest can be improved. There is a possibility.

  The second effect setting display may be moved and displayed from one of the first display and the second display to the other. With this configuration, by causing the player to pay attention to the second effect setting display, the player can easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and the player's interest can be improved. There is a possibility.

<Invention 4>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a first effect setting display, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a second effect setting display; and the first effect setting display Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 39), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. This is a display IN (item J or music E) of an item name indicating that an item has been given, as shown in FIG. 35 (i) or FIG. 39 (e), and the second effect setting display is displayed. When the first effect setting display The setting of the second effect setting display is reflected (for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (p), the setting reflection display HD indicating the item J for which setting can be newly made is displayed, or FIG. 37 (l) And (n), the setting reflection display HD is displayed, which indicates the music piece E which can be set anew), and the second effect setting display reflected in the first effect setting display. The part corresponding to the setting of the game may be displayed after the first effect setting display is transitionally displayed, and is a game console (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 4”) .

  According to the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, whereby the player can be notified that the setting has been reliably reflected. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of security, and the player's willingness to play can be sustained. In addition, it may be possible to confirm that the setting has been reflected after the transition display, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, a portion corresponding to the setting of the second effect setting display reflected in the first effect setting display can be identified as a display mode in which the setting of the second effect setting display is newly reflected. (For example, the display of the item "item J" and the display of the character string "NEW" shown in FIG. 35 (p)) may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately grasp the newly reflected setting even after the transition display of the first effect setting display, and it may be possible to enhance the convenience of the player. is there.

<Invention 5 of the Invention>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a first effect setting display, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a second effect setting display; and the first effect setting display Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 41), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. This is a display IN (item J or music D) indicating an item name shown in 35 (i) or FIG. 41 (e) indicating that the item is given, and the second effect setting display is displayed. When the first effect setting display The setting of the second effect setting display is reflected (for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (p), the setting reflection display HD indicating the item J for which setting can be newly made is displayed, or FIG. 41 (e) As shown in (1), the setting reflection display HD showing the music D which has become possible to be newly set is displayed, a part corresponding to the setting of the second effect setting display reflected in the first effect setting display May be a display indicating that it has been reflected (for example, a display including a display of a character string “NEW” shown in FIG. 35 (p) or FIG. 41 (e)). (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “invention 5 of the present application”).

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect of the present invention, by reflecting the setting of the second effect setting display on the first effect setting display, it is possible to notify the player that the setting has been reliably reflected. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of security, and the player's willingness to play can be sustained. In addition, the player can easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, which may improve the player's interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (d) to FIG. 41 (e), a part of the first effect setting display overlapped with the second effect setting display is of the second effect setting display. It may be changed to a part corresponding to the setting. With such a configuration, it may be possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, the "setting" which concerns on this invention 1-5 is not limited to the setting regarding an item or a music, What is necessary is just the setting regarding various effects. Therefore, for example, the volume, the light quantity, the brightness, the type of the sound effect, the movement of the movable body, switching of display / non-display of various displays, switching of output / non-output of various audio, switching of presence / absence of automatic operation, etc. It is also good.

  Further, any one, a plurality of, or all of the invention specific matters of the first to fifth inventions of the present application may be combined to constitute a new invention. In addition, one, a plurality of, or all of the invention-specifying matters of the modified example described below may be combined to constitute the invention of the lower concept, for example, while the first effect setting display is displayed, A second effect setting display may be displayed. With such a configuration, it may be possible to easily notify the player that the number of settings included in the second effect setting display is increased, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 35) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided. (Hereinafter referred to as “first count display”. For example, a display shown in FIG. 11C and FIG. 35C in which all ten gauges are extinguished, a display shown in FIG. The second effect setting display may be displayed on the display means when the character display CD 2) of "tan" is displayed, and the display by the count display means can be changed during the period of non-pattern variation display It may be a display. With such a configuration, since the display of the count display means changes during non-pattern variation display, it may be possible to play a game without getting bored of the player. In addition, the player may not wake up even if the suspension of the floating game is lost.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the advance notice display (for example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 14 (m) etc.) It may be displayed on the display means. If such a configuration is used, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a display other than the effect setting display.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the second effect setting display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 31) is executed. It may be displayed. With such a configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player for the period until the second effect setting display is displayed.

  In addition, an operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 11 (l) or FIG. 35 (l)) is provided, and the display means displays the display concerning the operation means while the second effect setting display is displayed. Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first operation display.” For example, it is a means capable of displaying the button effects shown in FIG. 11 (j) and FIG. 35 (j), and the first operation display means It may be a display including an effective period display (for example, an operation effective period display TG including a meter display). With such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means to participate even while the second effect setting display is displayed, and the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is a possibility.

  In addition, when the second effect setting display is displayed on the display means, settings that can be selected in the first effect setting display after the second effect setting display is deleted (for example, as shown in FIG. 25) The setting of the item to be shown may be increased. With such a configuration, the player's choice can be increased, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, it is an animation display that the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, for example, the display IN of the item name shown in FIG. 36 (f) to the same figure (g). There may be a case where it is executed in an animation display of moving from the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD while being reduced and displayed stepwise. With such a configuration, it may be possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). , Means for displaying effects setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 26, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19), and the effect setting display means one or more A display including settings (for example, setting of items shown in FIG. 25, setting of volume shown in FIG. 22, setting of luminance shown in FIG. 19) A display including the setting of 1 (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIG. 26) separately from the setting display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) Display (item When the first display is displayed on the display means, it is possible to display the display of IN and the display of the item explanation IT) on the display means, the first display of the effect setting display being displayed, The setting of the one included in the display may be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, while displaying the effect setting display in which the setting of 1 may be displayed, the first display including the setting of 1 separately from the effect setting display being displayed. Since the first display is displayed, the player can be expected to increase the number of settings included in the effect setting display because the first display is displayed, and the player's interest can be improved. is there.

  In addition, count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 11 (a) etc.) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided. , “First count display.” For example, a display in which all ten gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 11 (c) etc., and a character display CD 2 of “full tank” shown in FIG. 11 (d) etc. When it becomes, the said 1st display may be displayed on the said display means, and the display by the said count display means may be a display which can be changed in the period of a non-pattern variation display.

  With such a configuration, since the display of the count display means changes during non-pattern variation display, it may be possible to play a game without getting bored of the player. In addition, the player may not wake up even if the suspension of the floating game is lost.

  When the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display may be displayed on the display means instead of the first display, and the second display may be displayed. May be a display showing a notice (for example, a display of an item image IG including a character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 14 (m) or the like).

  If such a configuration is used, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 31) is executed. May be

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to enjoy the period until the first display is displayed.

  In addition, an operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 11 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) during display of the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying a button effect shown in FIG. 11 (j) etc., and the first operation display means an effective period display of the operation means (eg, FIG. 11 (j) etc. It may be a display including the operation effective period display TG shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means to participate even while the first display is displayed, and the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be erased.

  With such a configuration, the first display may be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, the selectable setting (for example, the setting of the item shown in FIG. 25) in the effect setting display after the first display is erased is increased. It may be

  With such a configuration, the player's choice can be increased, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 34 (o) to (r), when the ball enters a predetermined game area during display of the effect setting display (for example, effect customization screen) (for example, for increasing the meter) When a ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting opening or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player sets the item A) separately from the effect setting display in the display. And a setting (for example, an item A) corresponding to the first display can be displayed on the display means, and the display corresponding to the acquisition may be displayed on the display means. It may be displayable on the display means.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and for example, the symbol variation starts while the item appearing during the non-symbol variation is displayed. In any case, the item may not be deleted. Also, while the custom display and the item are being displayed, even if the variation of the symbol starts, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. In addition, even if the meter is difficult to see (or not visible) during the display of the custom display, the item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-design variations.

  Moreover, the meter which stored a part in non-design fluctuation may make an item which shows reliability appear after being full during symbol fluctuation. Further, an item (heat, intense heat, etc.) indicating the reliability may be made easier to appear at the time of symbol fluctuation than at the time of non-pattern fluctuation, or may not be appeared at the time of non-pattern fluctuation. Moreover, you may display a button effective meter (operation effective period display) during non-design fluctuation. Also, the item may be displayed by canceling the demonstration screen (or without cancellation), or the item may be displayed by canceling (or without canceling) the menu display. The display of the two-dimensional code may be canceled (or without cancellation) to display the item.

  Also, the meter may be stored at an opportunity other than ball passing. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the increase amount of the meter is increased than that in the normal state. Further, in this case, the system may be configured to shift to the increase mode at the end of the hold full or the power support. Also, the item may appear after the mini game with the meter full. In addition, even during SP reach, an effect may be performed in which an item appears. Also, the period of the button effect of reach and the period of the button effect of customization may or may not overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. Further, the items to appear may be changed depending on the game state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item is made to appear during the display of the customization screen, the display of “?” In the customization screen may be changed (the item is additionally displayed), or when the customization screen is displayed again without being changed. In the customization screen, the display of "?" May be changed. In addition, the appearance of the item may be notified, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may be made to easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. Further, the item may be displayed across a plurality of changes, the meter may be stored while the item is displayed, or the meter may be configured to be full at one type of trigger.

  In addition, display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or more single color or full color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) display device, the leaf display device, the plasma display, or the projector, or the meter display may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, , When the ball enters the entrance for increasing meter 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display 208 and the meter display of the other display devices increase by the same increment), one for the decorative symbol display 208 and the other display device It is good also as a count display means which performs meter display.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel And a stop button for stopping rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the symbol and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally winning combination Determining means for determining whether or not the game is performed, and payout control means for performing game medium payout processing for paying out the game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Next, a game console according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

  FIG. 42 to FIG. 66 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 42 to 66, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 Although illustrated, the common view display device 210 and the common view holding lamp 216 are not shown. In FIGS. 42 to 66, the types of the special views to be stopped and displayed on the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 have stop symbol forms shown in FIG. 75 (a) and FIG. 75 (b). It is done. In addition, although a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in FIGS. 42 to 66, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is provided as in the embodiment described above. It may be In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 42: is a figure shown stepwise about an example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment, and FIG. 43 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a specific effect shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not shown, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are symbols in order to indicate whether or not the symbol is changing (or while the symbol is stopped). Special pattern 1 The fourth pattern t1 is the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of losing or the symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol in the special figure 1 is displayed while the special pattern 1 is stopped. During the change, the symbol "-" blinks. The special pattern 2 fourth pattern t2 is a special pattern 2 symbol displayed while the special pattern 2 is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the result of losing or the symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol in the special figure 2 is displayed. During the change, the symbol "-" blinks. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position from the decorative symbol, but also in the display mode (shape here), so that the player can distinguish at first glance. In addition, by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol, it is also possible to give advance notice of the pre-reading advance notice or the symbol variation display. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 42 is the non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280. In the non-power-supply state, the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be displayed.

  The number of reservations of the special view 1 is also represented by the number of suspension icons of the special view 1 in addition to the number of lighting of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The reserve icon in Special Figure 1 is displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the left side becoming the older the prize icon.

  In FIG. 42 (1), three reserve icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and all three reserve icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 have default display modes (round shape And white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 42 is the non-power support state (non-short time state), it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win special figure 2 start port 232 It is because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a reserve icon of a special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280 according to the control state (playing state). . That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 42 (1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed, and the holding icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power-on state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is hidden.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is also a round non-pattern and white display mode, but the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the display position are made different. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be made different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a decision at first glance.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or blinking of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol. , This order may be back and forth.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 changes the fluctuation icon display area 280 , And the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. , The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (3), the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and a state is shown in which the suspension notice is started. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is a display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (4), a button operation effect for requesting an operation of the effect button 136 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (4), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display state of the button acceptance time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases in accordance with the time after the start of the operation effective period. This button acceptance time meter MT is a display indicating the maximum time that can be accepted for the operation of the effect button 136 after the start of the operation valid period. Here, the button image 136a is displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern, but is disposed on the rear side of the decorative pattern and is superimposed by the decorative pattern (overlapped) ) May be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (4), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (5), step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 42 (6). Ru. At this time, the button acceptance time meter MT is erased together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice that switching display is performed by a plurality of steps, and is a notice that suggests that the jackpot is highly reliable as the step progresses. The step-up notice in this effect example is a notice effect relating to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a prefetch notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 of this step 1 is a display represented by the face of the leader character. In this demonstration example, after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display of step 2 is performed more than the case where the display of step 1 is not performed after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Also, it is configured to be likely to be a big hit (big hit symbol is easy to be displayed clearly). In addition, although display SU1 of step 1 is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the middle pattern of a decorative symbol, it may be arrange | positioned on the back side of a decorative symbol, and may be displayed so that it may be superimposed by a decorative symbol. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the step-up notice may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (7), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the step-up notice has ended, and the display SU1 of step 1 is erased. That is, the present step-up notice ends at the display SU1 of step 1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (8), the second stop is performed, and the "description 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, becomes the change icon h0 which is the advance notice display mode related to the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area 280 without changing the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button acceptance time meter MT are displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 42 (4). At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (12), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14), the state shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period is started. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge may be faster than, the same as, or slower than the decreasing speed of the gauge displayed before the effect button 136 is operated. Furthermore, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (15) in FIG. 42 (15)) are arranged side by side with a plurality of mini characters BCH consisting of a face of a length There is. The number of mini characters BCH of the group leader displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time after the start of the operation valid period). In this example of the effect, by displaying the mini character BCH of the Bancho on the button acceptance time meter MT, it functions as a notice display that suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. When the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the step-up notice is started, and the display of the mini character BCH of the group leader in the button acceptance time meter MT (the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT) starts. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice may be started after the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is started, or the start of the step-up notice display and the button The start timing of the advance notice display using the reception time meter MT may be the same timing. The same applies to the following description. In addition, the advance notice display using this button acceptance time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the maximum time of the operation valid period elapses, but it ends at an earlier timing than that It may be done or it may be finished at a late timing. It should be noted that even if the effect button 136 is operated, there may be a case where the mini-character BCH of the program leader is not displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. That is, in this demonstration example, it is more likely that a big hit will be more likely if the mini character BCH of the bancho is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT than if the mini character BCH of the bancho is not displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. Is configured. In addition, there may be a case where a mini character (for example, a princess mini character) other than the mini character BCH of the master may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the displayed mini characters. In addition, after the mini-character BCH of the bancho is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT, a step-up notice in which the mini-character to be displayed changes may be performed. For example, the display mode of the mini-character BCH of the bancho changes It may be easy to be a big hit. In this example, the reliability of the big hit is the same regardless of the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, but the reliability of the big hit according to the number of displayed mini-characters BCH. For example, the larger the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of the deca button or a display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates), for example, a display mode of the deca button When the button image 136a is displayed, the mini character of the princess may easily appear on the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated, and the mini character of the princess is displayed as the mini character that has appeared. When it is included, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be displayed in a definite manner than when only the Bancho mini character BCH appears.

  On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, it may be easy for only the mini-character BCH to appear easily. Moreover, in this production example, when the production button 136 is operated after the start of the operation effective period, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the mini character BCH of the program leader is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. The advance notice may be displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the acceptance time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red), or the advance notice is displayed by changing the shape of the button acceptance time meter MT. You may do so. Further, in this effect example, the type of notice display on the button acceptance time meter MT may be different depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the start of the operation effective period. For example, the operation effective period starts If the effect button 136 is operated at an earlier timing, the mini-character BCH of the master length is easily displayed, and if the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the start of the operation effective period, timer display is performed. An advance notice may be made. In addition, the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is performed on display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a sub display device, a display device provided on the front door frame 106 or the door 108 with ball storage tray) You may do so.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (16), step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. The display SU2 of this step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the Bancho character. That is, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the display SU2 of step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that it is likely to be a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU1 of step 1. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is three at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (16).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (17), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. The display SU3 of this step 3 is a display showing that the character of the captain is breaking the clothes. Furthermore, together with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the word "super hot" is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. That is, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that it is likely to be a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and becomes one at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (17). Note that the button acceptance time meter MT may be erased before changing from the display SU2 of step 2 to the display SU3 of step 3 (that is, the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT may be ended), The button acceptance time meter MT may be erased at the timing when the display SU2 of step 2 changes to the display SU3 of step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is given even when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT is exhausted, but a notice may be given when the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted.

  Further, in this example, although the mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is not related to the number of steps executed in the step-up notice, for example, the mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT If a mini character of princess is included in the list, it may be easy to be displayed until the display SU3 in step 3, or conversely, the mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is only the mini character BCH of the Bancho If the display SU3 of step 3 is difficult to be displayed, the step-up notice may be easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, the display mode of the deca button or the display mode of vibration and rotation), for example, the button image 136a When the display mode is the display mode of the deca button, the display SU3 of step 3 is easier to be displayed than when the display mode is the default display mode, and the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. The step-up notice may be more easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (18), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. At this time, the step-up notice is ended, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also deleted. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the gauge remaining amount in the button acceptance time meter MT runs out, or may be ended before the gauge remaining amount runs out.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (19) following FIG. 42 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "super hot" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and it is suggested that the jackpot reliability in this reach is high. In addition, normally, when the reach state is formed, "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach state is reached. That is, it can be said that when the reach state is formed and the display of "super hot" is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the display of "reach" is performed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (21), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (22), as shown in FIG. 43 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the characters are arranged. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine pieces) of face-to-face are placed around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is It suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than that displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be determined to be a big hit (finally, a big hit symbol is determined and displayed).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a final display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the "concerts 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of "A" indicating that the big hit has been made in "special figure A" is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of "special view A".

  FIG. 44 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 44 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). Therefore, the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280.

  In FIG. 44 (1), two reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and among them, the first reserve icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani (pre-reading advance notice), and The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 44 (3), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (4), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (5), the state shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, and the timer acceptance display TM is displayed in place of the button acceptance time meter MT. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM displays a time according to the time from the start of the operation effective period (that is, the remaining amount of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated) At the timing shown in FIG. 44 (6), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM displays "03.87" indicating 3.87 seconds. That is, the timer display indicates the timing at which the notice effect performed by the completion of the countdown in the timer advance display TM is executed, and the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer display is started is It differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation effective period is started. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice by the timer notice display TM displayed in place of the button acceptance time meter MT is performed. In this example of presentation, although timer announcement display TM is displayed by operating presentation button 136, timer announcement display TM may not be displayed. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation valid period, the timer advance notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the timer advance notice display TM is displayed in a mode in which the time in the timer display is further reduced according to the time after the start of the operation effective period, and the timing shown in FIG. “02.49” is displayed to indicate that the

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (8), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 44 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208. The display SU2 of step 2 changes to the display SU3 of step 3. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is displayed in bold color while the display color changes to red, and notifies that the notice due to the completion of the countdown has occurred. The change from the display SU2 of step 2 to the display SU3 of step 3 is a notice display performed by the timer display in the timer notice display TM counting up. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice being given to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are mutually related. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices. In this effect example, the contents of the effect of the step-up notice may be changed according to the remaining time indicated by the timer display on the timer notice display TM. For example, the remainder indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started If the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU3 of step 1 is performed from the display SU1 of step 1 through the display SU2 of step 2, and the display SU3 of step 3 is performed. If the number is small (for example, 1 second), the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, and then the display SU2 of step 2 is not in time, so the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed, and the display of step 3 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed without the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 being displayed.

  Further, in this example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM is a time (for example, 1.13 seconds) after the operation effective period is started from the time (for example, 5 seconds) corresponding to the operation effective period. "03.87" indicating this is displayed when the remaining time after subtraction is 3.87 seconds, but according to the gauge remaining amount of the button acceptance time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the initial value of the displayed timer and becomes "00.00". . Specifically, for example, in a period (first period) within 1 second after the start of the operation effective period, “04.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second In the period (second period) of “03.00” is displayed as the initial value of the timer in the period (second period)... In the period (fourth period) within 4 seconds after exceeding 3 seconds, “01 .00 "may be displayed. Also, the timer advance notice may not be started when a certain period is exceeded after the start of the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 44 (10) to FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 44 (10)-the same figure (18) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (18)-FIG. 43 (25), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 45 is a view showing step by step another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 46 is a view showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 45 (1)-the same figure (5) is the same as that of FIG. 44 (1)-the same figure (5), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (4). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period is started. Furthermore, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (6)) are arranged by arranging a plurality of mini-characters BCH consisting of a face of a bancho in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. That is, the advance notice display by the display of the mini character BCH of the Bancho is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the timer notice display TM is predetermined regardless of the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. A timer display (for example, 30 seconds) indicating the time of 30 seconds (in the timer advance display TM shown in FIG. 45 (6), display of “30.00” indicating 30 seconds) is performed.

  At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM may be made different according to the time when the operation valid period is started, and the timing at which the countdown ends may be the same. The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by changing the time during which the reach effect is started and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach or the time for performing the temporary stop display due to the swing fluctuation. In addition, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM when the timer notice is started may be made to display a time according to the time after the operation valid period is started. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the notice by the display of the mini character BCH on the button acceptance time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated into one notice display. In other words, in this production example, while notifying the remaining time at the time when production button 136 is operated at least of the time set as the operation valid period, with button reception time meter MT, It can be said that the display of the character BCH and the timer advance notice are performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and is three at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (7). Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM counts down in accordance with the time since the start of the timer advance notice, and "28.50" indicating 28.50 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (7). Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. Furthermore, together with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the word "super hot" is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of displayed mini characters BCH of the Bancho decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and becomes one at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (8). In addition, the timer display on the timer notice display TM counts down according to the time after the timer notice is started, and "26.00" indicating 26.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (8). Is displayed. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 44, as a result of the timer countdown, it does not affect the step-up notice as a result of the countdown, and the countdown continues in FIG. 45 (8). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. At this time, the step-up notice ends, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also deleted, but the timer notice is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is in progress. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation effective period has passed and that the timer advance notice is continued even after the step-up advance notice is finished. In addition, the period during which the timer display in timer notice display TM is displayed is from the period from when the operation valid period starts and the gauge in button reception time meter MT starts to decrease until the remaining amount of gauge becomes 0. It can also be said that it is a long period. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (10) to (13) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 45 (10)-the same figure (13) is the same as that of FIG. 43 (19)-FIG. 43 (22), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (13) after the button preview effect is started as shown in FIG. 45 (12), as shown in FIG. 45 (14), the decorative symbol display In the apparatus 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "match" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the image of the close-up of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the Bancho is not displayed around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the big hit is more than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the reliability of is low, it suggests that the reliability of the big hit is higher than the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. Also at this time, the timer notice is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is in progress. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (14), "10.50" is displayed, which indicates that the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM has 10.50 seconds remaining.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". On the other hand, at this time also, the timer advance notice is continuously performed, and the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is in progress. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (15), “05.50” is displayed, which indicates that the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM has remaining 5.50 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 45 (16) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" When the timer display on the timer notice display TM becomes "00.00" at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (17) and the countdown is completed, the timer notice is shown in FIG. 45 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Bancho character BC appears backward, and on the timer advance notice display TM, the character "resurrection" is displayed to notify that a resurrection effect is to be performed. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit decision. In the resurrection effect, an effect that fails in resurrection may be performed, and the result of the loss may be derived.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (19) following FIG. 45 (18), the character BC of the bancho character who is backward facing faces the front, and the decorative symbol of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5" The combination of is displayed and it is notified that it becomes a big hit. Also, in the timer notice display TM, the word "Congratulations" is displayed, and it is shown that the player is blessed to be a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 5”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a final display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the "concerts 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  FIG. 47 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 47 (1) is the same as that of FIG. 44 (1), the description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol fluctuation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. In this example of effect, an icon of a bancho and an icon of a panda are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT. And the button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is different from the mode mentioned above, and as shown in FIG. 47 (3)-the same figure (7), according to the time after an operation effective period is started The display mode changes as it becomes shorter gradually. Further, in response to shortening of the button reception time meter MT, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves to follow the right end of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the No. long icon arranged at the left end of the button acceptance time meter MT has a fixed position and has not moved. In the following description, an icon arranged at the left end of the button acceptance time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the decrease display of the button acceptance time meter MT is referred to as a fixing icon, and is disposed at the right end of the button acceptance time meter MT. An icon which is displaced according to the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be referred to as a movement icon. Therefore, as time passes, the panda icon is displayed so as to approach the Bancho icon. In this example of the effect, it is predicted that something will occur when the panda bites into the bancho, that is, it can be said that the display itself of the button reception time meter MT functions as a notice display.

  In addition, from another viewpoint, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed, whereby the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT is started before the operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is performed. It can also be said that In this presentation example, a step-up notice may be performed in which the icons displayed on both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT change according to the time after the start of the operation valid period, for example, the operation valid period When the time has started, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT, and when the time passes, the panda icons change to ones with a long icon one by one, and the icon changes so much that the jackpot trusts A high-degree advance notice may be easily displayed, or the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed as the icon changes. Further, in this example of presentation, the advance notice is displayed in a mode in which the icon of the character is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT, but for example, the advance notice is displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT. It may be performed, or the advance notice may be displayed by changing the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT.

  FIG. 47 (4) shows that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes short as time passes after the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (5), as shown in FIG. 47 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes gradually shorter according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Change. At this time, a mini character (for example, a mini character BCH or a mini character of a princess, etc.) may be displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT to perform advance notice display. In this case, for example, when the two icons added to the button reception time meter MT are both the icons of the first set, the mini character of the princess is likely to be displayed, and 2 is added to the button reception time meter MT. In the case where one icon is a combination of a Bancho icon and a Panda icon, the Bancho mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is further shortened according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. By displaying the word "gabut", it is shown that the panda is bitten by the bancho. This causes the player to expect something to happen, and as a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the big hit. In this presentation example, the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT is performed within the range from the start of the operation valid period to the time corresponding to the operation valid period.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (8), the display SU2 of step 2 is covered in a difficult-to-see manner by the symbols of a large number of stars. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is an effect to be performed when the panda bites into the bancho, that is, the result of the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT affects the step-up notice (notice started by operation of the effect button 136). It can be said that it is something to give. In this case, it may be possible to expect that the step-up notice changes. In addition, since the step-up notice is further developed while showing that the step-up notice is over, it may be possible to make the step-up notice have unexpectedness. In this production example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the start of the display of the result of the preliminary display by the button acceptance time meter MT is determined, and therefore, the effect is produced after the operation valid period is started. The earlier the timing until the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice. Further, in this example of effect, when the effect button is not operated in the operation effective period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the display SU2 in step 2, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of "Premier" and that the big hit is confirmed A state of being informed is shown. That is, the result of the notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. It should be noted that if the effect button 136 is not operated in the button operation effect described above, the step-up notice is not started, and therefore, the premier notice is not given, but even if the step-up notice is not given, the premier notice is It may be performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (10), it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit of "decoration 7-decor 7-decor 7".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to a fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, FIG. As shown in the above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  FIG. 48 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, the appearance of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period in the button operation effect is shown. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 48 (1)-the same figure (3) is the same as that of FIG. 44 (1)-the same figure (3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 48 (4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation valid period is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 48 (4) to (6), when the operation effective period passes without the effect button 136 being operated, a step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 48 (7), The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the step-up notice is started after the operation effective period has elapsed even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period. In this case, since the button acceptance time meter MT is deleted as the operation valid period elapses, the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is not performed. In addition, when the above-described auto button mode is set, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is artificially operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the operation effective period. When the step-up notice is started, the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT may be performed, or only the step-up notice may be performed, and the notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only a notice using the button acceptance time meter MT may be given, and a step-up notice may not be given. After the step-up notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (7), the step-up notice develops in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 48 (8) to FIG.

  In this case, the step-up notice may end on the display SU2 of step 2 without the display SU3 of step 3 being displayed, or the display SU1 of step 1 may not be displayed. The step-up notice may end in some cases. The effects shown in FIGS. 48 (8) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 42 (16) to (17) except that the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed. Omit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (11), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "super hot" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and it is suggested that the jackpot reliability in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect as described above is performed, in the case of a big hit, after the temporary stop display due to the swing fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 48 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  FIG. 49 is a view showing stepwise an example of the pseudo-series effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 is a view showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. The effect shown in FIG. 49 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 44 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in the example of the effect, the character display of "If three people gather together, it is a pseudo sequence" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that a pseudo sequence effect is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is an advance notice effect regarding the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the same as that described above and shown in FIG. 47 (3), and the display mode changes as the button acceptance time meter MT itself becomes shorter as time passes. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this example), and a desired display result is displayed (the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character YSM, and the Hime character HME) By being displayed, it is predicted that the pseudo link will be performed. In the case where pseudo chaining is not performed, three characters are not displayed.

  In this example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation, or the number of continuous hitting operations The characters may be incremented one by one. In addition, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation. In addition, if the number of times the effect button 136 is operated does not reach the predetermined number of times (for example, three times) by the time the operation valid period elapses, the pseudo connection may not be performed, or the pseudo connection is performed. May be

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (4), as shown in FIG. 49 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG of is displayed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (5), as shown in FIG. 49 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM on the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (6), as shown in FIG. 49 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (8), the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT separate from each other, and the button acceptance time meter MT has the letters "All members set" Is displayed and it is predicted that the pseudo ream will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-replay symbol-decorative 7" is displayed, and a state in which temporary stop by the fluctuation display is performed is shown. , It is informed that the pseudo ream will be performed. That is, in this effect example, the stop symbol of the replay symbol is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-link is to be performed. In the example of effect, "decorative 7-replay symbol-decorative 7" is simultaneously stopped and displayed, but may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (10), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display saying "If three people gather it is a pseudo train" is displayed, and it is predicted that a second pseudo train effect will be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (11), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (11), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect relating to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the same as that described above and shown in FIG. 47 (3), but with the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this example of rendering, the pseudo-series is more likely to occur when the two icons are displayed, as compared to the case where the icon of the Bancho icon and the icon of the panda are displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. If two icons are displayed, pseudo-run may be performed. When two number-long icons are displayed on button reception time meter MT, button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of deca button, a display mode in which vibration and rotation are performed, etc.) Alternatively, when the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, it may be easier for the two button acceptance time meters MT to be displayed. .

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (12), as shown in FIG. 49 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG of is displayed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (13), as shown in FIG. 49 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM in the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (14), as shown in FIG. 49 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character HME at the top of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

  Then, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 49 (8), the pair of icon icons displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT are separated, and the button acceptance time meter MT has “all members set”. The characters are displayed, and it is predicted that the second pseudo-link will take place.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 7-replay symbol-decorative 7” is displayed, and a state in which temporary stop by swing fluctuation display is performed is shown. , It is informed that the second pseudo run will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (17), it is shown that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 3” display indicating the number of times the third variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link is performed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "It is extremely hot if collected by three people" is displayed, and it is predicted that a highly reliable notice of the jackpot will be made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (18) following FIG. 49 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (18), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect relating to a certain advance effect. In the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 50 (18), the icon of the bancho is displayed at both ends. In this example of presentation, a notification with higher reliability is more likely to occur when two icons are displayed, as opposed to the case where the icon for the Bancho icon and the icon for the panda are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. , It is easy to become a big hit by the display of two icons of the Bancho (big hit symbol is easy to be displayed).

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (19), as shown in FIG. 50 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG of is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (20), as shown in FIG. 50 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM in the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. Furthermore, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (21), as shown in FIG. 50 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (23), “decoration 7” is displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character TSM, and the princess character HME are arranged to overlap the front side of the middle symbol, and the button acceptance time meter MT displayed below them. The word "super hot" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (punching reach). The effects shown in FIG. 50 (24) to FIG. 30 (30) are the same as those in FIG. 43 (20) to FIG. 26 (26) except that the decorative symbols making up the reach state are different. Do.

  FIG. 51 is a view showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the pseudo-series effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, it is shown that three characters are not aligned in the button operation effect and no pseudo link is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 49 (1) to (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (6), the button operation effect is performed, and as a result of the effect button 136 being pressed twice, it is shown that the Echigoya character ECG and the donkey character YSM are displayed It is shown. Then, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (6), as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the princess character HME, The display of “x” indicating that the princess character HME has not appeared is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT separate from each other, and the letter “Sorry” is displayed in the button acceptance time meter MT. It is displayed, and the button operation effect fails, and it is informed that the pseudo link is not performed. In addition, although three characters are not displayed and the character of "sorry" is displayed, a pseudo ream may be performed. In this case, for example, a jackpot may be decided as a premium effect of the law collapse.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 51 (9) to (12), the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol> middle symbol> right symbol, and the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” It is displayed in combination in combination. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 51 (9)-the same figure (12) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (7)-the same figure (10), description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, in this effect example, the icons displayed accompanying the button reception time meter MT are the icon of the Bancho icon and the icon of the panda, and the icons of the two Bancho icons in the effect example shown in FIGS. The big hit design is less likely to be displayed than when it is displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, the appearance of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation effective period in the button operation effect is shown. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 52 (1)-the same figure (4) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (10)-the same figure (13), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (4). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is a timing later than the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14), and a timing slightly earlier than the end of the operation effective period. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT is small, and the number of the mini-characters BCH displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is only one.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. The step-up notice ends before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, since the timing when the step-up notice ends is predetermined (for example, in this example, the timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed in this example), the effect button can be displayed during the period when the step-up notice can be executed. It will fluctuate with the timing when 136 is operated. Therefore, the later the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this production example, since the production button 136 is operated at a timing slightly before the end of the operation effective period, the step-up notice is started and the display of the display SU1 of the step 1 is started, and so on until the display SU3 of the step 3. Although there is not enough time to perform the effect to be developed, and the display SU3 of step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, the step-up notice ends in the display SU1 of step 1. It should be noted that the display of the step-up to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. For example, as in this example of presentation, the execution time of the step-up notice is short In this case, the display may be started from the display SU3 of step 3 without displaying the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2.

  After that, the effects shown in FIG. 52 (8) to FIG. 52 (15) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 52 (7)-the same figure (15) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (18)-FIG. 43 (26), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a view sequentially showing another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 53 (1)-the same figure (4) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (10)-the same figure (13), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (5) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (4). The step-up notice is started. In this effect example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 of step 1, the display is started from the display SU2 of step 2, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), The display SU3 of 3 is displayed. This is the timing when the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14) as shown in FIG. When the display is started from the display SU1 of step 1, the display SU2 of step 2 and the display SU3 of step 3 can not be sufficiently displayed because it is shorter than the execution time of the effect that is scheduled to be executed in the up notice. . Therefore, in this presentation example, the display of the step for starting the display in the step-up notice is determined from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is performed based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 of step 2 and the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed. . As a result, for example, when the display SU3 of step 3 is to be displayed, there may be no case that the display button can not be viewed due to the delay of the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the example of the effect, the icon of the character described above may be added to both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT. For example, when the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda are displayed, the effect button 136 is operated. Then, when the button acceptance time meter MT is likely to display the mini-character BCH of the Bancho, and two icons of the Bancho are displayed, the mini-character of the princess is more likely to appear than the mini-character BCH of the Bancho. When a princess mini character appears, it may be more likely to be a big hit (a big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than when a Bancho mini character BCH appears.

  After that, the effects shown in FIG. 53 (8) to FIG. 53 (16) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 53 (8)-the same figure (16) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (18)-FIG. 43 (26), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 54: is a figure shown stepwise about the other example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 54 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 44 (1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, but the button acceptance time meter MT as described above is not displayed. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (4), when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the display of “after 5.00 seconds” indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is performed. The display of this remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value gradually decreases according to the time of the countdown according to the time after the operation effective period is started. The display of the countdown may be such that the countdown proceeds in response to the passage of the actual time, or the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown proceeds later than the passage of the actual time. You may In this example of presentation, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation valid period starts, but the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation valid period starts, for example, the operation valid If the maximum duration of the period is 5 seconds, start displaying the remaining time, for example, display 3.00 seconds after the start of the operation effective period, and when the remaining 3 seconds have been reached, etc. It is also good.

  After that, the timing shown in FIG. 54 (5) (for example, in this example, the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the operation effective period, and the display of the remaining time is “after 3.0 seconds”) Then, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 54 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the display of the countdown is also erased along with the button image 136a.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (7), the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIG. 47 (3) and described above is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The display of the button reception time meter MT is started with the same length regardless of the timing from the start of the operation effective period to the operation of the effect button 136. On the other hand, the execution period of the step-up advance notice depends on the timing from the start of the operation effective period to the operation of the effect button 136, so the period during which the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button acceptance time meter MT shortens differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. For example, as the effect button 136 is operated earlier after the operation valid period starts, the button acceptance time meter The speed at which MT shortens becomes slower.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is shortened according to the time since the button acceptance time meter MT starts to display, and at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (8), the panda icon approaches the number long icon. By displaying the letters "Gabutsu", it is shown that the panda bites into the bancho. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 54 (9) to FIG. 54 (13) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 54-the figure (13) is the same as that of FIG. 47 (8)-the figure (12), description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation valid period (the display of the remaining time and the display of the button acceptance time meter MT) changes before and after the operation of the effect button 136 There is.

  FIG. 55 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 55 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 44 (1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button acceptance time meter MT as described above is not displayed. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (4), when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, “5 more seconds” indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value is reduced by the method of countdown according to the time after the operation effective period is started. In this effect example, compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 54, since there is no display for less than one second, it can be said that the schematic display of the remaining time is performed. The display of the countdown may be such that the countdown proceeds in response to the passage of the actual time, or the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown proceeds later than the passage of the actual time. You may

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (5) (for example, in this example of rendering, one second has passed since the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining time display is “four more seconds”), When the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the display of the countdown is continuously displayed, and the countdown is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the display of the countdown is that the "after" part is erased, and it is indicated that the display of the remaining time of the operation effective period has been switched to the display as the timer notice until a certain effect is performed. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (7) to FIG. 10 (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display of a countdown as timer notice is performed. At this time, the display of the numerical part of the display of the countdown changes to multiple colors (for example, seven colors), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. In addition, when the display of the numerical part of the display of countdown changes to multicolor, it may be a big hit decision. Also, the numerical value portion of the display of the countdown may be displayed in another color, and for example, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the display color. Also, for example, the typeface of the numerical part of the display of the countdown may be changed, and the displayed typeface may indicate the reliability of the big hit. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (10), when the countdown display is “0 seconds” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 55 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of step 1 is performed. It changes from SU1 to display SU3 in step 3. In addition, the display of the countdown is erased. The change from the display SU1 of step 1 to the display SU3 of step 3 is a notice display performed when the countdown as the timer notice is completed. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further enhanced by the result of the timer notice being given to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are mutually related. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice made as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices.

  After that, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 42 (18) to FIG. (19) and reached the reach state, the effects shown in FIG. 55 (12) to FIG. Is done. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 55 (12)-the same figure (18) is the same as that of FIG. 43 (20)-the same figure (26), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 56 (1) is the same as that in FIG. 44 (1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this example of the effect, the character display "The chance is that it would be a chance to gather three people" is displayed at the top of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high if three characters appear. It is done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (3), a button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the same as that described above and shown in FIG. 47 (3), and the display mode changes as the button acceptance time meter MT itself becomes shorter as time passes. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this example), and a desired display result is displayed (the Echigoya character ECG, the Tonosama character YSM, and the Hime character HME) By being displayed, it is notified that a notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit is performed. That is, when all three characters are displayed, a notice is more easily displayed than when all three characters are not displayed. In this example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one according to the amount of the long press operation, or the number of continuous hitting operations The characters may be incremented one by one. In addition, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation.

  After that, when the operation effective period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (4), as shown in FIG. 56 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, Echigoya at the top of the display screen. The character ECG of is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the operation valid period continues. That is, it is shown that the hidden button effect is received in which the operation of the effect button 136 is received while the display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. Then, when the second production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (5), as shown in FIG. 56 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM on the upper part of the display screen is displayed. Are displayed side by side on the Echigoya character ECG. That is, it is shown that a character of the lord YSM appears by the operation of the hidden button. Further, when the third production button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (6), as shown in FIG. 56 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed. That is, it is shown that the princess character HME appears by the hidden button operation. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the hidden button rendering is being performed during the execution of the advance notice display by the button acceptance time meter MT.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (8), the icon of the screen leader and the icon of the panda displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT separate from each other, and the button acceptance time meter MT has the letters "All members set" Is displayed, and it is informed that a notice display indicating that the jackpot reliability is high will be performed thereafter.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (9), “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya character ECG, the donkey character YSM, and the princess character HME are arranged to overlap on the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below them In the time meter MT, the word "chance" is displayed, and a warning display indicating that the big hit is highly reliable is performed. In the button operation effect, the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated is insufficient and three characters are not displayed, or the effect button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, for example, any one of three characters When the above character does not appear, it may be changed to the character of "chance", for example, display "sorry" to notify that the big hit reliability is low. Moreover, when it becomes reach by a specific symbol (for example, "decoration 7"), a big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed than when reach by other symbols.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the state of developing to the above-mentioned defeat reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (11), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (12), as shown in FIG. 56 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character is defeated by the swordsman of the enemy character, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 57 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 57 (1)-the same figure (3) is the same as that of FIG. 44 (1)-the figure (3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (3), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (4) after the button operation effect is started, the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 The characters “Continuous Strike” are displayed on the screen, and the continuous strike operation of the effect button 136 informs that the step advances in the step-up notice.

  After that, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (5), as shown in FIG. 57 (6), in accordance with the first operation of the effect button 136, the step up notice is The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period is started. In addition, at this timing, a plurality of mini-characters BCH of a group length (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT. . Also in this example of presentation, by displaying the mini character BCH of the Bancho on the button acceptance time meter MT, it functions as a notice display which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the effect button 136, but the step-up is performed when a predetermined number of continuous hitting operations of the effect button 136 are performed after the operation effective period is started. An advance notice may be started. As described above, in the example of the effect, it is shown that the preliminary display by the button acceptance time meter MT is being performed while the effect of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is being executed.

  After that, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed and the operation of the effect button 136 is performed a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 57 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step SU1 to step SU1 is performed. Step up to 2 display SU2. As described above, in this effect example, on the condition that the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed, step-up of the display in the step-up notice may be performed, in other words, the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is insufficient If this is the case, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH has decreased according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

  After that, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed and the operation of the effect button 136 is performed a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 57 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step SU2 from step SU2 is performed. Step up to display 3 of 3 That is, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that it is likely to be a big hit than the display is ended in the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH has decreased according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

  After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (9) to (17) are performed. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 57 (9)-the same figure (17) is the same as that of FIG. 42 (18)-FIG. 43 (26), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in stages. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 58 (1) is the same as that of FIG. 44 (1), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 , And the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (3), it is shown that the button continuous hitting operation effect is started. Specifically, the bancho character BC1 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a letter "Awaken the bancho by continuous hitting" is displayed. That is, in this button continuous hitting operation effect, it can be said that the mission effect aims to display an aspect in which the clothes of the Bancho break in a predetermined time by continuously hitting the effect button 136.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (4) shows that the operation valid period in the button continuous hitting operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "Awaken the Bancho by continuous hitting" displayed on the right side of the character BC1 of the bancho is changed to the character display of "continuous hitting start", and Below the character display of "Start", a continuous hit button acceptance time meter RMT is displayed. The continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT has a display mode different from that of the button receiving time meter MT described above, and is constituted by an indicator consisting of a plurality of (9 in the example of effects shown in FIG. 58 (4)) There is. Then, the display mode of the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT changes in such a manner that one block is erased one by one from the block at the right end according to the time after the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (5) to FIG. 7 (7), when the effect button 136 is continuously hit operated, the number of star symbols displayed superimposed on the bancho character BC 1 as the operation frequency increases It will increase.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 58 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of a mode in which the character of the Bancho breaks the clothes (final form Is displayed, and the letters "Wake up" are displayed, and it is informed that the purpose (mission) of the button continuous hitting operation effect is achieved.

  At this time, the consecutive hit button acceptance time meter RMT is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a mode of changing to multiple colors (for example, seven colors), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. . In this effect example, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed by the change of the display mode of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT may not change, and it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is low, or the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT is erased when the mission is achieved. And there may be cases where no advance notice is displayed. Further, the display color of the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT may be changed to any of a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the changed display color. As described above, in this presentation example, it is shown that the preliminary display using the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT is performed after the purpose of the button continuous hitting operation presentation is achieved. In addition, in the button continuous hitting operation production, the number of times of operation of the production button 136 in the operation effective period is in spite of the fact that the mission is not determined to be achieved in advance or the mission is determined to be achieved in advance. If the number of times required to achieve the mission is not reached, the leader character will not be displayed in the final form (ie, the final form of the character BC2 will not be displayed), and the continuous hit button Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also erased, no advance notice display using the continuous hitting button reception time meter RMT will be performed.

  If it is determined in advance that the mission will be achieved, even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the operation effective period is less than the number necessary for the mission to be achieved, the character BC1 of the game leader is It may be a display of the final form. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT are erased, the advance notice display using the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT will not be performed. Also, after the start of the operation valid period, the number of operations of the effect button 136 has become the number required for the mission to be achieved, for example, because the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. If the conditions for achieving the mission are not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the directing button 136 is continuously hit and operated until the predetermined period of time elapses. In addition, in the button continuous hitting operation presentation, after the operation effective period starts, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the presentation button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (9), it is shown that one block is erased one by one and the remaining number of blocks is four in accordance with the time since the start of the operation effective period. It is done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (10), it is shown that one block is erased one by one and the number of remaining blocks is one according to the time since the start of the operation effective period. It is done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (11), the decorative symbol is in the normal display state, and the decorative symbols of “decoration 7” forming reach states on the left symbol and the right symbol are respectively stopped and displayed The manner in which the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner is shown. Then, the final form of the long-length character BC2 moves to the overlapping position on the front side of the middle symbol, the character "SP" is displayed, and it is informed that it will shift to the super reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (12) to FIG. 18 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 is shifted to super reach (punching reach), and a state where the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed is shown. The effects shown in FIGS. 58 (12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 50 (24) to (30), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a view sequentially showing an example of the button continuous hitting operation effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 59 (1)-the same figure (4) is the same as that of FIG. 58 (1)-the same figure (4), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (4), after the effective period of operation in the button continuous hitting operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 59 (5) to FIG. As the number of operations increases, the number of star patterns displayed superimposed on the Bancho character BC1 increases.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the last character of the form-length character BC2, and The word "alert" is displayed to indicate that the mission has been accomplished. At this time, the consecutive hit button acceptance time meter RMT is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a mode of changing to multiple colors (for example, seven colors), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. . In this example, compared to the example shown in FIG. 58, since the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 is quick and the number of operations per time is large, the number of blocks for the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT remains large The mission has been accomplished in the (7 remaining) condition. Thereafter, the blocks are erased one by one according to the time since the start of the operation effective period.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (8), a state is shown in which the mini character YM is displayed in the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the consecutive hitting button acceptance time meter RMT. There is. This mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation effective period to the achievement of the mission is early (when the mission is achieved within the predetermined first mission achievement time) It can be said that it is an example of the advance notice display using the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT together with the change of the display mode of the continuous hitting button receiving time meter RMT. That is, it can be said that the mode of the advance notice using the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT differs depending on the time from when the operation effective period is started to when the mission is achieved. As described above, when the advance display is performed using the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT, the rendering effect may be improved and the interest may be improved. In addition, when the mission is achieved, this mini character YM may always be displayed regardless of the time from the start of the operation effective period until the mission is achieved, Even if the time from the start of the operation effective period to the achievement of the mission may be early, it may not be displayed. In addition, when this mini character YM has appeared, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (9), it is shown that two more blocks are erased according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and the number of remaining blocks is three. ing. The continuous hitting button acceptance time meter RMT also shows that the mini character YM is moved to the left in accordance with the enlargement of the blank portion where the block has been erased. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (9), it is shown that the character of "O-ban" has appeared accompanying the mini-character YM of the lord. In this example of presentation, it is informed that a big hit is decided by appearance of a character of "big game behavior". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (9), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (10), it is shown that one block is erased one by one and the number of remaining blocks is one according to the time since the start of the operation effective period. It is done. At this time, the display of the characters of "Daio behavior" displayed along with the mini character YM of Tonosama completely appears. In this example of rendering, only "Ball" of "Ball behavior" may appear, and there may be a case where the "Dance" character does not appear. In this case, the entire "Ball behavior" character You may make it hard to display a big hit symbol clearly than when a character appears. By doing this, it may be possible to have an expectation as to whether or not the jackpot's reliability is a high-prediction until the character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In addition, display of a case in which characters different from "behavior" appear may be displayed. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 59 (11) to FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 59 (11)-the same figure (18) is the same as that of FIG. 58 (11)-the same figure (18), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60 shows, in stages, an example of an example of a reserve series notice effect executed during a big hit game. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In FIG. 60, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 Is also illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (1), in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is made on the "special view I" which is the lost symbol, and in the second special view display device 214, it is the big hit symbol " The stop display is given in the special view a ", and in this example of the effect, it is shown that the special view 2 has become a big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is lost in "special figure I". Stop is displayed with the symbol of "x" which shows that it became, and special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is stopped and displayed with the symbol of "A" which shows that it became big hit with "special figure a" There is.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 60, since the jackpot has been a big hit in the power support state, the reserve icon of the special view 2 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280. In FIG. 60 (1), the hold icons h21, h22, h23 and h24 of the four special figures 2 are displayed, and all the hold icons h21 to h24 of these four special figures 2 have default display modes ( Round non-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default holding icon of Special Figure 2 is a circular holding icon. On the other hand, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 0, and no reservation icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed. In this demonstration example, the hold icon in the special view 1 is not displayed in the power support state, but the hold icon is displayed when the number of holds in the special view 1 is one or more. Good.

  Further, in the effect movable body 224, both the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are in the initial position, that is, they are not in the movable state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (2), it is shown that a big hit game is started and a big hit start effect is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "big 7" of the "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" displayed when the big hit became the upper left of the display screen It is displayed in the corner, and in the center of the display screen, it is shown that a copanda character with a fan is celebrating a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (3), it is shown that the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started. It should be noted that in the stage during the big hit game, the number of big hit consecutive villas, the number of payout balls obtained during the present big hit, and the number of payout balls earned during the continuous loaf may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (4) shows that the seventh round has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the button is pushed out, the character "super heat is displayed" is displayed on the right side of the copanda character, and the effect button 136 is operated to operate the effect movable body 224. In the case, it is explained that it is notified that the symbol fluctuation display being held is highly likely to include a symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit (that is, there is a high possibility of occurrence of a hold string). It has been done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (6), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of the advance notice effect during the big hit game. At the timing shown in FIG. 60 (6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (7), as shown in FIG. 60 (8), the forearm portion of the effect movable body 224 224 b operates to move to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, a plurality of star symbols are displayed, and such effect display as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208 Has been done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (9), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is decided that a holding string will be generated. The display of "hold reservation fixed" is performed. In this example of production, when the production movable body 224 operates, the retention train is always generated, but even if the presentation movable body 224 operates, the retention train may not occur. Good.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the hold combination notice effect executed during the big hit game. The effects shown in FIGS. 61 (1) through 61 (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 60 (1) through 60 (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (7) after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (8), by the effect movable body 224 The operation is not performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "chance" to give an expectation as to whether or not the hold sequence will occur. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period is started. Further, in the button acceptance time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini character PNDs consisting of panda's faces are arranged and arranged in a plurality (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (8)) in the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini characters PND displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time after the start of the operation effective period). In this effect example, the mini character PND of the panda is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display that suggests that the degree of expectation of occurrence of the holding group is not so high. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the mini character PND of the panda may not be displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. That is, in the case where the mini character PND of the panda is displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT, it is easier for the hold sequence to occur than in the case where the mini character PND of the panda is not displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT. It may be configured. In addition, there may be a case where a mini character different from the panda mini character PND may be displayed, and the degree of expectation of occurrence of the hold sequence may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be displayed in a mixed manner. In this example, regardless of the number of panda mini-characters PND displayed, the degree of expectation for generating a hold string is the same, but according to the number of panda mini-characters PND displayed. The degree of expectation generated by the holding group may be different, for example, the higher the number of panda mini characters PND displayed, the higher the degree of expectation generated by the holding group may be.

  In addition, the type of mini character displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT may be changed according to the timing after the start of the operation valid period, for example, the timing of operation of the effect button 136 is the operation valid period If the timing is early after the start of the, the mini character other than the panda mini character (for example, a mini-length character or the like) may be easily displayed. Further, in this example of rendering, the character display of “chance” is displayed by operating the rendering button 136, and thereafter, the mini character PND of the panda in the button acceptance time meter MT is not based on the operation of the rendering button 136. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of "chance" and the display of the mini character PND of the panda in the button acceptance time meter MT may be simultaneously performed in response to the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the object displayed by the operation of the effect button 136 is the display of "chance", and the display of the mini character PND of the panda in the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed by the operation of the effect button 136 It is shown about the example which is not a thing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (9), the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time after the start of the operation effective period. Further, the display number of the mini character PND of the panda is also reduced according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and is two at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (9).

  FIG. 61 (10) shows that the eighth round has been started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (10), it is shown that the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT becomes zero. That is, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star figure is displayed, while the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 61 (12) As described above, the display of the character "Sorry" is performed, and the button operation effect fails, and it is informed that the possibility of the occurrence of the hold sequence is low. In this production example, even when there is a plan to generate a suspension string, there may be a case that the button operation presentation may fail, and by configuring in this way, the expectation to the suspension string is lost May be reduced.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the step by step example of another example of the hold combination notice effect executed during the big hit game. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 62 (1)-the same figure (7) is the same as that of FIG. 61 (1)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (8), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (7) after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, the effect is produced also in this effect example. Although the operation by the movable body 224 is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character of "Tsu" which gives expectation as to whether or not the hold sequence will occur. When the word "Tsu" is displayed, the effect movable body 224 is easier to operate than when the word "chance" is displayed. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period is started. Furthermore, in this effect example, a plurality of mini-characters BCH consisting of a face of a length and a mini-character PND of a panda are displayed respectively on the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. In the device 208, two mini-characters BCH of a long-length and three mini-characters PND of a panda are arranged side by side. In this effect example, the hold sequence is more likely to occur in the case where the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed than in the case where only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed (in the symbol variation display being held, the big hit The symbol is easy to be displayed finalized). In other words, in the case where there is a schedule for generating a reservation string, it is easy to display the mini-character BCH as the leader. It should be noted that the Bancho mini character BCH is disposed to the right of the panda mini character PND, and the Bancho mini character BCH is erased faster than the panda mini character PND according to the decrease in the remaining amount of the gauge. Therefore, the player may be allowed to pay attention to the change of the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT in order to confirm the mini character BCH of the gamemaster.

  In addition, since the number of mini characters displayed on the button acceptance time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time after the operation effective period is started), the operation effective period is started. From when the timing of operation of the effect button 136 is late, and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT is less than the space for arranging the mini character BCH of the note length, only the panda mini character PND is displayed, There may be a case in which the mini character BCH of the leader is not displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to improve the desire to quickly press the effect button 136 in order to confirm the mini character BCH of the bankmaster. It should be noted that in this example of rendering, the expectation for the effect movable body 224 to operate is the same regardless of the number of displayed mini-characters BCH, but according to the number of displayed mini-characters BCH. For example, the effect movable body 224 may be made easier to operate as the number of displayed mini-characters BCH increases. In addition, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 62 (6) may be displayed in the display mode of the Deca button or the display mode in which vibration and rotation are performed, and such a display mode is displayed. In this case, the mini-character BCH of the master may be displayed more easily than when displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (9), the button acceptance time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time since the start of the operation valid period. Further, all the mini-characters BCH of the Bancho are erased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and only the mini-character PND of the panda is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (9), two panda mini characters PND are displayed.

  FIG. 62 (10) shows that the eighth round has been started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (10), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT becomes 0, and the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation valid period was started. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (11), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and such an effect as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208 The display is being done. As described above, in this effect example, the action movable body 224 does not immediately operate in response to depression of the effect button 136, and the operation is performed only when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button acceptance time meter MT becomes 0. It shows about the example of presentation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (12), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is determined that the generation of the holding string will be generated. The display of "hold reservation fixed" is performed.

  FIG. 63 is a view sequentially showing another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 63 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). Therefore, the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (1), three reserved icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and all three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are default. It is displayed in the display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 changes the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 are moved to the display positions of the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12, respectively. The hold icon h11 is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT in this example of presentation is the mode shown in FIG. 47 (3) and described above, and a bancho icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT.

  FIG. 63 (4) shows that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes shorter as time passes after the start of the operation valid period.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (5), as shown in FIG. 63 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button acceptance time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is such that the button acceptance time meter MT becomes gradually shorter according to the time after the operation valid period starts. Change.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is further shortened according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. By displaying the word "gabut", it is shown that the panda is bitten by the bancho. This causes the player to expect something to happen, and as a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (8), after the icon of the first long displayed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a panda icon, the pair of panda icons separates The characters “icon change” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU2 of step 2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (9), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and a notice of the symbol fluctuation display is performed. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU2 of step 2 here. As described above, in this example, even if the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 of step 3, the change icon changes to the notice mode of the notice by the notice effect using the button acceptance time meter MT. In some cases, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a big hit. In this effect, depending on the characters displayed on both ends of the button acceptance time meter MT, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed with different ease. For example, icons displayed on both ends of the button acceptance time meter are displayed. In the case of the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda, the display SU3 of step 3 is hard to be displayed, and the step-up notice is easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2; When the icons displayed at both ends are two number-long icons, the display SU3 of step 3 may be easily displayed.

  After that, when the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed and the "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively, and the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. In the device 208, the display of "reach" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 63 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the state of developing to the above-mentioned defeat reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (12), the button preview effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (13), as shown in FIG. 63 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy swordsman and the defeated screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holis 5-Decorative 6-Decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a button continuous hitting operation effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in stages. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 64 (1)-the same figure (6) is the same as that of FIG. 63 (1)-the same figure (6), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (5) and the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (6), FIG. 64 (7) is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, although the step-up notice is continuously performed, the display SU1 of step 1 is not changed to the display SU2 of step 2, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains. On the other hand, the button acceptance time meter MT is further shortened according to the time since the start of the operation effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (7), the panda icon approaches the ban icon and the panda icon Is trying to bite in the Bancho, but the word “Attack” is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 64 (8), it is shown that the panda is defeated by the Bancho. In this example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the panda takes on the game after the game is performed, than when the panda takes the game in the game. In the effect example, as will be described later, the suspended symbol variation display is likely to be a big hit).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (9), after the panda icon displayed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a long icon, a pair of long icon is separated. The characters “icon change” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 of step 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main hall, and a suspension notice is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU1 of step 1 here. As described above, in this example of the effect, even if the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display does not have the expectation for the big hit, the pre-reading notice using the button acceptance time meter MT may be performed. In some cases, it may be possible to have an expectation for becoming a big hit in the symbol variation display being held. Further, in this example of presentation, any of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 changes as a result of the notice effect by the button acceptance time meter MT being performed in the same display mode, so the effect of the notice of the symbol change display And at least a part of the effects are performed in the same manner in the pre-read advance notice and when it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation until the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14 changes There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and thereafter, in FIG. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the "Holiday 2-Decorative 2-Decorative 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. . In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 65 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). Therefore, the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 65 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed, and the reserved icons h11 and h12 of these two special drawings 1 are both default display modes. Is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, moving animation of holding icon h11, h12 of special figure 1 is done, the holding icon which is the display position of the first holding icon h11 (the holding icon which is the object of this design fluctuation) fluctuation indicator display area 280 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (3), the operation effective period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (4), the button image 136a is erased as shown in FIG. 65 (5). The button acceptance time meter MT is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game is started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (5), the characters "stock chance" and "press well" are displayed, and in the button acceptance time meter MT displayed in an enlarged manner, the operation valid period Depending on the time since the start of the display mode changes as the gauge decreases. At this time, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the button reception time meter MT, three treasure boxes (treasure boxes TR1, TR2, and TR3) are arranged in a row in the remaining display portion of the gauge, and the right end portion of the gauge is displayed to decrease with time. It is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when each of the two passes through the center of each treasure box. That is, it is notified that the mini game of the timing press is started. In the example of this effect, the mini game with the button acceptance time meter MT may not be performed, and a preliminary announcement effect using the button acceptance time meter MT described above may be performed. In addition, the number of treasure boxes to be displayed may be different depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time from the start of the operation effective period when the effect button 136 is operated, for example, the effect button Since the remaining amount of gauges increases as the operation timing of 136 starts earlier after the operation effective period starts, the number of treasure boxes may be increased by that amount, and as the timing of operation of production button 136 is later, The number of treasure boxes to be displayed may be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (6), the effect button 136 is generated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR1 disposed at the rightmost of the three treasure boxes. When operated, as shown in FIG. 65 (7), the treasure chest TR1 may move upward, and the treasure chest TR1 may be opened to cause a notice icon I71 of the sabothani to which the character of "change" is added. . The notice icon I71 of Sabohani is a form of pre-reading notice. When the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, it is forecasted that the change icon or the hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice. As described above, in this example of the effect, the effect button 136 is operated with good timing when the right end of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is substantially in the center of the treasure box disposed on the button acceptance time meter MT. A notice icon may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be referred to as a notice item or a mini item. Even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is substantially at the center of the treasure box TR1, the advance notice icon may not appear. Also, something other than the notice icon may appear. For example, a notice character appears to give notice of the symbol variation display or give a notice of advance reading, or a mere effect display without notice (for example, an instruction display etc.) May be performed. In addition, even if the advance notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, the display mode of the change icon or the hold icon may not change.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (7), when the notice icon I71 of Sabo Hani appears from the treasure box TR1, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (8), the notice icon of Sabo Hani appeared in the upper right corner of the display screen. I71 is displayed, showing that the notice icon has been stocked.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (9), the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes approximately the center of the treasure box TR2 disposed on the right side of the remaining two treasure boxes (treasure box TR2, TR3) When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 65 (10), the treasure chest TR2 moves upward, and the treasure chest TR2 is opened, and the notice icon I72 of the lord with the character of “subjugation” added. May appear. This notice icon I72 of the lord is a form of pre-reading notice, and the strong cut-in CI1a is executed in the defeat reach which is scheduled to be executed with the symbol variation display being held by stocking the notice icon I72 of the lord. It is predicted that it will appear. That is, by the stocking of the notice icon I71 of the courtesy, the pre-reading notice that the punishment reach is performed in the suspended symbol variation display, and the pre-reading notice that the strong cut-in CI1a appears are performed. It can be said. It should be noted that the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear even if the grandchild's preview icon I72 is stocked, or the strong cut-in CI1a may always appear.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (10), when the notice icon I72 of the statue appears from the treasure box TR, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (11), the notice icon of the statue appearing on the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed, showing that the notice icon is stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing significantly delayed from the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is substantially at the center of one remaining treasure box TR3. As shown in FIG. 65 (13), the treasure chest TR3 moves upward but is not released, and the character "failure" is displayed, indicating that the timing pressing has failed. Therefore, the content of the treasure box TR3 is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (14), the treasure box TR3 is erased as it is. If the timing press fails, the contents of the treasure box are displayed, but if the contents of the treasure box are the notice icons, they may not be stocked. Further, in the example of the effect, when the effect button 136 has the function of the auto button enabled, the right end portion of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is an approximate shape of each treasure box even if the effect button 136 is not operated. Each treasure box may be opened on the assumption that the effect button 136 is operated at the center timing, or the function of the auto button may be disabled in this timing-pressed mini game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (15) shows that the button acceptance time meter MT has been erased and the mini game using the button acceptance time meter MT has ended. In addition, the notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lady are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 5-decorative 5-decorative 2" shakes A temporary stop due to fluctuations is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. Further, in this example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button acceptance time meter MT It is shown that the notice display using the symbol has an influence on the subsequent decoration symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon which is the target of the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. In addition, the notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lady are continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (19) following FIG. 65 (18), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (20), the state of the advance notice icon I71 of the sabo hani is moved approximately to the center of the display screen while being enlarged, and a state of the advance notice icon I71 of the sabo hani being digested is shown .

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (21), the change icon h0 of the default display mode displayed in the change icon display area 280 changes to the display mode of the safari, and the notice display by the change icon h0 It is shown that is being done. In addition, when the advance notice icon I71 of Sabo Hani is digested, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (21), after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (22), the notice icon I71 of the enlarged sabothani is erased, and then As shown in FIG. 66 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (24), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (25), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "super hot" are displayed, and it is informed that the reach state has been reached, and the reliability of the big hit in this reach is It is suggested that it is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (27) shows that normal reach effect is being performed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (28), the state of the notice icon I72 of the lord moving to the approximate center of the display screen while being enlarged and the state of the notice icon I72 of the lord being digested is shown .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (30), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (31), as shown in FIG. 66 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. As shown in FIG. 66 (28), the strong cut-in image CI1a appears as a result of digestion of the preview icon I72 of the lord. When the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button advance effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period. Even if not, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed after the lapse of the operation effective period. Further, in the mini game described above, if the preview icon I72 of the grandfather is scheduled to appear, but the timing of the presentation button 136 has failed and the preview icon I of the grandfather has not appeared, the strong cut-in image CI1a The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily than the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. "Decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”, as shown in FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a final display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of the "concerts 5-decorative 5-decorative 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  In this presentation example, as a result of the mini game, a notice icon may be stocked to the effect that a button operation effect in which a notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT described above is performed is performed. That is, the advance notice of the advance notice display using the button acceptance time meter MT may be performed.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 68 to 79, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special view hold lamp 218 and the second special view hold lamp 220 Although illustrated, the common view display device 210 and the common view holding lamp 216 are not shown. Also in FIGS. 68 to 79, the types of the special views to be stopped and displayed on the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 have the stop symbol form shown in FIG. 75 (a) and FIG. 75 (b) It is done. In addition, although a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided. It may be In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, with regard to the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, it can be applied that the display mode of the button acceptance time meter MT shown in FIGS. Nor.

  First, with reference to FIG. 67, types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. Here, FIG. 67 (a) is a view showing another example of a decorative symbol, and FIG. 67 (b) is a view for explaining a combination of symbols serving as an opportunity of pre-reading advance notice.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the decorative pattern of the present embodiment, in addition to the 10 decorative patterns of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10", two specials of "special 1" and "special 2" Decorative designs are also available. The decorative symbol of "special 1" may be referred to as a replay symbol, and for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 1" stops in middle symbol, or "special 1" is in all symbols. It is a decorative symbol that is to be subjected to a pseudo-series effect when it becomes a mode of stop display etc.). The decorative pattern of "special 2" is sometimes referred to as a chance button pattern, and is a display mode that represents the button in a simplified manner, and the display mode is different from the button image 136a as described above displayed in the button operation effect There is. For example, the display pattern of "special 2" includes a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 2" stops and displays in the middle symbol, a mode in which "special 2" stops and displays in all symbols, etc.) When it becomes, it is a decoration pattern by which button operation production is performed. Note that "special 1" and "special 2" are not always included in the variation display of decorative symbols, and appear as necessary, but they are always present in the variation display of decorative symbols. It may be included.

  Further, "special 1" and "special 2" are not displayed in a definite manner by a combination of decorative symbols including them, and function as a notice display for giving a notice of the contents of the effect to be performed thereafter. In addition, it is displayed by the combination of the decoration design including the decoration design of "special 1" or "special 2", and it functions as a pre-reading notice that the effect corresponding to "special 1" or "special 2" is performed You may In addition, although one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and one type of symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, respectively, two or more types may be provided. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the decorative symbol of "special 1" corresponding to a pseudo-series effect and the decorative symbol of "special 2" related to button operation effect are prepared, for example, a variation icon Alternatively, a special decorative symbol corresponding to the effect that the display mode of the holding icon changes to the display mode of the notice, or a special decorative symbol specifically suggesting the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the present embodiment, it is a combination of decorative designs consisting of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" and excluding the combination constituting the reach and the combination of the big hit decorative designs The preview notice is configured to be able to be displayed by finalizing the display with a combination of decorative symbols (sometimes referred to as "chance eye"). Specifically, the combination of the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7", the combination of the decoration design of the border of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7", "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3" Design of the combination of the decorative design of the loss of "", and the combination of the decorative design of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", the pattern having a high probability of becoming a big hit on the suspended design fluctuation display It is informed that the variable display is included.

  FIG. 68 is a view showing in stages an example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 69 is a view showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following figures, it is shown that the presentation proceeds in the order of numbers in parentheses.

  In the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (1), the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

  The special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In both the special figure 1 fourth pattern t1 and the special figure 2 fourth pattern t2, a symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of losing is displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower left corner of the display screen.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 68 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280. The reserve icon of the special figure 1 represents the reserve number of the special figure 1 by the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The reserve icon in Special Figure 1 is displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the left side becoming the older the prize icon.

  Two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in FIG. 68 (1), and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round no It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 68 is in the non-power-supply state (non-short time state), it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win special figure 2 start port 232 It is because there is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a reserve icon of a special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area 280 according to the control state (playing state). . That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power-on state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is hidden.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is also a round non-pattern and white display mode, but the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the display position are made different. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be made different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a decision at first glance.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or blinking of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol. , This order may be back and forth.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 Is started. In addition, the move animation of the hold icon h11, h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol fluctuation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (3), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (4), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "decorative 3-special 2-decorative 4" is displayed. The stop display (temporary stop display) is performed in combination. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect requiring operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, in this effect example, the stop symbol of "special 2" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, the decorative pattern of "special 2" is erased, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode in place of the decorative pattern of "special 2", and together with this button image 136a The button acceptance time meter MT is also displayed. In addition, the characters “press the chance button” are also displayed above the button image 136 a to promote the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the middle symbol may be erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which the button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative image of "special 2" is displayed in a mode in which the buttons are displayed in a simplified manner as described above, whereas the button image 136a is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. And the display of the button acceptance time meter MT, which can be said to have different display modes. In addition, although the decoration pattern of "special 2" is made not to perform animation at least when it is stopped and displayed, animation may be performed during the stop display.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (7), as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 When the button acceptance time meter MT is erased, symbols of a plurality of stars are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and a display is performed to affect these.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (9), after the slip variation display in which the middle symbol and the right symbol are changed at high speed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 68 (10), the middle symbol and the right are displayed. "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the design, and a temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (11), "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the decorative symbol display device 208 It is displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the loss of. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a chance eye and includes symbol variation displays that are likely to be a big hit in the symbol variation displays being held. It functions as a pre-reading notice to inform that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 68 (11), it is foretold that it is a symbol variation display that there is a high possibility that the suspension of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 will be a big hit. In this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 68 (10), when the game is temporarily stopped at the chance, the word "Chance" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance is eye Informing that pre-reading advance notice by.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (12), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (13) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (13), the characters "Mini game" and "Press well" are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed, and the approximate center of this timing meter is displayed. It is shown that the treasure box TR is arranged at. At this time, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this timing meter, the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge displayed to be reduced as time passes by the center of the treasure box TR.

  FIG. 68 (14) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. The TR is enlarged and moved to the upper side of the timing meter, and a replay icon RP appears from the treasure box TR. A display in which a question mark is added to the characters “Continued” is displayed on the icon RP of this replay, and it is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-link will be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it can be said that the icon RP of the replay functions as a notice of the pseudo-series effect in the symbol variation display. That is, in this example of presentation, the case where the icon RP of replay appears appears to be easier to start the pseudo-link than the case where it does not appear. Here, the icon RP of replay does not appear, for example, the icon of a button may appear, and when the icon of the button appears, the decorative symbol of “special 2” is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a button operation effect will be performed.

  Here, when the button icon appears, the "special 2" decorative symbol may be displayed and the button operation effect may be started more easily than when the button icon does not appear. In addition, the timing meter continues to be displayed, and the bancho icon is displayed on the left and right ends of the gauge. The Bancho icon displayed on the right follows the reduced display of the gauge and moves toward the Bancho icon displayed on the left. If the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the timing meter gauge is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR1, something other than the replay icon RP may appear. For example, the button icon By appearing, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a button operation effect may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, the button operation effect may be more easily started when the button icon appears than when the button icon does not appear. In addition, even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the timing meter gauge is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR1, there may be a case where nothing appears.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (17), the treasure box TR is erased, the icon RP of replay is displayed substantially at the center, and a turning effect is performed as to whether or not the pseudo connection is performed. This turning effect is continued until the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. Until then, the timing meter continues to display the gauge decrease.

  After that, when the time corresponding to the operation effective period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period, and the remaining amount of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0, in the decorative symbol storage display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the question mark in the icon RP is changed to the exclamation mark, and the text "I will continue" is displayed on the timing meter, and it is reported that the pseudo-link is to be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed by displaying the icon (replay icon RP) relating to the pseudo continuous effect before the decorative symbol of “special 1” is stopped and displayed. In some cases, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (19) following FIG. 68 (18), it is shown that the mini game is over and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (20), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (21), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (22), after the decorative symbol of “special 1” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, as shown in FIG. 69 (23), “special 1” The decorative design of is displayed in a stop, and the stop display (temporary stop display) is performed by the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 3-special 1-decoration 4". This "special 1" decorative pattern is a pattern in which the character of "Replay" is displayed on a substantially oval shape with a moon pattern, and the figure is different from the replay icon RP that appears as a result of the mini game. It is common in that it is the same, but the displayed characters are different.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (23), the decorative symbol of "special 1" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is enlarged and displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is performed. The appearance of this "special 1" decorative symbol is that it is an effect to be performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini game shown in FIG. 68 (13) to FIG. Can. If the mini game described above fails, the pseudo sequence may not be performed, or even if the mini game fails, the pseudo sequence may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (25), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (27), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into a super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other. At this time, the display of "Chance" notifying that the chance eye has appeared is erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (29), it is shown that the button preview effect is started. In this button preview effect, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed in place of the button image 136a in the default mode. Although this large button image 136aL is an image imitating the effect button 136, it is a display mode that is larger than the button image 136a in the default mode. In addition, the display mode of the deca-button image 136aL is displayed in the previous symbol variation display (that is, displayed in a different decoration symbol variation display), the display mode of the "special 2" decoration symbol shown in FIG. Both are different. As described above, in this presentation example, a plurality of button images are prepared as button images displayed in the button operation presentation, and a display pattern of the button image (the decoration pattern of "special 2") displayed as the decoration pattern It can be said that it has more display patterns. In addition, it may change to Deca button image 136aL, and the button image 136a of a default mode may be displayed. In this case, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the case where the large button image 136aL is displayed than in the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (30), as shown in FIG. 69 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 3”, “dec 3” and “dec 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69 (33), when the decorative symbol is in the default display mode, the display of the character of "Chance" for notifying that the chance eye is displayed is resumed. It does not have to be.

  In this effect example, when the decorative symbol of the third stop is "special 1" or "special 2", button operation presentation or pseudo-series is performed, but "special 1" or "special 2" When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop, a button operation effect or pseudo link may be performed. In addition, when the decorative pattern of “special 1” or “special 2” is included in two of the three decorative symbols, the button operation effect or the pseudo-link may be performed.

  Further, although this effect example has been described in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect performed by displaying the decorative symbol of “special 2” in one decorative symbol variation display, one decoration The present invention also includes the comparison between the decorative pattern of "special 2" displayed in the symbol variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect unrelated to the display of the decorative pattern of "special 2". It can be applied as a concept.

  FIG. 70 is a view showing the steps of another example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 70, although the button operation effect is performed when the three “special 2” decorative symbols are aligned, the button operation effect is not started without the three “special 2” decorative symbols being aligned. It is shown that the production is being performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 70 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 68 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (3), the first stop is performed, and “special 2” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is displayed stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, "special 2" is more easily stopped and displayed on the right symbol than when "special 2" is not displayed and stopped on the left symbol. It is also good. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to give up early that the button operation effect is started, and the expectation for the button operation effect is expected to be expected until the last moment when the third stop of the decorative symbol is performed. There is a possibility. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "special 2-decoration 4-special 2" is displayed. A temporary stop is displayed in combination, and three "special 2" are not aligned, and it is informed that the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variably displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 70 (6), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 3” is displayed on the right symbol. Is displayed in a stopped state, and a temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3", and then, as shown in FIG. 70 (7), "decoration 4" -Decoration 4-It is determined and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of the loss of 3 ". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 71 is a view showing the steps of another example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 72 is a view showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 72. In the effect example shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, the pseudo continuous effect is performed when three decoration symbols of "special 1" are aligned, and the button operation effect is performed when three decoration symbols of "special 2" are aligned. It is shown how it will be done. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 70 (1) to (4), so the description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (4), after the second stop is performed and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (5), the third stop is a line In the middle pattern, the decoration pattern of "special 2" is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which "special 2" is aligned.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (6), the decorative symbol starts fluctuating display again, and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button acceptance time meter MT along with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 is also started to vibrate and rotate the internal mechanism. In the case where the effect button 136 vibrates and the internal mechanism rotates, the effect button 136 is more likely to be a big hit than when the vibration and the internal mechanism does not rotate (the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed) ) Is configured. This button operation effect can be said to be an advance notice effect in which a chance appears in the symbol change display, or is a previewed notice effect to notice that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the symbol change display being held. It can be said that. In addition, it may change to vibration and rotation button image 136aV, and the button image 136a of the default display aspect mentioned above may be displayed. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be displayed in a blinking manner, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Moreover, it may change to vibration and rotation button image 136aV, and may be displayed by other display modes (for example, the display mode of a deca button etc.). At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, it is possible to display a button image corresponding to the state (at least one of vibration and rotation) of the effect button 136, and the display mode of "special 2" Can be said to have a different display. In this example of the effect, the effect button 136 may perform only the vibration and display a button image in which a state of vibrating corresponding to this is displayed, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136 , And a button image may be displayed in which the user is shown to rotate accordingly. In addition, the button image 136a of the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which neither the vibration nor the rotation operation is performed in the effect button 136. In addition, a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, in the state where the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a of the default display mode May be displayed. Also, on the contrary, although the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed, the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation operation is performed.

  Thereafter, after the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (7), as shown in FIG. 71 (8), the decorative symbol is displayed as default. While the variable display is performed as an aspect, a plurality of star patterns are displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern in the variable display in a large and small manner, and a display that affects the decorative pattern in the variable display It will be.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (9), after temporary stop due to swinging is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3-decorative 7-decorative 7”, FIG. 71 (10) It is displayed as shown in. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a chance eye and includes symbol variation displays that are likely to be a big hit in the symbol variation displays being held. It functions as a pre-reading notice to inform that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71 (10), it is foretold that it is a symbol variation display that there is a high possibility that the suspension of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 will be a big hit. In this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), when the game is temporarily stopped at the chance, the word "Chance" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance is eye Informing that pre-reading advance notice by.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (11), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (12) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (12), the characters "Mini game" and "Press well" are displayed, and a belt-like timing meter is displayed, and the approximate center of this timing meter is displayed. It is shown that the treasure box TR is arranged at. At this time, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this timing meter, the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started. In this mini game, it is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge displayed to be reduced as time passes by the center of the treasure box TR.

  FIG. 71 (13) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the timing meter's gauge is approximately at the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. To the display showing the appearance of the pattern BF of the face of the Bancho. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (16), after the character of “continue” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 71 (17), the character of “following” is added to the fluctuation icon h0, and the symbol fluctuation display is performed. It is notified in advance that a pseudo reunion will take place at. The fluctuation icon h0 to which the character "continuation" is added can also be said to be an example of a display mode of a symbol for effect for notifying that the pseudo connection is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of notification modes may be prepared for performing pseudo chaining.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (18), it is shown that the mini game is over and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (19) following FIG. 71 (18), the first stop is performed and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (20), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (21), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and once “special 1” is aligned. Stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (22), the copanda character appears, the character of "one more time" is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-linkage is performed. As described above, although the decorative symbol for notifying that the pseudo-link is performed has one kind of display mode (the decorative symbol of "special 1"), the symbol pattern for effect for notifying that the pseudo-linked is performed A plurality of display modes are prepared, and the number of variations is large.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (23), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (24), it is shown that the selection effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (24), the two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side, and the button acceptance time meter MT is shown below the boxes. Here, the box disposed on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box disposed on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Further, an operation key image 137p schematically representing the operation key unit 137 is displayed above the two boxes BXL and BXR in a state in which the left and right button parts are highlighted, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is performed. The word "Select" is displayed to prompt the user. In addition, the left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXR is displayed in a manner surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this presentation example, the cursor CSL is moved by operating the left button 137 c and the right button 137 d of the operation key unit 137 from the start of the operation effective period to the end of the operation effective period, When one of the boxes BXL and BXR is selected, an effect corresponding to the selected box is shown. The operation key image 137p is an image displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative symbol for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, no special symbol is prepared to announce that an operation effect will be performed. In addition, you may prepare separately the image which imitated the operation key unit 137 as a special symbol which announces that operation production is performed.

  Thereafter, after the operation acceptance period of the operation key unit 137 is started, if the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (25), as shown in FIG. 72 (26) The cursor CSL surrounding the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXR.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (27), when the operation acceptance period has elapsed and the remaining amount of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT disappears, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (28) is not selected. The left box BXL is erased, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and the replay icon RP appears in a manner with the question mark nearby. That is, the icon RP of this replay is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "special 1" in that a question mark is added. Thereby, it is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo link may be performed in the symbol variation display. In this rendering example, since the question mark is added to the icon RP of replay, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo ream is always performed. Therefore, there is a case where the pseudo link is not performed and it ends in a cassette. In addition, there may be a case where a question mark is not attached, and it may be displayed in a mode to guarantee that the pseudo link is always performed, or the pseudo link is always executed when the replay icon RP appears from the box. You may do so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (29), the character of “continuation” is added to the change icon h0, and the display of the change icon display area 280 is performed corresponding to the display of the question mark added to the replay icon RP. A question mark is also displayed at the upper side, and it is also informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-link will be made in the symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (30), it is shown that the selection effect is ended and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (31), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (32), the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (33), the enlarged display of the “special 1” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. At this time, the decorative pattern of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect being performed, or the decorative symbol of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (34), the character "one more time" is displayed below the "special 1" decorative symbol, and the question mark displayed above the variation icon display area 280 is displayed. It is changed to an exclamation mark, and it is informed that a pseudo link will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the decorative symbol of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed and the pseudo connection may be started after reaching the reach state. In addition, when a pseudo ream is not performed, after the decorative symbol of "special 1" scrolls out without stopping, reach production may be performed, and reach production is not performed, and the middle Any of the decorative symbols other than the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols or the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be derived.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (35), it is shown that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 3” display indicating the number of times the third variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (36), symbols of a plurality of stars are displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the variation icon h0, and a display as if affecting the variation icon h0 is performed. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (37) following FIG. 72 (36), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the safari. That is, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the advance notice. In addition, in the example of an effect shown in FIG. 72 (36)-FIG. 73 (37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed instead of the change icon h0.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (38), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (39), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "super heat" is performed to notify that the reach state has been reached, and it is suggested that the jackpot reliability in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of developing into super reach (punching reach). In the super reach state, the decorative design is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed where the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character face each other.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (41), button advance notice effects are started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (41), in place of the button image 136a, a protrusion button image 136aS is displayed that schematically represents an aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, This suggests that the button image 136a of the default display mode is more likely to be a big hit (i.e., the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed) than when displayed. In the projecting button image 136aS, a brow character is added to the front side, and a character "Press" is displayed below it, prompting operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, since the production button 136 is not equipped with a function to project upward, the state of the production button 136 is not compatible with the display mode of the projection button image 136aS, but the production button 136 may have a function capable of projecting upward, and in this case, the rendering button 136 may or may not project upward in accordance with the display of the projecting button image 136aS. . In the button advance notice effect, the button acceptance time meter MT is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (42), as shown in FIG. 73 (43), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (44), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (45), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after a temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 3”, “dec 3” and “dec 3”. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the display of "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In the first special view display device 212, stop display is performed in the form of the big hit symbol of the special view A.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 42 (4) to FIG. 6 (6), when the presentation button 136 is operated when the advance notice using the button acceptance time meter MT is not performed, the button acceptance time Although the meter MT is erased, for example, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the button acceptance time meter MT may be continuously displayed, and effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display, or may be an effect display other than the notice display.

  FIG. 74 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 74 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 68 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (3), “decoration 3” is displayed from the upper side of the display screen in the left symbol. It is shown that it scrolls in and moves downward. At this time, "decoration 3" is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol by high speed continues.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (4), the left symbol "decoration 3" moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, to the front side of the left symbol "decoration 3" A pattern of a plurality of stars is displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display as if to affect the "decoration 3" of the left pattern is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (5), after “decoration 3” of the left pattern is changed to the decoration symbol of “special 2”, the display is stopped. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the symbol is changed to a “special 2” symbol that schematically represents the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (6), it is shown that "decorative 1" scrolls in from the upper side of the display screen in the right symbol and moves downward. . At this time, "decorative 1" is moving at a low speed. In addition, in the middle design, the fluctuation display of the decoration design with high speed continues.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (7), the "symbol 1" of the right symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, to the front side of the "symbol 1" of the right symbol. A pattern of a plurality of stars is displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display as if to affect the "decoration 1" of the right pattern is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (8), after the "description 1" of the right symbol is changed to the decoration symbol of "special 2", the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (9), it is shown that “deco 6” is scrolled in from the upper side of the display screen in the middle symbol and is moving downward. At this time, "decoration 6" is moving at a low speed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (10), the "symbol 6" of the middle symbol moves at a very low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the "symbol 6" of the middle symbol. A pattern of a plurality of stars is displayed so as to overlap, and an effect display as if to affect the "decoration 6" of the middle pattern is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (11), after the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol is changed to the decoration symbol of “special 2”, the stop display is performed, and the temporary stop is performed in a mode in which three “special 2” are aligned Displayed (provisional stop display).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (12), the decorative symbol starts fluctuating display again and the button operation effect is started. The effects shown in FIG. 74 (12) are the same as those in FIG. 71 (6), so the description will be omitted.

  In this effect example, a state is shown in which the display is changed to the “special 2” decorative symbol simply imitating the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative symbol stops and the stop display is shown, but for example, the decorative symbol is stopped Just before doing, “special 2” may be interrupted in the order of arrangement of decorative symbols, and the “special 2” may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case where the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the order of "decorative 1"> "decorative 2"> ...> "decorative 10", "decorative 1" and "decorative 1" are displayed immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped. The decoration pattern of "special 2" may be inserted between the decorations 2 ", and the" special 2 "may stop and be displayed.

  FIG. 75 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 75 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 68 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (3), the first stop is performed, and the left symbol "Is displayed stopped. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (4), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (5), it is shown that the decorative symbol of "special 2" appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward. This "special 2" decorative pattern is a display mode of an oversized size that is larger than the normal display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (6), the left symbol and the right symbol are erased, and only the decorative symbol of "special 2", which is the middle symbol, is stop displayed (provisional stop display). It is shown. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode by the combination of three decorative symbols may be displayed in the stop display mode by one decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (7), a simplified button image 136aX imitating the decorative symbol of "special 2" is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT. That is, the simplified button image 136aX has the display portion of the button in common with the decorative symbol of “special 2” in the display mode, but the decorative symbol of “special 2” is displayed at least with the button acceptance time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different. In addition, the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX may be a mode in which the character display of "Chance" is omitted from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2". In this case, although the button shape is common, It can be said that the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX differs from the display mode of the "special 2" decorative symbol depending on the presence or absence. Although the decorative symbol is not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (7), for example, it may be displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (5), although the decorative symbol of "special 2" appears in the middle symbol and it is shown that it scrolls downward, but the button operation effect is performed. If not, for example, the decoration pattern of "special 2" is scrolled down without displaying the stop display, and then, as shown in FIG. 75 (6 '), the display of "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern After the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, the final display may be made by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 3-decoration 6-decorative 1".

  FIG. 76 is a view showing the steps of another example of the pseudo-series effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 76 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 68 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (3), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is displayed stopped. The decorative symbol of "special 1" in this effect example is added with characters notifying the number of times of pseudo ream. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (3), the decorative symbol of "special 1" The character “× 1” is added to indicate that there is a possibility that the first pseudo run may be performed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character of "x 1" is added to notify that the first pseudo link may be performed also for "special 1" in this right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and provisionally in a mode in which three "special 1" are aligned. Stop display. Here too, the character of "x 1" is added to notify that the first pseudo run may be performed for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (6), the decorative symbol in which three "specials 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of oversized size It is shown that it is being done. Thereby, it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode by the combination of three decorative symbols may be displayed in the stop display mode by one decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (7), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (8), the first stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. The decorative symbol of "special 1" shown in FIG. 76 (8) is also added with characters notifying the number of times of pseudo run, and it is notified that there is a possibility that the second pseudo run may be performed. The letter of is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (9), the second stop is performed, and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character "x 2" is added to notify that there is a possibility that the second pseudo run may be performed even for "special 1" in this right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (10), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and provisionally in a mode in which three "special 1" are aligned. Stop display. Here too, the character of "x 2" is added to notify that the second pseudo link may be performed also for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (11), the decorative symbol in which three "specials 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of oversized size It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is informed that the second pseudo link will be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (12), it is shown that the third variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 3” display indicating the number of times the third variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link is performed.

  As described above, in this example of rendering, the number of pseudo runs is displayed on the decoration symbol of "special 1", but the display mode of the decoration symbol itself of "special 1" is changed according to the number of pseudo runs. You may do so. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize the number of pseudo runs.

  FIG. 77 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 77 (1) and (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 68 (1) and (2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (3), the first stop is performed, and “special 2” is displayed on the left symbol. "Is displayed stopped. The decorative character of "special 2" in this presentation example is displayed in a mode in which a mini-head character BCH of a Bancho is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (4), the second stop is performed, and “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Unlike the decorative symbol of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the decorative symbol of "special 2" in the right symbol is displayed in a mode in which a panda mini character PND is added. In this effect example, even if the same "special 2" decorative symbol, since the added symbol is different, it may be possible to prevent misidentification that reach has occurred. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. On the decorative pattern of "special 2" in the middle symbol, a mini-character BCH having the same length as the decorative symbol of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the left symbol is displayed. As a result, the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which three "specials 2" are aligned, but in this effect example, the types of mini characters added to "special 2" stopped and displayed on the right symbol are different. . That is, in this example of the effect, even when three "special 2" are aligned, the display mode of at least one "special 2" is different from the display mode of the other "special 2", so the symbol is In some cases, it may be possible to prevent false recognition that a big hit has occurred. In this demonstration example, the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the right symbol and the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol are the same, but three "special 2" All of the display modes may be different. In addition, all types of mini characters added to three “special 2” s may be the same (for example, a mini-character BCH of a bancho is added to any of three “special 2” Also, in this case, the jackpot reliability is higher (the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized and displayed) than when the types of mini characters added to the three “special 2” are not all the same. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (6), a state in which the button operation effect is started is shown because three decorative symbols of "special 2" are aligned and stop-displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button acceptance time meter MT along with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Furthermore, a mini-character BCH of a guard length is added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, and in this respect, it can be said that the display pattern and the decorative pattern of the "special 2" described above are common. At this time, neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed, and the effect button 136 is in the normal state, but the vibration and the rotational operation of the internal mechanism may be started. The button operation effect is a notice effect on the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The mini character added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be a mini character (for example, a panda mini character PND, etc.) other than the mini character BCH having the set length. At this time, the reliability of the big hit may be made to differ depending on the type of the additionally displayed mini character, and, for example, the mini character BCH of the slot length is displayed than when the panda mini character PND is displayed. In the case, the jackpot may be made more reliable. In addition, as in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 74 (12), the mini character may not be additionally displayed, and when the mini character is additionally displayed, the big hit than when the mini character is not additionally displayed. The reliability of the symbol may be high (the jackpot symbol is likely to be determined and displayed). Also, in place of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a of the above-described default display mode may be displayed. At this time, a mini-character BCH of a game-length or a mini-character PND of a panda may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Thereafter, after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (7), as shown in FIG. 77 (8), the character “× 1” The stop display is performed in a mode in which three decorative symbols of “special 1” to which “is added” are aligned, and it is informed that the first pseudo link will be performed. In addition, the mini character mentioned above may be added and displayed on the decoration pattern of "special 1", In this case, at least one mini character of the decoration patterns of three "special 1" is another "special 1" You may make it prevent misidentification with respect to a big hit and a reach state by making it different from the mini-character of the decorative design of "".

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (9), the decorative symbol in which three "specials 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of oversized size It is shown that it is being done. Thereby, it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (10), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol has been started by the pseudo-link.

  FIG. 78 is a view showing the steps of another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 78 (1)-the same figure (7) is the same as that of FIG. 68 (1)-the same figure (7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (7) after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 78 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button The image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second reserved icon h12, and a display is performed to affect these. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, "decoration 4" is scrolled in from the upper side of the display screen, and it is shown that it is moving toward the stop position of the middle pattern due to low speed fluctuation.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (9), a state is shown in which the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button preview display mode. That is, the display mode of the button preview is a display mode of the preview notice. The display mode of this button preview is different from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2" in that the character "Chance" is not displayed and an animation prompting button operation is displayed. . The middle symbol continues to change at a low speed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (10), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and then the decoration is performed as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "losing 3-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, a display of “x” indicating that there is a loss is performed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In addition, in the first special view display device 212, the stop display is performed with "special view I" which is a lost symbol. The second hold icon h12 changed to the button image has not changed yet.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (12), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special view display device 212 The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol fluctuation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The second hold icon h12, which was the display mode of the button preview, is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the button preview continues. Be done.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (13), as shown in FIG. 78 (14), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the Sabohani from the display mode of the button advance notice. It is changed to an aspect. It is suggested that this is a symbol variation display with high possibility of becoming a big hit the symbol variation display reserved at the first.

  FIG. 79A is a view showing another example of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 79B is a simulation performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure shown about the other example of a row production.

  FIGS. 79 (A1) to (A2) show how the contents of the button operation effect are suggested by the decorative symbol of “special 2”. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (A1), a state is shown in which the decorative symbol of “special 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol, respectively. In this effect example, the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is different from the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed in the left and right symbols, and the effect button 136 is simulated. It is assumed that the And in this "special 2" of the middle symbol, the character "hold change" is displayed on the upper surface, and by the effect button 136 being operated in the button operation effect, the hold icon (or the change icon) It is notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, it can be said that the decoration symbol of "special 2" of the middle symbol is a dedicated display mode in which it is notified that change notification of the holding icon due to the button holding is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (A2), it is shown that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the decorative symbol in which three "specials 2" are aligned, and instead, the button image 136a represented in the extra large size is displayed It is shown that it is done. The character "hold change" is displayed on the upper surface of the button image 136a, and it is notified that change preview of the hold icon due to the button hold is being performed. The button image 136a has the same display mode as the "special 2" of the dedicated display mode, but differs in that an animation promoting button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that a part of the display mode is common to the button image 136a shown in FIG. 79 (A2) and the decorative symbol of “special 2” of the dedicated display mode shown in FIG. 79 (A1). On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold has the characters “Push” displayed on its upper surface, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is erased, and the hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode changes to another display mode (for example, a display mode of Sabohani, a default display mode, etc.) .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (B), a pseudo-announced notice icon acquired and stocked in a mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The pseudo-reminder notice icon is a notice icon displayed in a manner in which the character of "pse-cho-rench" is added to the character of the lady, and may be displayed by both the prefetch notice and the notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the pre-reading advance notice and the symbol variation display. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (B), a state is shown in which three decorative symbols of “special 1” are aligned to generate a pseudo-link. In FIG. 79 (B), there is no relation between the pseudo-series notice icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen and the display of the mode in which three decoration symbols of “special 1” are aligned, Both may be related. Here, the display mode differs between the display mode of the pseudo-announced notice icon and the display mode of the decorative symbol of "special 1", and the player can clearly distinguish the notice icon from the decorative pattern. There is.

  In the embodiments described above, the main display device having a large screen size and one or more sub display devices having a screen size smaller than the main display device may be provided. In this case, For example, a symbol displayed on a sub-display device whose screen size is smaller than that of the main display device than a symbol (decorative symbol, button image, various icons, characters, etc.) displayed on the main display device whose screen size is large. You may make it display the larger one.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Next, a game console according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  In FIG. 80, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a general view display device 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a general view hold lamp 216 and a fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has been started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when frame in of timer notice display TM1 is started, but after frame in of timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 80 (3) After that, the countdown may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in (3) to (7) in FIG. 80, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 80 (8), the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol with the character of Tonosama in the middle symbol is moved at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 80 (11), after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown in FIG. Thus, a cut-in display is performed, which consists of the character of the lord and the "continuation" character display. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit. In addition, there may be a frame out in the lower part without displaying the pseudo run symbol, and the pseudo run will not be started when the pseudo run symbol is in the lower frame, the decoration symbol of the loss is just as it is The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach effect may be started in the reach state. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo link will be started after the countdown is completed by the timer advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 80 (3a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 80 (2). Note that, in this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started.

  After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 80 (10a) to FIG. (11a), the first pseudo run is performed in the above-described manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. FIG. 80 (10a), FIG. (11a) and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 80 (10), FIG. (11) and FIG. (14), respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively, as shown in FIG. 80 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 80 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" for urging attention to the notice is displayed. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the right pattern changes from "deco 6" to "deco 7". Note that the right pattern may be left unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (16a) to FIG. (17a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As such, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 80 (3 a) to FIG. 80 (17 a) gives notice that the second pseudo run is started. In addition, it can be said that the start of the second pseudo-run is also foreshadowed that the start of the first pseudo-run, that is, in this example of the effect, by the timer notice effect, It can be said that the first and second pseudo-announcements have been announced. In the timer advance notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo run is notified, but the occurrence of notices and other kinds of advance notices may be made.

  FIG. 80 (7b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 80 (6). FIGS. 80 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 80 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (7b), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (8b-1), a face image of a character of the toemen character with a balloon serif "Rake" in place of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, attention may be drawn to the notice by the display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, as a means to which the countdown in timer advance production is completed and to draw attention to a notice, it may carry out not only by a display but by a sound or a lamp, and performs combining two or more of a display, a sound, and a lamp You may do so.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (9b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (10 b), movement display of the pseudo-connected symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the character of the lord is erased, as shown in FIG. 80 (11 b). After the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (12), a cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of "tendon" and the character display of "CONTINUED".

  In this example of rendering, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding rendering (pseudo chain) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00" However, there may be a case where the effect corresponding to this is not performed.

In addition, while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer advance display TM1, another advance notice may be performed. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.
FIG. 81 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 81 (a1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 80 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 81 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a2), display is performed in which the navigation character YM faces the variation icon h0 and points the sword. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter shown in FIG. 81 (a5) Thus, the notice display in which the character of "Heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. The preview notice may be displayed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 81 (a7), a reach state by “decoration 7” occurs. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect for giving notice that advance notice will be made.

  FIG. 81 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance announcement effect starts. In the timer advance notice effect in this production example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started to be "30:00", that is, an advance notice effect that occurs 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It is suggested to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 81 (b1), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown time may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the countdown time may be configured. The shorter the time, the higher the jackpot reliability may be, or the higher the jackpot reliability may be, regardless of the countdown time.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative symbol, the appearance of reach effect by “decoration 7” is started. It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 81 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and leftward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 is displayed leaving the fluctuation icon h0. While the frame is out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  Thereafter, FIG. 81 (b4) shows that the state has been developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b4), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. Also during this time, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 81 (b6), on the timer notice display TM1, the notice is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the change display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

  FIG. 81 (b4'-2) shows another example of effect following FIG. 81 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b4'-2), after the animation display of the duel scene is started, it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02: 37". There is. In other words, it shows that about 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance presentation is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer advance effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (b5 '), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 81 (b6'), the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the advance notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b7 '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of "heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice display (or presentation) made as a result of counting down in the timer announcement production is being performed during execution of the button presentation.

  Although the above-mentioned example of presentation explained the example in which change display of the display mode of fluctuation icon h0 is performed as the effect which is done as a result which is counted down in timer announcement production, but it is not limited to this, other production may be done For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b7 ′ ′), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give notice.

  FIG. 81 (b6 ′ ′ ′) shows another example of effect following FIG. 81 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 81 (b6 ′ ′ ′), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character display of "is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b6 ′ ′ ′-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to perform advance notice, and the animation display of the duel scene is trusted by the big hit It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the character of the princess is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and a character of "jump" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display that a big hit is determined. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that two or more notice displays are being performed as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 81 (c1) to FIG. 81 (c2) show that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and instead of the timer display, the attention of the notice is promoted. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example of production, in addition to the production button 136 as the operation means for production, production lever 136V is provided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the lever effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (c3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in the example of the effect, as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect, the state in which the lever effect starts is shown, but instead of the lever effect, the above-described button effect may be performed.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of types of button effects according to the degree of expectation to the big hit (for example, a button image 136a of a default mode, a button image 136a different in color from the default mode (for example, red, gold, etc.) , A default mode, such as a letter display (for example, "super heat" or "expected size") or a button image 136a to which a character is added, or a button image 136a different in size from the default mode (for example, deca button effect or mini button Effect), when there are more button images 136a displayed (for example, three button images 136a are displayed than the default mode), the same number of operations (for example, three times) as the number of button images 136a are performed You may make it do the operation (for example, 1 time, 2 times, 4 times ...) different from the number of button images 136a. Further, as the response display according to the operation of the effect button 136, the number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or the number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed. etc).

In the effect example shown in FIG. 81 (d1) to FIG. 81 (d4), as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, the appearance movable body is shown as operating. As shown in FIG. 81 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is reached with "decoration 7", and it is shown that a reach effect is being performed. The first UI unit 280 leaves the variation icon h0 and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. In addition, a timer announcement effect is also performed, and it is shown that the timer display on the timer announcement display TM1 is “00:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (d1). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (d2), in the timer advance notice display TM1, in place of the timer display, characters of “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (d3), the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this example of rendering, as a result of counting down in the timer advance rendering, the situation is shown that the first large-screen behavior character Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character Gd as the effect movable body operate. The object 224E or the one thousand box character 224H may operate, and at least two of the first large movement character Ga to the fourth large movement behavior Gd, the family crest 224E, and the one thousand box character 224H may be operated. May be
FIG. 82 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (1), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "overlay" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time addition is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-series effect, an advance notice of a chance increase, an advance notice such as a advance notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer advance effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 82 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (4), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. In addition, it is not necessary to perform count-up animation display. Further, instead of the display of the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 82 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM is difficult to visually recognize. After the effect image shown in FIG. 82 (4a) is displayed, the display of the count-up animation shown in FIG. 82 (4) may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time on the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the completion of the timer addition effect is elapsed), the first pseudo link effect is performed. Is started, and the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), and it is informed that the pseudo run is to be performed.

  In this production example, when the timer display effect is performed and the time display is performed on the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the time addition is not performed. There may not be a change, and it may be hard to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 82 (1b) to (6b) show that the timer addition effect by the notice of conversation is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1 b), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1b), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (1 b), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM 1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1b), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Also, in FIG. 82 (1b), the conversational announcement is started, and the conversation image CI1 of the guests is displayed along with the character of the characters "CANCEL". Note that the timing at which the timer announcement effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation announcement is started, or the conversation announcement may be started after the timer announcement effect is started, or the conversation announcement is After being started, the timer announcement effect may be started. In addition, a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2b), the speech notice is updated, and the speech image CI1 of the lady is reduced and displayed, and moves downward to the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 is displayed with a text display of "10 seconds added" indicating the time to be added. Thus, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer advance display TM. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in timer advance production is performed continuously. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle is considered to be more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the insulting conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (4b), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 82 (6b), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM is It is updated to "15:00" and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this effect example, the count-up animation display is ended after the end of conversation announcement, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (4b′-1) to FIG. 82 (4b′-2), The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Also, the timing at which the conversation advance notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 82 (1 c) to FIG. 82 (6 c) show another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation advance notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1c), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1c), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (1c), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1c), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Also, in FIG. 82 (1c), the conversational announcement is started, and the conversation image CI1 of the guests is displayed along with the character of the greetings, with the character display of "chance" being displayed. A part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lady is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the eyelid on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character of. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even when the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation announcement, the countdown by the timer announcement effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-2). FIG. 82 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation effective period, and the length according to the time when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has elapsed It is decreasing. Thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified of that. Ru. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is changed to the character display of "10 seconds addition" showing the time for being added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. When the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period, the time addition in the timer display may not be performed. Also, if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may disappear once, and then it may be changed to the character display of "10 seconds on top". The display of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to the character display of “10 seconds on top” without displaying the disappearance of the gauge. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display of “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (4c), an effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the end of the conversation notice, or the conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The end timing of the may be the same as the end timing of the count-up animation display.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 82 (6c), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to “09: 85” after 10 seconds have been added to the time in the timer display.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2 c-2) to FIG. (2 c-4), the display of the countdown in the timer advance presentation effect is continuously performed even in the operation valid period, for example After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-3 '), the update display of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is not performed in the operation effective period. (The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept "06:00"), and internally clocked, and at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4 '), The counting result is reflected on the timer display of timer notice display TM1 (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4 ′)), and the countdown update table The may be resumed.

Also, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-3 ′ ′), the countdown update in the timer announcement effect is updated in the operation effective period. Without performing display (with the timer display in timer notice display TM1 remaining "06:00"), clocking is performed internally, and as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4 ′ ′), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, as shown in FIG. 82 (3c ′ ′), “10 seconds is added” which indicates the time for which the display of the conversation image CI2 of the user is added from the operation promotion notification image without reflecting the time measurement result inside. At the timing changed to the character display, reflect the internal clocking result (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3c ′ ′)) on the timer display of the timer advance display TM1. The countdown update display may be resumed.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  FIGS. 83 (1d) to (2d) show other effect examples of FIGS. 82 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 83 (1 d), the character display displayed in the speaker's conversation image CI 1 is “focus on timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becoming "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lady in FIG. 83 (1d).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (2 d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned conversational image CI2 is displayed. As described above, it may be notified that the timer display changes after attention is paid to the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 83 (1e) shows another example of effect in FIG. 83 (1d). In FIG. 83 (1e), the timer display is “00” by performing scroll display SC1 which scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1 instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord. It may be made to pay attention to the effect performed as a result of becoming “00:00”. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 83 (1e), the characters “focus on the timer advance notice” are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 83 (1f) to (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, in which the countdown of the added time is performed by the display different from the timer notice display TM1. It shows. FIG. 83 (1 f) shows an example of effect following FIG. 82 (3), and after notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM is performed, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed on the display screen below the timer notice display TM1. The frame in from the right is shown. In the additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The superimposition timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlap state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 83 (2f) shows that the animation of the frame in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted after the animation of the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 is completed, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 The animation of may be completed, or the timing at which the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. In FIG. 83 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is disposed below the timer advance notice display TM1. However, the timer advance notice display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped and disposed, for example, As shown in FIG. 83 (2f '), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and as shown in FIG. 83 (2f ′ ′), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 83 (2f) to (4f), the countdown on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00" is reached. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (5f), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen is shown. . Here, after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, the animation of the frame out of the timer notice display TM1 may start, or the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the animation of the frame-out of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. In the example of effect shown in FIG. 83 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (5f '), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the word "attention" to urge attention to the notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (6f), there may be a case where a pseudo run symbol appears in the middle symbol and a pseudo run is performed in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. This suggests that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo run symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo run symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed by displaying on the additional timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1. ing. Note that the notification of the added time may be notification of a total value of a plurality of timer notices, for example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time You may display the value which added 7 seconds. Here, the additional timer display TM2 may be a timer notice that is newly displayed along with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

  FIGS. 83 (3fa) to (8fa) show still another example of the timer addition effect, wherein the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown of the timer display in the addition timer display TM2 are performed simultaneously. It shows the situation. FIG. 83 (3fa) is an example of effect following FIG. 83 (2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is shown how to start the That is, in this presentation example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. Note that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds, in which the additional timer display TM2 is performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 83 (3fa), “15:00” may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, the countdown is continued in the manner as shown in FIG. 83 (3f) to FIG. (6f), and in FIG. 83 (7fa), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol and it is informed that the pseudo run is performed. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again and the first pseudo run is being performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (8 fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM 2 is completed, and the word “focus” is displayed instead of the timer display to prompt attention to the notice. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the second pseudo run is started. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 83 (9fa '), the symbol CC of the pine as a chance symbol may be displayed in a stopped state in the middle symbol, and a notice may be made. In addition, the pseudo connected effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. As described above, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance effect, it may be suggested to be an advance effect or a big hit other than the pseudo ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, this effect example indicates that the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (1), a state is shown where variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 2, and the first icon h11 and the second icon h12 are displayed, and the second number of displays is displayed. , “2” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice symbol MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a pre-reading notice, and gives a notice that the addition of time is performed in the timer notice effect. In addition, it may be notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be displayed after the left pattern is stopped, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 on the clock is displayed. In addition, the display timing of the notice icon stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed accompanying the decorative pattern, and temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, various kinds of navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be carried out at any timing such as advance notice or hold on the symbol variation display by the effect or advance notice of the effect by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows that the table on which the navigation character YM stands up rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the advance notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (4), it is shown that the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol is stopped. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in a reduced size, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the stock notice icon MI1 of the clock is shown. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a combination of decorative symbols of “the decoration 4 – the decoration 1 – the decoration 7”. It is shown that the display is finalized by. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (6), a state is shown in which the symbol change display is performed by digesting one hold of the special view 1. Further, the timer advance notice effect is also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (eg, navigation character YM, etc.) overlapping with the timer advance notice only only during execution of a certain effect (eg, stock effect of the advance notice icon, etc.). Also, conversely, there may be an effect display that causes the timer notice to overlap only while a certain effect is being performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (7), the effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, and it is notified that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is used. . Note that "07: 31" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Although the effect remains displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it pops out from the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display of the count-up animation is started, or the display of the count-up animation may be performed after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased. It may be started or, after the display of the count-up animation is started, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (10), the advance notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.
FIG. 85 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 85 (A1) to FIG. 85 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A3), a balloon in which the character of "superimposed" is displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time display is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the character display of "superimposition" is performed, the addition of the time of the timer display may not be performed in some cases, and another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3a-1), after changing to the timer display and displaying the letter “attention” to promote attention to the notice, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3a-2) Alternatively, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” may be displayed on the balloon to indicate the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed for the "attention" is not the advance notice but for 10 seconds. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters "still" that the timer advance presentation is continued instead of the timer display, the display of the timer advance display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to a display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" on the timer notice display TM1, the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10 indicating the time to be superimposed on the balloon is displayed. "Seconds" may be displayed. After the display shown in FIG. 85 (A3) is performed, the display as shown in FIG. 85 (A3 b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (A4), the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A4), in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed and becoming "00:00", the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol Is shown. In addition, the timing when the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the timer display is updated, the pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 85 (B1) to FIG. 85 (B5) show an example of effect in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1), a balloon in which the characters “subtract” are displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and time subtraction is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is informed that the time for which the timer advance presentation effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display indicates “05: 89”. Moreover, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction", and is "-3 seconds" which indicates the time to be shortened. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed becomes shorter than the time originally displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) is performed in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortening animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. In addition, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and the time in the timer display is reduced by 3 seconds (subtracted) ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed due to the effect of shortening the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped while the timer shortening effect is being performed, or the display of the countdown may be in progress.

  Thereafter, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 85 (B5), instead of the timer display, the word “attention” is displayed to prompt attention to the notice. The notice display is performed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 85 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it may be notified that the pseudo run is started. Note that the timing at which the character of "attention" in the timer advance notice display TM1 starts being displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character of "attention" After the display starts, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped, the word "notice" May start displaying. It should be noted that the appearance rate of the contents of the effect to be performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or when the timer display effect changes, for example, while the timer notification effect is being executed If there is no change in the display, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and it is easy to be notified of the pseudo run, but if the timer display changes during execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-series notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 85 (C1) to FIG. 85 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes in the timer advance notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (C1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (C1), a balloon in which the characters “Timer notice level UP” are displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the reliability of the big hit for the timer notice display TM1 is It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes, for example, from white to red, and it is informed that the big hit reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display being counted down, it is informed that a notice with a very high reliability may be given as a notice to be performed.

  The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 85 are examples of effects in which the countdown of the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted and resumed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (D1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and "06: 99" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D1), a balloon in which the character of "stop" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the countdown of timer display is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the display of the balloon with the text “stop” starts may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, or the display of the balloon with the text “stop” started. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the balloon may be started to be displayed with the word “stop”.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D2), it is shown that the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo run is to be performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 85 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is suspended, and the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 remains "06: 99".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again, and it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is performed. It is done. In addition, "x 2" which shows that the fluctuation display of the 2nd decoration symbol by pseudo | simulation run is performed is displayed under the 2nd decoration symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (D3), a balloon in which the characters "resume" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (D4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is indicated that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while the predetermined effect such as pseudo ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect is completed. It is done.

  Note that, as an example of the change of the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1, the number of the timer notices TM1 may be changed (increased or decreased) more than before the change. For example, when one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to two or more when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, and conversely, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased. If three advance notice displays TM1 are displayed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by timer notice display TM1 may be divided and displayed by timer notice display TM1 originally displayed, or originally The timer notice display TM1 displayed may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer notice notice TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10) The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). In addition, when the number of timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if it is reduced to one, the timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds become one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 changed due to increase, decrease, etc., the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or may be started at different timings.

  FIG. 86 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer advance presentation effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 86, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the illustration of the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character objects 224Gd and the one-hundred box character article 224H is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 86 (A1) to FIG. 86 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (A1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is reported.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the count up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In the example of the effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 86 (B1) to FIG. 86 (B7) show another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 86 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 54” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 86 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character of "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count up animation display is started in the timer notice display TM1. The effect is that the time is added. At least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts. The sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol display After being positioned on the substantially central front side of the device 208, the count-up animation display may be started, or it may be counted up before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the substantially central front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (B4) to FIG. 86 (B5), in the sub display device 208S, t is performed for the additional time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by one second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by one second. . In this example of presentation, while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without interruption.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is "0 seconds", the time of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to identify, but is displayed in a distinguishable manner. It is also good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” which indicates that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 86 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (B7), the timer display is "14:23". After that, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, display of the fluctuation icon h0 and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 86 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S starts to descend. Alternatively, after the sub display device 208S starts to descend, the countdown of the timer display may resume. Also, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be resumed, or after the countdown of the timer display is resumed, the display of “Restart” may be started on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub display 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown resumes.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 86 (C1) to FIG. 86 (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (C1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is reported. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the display of the suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S by the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the suction is displayed from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how you are doing is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (C2), the sub-display device 208S moves upward, causing part of the display area of the sub-display device 208S to overlap with part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character of "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is extended toward the timer advance notice display TM1 and displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a look that is surprised by the appearance.

  In FIG. 86 (C3), it is shown that the display of the suction animation is continued. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 by the suction animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to be the sub-display 208S. And the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the count-up animation described above is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that it is going to the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. While the navigation character YM sees the suction animation and performs an astonishing animation (animation accompanying the suction animation) when the suction animation is being displayed, it is not necessary to particularly perform the animation. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 86 (C6), the timer In the advance notice display TM1, it is shown that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice may be performed only by one of the decorative symbol display devices.
FIG. 87 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 87 (A1) to FIG. 87 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the example of effects shown in FIG. 87 (A1) to FIG. (A4), although it is described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), to facilitate the explanation A part of the 1-large-scale behavior character 224GA to the 4th-large-size behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (A2), the second large-screen behavior part 224Gb and the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd operate to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time display is performed on the timer display in the timer advance display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example, the second large-area behavior part 224Gb and the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd out of the first large-area behavior part 224Gd to the fourth large-area behavior part 224Gd operate on the timer display 10. It is reported that the second addition is performed, but the time to be added may be different depending on the number of acting items among the first large behavior character objects 224 Ga to the fourth large behavior character objects 224 Gd, for example, When all of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this example, the second large-screen behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate only once to notify that the timer display is performed for 10 seconds, but the operation is The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times, for example, when the second large-scale behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-size behavior character 224 Gd are operated three times, the timer display may be performed for 30 seconds. May be

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 87 (B1) to (B4) show examples of timer-added effects using the family crest item 224E. In the example of effects shown in FIGS. 87 (B1) to (B4), the effects are described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Description will be made with the illustration of 224 Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224 Gd and the one thousand box character article 224 H omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (B2), the family crest 224E operates and ascends to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper and lower portions at that position Operate in the direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the overlapped family crest item 224E. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, whereby timer notice display TM1 is performed. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be performed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (B3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example of rendering, the family crest item 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is to be performed for 10 seconds, but even if the time to be added differs depending on the number of operations. For example, if the family crest 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 87 (C1) to FIG. 87 (C6) show another example of the timer-added effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 87 (C1) to FIG. (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first held icon h11 is held in the held display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and “1” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the second number-of-retentions display disposed in the upper right corner of the display area. A first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first UI unit 280 displays a variation icon h0 and a navigation character YM.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effect is performed, and countdown of timer display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (C1), “05:00” is displayed as the timer display, and in this example, when the timer display is “05:00”, the countdown is interrupted and “05:00” is displayed. The display is maintained. Note that the countdown may be performed continuously without interrupting the countdown.

  In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters of "10 seconds on top" are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 87 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is less visible than in the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second It is displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (C5), the display of “15:00” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, After the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Ru. In addition, the countdown of a timer display in the state (For example, the state shown, for example, FIG. 87 (C4)) where the display of "15:00" was displayed straddling the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N. May be resumed. It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when the timer display is displayed across multiple decorative symbol display devices than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of a jackpot may be the same, and may be configured to be less likely to be a jackpot.
FIG. 88 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 88 (A1) to FIG. 88 (A4) show another example of the timer-added effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (A1) to FIG. (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 88 (A1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effects are respectively started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this example of effect, two timer announcement effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is regarded as a first timer notice effect, and the timer notification effect performed by the third decoration symbol display device 208N is regarded as a second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 88 (A1), "05: 89" is displayed as the timer display in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15: 89" is displayed as the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is done.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 88 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each of 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Ru. At this time, the timer display countdown is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, a timer display of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 88 (A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device According to the movement of 208N, the scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in accordance with the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N corresponds to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display "20:00" to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a first decorative symbol display device 208L and a third decoration When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, it is shown in FIG. 88 (A3). As shown, the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 88 (A3)). Here, the probability of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this example, the first display of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first 2) It is more likely to be a big hit than being divided and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the likelihood of becoming a big hit may be the same or it may be difficult to be a big hit).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 88 (B1) to FIG. 88 (B3) show an example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, although the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A is applied to the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (B1) to FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 88 (B1) to FIG. Description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05:71” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 88 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” in the simple display is displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 88 (B1), all of the first decorative symbol and the variation icon h0 and part of the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11 and the timer notice display TM1 are turned by the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I. It overlaps with the rotation area and is considered to be difficult to view.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the characters "+10" are displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the character "+10" is performed so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to perform display in which a sense of unity is given by the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example of effect, the font of the number displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the number displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is decreased, as shown in FIG. 88 (B3), the operation is stopped in the initial attitude. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to view than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this effect example, 10 seconds are subsequently added to the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 88 (C1) to FIG. 88 (C5) show other examples of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (C1) to FIG. 88 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 88 (B1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “06: 87” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 88 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. Note that the whole of the variation icon h0 and a part of the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped on the POV display 224I, and it is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a fixed rotation speed and is set to a fixed rotation, as shown in FIG. Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown continues. Also, at this time, it is shown that the time displayed on the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround the family crest 224E, which causes the timer display to display 10 seconds It is informed that the addition of

  Thereafter, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 88 (C3) displays an effect that the timer display bursts, and then, as shown in FIG. 88 (C4), the timer display after being added is “15:00”. Is displayed. In the example of the effect, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be performed continuously.

  Thereafter, the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and thereafter, the countdown is resumed. The countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, if the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easier to be a big hit May be the same or may not be a big hit.

In addition, in the timer advance presentation described so far, when the timer display is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time before change may change, and after change, the time of change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after the countdown starts, If you count down 10 seconds and display "attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). In addition, the indication of the countdown may coincide with the time for internally counting down.
FIG. 89 shows, in stages, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 89, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in the example of the effect, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 89 (1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (25). In FIG. 89 (1), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (2) Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the progress of the current reach production is summarized Informing Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 89 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state of development to the super reach shown in FIG. 89 (1) is started. The display may be started at the specified timing, may be started when the reach state is reached, may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (3), it is shown that the character SAH of the sabo hani starts moving from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side at the timing when the sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. It can be said that this boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice by chance up character display is given. It is reported that Note that the timing at which the display of the BOY character BOY starts may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the SABOHANI character SBH is started, or after the display of the BOY character BOY starts, the balloon of the SBOH character SBH is displayed. The character BOY may be displayed, or the character BOY of the boui may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani is started. It should be noted that while the advance notice based on the display of the character BOY of the Boy is given, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the SABOHANI character SBH approaches a check point. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged, or only the portion of the relevant check point may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (8), when the character SBH of SaboHani reaches the second check point CP2, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT It is displayed, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (10), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the second check point CP2 until the button operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period has elapsed, but may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 89 (11), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (12) It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 89 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed . In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the tombstone is a cut-in image of a special display mode in which it is shown surrounded by a golden frame and wearing a sunglasses and running a large bike while turning a cigar. It reports that the credibility of the big hit is dramatically high. In place of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 89 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than that of the cut-in image CI3 is displayed. May be The cut-in image CI1 of this lady-like state shown in FIG. 89 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, and the effect button 136 is effective in operation. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within a period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 89 (13) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button It may be displayed whenever the operation effective period elapses without the operation 136 and may not be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (14), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It is informed that a notice has been made by the display of an image. In addition, the timing when the display start of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord will be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani, or the character of the sabothani after the display of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord A balloon of SBH may be displayed, or a cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that while the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second check point CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not be stopped. Further, in this presentation example, the timing at which the sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 may be the same as the timing at which the button presentation is started, and the sabohani character SBH may be used as the second check point CP2. After reaching the button effect may be started, or after the button effect is started, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2.

  In the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the statue is not displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect button is also operated when the effect button 136 is not operated. In the same manner as when the 136 is operated, it may be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or the advance notice of the chance up Only a part of the occurrence may be informed (for example, the balloon may not be displayed, and only the letters "UP" may be displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (15), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (16), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (17), when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (18) displays the lever image 136Va and In the vicinity of the character SBH, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed, and it is informed that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  It should be noted that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during display of the balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, but may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT, and vice versa. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all of the m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and while the chance up meter CMT is displaying, a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped. It is also good.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (20), when the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation effective period has elapsed.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 89 (21), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 89 (23), the first large-screen behavior part 224 Ga to the fourth are displayed. The large-scale behavior character object 224Gd and the one-handed box character object 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, the effects (the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-area behavior product 224Gd and the one-hundred box property 224H are activated when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 89 (23) is operated, and light emission of the light guide plate IL) The effect produced when the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 17 (40) are the same, but may be different. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative symbols The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Although the chance up meter CMT is also faded in with the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the fade in of the animation display of the due battle scene is completed. . The operations of FIG. 89 (23) to FIG. 24 (24) are performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 17 (38) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SAH of the sabothani reaches the final point GP, and the placard indicates the letter “V” indicating that the jackpot will be made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (26), the main character of the main character wins over the sword player of the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 88 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. In addition, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, Sabohani characters SBH and placards) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the production | presentation using the chance up meter CMT mentioned above, there may be a case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed and a case where it is not displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may not be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance increase appearing regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, the position of the check point may move or the check point may be erased while the presentation in the chance up meter CMT is being performed.

  In addition, during execution of the rendering in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past) or indicates the position ahead (pointing to the future) Position).

  In addition, the effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when an effect is performed at a position indicated by a check point, an effect such as increasing the chance may be performed. Also, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a check point, and an effect may be performed such that the chance is raised when fighting against the ally character and winning.

  Further, as an effect of chance increase (for example, rank increase bonus, probability change promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.) during the execution of the big hit game, an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption. Further, although the chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, the history of the timing of the check point and the occurrence of the effect of the chance up before the power failure may be hidden.

In addition, the effect displayed after the count display of the count display in the timer advance effect becomes 0 may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT, or may be performed.
FIG. 90 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 90 (3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 89 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 89 (3) is performed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (4a), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, but no advance notice is given. That is, it is shown that the advance of the chance increase is not performed even if the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 90 (5a) to FIG. 90 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first check point It passes CP1 as it is, and the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. As a result, in the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has ended without failure. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not performed at the first check point CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (7a ′), the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased. Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (7a ′ ′), in place of the letter “UP” displayed at the first check point CP1, the display of “x” indicating that no advance of chance increase has been made. May be performed. In addition, even if the advance notice of the chance up is not actually performed, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance up is performed after the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, marking at the check point or “UP”. The character of may be displayed. For example, once marking at the check point or non-display of the character of "UP", the character of marking or "UP" may be displayed, Sabohan's character SBH may return to the check point to give a notice of chance improvement, and may display the marking and the character of "UP". Further, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or to the middle is performed, and then, when the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, an effect of chance increase is performed, and the character of marking or "UP" May be displayed.

  FIG. 90 (17b) is another example of effect following FIG. 89 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 89 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a display of a question mark, and when the SBOH character SBH reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance up is not started It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 90 (17b) to FIG. 90 (20b), the character SBH of Sabohani is the third check point. It passes CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. In FIG. 90 (19b), it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the player can now accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 90 (20b), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (21b) within the operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (22b) Along with the line, "Is it removed ...", it is displayed that the game won't be won. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with the word "progress", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed.

  After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tonosama character shown in FIG. 90 (23 b), as shown in FIG. 90 (24 b), an effect that the panda character appears as a helper in Kagoshima reach Is started. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and travels toward the start point SP.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (25 b) to FIG. (29 b), while the sabo hani character SBH is heading toward the start point SP, the display for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the sabo hani character SBH Do. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (26b) to FIG. (27b), for example, a part of the chance up meter CMT after change appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears due to the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. As shown in FIGS. 90 (28b) to (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (29b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is again located at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the letter "UP" is not displayed) It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (30 b) shows a state where it has developed into an SP Ken-Age reach. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 90 (30b), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-Awa reach in that the hero of the main character and the enemy Kana of the enemy will face each other, but follows the panda as a helper of the hero. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (30 b), the copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is supported by the timing at which the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4. An announcement is made to show that the situation is being reported, and it reports that the credibility of the SP Ken-Atsu reach for the big hit has been dramatically increased. It can be said that this copanda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The copanda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach, or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (31 b), a balloon with the word “Cance-up copanda cheering party” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH. It is reported that it was. In addition, the timing when the display start of the copanda cheering party KPD may be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or after the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is started, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is It may be displayed, or the copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that, while the advance notice by the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is being performed, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, the display of "Collaboration Killing" to the effect that chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 90 (33b), the lever image 136Va is displayed together with the display of "One shot" Be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Here, the lever effect which is a chance up effect may not be performed, and a button effect which is an effect of operating the effect button 136 may be performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (34b), in addition to the lever image 136Va, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, effects are performed as described above and shown in FIGS. 89 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will be made.

  FIG. 90 (23c) is another example of effect following FIG. 89 (22), and in the lever effect shown in FIG. 89 (18) to FIG. (22), the effect lever 136V is operated by the player. It is shown that he failed in the production. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

FIG. 90 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 89 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (5d), it is shown that a large number of booy characters BOY (booui group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Bowie group. If the character of the boy appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boy's character BOY appears alone. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters of “chance up BOY group” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is informed that the advance notice based on the chance up character display has been performed. As described above, different chance-up effects may be performed even with the same chance-up point, or the same effect may be performed with the same chance-up point.
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 91 (7e) is another example of effect following FIG. 89 (6), and the same effect as FIG. 89 (7) is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 91 (8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches a position before the third check point CP3. It waits at that place until the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is made. In addition, while the effect that the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, an effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 89 (9) to The above-described button effect or the like shown in (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the character display of “UP” may be performed as being performed.

  FIG. 91 (2f) shows another example of effect following FIG. 89 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohani, the status of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the advancing speed of the marker MRK is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, the display mode of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by a question mark, and it is made to have an expectation for the advance of the chance up being performed. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the beginning and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  In FIG. 91 (3f) following FIG. 91 (2f), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (4f), the character BOY of the boy appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (5f), a balloon with the word "CHANCH UP BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice of chance up by the character display is performed. Is notified. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 91 (5f) to FIG. 91F (6f).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (7 f-1) to FIG. 91 (7 f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started moving. At this time, in place of the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In addition, the character BOY of the boy is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (7f-2).

  FIG. 91 (4g ′) shows an example of an effect when the character MOY of Boy does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 91 (3f) is performed. It is done. Specifically, when the character BOY of Boye does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (4f), as shown in FIG. 91 (4g ′), the chance up meter CMT causes the first check point CP1 to be displayed. In place of the display of the question mark, the display of “x” indicating that the notice has not appeared is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 91 (4g ′ ′), the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1 may be erased, and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 91 (4g ′ ′ ′), the display mode may not be changed with the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1.

  FIG. 91 (2h) shows still another example of effect following FIG. 89 (1). The effect example shown in FIG. 91 (2 h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 91 (2 f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are not displayed. It differs in the point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance up, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance up is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 91 (5h), a balloon with the word “CHANNEL UP BOY PASS” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice by the character display of the CHANCE UP has been performed. At this time, a part of the letters “UP” has appeared, which indicates that the reliability of the big hit has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (6 h) to FIG. 7 (7 h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” hidden becomes Appear.
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 92 (A1) to (A11) show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and it is shown that a chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  Thereafter, FIG. 92 (A3) shows that the chase effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 91 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 92 (A3), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo link may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached while the marker MRK is moving, a pseudo link may occur. In addition, it is suggested that reaching the final point makes it possible for a devil merchant to be captured and to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this example of effect, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the pseudo ream occurs. In addition, if a pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when a pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), a big hit is determined. It should be noted that the number of times of pseudo run may be determined to be a big hit by a number other than 4 times, for example, it may be determined to be a big hit when the number of times of pseudo run is 1 time and 4 times. The number of pseudo runs that will be determined as a big hit is less likely to occur than the other pseudo runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (A6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. In addition, even if the timing when the character of “continuation” is displayed and the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of “continuation” are the same as the display of driving the vice merchant by the main character The display of the first check point CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation" after the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant. After the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation", the character of "continuation" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the main character of the main character and the evil merchant is reduced.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A8), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the second pseudo-link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant has been changed, and the expression of the evil merchant who had been spared up to now has become an impatient expression.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A10), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the third pseudo link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (A11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of “secure” and also a state in which the main character of the main character has captured the vice merchant. At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and in the symbol variation display of this time, the pseudo run has been performed three times in total. In addition, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the "decorative 7" is in the reach state, and the reach effect is started.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 92 (B1) to FIG. 92 (B14), the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decoration symbol, and a state in which the notification of the timing when the advance of the chance up occurs occurs is shown There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 91 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 92 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a notice of chance increase may occur, and the player is made to have a sense of expectation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point. In addition, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon of the character of "Nov. character" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance directly related to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "appropriate" to "not". In response to this, a balloon with the word "chance up no" added is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance of the chance up by the navigation character YM has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a conversation notice is also started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. This conversational image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Further, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is considered that the Tonosama conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that this conversational image CI1 is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (B5), with the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Heating fever". In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon character of "super heat" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up related directly to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the second decorative symbol. In this case, too, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which the above-described operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed together with the whistle character as a continuation of the conversational announcement. In addition, although this talk image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B6), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rattan. In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (B6), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the balloon conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped by the balloon character YM balloon and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to recognize than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B7). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 92 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B8), the navigation character advance notice is ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B9), as shown in FIG. The word "" may be displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Furthermore, in this presentation example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is a display mode in which it is highlighted with a bold gold line, and is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal outer frame display mode. Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle changing to gold. , It has been notified that the advance notice of the chance up in the conversation advance notice has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Note that if there is no operation of the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle may or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 of a spear is not displayed, it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or may be notified or only a part may be notified. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

  The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 92 (B11) shows that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow, and the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 92 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 92 (B11) from the beginning.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (B12), with the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed in the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. Note that the display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation announcement ends, or may be deleted after the conversation announcement ends. In addition, the conversation announcement may end after the display of the balloon is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with "decoration 7". At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and the rendering by the chance up meter CMT is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect is started, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, the timing when the reach effect is started may be the same as the timing when the chance up meter CMT is erased, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance Reach production may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

In addition, production with the chance up meter CMT in this production example is ended when it reaches the reach state, but production may be continued even if it reaches the reach state, and it will continue even if it shifts to super reach You may do so. Moreover, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is ended. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may be started, which is different from the presentation by the currently running chance up meter CMT. Moreover, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may always start during normal symbol variation display, or may not start. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started and a case where it is not started, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. In addition, when it is possible to produce effects by the chance up meter CMT, when the effect button 136 is operated, the effects by the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to make the player recognize.
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 93, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 93 (A1) to (A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but it is shown that it is erased halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2 and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (A1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 were reached, respectively, since notice of the chance up corresponding to these did not occur, the display of 1st check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 is erased. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1), it is shown that the character SAH of the sabo hani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2), a cut-in display is performed, which shows that the character of the beard having a nutritional drink is saying “Fight”. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Also, when this cut-in indication is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this example of presentation, it is indicated that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is finished by the advance notice which is likely to be a big hit than the advance of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is performed. There is. Note that the display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that rendering by the chance up meter CMT ends before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT is finished before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point.

  In this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may always be ended halfway, or the chance up meter CMT may or may not be ended halfway. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends halfway or not, or the effect of the same content may be performed. . In addition, when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway. In addition, the reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway is the same as the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway when the notice of the chance up occurs at all the check points. It may be Alternatively, if the chance up meter CMT is not ended halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than if the chance up meter CMT is ended halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "one blow", and it is shown that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation effective period elapses, “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 93 (A4), “ It is notified that it becomes a big hit combination of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 93 (A4 '), "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" will be lost. Be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene is faded in, and a state is shown in which the main character of the main character has defeated the hostile swordsman, and it is reported that .

  FIG. 93 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 93 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2a), a cut-in display is performed to show that the princess character says "Rewrite reach". The display of the cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that effects of other contents are performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in indication is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, also in this example of presentation, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the situation is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2a), the variation icon h0 is also erased, but may not be erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a), a state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 93 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and red respectively And marked with “UP”. That is, in fact, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the notice of the chance up corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not performed, but both are represented as being performed and the big hit It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 93 (A3a′-1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 93 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a′-1), a state is shown in which it is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 90 (30b) instead of the swords reach. The SP Kenshou reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the Kensou reach. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a'-1), the chance of showing that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 An advance notice is displayed, and it reports that the credibility against the big hit of the SP Ken-Atsu reach is dramatically high. The child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 93 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

  FIG. 93 (A3a′-2) is an example of effect following FIG. 93 (A2a), and shows an example of effect different from FIG. 93 (A3a′-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 93 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 93 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, specifically, As described above with reference to 90 (30b), it is a chance up meter CMT that is displayed when shifting from a sword alive reach to an SP kana reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the copanda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth check point CP4 which has passed and shifted to SP Kengo reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, and it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is made. In addition, when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the SABOHANI character SBH may be located at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, and the SABOHANI character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of the SP Kenshou reach.

  FIG. 93 (A3a ′ ′) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 93 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a ′ ′), a state in which the full rotation reach starts is shown. The full turn reach is a reach where the big hit is decided, and it is not necessary to give the player a greater sense of expectation, so the display of the chance up meter CMT is not performed again, but FIG. 93 (A3a ′ ′ ′ ′ As shown in), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be decided when all the rotation reach starts, so the position of the SABOHANI character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing the fifth check point CP5. , The placard may be displayed with "V" indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, or after the full rotation reach starts, the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the sabothan character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full turn reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

  FIG. 93 (A2 b) to FIG. 93 (A3 b) show another example of effect following FIG. 93 (A1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large-screen behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the effects of overlapping the first on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are operated. And the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 93 (B1) to (B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but since the result of losing is displayed on the way, the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is being developed into a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 has been reached, no notice of chance up corresponding to this has occurred, so the red mark and “UP” are not displayed on the first check point CP1. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (B1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B2), it is shown that the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed to notify that the possibility of losing is high. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B3), the main character of the main character loses to the host of the swordsman, and the "symbol 6" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it will be lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, it is displayed that the character SBH of Sabohani is a lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 93 (B3 '), although "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that there will be a loss, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is the final It may be displayed that it progresses toward the point GP as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (B4), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after swing fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  In FIG. 94, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 94 (A1) to (A5), the chance up meter CMT is once erased in the middle of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. It is shown that Sabohani's character SBH is starting to move from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, FIG. 94 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL more visible. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted by dark display is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up illumi irradiance” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that the advance of the chance up has been performed. The light emission of the light guide plate IL continues to be performed.

  FIG. 94 (A4) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended and fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown.

  FIG. 94 (A5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

  In this production example, the presentation by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance up in the reach production, but it is not limited to the one described above, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and tells whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the presentation on whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to the production about whether it will be a big hit, or something else (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the effect by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 94 (B1) to FIG. 94 (B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, and the character BOY of Boi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. Furthermore, in this effect example, guidance display is performed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, the icons indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “not displayed by the arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the sword strike is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the sword strike is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B2), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY pass” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice by chance up character display has been made. Is notified.

  Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 94 (B4) . Thereafter, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 94 (B6). At this time, the SABOHANI character SBH is at the position where it should be positioned when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 94 (B2) may not be displayed, and the rendition in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from a place where the touch is good. Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (B6 '), when the display between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the character SBH of Sabohani The second check point CP2 may be located before the second check point CP2, and may stand by at that position until the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 94 (B6) and FIG. 94 (B6 '), the first check point CP1 is marked in red and the “UP” is marked due to the appearance of the character BOY of Boi. The letter is displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B6), the character "UP" is overlapped by the character SAH of Sabohani, and is considered to be difficult to view.

  In the example of effect shown in FIGS. 94 (B1) to (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times in accordance with the operation of the player, but the chance up meter CMT After being displayed, after being made non-displayed by the operation of the player, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until presentation by the next chance up meter CMT is performed.

  Further, in the example of this effect, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially not displayed. It may be configured to be in the closed state.

  FIG. 95 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the effect using the chance up meter. In FIG. 95, an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 95, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 95 (A1) to FIG. 95 (A2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents, respectively.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this rendering example, the chance up meter disposed on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter disposed on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. These chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 91 (2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 95 (A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks, and are designed to give a sense of expectation that the advance of the chance up will be made. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are for the same advance notice of the chance up.

  In this example, although two chance up meters are displayed, only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters are displayed rather than when only one chance up meter is displayed. The display may be more likely to be a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of the big hit may be the same. Further, when the effect is displayed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed. Also, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Moreover, in this example of presentation, although the advancing speed of 1st chance up meter CMTa and 2nd chance up meter CMTb is made the same, you may differ, for example, the advancing speed of 2nd chance up meter CMTb However, it may be faster than the advancing speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2), in response to the markers MRKa and MRKb reaching the first check points CP1a and CP1b and the character BOY of Boyy appearing, “in the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb A balloon with the word “BOY passing BOY passing” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that the advance of the chance up by the character display has been performed.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (A2 '), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the word "CHANNEL UP BOY passing" is displayed on the balloon, and the reliability of the second chance up meter CMTb is displayed. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY.

  In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (A2 ′ ′), when the display of a state in which the character BOY of the Boy is singing a nasal song as a rare advance notice is performed with the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. Display the word “chance up BOY passing” on the balloon of the up-meter CMTa, and display the word “chance-up nasal song” on the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb to the effect that rare notice has occurred. It is also good.

  In this example of presentation, the advancing speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same between the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may advance at different speeds. Moreover, although the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb in this example of presentation, it may be displayed on only one of them.

  FIG. 95 (A2a-1) to FIG. 95 (A2a-2) show another example of effect following FIG. 95 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2a-1) continued to FIG. 95 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the character BOY of Boye appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, either one may be erased, for example, when one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be easier to be a big hit than it is, or it may be a big hit if it is not erased. Also, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  FIG. 95 (A2 b-1) to FIG. 95 (A2 b-2) show still another example of effect following FIG. 95 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2b-1) continued to FIG. 95 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb to receive the appearance of the boy character BOY. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the big hit. It can be called an aspect. Note that only one of the two chance up meters may be changed, or both may be changed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed out of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. The second chance-up meter CMTb is displayed and only the second confidence-up balloon is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. In addition, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 95 (B1) and FIG. 95 (B2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different advance chance notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0 interposed therebetween. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 95 (B1), three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, third check point CP3a) It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check points. The timings of the notice and the start of the corresponding chance increase are different from any of CP1a to third check point CP3a. In this example of rendering, when the timings at which the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b arrive are arranged in chronological order , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1 a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b, and the character of the Boy BOY is starting to sing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the word "chance up" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, and it is informed that a notice of chance up has been made.

  In this example of presentation, although both the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb were displayed, only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter not displayed is not displayed. It may not be performed, or may be notified of a chance improvement corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter not displayed. In addition, there may be a check point not to be notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even the check point being notified Good.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 95 (C1) to FIG. 95 (C4) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display notices of different chance ups.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (evolution point CPA) is arranged It is done. This development point CPA indicates points at which reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb, When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this rendering example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period.

  Further, in this demonstration example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 91 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb, which is a display mode, is a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 89 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is set as a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, A third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance increase may occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of the Sabohani in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C2), it is shown that button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. In addition, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “UP” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred is displayed at the first check point CP1, and the appearance that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2 is It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up appearing as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SAH of SABOHANI is advancing toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the sabothan character SBH has reached the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character says "Rewrite reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. In addition, when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be extinguished.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C4), a state is shown in which a cut-in image of a panda is displayed and transition is made to SP swords reach. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is It has been shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, a notice of chance increase may occur. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 96A1 to 96A7 shows that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A1), characters such as "Please secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that a chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a chance up meter CMT is displayed, and in this chance up meter CMT, a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2 and a third check point CP3 are arranged. It is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo link will occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A4), it is shown that variable display of the first decorative symbol by the first pseudo run (that is, variable display of the second decorative symbol) is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A5), although the devil merchant has been missed, it is shown that it has developed into a reach by having revived one thousand boxes. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the indication of the second check point CP2 has moved from the question mark to the reach state to the letter “R”. It has been switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo series effect is ended halfway, and as shown in FIG. 96 (A6), the display of the pseudo series effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved to the upper right and left, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0. While being framed out below the display area, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-series effect. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when it reaches the end than when it ends at a checkpoint on the way. Also, the likelihood of a big hit may be made different depending on the check point reached.

  Moreover, you may be performed in the point shown to FIG. 96 (A6 a-1)-the figure (A6 a-2) as an example of presentation which makes the chance up meter CMT non-display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (A6) to FIG. 96 (A6a-2), when the pseudo connected effect is ended halfway in FIG. 96 (A5), the chance up meter CMT is The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out to the outside of the display screen.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 96 (B1) to (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT performs during the period from the start of the reach effect to the development of the super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect shifted to reach by "decoration 7" is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. And in this example of presentation, when reach production starts, chance up meter CMT is displayed under the 2nd decoration design, production which uses chance up meter CMT is done. The presentation using the chance up meter CMT is performed until transition to the super reach or until a loss is displayed without transition to the super reach. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 96 (B1), in reach presentation, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a notice of a chance increase corresponding to each check point Is performed and the character "UP" to that effect is displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0 below the display area. A state is also shown in which the pending icon h11 displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (B3), the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Furthermore, in this example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. ing.

  In this example, while the marker MRK continues to move while the first large-screen behavior character 224G to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are operating, the first large-pattern behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large screen The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior object 224Gd is in operation. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be made non-displayed while the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd are in operation. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 96 (B3), a balloon with the words “CANCELCE UP BLOCK BED” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the 1st B board behavior character object 224 Ga to the 4th B board behavior character It is notified that the notice of the chance up by object 224Gd was performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 96 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. Although the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated after the marker MRK has reached the final point Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol is disposed on the front side of the chance-up meter CMT after the first large-area behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd are operated, and the left of the first decorative pattern The first overlapping design is placed on the front side of the chance increase meter CMT before the first large movement character 224GA to the fourth large movement character 224Gd are operated although the design overlaps with the chance increase meter CMT. After the 1 large movement character item 224Ga to the 4th large movement character object 224Gd is operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped to the chance up meter CMT. You may In addition, it is not necessary to change the anteroposterior relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT before and after the operation of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd return to the initial position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (B7), it develops into a super reach.
FIG. 97 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 97 (A1) to (A5), other effects not related to the chance up meter CMT overlap with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. It is shown how it is done. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, and other effects may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is being developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is an advance notice effect that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even during display of the treasure box BX, and continues to progress.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and in the second check point CP2, a notice of that is issued “UP The display of the character "is performed. The treasure box BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A4), it is shown that the treasure box BX is opened, and the characters of "superheat" appear from inside. This "superheat" character display is also a notice effect unrelated to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (A5), the treasure box BX displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in an easily visible state.

  FIG. 97 (B1) shows that, during the execution of the presentation using the chance up meter CMT, another presentation unrelated to the chance up meter CMT is performed overlapping the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B1), wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT while executing the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that simultaneous effects are being performed on the wipe screen WP. Here, simultaneous rendering means, for example, a pachinko machine 100 of the same model attached to the same gaming island using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a clocking means or a built-in timer, and the same rendering content is the same. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when simultaneous rendering starts, and is erased when ending. In addition, the wipe screen WP may be displayed also when effects other than the simultaneous effect are performed.

  FIGS. 97 (C1) to (C2) show that an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 97 (C1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 97 (C1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (C1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2.

  After that, for example, the radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that the radio wave such as transceiver or the like is outputting a strong radio wave causing fluctuation in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 97 (C2), an error display is performed by the character display of "radio wave detected" indicating that. In the effect example shown in FIG. 97 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. It is applicable also to a door opening error etc. which occur when it is detected that a door member such as 1) is opened. Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, and the error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  FIG. 97 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of the error display, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 97 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be performed simultaneously, and when an error occurs, the display is shown in a line from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 97 (C2c), it is shown that an error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, for example, it is detected by the magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100 In this case, as shown in FIG. 97 (C2c), the error display by the character display of “Magnet detected” indicating that is performed over the entire display screen. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, the game may not be progressed by not performing a part of processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is shut off, such as not performing a big hit determination. . In addition, when the power is shut off while the error display is being performed, and the supply of power is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command that is being executed when the power is shut off has elapsed and the symbol fluctuation stop command is displayed. For example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub control unit 400.

  FIGS. 97 (D1) to (D2) show that the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. In the effect example shown in FIG. 97 (D1) to FIG. (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (D1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that effects are being performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (D1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 97 (D1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (D1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. In addition, in the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs Kengo” indicating that it has developed into a Ken-Age reach is displayed, and a fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 97 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered that the chance up meter CMT is less visible than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, on the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character of the main character with a speech balloon in which the characters "Match game" are displayed is displayed.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display means, but it may be overlapped with the chance up meter CMT by other display means. For example, a display unit configured of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp or the like is applicable.

  Further, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this example of presentation, although the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped to another display has been described, it is also applied to the case where the timer advance indication TM1 is overlapped to another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram for describing a mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

  In FIG. 98, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 98A1 to 98A9, the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in conversation announcement Is shown to be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A2), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by this navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 98 (A3), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A3), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A4), the operation valid period in conversation announcement is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period is started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 98 (A4), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A5), the operation valid period in the speech advance notice is started. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A5). In addition, the operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation advance notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 98 (A5) to (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is more than the decrease speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is reduced earlier than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A8), as shown in FIG. 98 (A9), the conversation image CI2 of the whistle is changed to the operation promotion notification image and “It is intense heat There are times when the character "is displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Also, on the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "superheat", notifying that the big hit reliability is considerably high. ing. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the rendering according to the button operation result is performed for both the button rendering in the conversation announcement and the button rendering by the navigation character YM by one operation of the rendering button. ing. In addition, the character display of "It is super fever" displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the wolf and the character display of "Extreme heat" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are also displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed. But may not be displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (A9a-1), an operation corresponding to the button effect started earlier. An effect corresponding to the result may be performed. That is, in this example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started earlier than the button effect in the advance notice of conversation, as shown in FIG. 98 (A9a-1), the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM Only the effect corresponding to the operation of (the letter display of “superheat” in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the advance notice of the conversation (displayed in the conversation image CI2 "The heat is intense" is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (A9a-2), when the player performs the second operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 88 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result is performed. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation advance notice (character display of "It is intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the whistle) is performed.

  In this production example, when the production button 136 is operated when the operation effective period is started in each of the two button productions, the production with high priority is given to the button production with a large reduction rate of the gauge in the remaining time display meter. The effect corresponding to the operation of the button 136 may be performed, or the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by giving priority to the button effect with a small speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter. It is also good.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the change speed of the display mode of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 is different, but, for example, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the notice image CI2 of the eyelid until a certain time The speed may be the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may change when a certain time is reached. .

  Moreover, although the operation effective period which concerns on notice image CI2 of eyebrows was made into 5 seconds in this example of production, for example, it prepares in the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM becomes the same. In this case, when the operation effective period relating to the preliminary preview image CI2 of the eyebrows is selected to be 5 seconds, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is selected to be 10 seconds.

  Further, in this example of the effect, "It is intense heat in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when" Extreme heat "is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier. If the "" is displayed, the jackpot is more reliable, which makes it easier to be displayed when the notice displayed later is a big hit, and the notice displayed later is displayed more easily. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying while the attention level is lowered relatively. In addition, "It is intense heat" is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when "Extreme heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier In the case, the jackpot reliability may be lower or the jackpot reliability may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 98 (B1) to (B11) show that both the timer advance notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 98 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current is The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 98 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, and the player has a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B2), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the start point SP.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the sabo hani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this example of presentation, it can be said that the start of the timer advance presentation is functioning as a notice of the chance up. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B4), a balloon with the word "chance up timer advance notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice of chance up is made. It is informing. On the other hand, the timer display is counted down in the timer advance display TM1, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B4).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B5), "08: 81" is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B6), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the second check point CP2. In this example of presentation, the advance of the chance increase (for example, the occurrence of a cut-in) is performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. The letter "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been raised due to the appearance of the preliminary announcement is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the preliminary announcement is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "04: 14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the third check point CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, which shows that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B9), in the timer advance notice display TM1, in place of the timer display, characters of “attention” for urging attention to the notice are displayed. According to this presentation example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the rate (speed) of the change to the whole display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP of character SBH of Sabohani to the final point GP by chance up meter CMT started earlier Can be said earlier.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani. It notifies that the advance notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a notice of the chance up displayed corresponding to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of the chance up performed when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the notice indicated by the word "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect, for example, the third check in the effect by the chance up meter CMT The notice of the chance up performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice performed as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appeared lever image 136Va with a higher reliability. (For example, it changes from red to gold).

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect in stages.

  In FIG. 99, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (2), the appearance of the button effect is shown. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion informing images, each of which is a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter, are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is disposed at the upper left of the display screen, and a second button image 136a2 and a second remaining time are arranged. The second operation promotion notification image including the display meter MT2 is disposed at the upper center of the display screen, and the third operation promotion notification image including the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation prompting notification image, which is disposed on the upper right and which includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is disposed on the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth residual image are displayed. The fifth operation prompting notification image consisting of the time display meter MT5 is disposed at the lower center of the display screen, and the sixth operation prompting consists of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (4), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced for all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6. It is done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification image. The operation validity period is set to pass earlier than earlier. In addition, in this example of production, the length of the operation effective period is the same in all of the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (5), as shown in FIG. 99 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is a character of the copanda It has been changed to KP, and it is shown that a notice is being made. In addition, the second operation promotion informing image to the sixth operation promotion informing image are not changed. That is, in this example of effect, only one operation promotion informing image among the plurality of operation promotion informing images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, the fifth operation promotion The display mode is changed one by one preferentially in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. In addition, the order of the operation promotion notification image which changes a display mode is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set suitably. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136.

  In this production example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (the remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the production button 136 is operated). Although the gauge reduction is faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated) In the remaining time display meter MT1, the reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image in which the display mode changes with priority given to the third is the other remaining time display meter MT1 , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4b), the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (sixth operation promotion notification in which the priority to change the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated is the lowest) The reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Moreover, as a remaining time display meter which accelerates | decreases a gauge reduction, it is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set to an appropriate thing.

  Further, in this example of rendering, although any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image has the button images 136a1 to 136a6 as its configuration, the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4c), the sixth button image 136a6 is used as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, and the sixth operation is to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of may be displayed. In this case, any remaining time display meter of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same reduction rate of the gauge, as shown in FIG. 99 (4c), the sixth The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is reduced faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images You may make it slow or you may make it slow. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the button effect is started and display as shown in FIG. 99 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect lever 136V once after operating the effect button 136 five times. There are times when you can do it.

  Further, in this effect example, the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is displayed for the remaining time display in another operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4d), there may be two or more cases in which the decreasing speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (4d), the speed at which the gauges of the display meters MT3 and MT5 decrease in the remaining time of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image indicates the other operation promotion notification The remaining time meter MT1, MT2, MT4 and MT6 of the image is different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and the fifth corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image The rate of decrease of the gauge may be larger in the remaining time display meter MT5.

  FIG. 100 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 100, a first special view display 212, a second special view display 214, a general view display 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a general view hold lamp 216 and a fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 100 (A1) to FIG. 100 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 100 (A1) shows that two timer announcement effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this demonstration example, as described later, since the speed of the countdown of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display, the time until the countdown is completed is completed. It is different. In this example of the effect, among the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed at the upper side is called the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed at the lower side is called the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 has a faster countdown speed than the first timer notice display TM1. Although the first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "09: 73", and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is "06: 73". It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2 is set to the speed according to the passage of the actual time, The countdown speed of the timer notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, a state where 4 seconds have elapsed since the timer notice display countdown starts is shown. Can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (A5), in the second timer advance notice display TM2, in place of the timer display, characters of "attention" are displayed to urge attention to the notice. On the other hand, the first timer advance notice display TM1 continues the countdown, and the timer display is "05: 87" at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A5). After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the timer countdown of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. The second timer advance notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, a frame out after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A6), it is shown that the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. After that, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, a frame out.

  In this example of presentation, although the case where two timer announcement effects were started simultaneously was explained, two timer announcement effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer announcement effect started earlier. The speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 100 (B1) to (B4), a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one timer notice effect is added It shows.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first suspension icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 100 (B1) shows that two timer announcement effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer announcement effect is started when the timer announcement display (first timer announcement display TM1, second timer announcement display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example of effect, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B2), it is shown that the frame in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 both count down as the actual time has elapsed. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer announcement display TM1 and the second timer announcement display TM2 are “09: 73”. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be slower or faster than the actual time lapse. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B3), it is shown that the effect of adding a timer by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (B4), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since addition is not performed on the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 Is occurring. Therefore, although two timer announcement effects are started, since time is added to one timer display on the way, the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, although time addition is performed on one of the two timer notice displays, the time may be shortened (subtracted), or the timer notice effect may be performed. The countdown of any one timer display may be paused to make the time until the countdown is completed different.

  Also, in this example of rendering, the case has been described where two timer preview effects are started at the same time, but two timer preview effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer preview started earlier. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the timer notice effect started later being completed, the timer notice effect started earlier The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display may be completed. In addition, the time is reduced for the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this example, when two timer notice effects are being performed, and the timer overdraft effect is performed, time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display according to any one of the timer notice effects. However, the time display (or shortening of time, temporary stop of countdown, etc.) is performed for the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, and any display mode of the timer notice display is also used. It may be changed.

  Also, after the two timer announcement effects are started, two timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer announcement effects are performed, whereby timer announcements pertaining to the timer announcement effects The time addition to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after the two timer announcement effects are started, three timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one timer announcement effect of the two timer announcement effects A change in timer display may be performed by the two timer addition effects or the like, and a change in timer display by the remaining one timer addition effect may be performed with respect to the other timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, for example, a change in timer display may be performed by only two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only one of the three timer addition effects and the like. A change of the timer display may be performed, or a change of the timer display may not be performed by any of three timer-based effects or the like.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 100 (C1) to FIG. 100 (C4) is a remaining time display timer indicating an operation effective period for each of the plurality of operation means in the effect to prompt operation of any of the plurality of operation means. It is shown that it is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first suspension icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. In correspondence to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL , Remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, a right key image 137aR imitating a right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed corresponding to the right door image DRR, overlapping the right door image DRR, and also below the right key image 137aR. , The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be received.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (C2), the operation effective period of each of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 respectively corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR is reduced and the gauge is reduced. The situation is shown. In this rendering example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 100 (C3) shows that the left door image DRL is selected by the player operating the left key. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen to be enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. The right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. Thereby, notification that the left door image DRL has been selected is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. Thereby, for example, it is predicted that a pseudo link will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 100 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 100 (C4a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the right door image The door of DRR opens, and a pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekitsu" is added to this pine figure CC, which suggests that the jackpot's reliability has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a faster decrease in gauge, a notice display with higher reliability is performed, but in any case Or the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a slower decrease in gauge, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

Further, in this example of rendering, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the lengths of the operation effective periods may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the operation of the right key is performed while waiting until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0. It may be enabled, or while waiting, the operation of the right key may be disabled.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 101, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a general view display device 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a general view hold lamp 216 and a fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 101 (A1) to FIG. 101 (A12), a state is shown in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. . Here, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of timer notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, timer notice display TM1 is large before the display of the countdown is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A2), "03:01" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A3), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds is reached, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated It is changed to the approximate center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the timer notice display TM1 in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged may be overlapped. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the enlarged display is performed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "03:00", but there may be cases where the enlargement is not made, for example, timer notice When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Moreover, in this example of an effect, when timer advance notice display TM1 is expanded and displayed, a display position was changed, but a display position may not change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A4) to (A7), the countdown on the enlarged timer notification display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the enlarged timer notification display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). The timer advance notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol, in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol, moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 101 (A12), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo link will be executed.

  In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining in the timer notice effect, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. The color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal orientation to vertical orientation), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer Another element such as a character or a symbol may be added to the advance notice display TM 1, addition of time to the timer display may be performed, or time reduction to the timer display may be performed. The countdown of the timer may stop, or the speed of the countdown of the timer display may increase, or the timer display may count up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 is split and a new one is displayed. If the plurality of timer notices are displayed, the timer notices may be integrated into one timer notice.

  Also, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes of small size and large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, timer display or When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when the timer display or the "attention" character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. By this, for example, the display mode may be able to be changed according to the reliability of the big hit.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but for example, the size may be changed from the small size to the large size through the middle size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from small size to medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", medium size to large size It may be changed in size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, there may be a case where it does not change to large size.

  Further, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "00:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when displaying the text of "attention", the timer notice display TM1 The size may be changed to a large size.

  Further, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the color of the frame or the background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made to differ depending on the size of the timer advance notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Also, for example, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the color of the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc. ). Also, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, high reliability in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the shape of the character display of "attention".

  In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, a certain effect may easily appear. For example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo run symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be Here, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily made.

  Further, in this example, at the time when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 starts to count down, the timer notice display TM1 is in the small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or at the start of the display of the timer notice display TM1. The display mode may be large.

  Further, in this example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display The size of may not be changed. Also, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. In addition, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  Also, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. In addition, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed in form by animation, the timer display may also be changed in form by animation. In addition, although the form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the animation, the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the timer display changes in form due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 101 (B1) to FIG. 101 (B4) show another example in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 101 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and "00:31" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Moreover, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being changed and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B2) to (B3), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B2), although "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 101 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. As described above, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character display of "attention" is performed. In addition, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer announcement effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 102A1 to 102A3, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, an example in which the timer advance notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means It shows. In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (A1) to FIG. 102 (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 102 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 102 (A1), a timer preview effect is performed, and the timer preview display TM1 is arranged at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as the timer indication, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the effect of the countdown by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (A2), variation display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the countdown of the timer display continues in the timer notice display TM1, and "03: 01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (A2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (A3), when the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S is moved to the decoration symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is a decoration symbol from the sub display device 208S. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 102 (B1) to 102 (B3), when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, another display means displays the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode. An example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 102 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B2), variation display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is in operation, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is positioned on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, and the sub display device 208S completes the movement. May be erased after the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased when the sub display device 208S completes moving. Also, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. In addition, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (B3), when the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decoration symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is displayed from the decoration symbol display device 208 as a sub The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 is displayed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the timer notice display TM1 on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer displays on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 102 (C1) to FIG. 102 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer advance notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first number of suspension icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 102 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (C3), when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is disposed inside the circular meter. As shown in (C3) to (C6) of FIG. 102, the display state of the circular meter section changes in a manner such that the gauge decreases in the clockwise direction from the position of 12 o'clock according to the passage of time. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Also, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but for example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter part is enlarged when the remaining one second is reached It may be displayed. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by a circular meter unit, and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to be recognized than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a in which the display mode has changed. In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the animation of the change display is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the change display is being performed. When the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed without changing the timer display portion.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C4) to (C6) in FIG. 102, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1a and the decrease display of the gauge are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this effect example, the effect of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter section. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a is changed to the timer display and the pseudo continuous effect is performed. The character "is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo connected effect is to be performed. In addition, character display other than "continuation" may be performed, for example, when it shifts to SP reach as a result of the countdown of a timer display completing, it displays as "SP reach" etc. It may be informed that it will shift. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “notice” may be displayed in order to focus attention on the occurrence of a notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character in the middle symbol is displayed on the middle symbol. A display is started in which the pseudo linked symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. After that, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo run is executed.

  In this effect example, the character "continuation" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, but for example, a question mark is added to the character "continuation", etc. A display may be performed in which the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-series effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

Further, in the example of the effect, when the timer indications for the same effect are respectively displayed by a plurality of timer advance notice displays, one timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size, or both may be displayed. The timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size. Also, one of the timer notices is displayed as "03:00", and the other timer notice is displayed in a different manner, for example, roughly displayed as "3 seconds later". Display of countdown may be performed.
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 103, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 103 (A1) to FIG. 103 (A8), a state is shown in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A2), it is shown that the timer-adding effect by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "above" is displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time display is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be performed. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display is 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decoration symbol display It is changed to the approximate center of the device 208. In the example of the effect, the countdown is interrupted once at “05:00”, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer announcement display TM1 is performed by adding the time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. It may be made to overlap with TM1. In addition, the conditions under which the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed are not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display, for example, when the timer display changes such as shortening of the time in the timer display or stopping the countdown. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 103 (B1) to FIG. 103 (B7), it is shown that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped at the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped at the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and "00:00" is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-connected symbol represented by the middle symbol in the middle pattern is moved at low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo run effect by the pseudo run symbol is continuously performed from FIG. 103 (B3) to FIG. (B7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (B4), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (B6), the timer advance notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). Thereafter, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer indication is resumed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the pseudo symbol is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (B7), a cut-in display is performed, which includes a character of the character of "tenon" and a character display of "continuation", and thereafter, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (B7), the timer display is "14: 92".
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 104, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 104 (A1) to 104 (A8), when the display mode of the timer advance notice is changed and the rank of the notice is increased, the timer advance notice is enlarged and displayed. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20: 35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (A2).

  FIG. 104 (A3) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (A3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the jackpot reliability has increased. Then, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 has been ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be suspended while the enlarged display is performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, and the display mode of the timer announcement display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by being changed to the mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (A6), when the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 104 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the advance notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, a character of "jump" is displayed along with the princess character, which suggests that the jackpot is highly reliable. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A7), in response to the rank increase of the timer advance notice display TM1, the letter display of “expected large” is additionally noted. This makes it more likely to be a big hit than the case where a cut-in display in which the character display of "expected large" is not added is displayed. Note that the character display of “expected large” may or may not be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up. In addition, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on condition that the timer advance notice display TM1 is ramped up, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed without being ranked up. May be In this effect example, the character display of "expected large" is easier to be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A7), the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also changed and the advance notice display is performed. The change of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice performed by the timer notice effect may be performed.

  As described above, in this effect example, rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice is promoted, or the timer notice The rank increase of the display TM 1 may function as a notice of the chance increase. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the expectation for displaying a high notice of a big hit in advance is high in advance.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted, for example, the first decorative symbol It may be suggested that the reach design in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when reach effect is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not determined and reach production is being performed, if the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, the probability variation big hit if it becomes a big hit May be determined, and may change to the reach of "decorative 7" which is likely to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 104 (B1) to FIG. 104 (B7) show that the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer advance effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20: 35” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy player, the swordsman, has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 104 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (B2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the start point SP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (B3).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the sabotary character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to make the boy character BOY stand out. That is, by displaying the timer notice display TM1 in a reduced size, it may be possible not to disturb the display of the character BOY of the boy, and it is also possible that the notice of the chance improvement is performed by the character BOY of the boy. It may be easily recognizable. It is to be noted that, even if the timer advance display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (B4). Note that, while the reduction display is performed, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the reduction display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is maintained until the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (B7), when the notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this example of presentation, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, thereby notifying that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. By changing the display mode, it may be possible to achieve the purpose. For example, in addition to the reduction display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the color change of the timer display itself, the change of the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by the change of the shape of the display TM1 or the like.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 105, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 105 (A1) to FIG. 105 (A3), it is shown that the display position of the timer advance notice displayed at the time of transition to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 105 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A1), a state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A2), a super reach title in which an enemy character sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (word player reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer preview display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Also, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (A3 '), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size to make the effect of super reach noticeable.

  In this production example, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the transition to super reach shown in FIG. 105 (A1) is performed The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the display of the super reach title shown in FIG. 105 (A2) is performed. It is also good. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing increase of the timer notice advance TM1, etc.), It may be displayed as it is. In addition, even when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, the enlarged view (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, the timing when 3 seconds or 0), the chance advance of the timer notice display TM1, etc.) Display (or display larger than the size initially displayed).

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 105 (B1) to (B7), the appearance of changing the display position of the timer advance notice displayed when the effect movable body operates is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 105 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (B1), a state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “27: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In FIG. 105 (B2), it is shown that the first large-screen behavior character thing 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "25:34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partially overlapped by the second large-screen behavior character item 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd, and the timer notification display is more than in the non-overlapped state. TM1 is considered to be difficult to view.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position so as not to be overlapped with the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior article 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the 1st large board behavior role thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior role thing 224Gd do not operate, it is not necessary to change a display position, but a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easy-to-see manner. At this time, although the effect image appearing due to the light emission of the light guide plate IL is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed by this. When the light guide plate IL emits light, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 105 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the right end center portion of the display screen). In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “21: 37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd starts to return to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd has started to return to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be performed. After the start of the movement to the original position, the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may start an operation to return to the initial position.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 105 (C1) to FIG. 105 (C5) show that the positional relationship between the timer advance notice and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “29: 69” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped at the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C2). Also at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C3), reach effect is started, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved to the upper left and right, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "21: 37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decoration symbol. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C4) shows a state of being developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C4), a super reach title is displayed in which an image of an enemy player of the sword sword is displayed in a large size. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "20: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and effects are performed using the chance up meter.
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer announcement effect.

  In FIG. 106, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 106 (A1) to FIG. 106 (A10), it is shown that the display position of the timer advance notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 106 (A1), a mode transitioning to a super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A2), a super reach title in which an enemy character sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (venger reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "20: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the following FIG. 106 (A3), the display of animation of a duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A3). In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the word "Reduce timer" is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer advance presentation is started, or when the reach state is reached May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A4), timer announcement display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and the display position thereof is displayed as shown in FIG. 106 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be made non-display. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 106 (A5), the characters “enlarge timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, the display is displayed in the original size, and the display position is also notified to return to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A6), timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 106 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "17: 81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 106 (A7), the guide display in which the characters “Shrink timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is performed, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 106 (A3), when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated when timer advance notice display TM1 is at the default display size and at the default display position, The timer advance notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (A9), when “03:00” indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds is reached, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is erased. It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer advance notice display TM1 can not be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Also, when the timer display changes to "03:00", the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, and if it is displayed in a reduced size, at this timing, the default display size is returned to the default display position. It may be displayed as it is or may be reduced and displayed at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A10), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and it is shown that the countdown is completed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 106 (B1) to FIG. 106 (B9) show that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B1), a super reach title in which an enemy character sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (word player reach) is shown. Moreover, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the following FIG. 106 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (B2).

  FIG. 106 (B3) shows that animation display of a duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is remaining 15 seconds, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer advance notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (B5), “13:56” is shown. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In these timer notices TM1L and TM1R, although the color of the frame changes to red, the color of the frame does not have to change, and the direction of the frame changes to red when the color of the frame changes to red. It may be more likely to be a big hit than when the color does not change. Also, the color of one of these timer notices TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (B6), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 106 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R The word "Attention" will be displayed in order to call attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach" is being performed. There is. This cut-in display is an effect that is performed when the timer display countdown on one timer notification display (for example, the left timer notification display TM1L) of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1R is completed, and the big hit is trusted. It is reported that promotion to a higher reach effect of sex. Note that the effect may be an effect performed by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer notices of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1R.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B9), a state in which it has been developed into an SP Ken-Age reach is shown. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Fig. 106 (B9), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-Awa reach in that the main character of the main character and the enemy of the main character are opposed to each other, but follows the panda as a helper of the main character. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B9), a notice display showing that the copanda cheering party KPD composed of the characters of three copandas is cheering is performed, and SP Kengo Reach's It reports that the reliability for the big hit is dramatically high. The copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

In this production example, the advance notice of the chance up and the development of the reach production are performed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (the development of reach production) corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that, among the developed reach productions, chances-up are being performed.
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 107, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 107 (A1) to FIG. 107 (A5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 107 (A1) to FIG. (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach (Kenai reach). . Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" shown is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer announcement effect is performed, “15: 47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (A2), animation of a duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A2).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the display region in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A4), “13: 56 ”. The timer display continues to count down while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. In this case, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. For example, timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A5).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 107 (B1) to FIG. 107 (B5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 107 (B1) to FIG. (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided, for example, at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this effect example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as LCD, EL, 7 segments, a lamp, a drum and the like may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and can drive the mini display device 208P into the easy-to-see state and the hard-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (B1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. The timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6: 19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are being performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes "0" in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. In such a case, a presentation such as a notice of chance up may be performed, and a presentation such as a notice of chance up is also performed when the timer display becomes “0” in the timer advance presentation on the mini display device 208P. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (B2), the timer notice is displayed at "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1, and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time shown on the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The word "UP" is displayed to indicate that the timer display of TM1 is to be added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (B4), a time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and updated to "18:00".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (B5), in the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed. At the timing shown in FIG. 107 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the shutter member makes it difficult to visually recognize the display screen. In this effect example, when time addition is performed on the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time addition is performed to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P may not end, and thereafter, the timer display may be counted down.
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer announcement effect.

  In FIG. 108, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 108 (A1) to (A10), the appearance of informing by displaying that the timer advance effect is being prepared is displayed before the start of the timer advance effect is started. It shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A1), it is shown that the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect has been started. Specifically, the timer notice preparation effect is started by the frame of the timer notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. The timer announcement preparation effect is to display an indication that the preparation is in progress until the timer announcement effect starts, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1. Note that, for example, display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A3), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” indicating that the preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and this is notified. That is, this effect example is an effect to be performed as one aspect of the advance notice for announcing that the timer advance effect will be performed in the hold state. In addition, it may be the said fluctuation notice which announces that timer notice effect is performed in the symbol display under fluctuation.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 on which the character "STANDBY" is displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and becomes a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3—decoration 9—decoration 1”. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A7), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. In addition, the symbol variation display of this time is a thing corresponding to the pending which was the target of the pre-reading.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position, and the timer display is started from the "STANDBY" display. It is shown that it switches to the display of "10:00" as. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. When the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, an animation moving while expanding the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged, or the display position may be changed after the enlarged display. Also, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing of changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, "03:00") or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 You may change from small size to large size.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 108 (B1) to (B8), a plurality of notice icons MI1 of the clock functioning as the advance notice are stocked, and the timer notice effect is performed by the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B2), a state in which “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. The notice icon MI1 of the clock is added to the “decoration 3”, which indicates that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked. Note that two or more watch notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B3), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3—decoration 9—decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the stocked number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that a notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer advance presentation effect by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the notice icon MI1 on the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B4), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, it is shown that a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is also performed. The navigation character preview is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this effect example functions as a prefetch notice that the timer notice effect is performed within the hold state. As described above, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol change display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 3” is performed, which indicates that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B6), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B7), it is shown that one of the notice icons MI1 of the three stocked clocks is digested and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer indication, and it is suggested that a notice of chance up may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Also, in this example, one notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer notice effect is started, but two watch notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Also, in this example of rendering, one preview icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer preview effect is started, but for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (B7 '), the preview icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The timer announcement effect may be started without being digested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B8), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position substantially at the center of the right end of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. In addition, when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end center of the display screen from the beginning. .

  In the above description, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [eg, the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol A game console provided with the display device 208N, the mini display device 208P, the POV display 224I, etc.], wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first display [eg, timer shown in FIG. 82 (1) Timer notice effect etc. in notice display TM1], the first display is a certain effect [for example, pseudo connected effect shown in FIG. 80 (11) ~ (12), or shown in FIG. 81 (a 5) Notice display by change in display mode of fluctuation icon h0, lever effect shown in FIG. 81 (c2), notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as chance symbol shown in FIG. 83 (9 fa ′), etc. The timing at which the effect display using the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the mini display device 208P is performed It is a display to be notified, and one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer overlay effect etc. shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. The display is a display for giving a notice that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, the balloon of the navigation character YM in the timer-added effect shown in FIG. The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, such as the display of “overlay” or “+10 seconds” displayed on the screen [eg, FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. As shown in 5), When the timer announcement attraction in timer predictive display TM1 is being performed, etc. the timer plus effect is being performed, the amusement machine, characterized in that. It explained about.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is notified by the first display, it is notified that the time notified by the second display changes. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain effect to start, it has the expectation that the time may change, and the first display also enjoys There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the first display and the second display. . Moreover, the display means may display the first display and the second display without fail, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, the second display may give notice that only the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, or may give notice that other than the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one. In addition, the second display may always give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, and may not give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Also, the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or the second display may not be displayed while the first display is displayed.

  Note that the start of the timer advance notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed) It may be that the countdown display of the countdown display has been started. In addition, the end of the timer advance notice display may be that the first display has become non-display, or that the countdown display has become non-display (for example, the numbers are erased, and "the attention" is Displayed state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may have ended (for example, 0 is displayed), display displayed on the first display after countdown has ended It may be that (for example, the character display of "attention") is hidden.

  Also, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated, and the time display on the timer display is performed, etc.]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, only the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of displays other than the above may also be changed. In addition, the display mode of the first display may be changed without fail after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is displayed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured such that it may not change.

  In addition, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display is only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.], and one of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, Sub display device 208S etc.], the first display is a display displayed on the first display means, and the second display is a display displayed on the second display means , A game stand characterized by. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the line of sight of the player may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means is also displayed on the second display means. In some cases, it is possible to focus on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight on only the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be composed of display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It is also good.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means or may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display means or may not be displayed on the second display means.

  [The second display means is disposed on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the sub display device 208S is on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Placed on the side etc],

  The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display [eg, as shown in FIG. 86 (A2) to FIG. (A3) , A decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a sub display device 208S on which a timer addition effect is performed, etc.], A game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the second display may cause the second display to be focused and a certain effect may be started by the fact that the second display may overlap the first display while the second display is being displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first display means is overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displays the second display Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped depending on the display means. In addition, the first display means may always be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, and the second display means displays the second display. One display means may not be overlapped.

  In addition, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means in which the second display is displayed, or the second display in which the second display is displayed The first display means may be overlapped also by display means other than the means.

  Also, “first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 86 (B1), etc.]” and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. The second display means is configured to be movable between a position at which the front side substantially at the center of 208 overlaps, and the like.

  The second display means is a display means which overlaps the first display means at the second position [eg, as shown in FIG. 86 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device The sub display unit 208S overlaps the decorative symbol display unit 208, etc., at a position overlapping with the front side substantially at the center of 208], and the like. I also explained about.

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of may also be configured to be movable. Also, the second display means may be configured to move necessarily between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may be arranged between the first position and the second position. It may be configured such that it may not move.

  Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, or may be configured other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Also, the second display means may be capable of overlapping with the first display means only at the second position, or may be capable of overlapping with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be Also, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. It is also good.

  In addition, “the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 80 (2) to FIG.

  The countdown display is a display for performing the timing until the certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIG. 80 (2) to FIG. 7 (7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing at which the pseudo sequence is performed, etc.], The game table characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  Here, the first display may include only the countdown display or may include displays other than the countdown display. In addition, the first display may include the countdown display without fail or may not include the countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect may be performed by a countdown. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or even if the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by counting down. Good.

  In addition, even in a state where the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued, and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, even in the state in which the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even in the state in which the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by countdown display There may be one. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. It is also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, and the countdown by countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, while the second display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted, and the game console is characterized. I also explained about.

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. In addition, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the second display.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”” in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 80 (8)], and the third The display is a display different from the first display, the third display is a display different from the second display, and the third display is not included in the certain effect. In the display, when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 80 (7) to FIG. When the timer display on the display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.], and the like. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display becomes a display showing 0, a third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be necessarily displayed, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display may be a display other than a case where the display indicates 0. Three displays may be displayed.

  "A game console characterized by the fact that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second display is displayed than when the second display is not displayed. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by the display of the second display.

  In addition, when the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed finally in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 80 (9) to FIG.
The certain effect is a effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display, wherein a game console is provided. I also explained about.

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include displays other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain effect may include the fourth display or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [e.g., the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd shown in FIG. 81 (d3)],
The certain effect is a effect including the first operation,
A game console characterized in that the first operation is a rendering operation. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be executable other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. In addition, the effect movable means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  In addition, a certain effect may include only the first action, or may include actions other than the first action. Also, a certain effect may include the first action or may not include the first action.

  In addition, in the case where the certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [eg, FIG. 80 (11) to FIG. 12) The case where the pseudo run is started is more likely to be a big hit, etc., than the case where the pseudo run is not started], and the like. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the end, or even if a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It is also good.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays may be a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 16 (9) to FIG. (14), and FIG. 80 (9) to FIG. The pseudo-sequence effect shown in Figure 89, the notice display of the chance up shown in Figure 89 (4) and Figure 13 (13), etc.],
In the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, the fifth display may be started to be displayed.
The fifth display is a notice display,
In the case where the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the fifth display is not displayed [eg, FIG. 16 (9) to FIG. 16 (14) If the conversation notice shown in is made, it is easier to be a big hit, etc. than in the case where the conversation notice is not made, etc.], and the game table is characterized. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the fifth display to be displayed in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display. is there.

  Here, in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, only the fifth display may start to be displayed, or the first display In the period from the display start to the display start of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may be always started, or after the first display is started The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

  In addition, the fifth display may start being displayed only during a period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, or the first display may be displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started also in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or even when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is not finally displayed. There may be.

  In addition, “the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],” a gaming machine characterized by: I also explained about. In addition, “the gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, slot machine 1000, etc.]”. I also explained about.

Further, in the above description, “display means capable of displaying several types of displays [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decoration symbol display device 208L, the second decoration symbol display device 208M, the third decoration A game console provided with a symbol display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is period display [for example, display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1)], and the period display is a period during which reach effect display is performed. This is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 89, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed in a period in which sword reach is being performed, etc.], One of a plurality of types of displays is a first effect display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 89 (18), etc.], and the period display is a first timing [for example, FIG. (18) is a display for notifying of the timing etc. indicated by the check point CP3 at which the advance notice by the lever effect is started, and the first timing is the display of the first effect display This is a timing that may be started, and the display of the period may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started [eg, FIG. 93 (A1 As shown in FIG. 93 (A2), when the cut-in display shown in FIG. 93 (A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the check point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.), A game stand characterized by It explained about.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing approaches. Here, the display means can be made to look at the display means in order to see the period display even before the first timing when the period display may be hidden before the first timing comes. There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game from the display of the period display to the first timing.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Also, a plurality of types of display may be displayed without fail, or there may be cases where a plurality of types of display are not displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the period before the first timing starts after the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before. The displayed period may be displayed during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of reach.

  Also, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed in the case of long reach but may be displayed in the case of SP reach. Also, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach but may be displayed in the second half of the SP reach. Also, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach.

  Furthermore, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Moreover, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the effect such as the reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing when the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed. Also, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is ended. It may be. In addition, when display / non-display of the chance up meter is configured to be possible by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  In addition, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed is displayed) to the start of the period display until the period display effect is ended (for example, the chance up meter May be displayed until the display that suggests that it can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden). Further, the term period display includes not only those displayed until the first timing is reached, but also those erased before the first timing is reached.

  Moreover, there may be two or more in a period in which the reach effect display is performed for a certain period. At this time, the period display may start and end at each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as display may start and end.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a second effect display [for example, a cut-in display of an eyebrow shown in FIG. 93 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2 b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. 93 (A2 b), a chance up meter In the effect by CMT, there is a case where the display of the eyebrow cut-in shown in FIG. 93 (A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b) In the effect by the up meter CMT, the display timing of the eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 93 (A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2 b) etc. is not displayed, the second effect display is being displayed. In the period display, the display of the period is erased. [For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b), display of the cut-in of eyelid shown in FIG. When the display of the effect image shown in (A2b) is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased and the like], and the like. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing by displaying the display not notified by the period display, so before the first timing comes There are also cases where you can have hope.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing comes, or before the first timing comes, effect displays other than the second effect display are also displayed There may be cases. In addition, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing comes, or the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing comes There may be. In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or there may be cases where the notification of the second effect display is not notified other than the timing when the display is started. May be In addition, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Moreover, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, and the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be erased during the second effect display. In addition, the period display may be erased only while the second effect display is displayed, or the period display may be erased other than during the second effect display.

  In addition, instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, or a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of the prepaid card may be used. Further, as an aspect of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, an operation by an effect movable means, or light emission by a light guide plate may be used.

  Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

  In addition, “the second effect display is a second advance display [for example, a display of a cut-in of an eyebrow shown in FIG. 93 (A2) or an advance display by a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2 b), etc.] A game console characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the fact that the second effect display is displayed before the first timing can indicate that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, it is possible to give the player expectations even in the period until the first timing comes.

  "A game console characterized by the fact that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined when the second effect display is displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed. I also explained about.

In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, finally the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or even if the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done.
In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operation is a second operation [for example, the operation of the first large-screen behavior player 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd shown in FIG. 93 (A3b),
The second operation is a rendering operation,
While displaying the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2b) and the like], the second operation may be performed. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, while the second effect display is being displayed, there may be a case where only the second operation is performed, and while the second effect display is being displayed, an operation other than the second operation is also performed. May be In addition, the second operation may be performed while the second effect display is displayed, or the second operation may not be performed while the second effect display is displayed.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of operations may be performed as the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 15 (E1) to FIG. 15 (E2), or FIG. The operation of the one thousand box box 224H, etc.], The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is displayed again [for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (A2a) to FIG. (A3a), the princess character's character is displayed. After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed again, etc., when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed], etc. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have expectation for redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, the displays other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be

  Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display has been erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display has been erased. It is also good.

  Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [eg, as shown in FIG. 93 (A2) to FIG. (A5) In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the indigo character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed or the like in the symbol variation display], etc. I also explained about.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, until a certain period elapses. The display other than the period display may be configured not to be displayed. In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display may not necessarily be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period until the certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed. Also, only after the period display is erased, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or other than after the period display is erased, a certain period elapses. Until the period display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, the period display is performed in the first certain period after the period display is erased in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when the second certain period after the first certain period starts. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

  Also, “a certain period of time is a period during which super reach is being performed,” a game console characterized by: I also explained about.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of a Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. It is a notice of the chance improvement by the display of the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display indicates a second timing [e.g., the timing indicated by the check point CP1 at which the advance notice of the Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boyy shown in FIG. 89 (4) is started, It is a display which may also notify [the timing etc. which are shown by check point CP2 by which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started],
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started. I also explained about.

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timings than the second timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

In addition, the second timing may have a possibility that only the display of the third effect display may be started, and the other than the display of the third effect display may also be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started in some cases.
The timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

  In addition, if a certain reach occurs, effect display is always performed three times, and if another reach occurs, effect display is always performed twice, so it is possible to fix places where effect display is performed according to reach. When there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed three times, and when there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed such that the effect display is performed only once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be more likely to deviate. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Also, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  Also, the second timing may be timing after the first timing, and the second timing may be timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

  In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 89 (18), etc.]”, a game console characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  "The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100, etc.]". I also explained about.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the third display, and“ when at least a part of the first display is difficult to visually recognize ”is“ the third display. When at least a part of the first display is overlapped, the game console is characterized by: I also explained about.

"Display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means.
The first display means is a means which may display the period display,
The second display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means. I also explained about.

  Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other display than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display or may not display the period display.

  Further, the second display means may perform only the rendering operation, or may perform an operation other than the rendering operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the rendering operation, or may not perform the rendering operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means, or in the case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means There may be. In addition, at least a part of the period display may always be overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. It is also good.

Further, in the above description, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third A game console provided with the decorative symbol display device 208N, the mini display device 208P, the POV display 224I, etc.,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [eg, effects by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (A1) to FIG. (A9), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 98 (A4) to FIG. (A9),
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (A1)] has a first speed [eg 10 It may change by the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.
The display mode of at least a part of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 98 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, 5 seconds The speed may be changed, etc.], and the first speed and the second speed may be different speeds. It explained about.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, many displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who starts the game with his / her model does not know where to look. In this gaming table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player is naturally induced to gaze at the display with a fast (slow) display at which the display mode changes, and the player who has the above problem There are also cases where you can be entertained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before the period display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

In addition, “the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 98 (A1), etc.],
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 98 (A4), etc.]
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period etc.] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. A remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), etc., the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period], etc. I also explained about.

  According to this game console, the speed of change of the display mode may be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. Moreover, the first display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. In addition, the second display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  In addition, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes in accordance with other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be Also, the time display may be such that the display mode necessarily changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

  Also, in some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (A4) to FIG. Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the whistle in the preannouncement of conversation etc. are displayed, etc.]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the presentation may be made lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be displayed other than both the first display and the second display. It is also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be necessarily displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, character display of“ superheat ”in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (A9), etc.]” One of the displays is the fourth display [for example, the character display of "It is intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 98 (A9)], and the third display and the above The fourth display is another display, and the first display is a display capable of changing at least a part of display modes until a first time [e.g., 10 seconds etc.] elapses, The second display is a display capable of changing at least a part of the display mode until a second time [for example, 5 seconds etc.] elapses, and the first time after the first display starts to be displayed. The third display may be displayed when the time has passed, and the second display When the second time from the start has elapsed, the amusement machine where the fourth display might be displayed, it is characterized. I also explained about.

  Here, the first display may change only at least a part of the display mode until the first time passes, or at least a part of the display modes until the first time passes Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least the display mode changes until the first time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second display may be such that at least a portion of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a portion of the display mode other than the second time elapses The display mode of may be changeable. In addition, the second display may change at least a part of the display mode until the second time passes, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the display start of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the display start. As time passes, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to display, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed after the first display has started. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start after the second display is started. As time passes, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to display, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display has started. , The fourth display may not be displayed. Note that the third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have a higher or lower reliability of the jackpot. Also, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

  In addition, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, display of a countdown in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 100 (A1), etc.]”, and the second display is the countdown Display [for example, display of countdown in timer display of second timer announcement display TM2 shown in FIG. 100 (A1)], and the countdown display means that a certain effect [for example, display of pseudo-series effect etc.] This is a display for notifying of the timing until it is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 100 (A1) count down the time until the pseudo run occurs. Informing by display etc.], The game stand characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing before a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

  In addition, “the player has an operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the effect button 136 etc.], the first display is an operation valid period display, and the second display is the operation valid period display. The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation effective period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective. I also explained about.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be operated by the player without fail, or may have a habit of not being operated by the player.

  In addition, the operation effective period display may indicate only the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may indicate other than the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The operation effective period display may always indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may not indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMTa or the like shown in FIG. 95 (A1)],
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb and the like shown in FIG. 95 (A1)], and the period display is a first timing [for example, FIG. 95 (A2) This is a display for notifying of the timing at which the advance notice of the chance up is started by the character BOY of the show shown, etc.], and the first timing is a first period [for example, FIG. 95 (A1) to FIG. The timing at which there is a possibility that a certain effect [for example, the display of an advance notice of a chance increase by the character BOY shown in FIG. And the first timing is notified between the start of the first period and the end of the first period. I also explained about.

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may also start to be displayed in the first period. It may be possible. In addition, the first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be

  In addition, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. A thing other than timing may also be alert | reported. In addition, the first timing may be notified before the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Also, the first timing may be notified only between the start and the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified before and after the start of the first period. One timing may be notified.

  In addition, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed. I also explained about.

  Here, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change only at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, the second display At least a part of the display modes may change at a speed other than the first speed. In addition, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, or according to the passage of time, at least a part of the second display The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  Also, depending on the passage of time, only the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display may be changed. Things other than some display modes may change at the first speed.

  "When at least a part of display aspects of the second display changes at the second speed than when the display aspect of at least parts of the second display changes at the first speed The game console characterized by the fact that the big hit symbol is finally easy to be displayed. I also explained about.

  In addition, when the display mode of at least one part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the display of the second display Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

  In addition, “the first display is a presentation display [for example, a presentation display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (A1) to FIG. 98 (A9), etc.]”. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the second display is a presentation display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 98 (A4) to FIG. . I also explained about.

  "The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 or the like]". I also explained about. “The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]”. I also explained about.

Further, in the above description, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third A game console provided with the decorative symbol display device 208N, the mini display device 208P, the POV display 224I, etc.], wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first display [eg, FIG. 101 (A1) Timer notice display TM1 etc.], and the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown of a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A1)]. The display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, As shown in FIGS. 101 (A1) to (A7), the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 notifies the timing at which the pseudo link is performed, etc.], while the countdown display is displayed. The display mode of the first display is the first display mode [for example, the display mode etc. of the small size of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A1)] and the second display mode [eg, FIG. 101 (A3) May change to the display mode etc. of the large size of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG.
A game console characterized in that the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes. It explained about.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Also, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include displays other than the countdown display. Also, the first display may include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, or the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or when the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing a countdown. There may be

  In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only, and the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to the display modes other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the display of the first display may be performed while the countdown display is displayed. The aspect may not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

  In addition, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is finished before the symbol variation display is completed [eg, as shown in FIG. 80 (1) to FIG. (7) The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and is ended during the symbol variation display, etc.], A game console characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, since the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol change display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol change display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol change display, The display other than the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended. In addition, the countdown display may be started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the countdown display may always be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the symbol The countdown display may not end before the end of the variable display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol The countdown display may end other than the end of the variable display.

Also, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, small size etc.],
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [eg, large size etc.],
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, when the display size of the countdown display becomes large, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (make the user pay attention to the countdown display whose display size becomes large).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be a display mode being displayed. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size There may be a display mode.

In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be selected. In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size There may be a display mode. In addition, the size of the display size may be the same, for example, the display size may be the same, but the color or the shape of the frame or the character may be different.
Also, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

  [When the display of the countdown display is started [eg, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 80 (3), etc.]] A game is characterized in that a display is displayed in the first display mode. I also explained about.

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. Display modes other than the one display mode may be displayed. Also, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first There may be cases where the display mode is not displayed.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, when the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 80 (2), when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, etc.], the first display is displayed. It is displayed in said 1st display mode, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

  Also, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, as shown in FIG. 101 (A2) to FIG. 101 (A3) Thus, while displaying the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size etc], and the game stand characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation that the display mode changes during countdown display.

  Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode, or during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed, and the first display may be changed to the second display mode other than the display of the countdown display. You may change from one display mode to a second display mode.

  Also, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game console characterized by the fact that the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed finally in the case of a game. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the first display to change to the second display mode.

  In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed in the final display, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

  In addition, the first display is a display in which the display position may be changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (A2) to FIG. (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device The display position of the display screen of the display screen is changed from the substantially right center of the display screen 208 to the approximately center, etc.], I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, when the display position of the first display changes, a visual change may be given to improve the rendering effect.

  Here, the first display may change only the display position, or may change other than the display position. In addition, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

  Also, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 101 (A2) to FIG. 101 (A3) As shown in), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to make the first display pay attention.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display from the first display mode If it changes to a 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of a 1st display may also change. In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display may change from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change also in the case other than the case of changing from the second display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, “the first display is a display in which movement display [for example, display of animation of enlarged display of timer notice display TM1 etc.] may be performed], and the first display is performed by performing the movement display. The display position of the display changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (A2) to FIG. 101 (A3), the timer preview display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by the animation of the enlarged display, and the display position is also changed, etc.) A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, since visual change can be given by the movement display of the first display, the rendering effect may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display may be performed, or may be one in which display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the movement display, and the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may also be changed by performing the movement display. It is also good. Further, the display position of the first display may be changed by moving display, or the display position of the first display may not be changed by moving display. .

  Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only by performing the movement display, or even if the display position of the first display is changed due to other than the movement display being performed. Good.

  In addition, “a countdown by the countdown display proceeds even during the display of the movement display, a game machine characterized in that I also explained about.

  Here, even during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even during the display of the movement display, other than the countdown display by the countdown display may be continued. In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than the display of the movement display.

  In addition, while the movement display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted, and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, only the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display, or something other than the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display. In addition, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted except when the movement display is displayed.

  “The countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (A2) to FIG. (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing at which the pseudo sequence is performed, etc.], The game table characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  Here, the countdown display may perform only the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform other than the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

  Also, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 101 (A7) to FIG. (A8) As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that the pseudo link is performed, and so on]. I also explained about.

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only a timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. The thing other than the timing to which a certain effect is performed may also be notified. In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be always notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, In some cases, it may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

  Moreover, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

  Also, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (A7) to FIG. (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased and the like], and the like. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the effect may not be redundant by erasing the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the display other than the countdown display may be performed. May also be configured to be erased. In addition, after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication may be necessarily erased, or after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is erased. It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”” in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A8)], and the second The display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, after the second display is displayed, the countdown display is configured to be erased [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" is displayed, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. And so on]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, when the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, there are cases where it is possible to improve the effect on the erasure of the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Also, the second display may be included in an effect.

  In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased when the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be necessarily erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. May be configured such that the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed only when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased when the second display is displayed.

  "The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the sub display device 208S etc.], One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.], and when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the display means The first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 102 (A1), the small size timer preview display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.], Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may also be displayed on display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means without fail, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Also, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means also in cases other than the above case.

  Also, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIG. 102 (A2) to FIG. 102 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol It is displayed on the display device 208, etc.] I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, since the display means displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the rendering effect in an entertaining manner.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display displayed on the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on other display means. Moreover, when the first display is always displayed on the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be displayed on the second display means. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be It may be displayed on the display means of.

  "The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100, etc.]". I also explained about. “The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]”. I also explained about.

  In addition, the countdown display demonstrated so far may be a display performed only during execution of the said symbol fluctuation display, and may be performed as a prefetch notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In addition, when the countdown display is performed as a preview advance notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol change display and the symbol change display to be performed next. In that case, while the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped / suspended / canceled (for example, the time of the timing of the decision stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop displayed (however, the countdown If the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by countdown may be continued, or the symbol countdown may be internally performed. You may stop the countdown internally during symbol stop display.

  In addition, when the countdown display is displayed as the pre-reading notice, the countdown display is not performed when there is a hold (for example, a hold with a fluctuation time indefinite) in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds. It is also good. This is because there is a possibility that it will not be clear at which timing the countdown will be 0 if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (simulation, reach, In the case of development etc.), it is preferable to carry out only in the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when there is a pending with the fluctuation time being indefinite. In this case, for example, a presentation that causes no problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the reserved icon, a presentation such as round promotion during a big hit, etc. The present invention can be applied to the case where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed before the end of the object's detention. In addition, when there is an effect that needs to be synchronized (such as the start of the symbol variation display on hold that has been pre-read target) n, such as effect to force the time to match the time is performed It is also good.

  Also, the countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the inter-round interval. Here, since the period of one round is indeterminate during the big hit game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately, for example, whether or not the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the big hit end interval (final If the big hit end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or if it becomes a certain round, the book edge is forced The combined time (for example, "00:00" is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, etc. may be displayed).

  Further, the time until the simultaneous effect or the effect by the RTC starts may be notified by a countdown display.

  In addition, the display device may be configured of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as effect moving means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. These may be configured to be visible through the. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the rear side can be viewed and a state in which the transmissive liquid crystal can not be viewed by the liquid crystal shutter.

  In addition, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as a bonus may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

  In addition, it is a display that announces that it may give an effect that affects the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as saying that something may occur due to a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may occur in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, an effect such as always performed something May be performed, and effects may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the easier it will be for the jackpot.

  In addition, when there are a large number of display of the countdown display, it may be easy to become a big hit in the end, or it may be easy to become a big hit if a notice of chance increase is given.

  In addition, with regard to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged / reduced or a promotion effect (for example, a color or shape changes or a character or marker indicating the current position is changed) is performed. Good.

<< Embodiment 4 >>
Next, a game console according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 109 shows an example of presentation using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display.

  The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode. In FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emits light, it is expressed in light black color, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is expressed in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 109 (b) following FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  109 (c) following FIG. 109 (b) shows a state where the movable body 1 is moved from the initial position to the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position There is. When the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the common drawing reserve number aa5, the part of the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the button advance notice h110 , And a part of the ball extraction error display h111, the operation expiration date display h112, and the preview display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that the movable body 1 may overlap with displays other than these as the movable body 1 is positioned approximately at the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 109 (d) following FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 30 degrees from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 109 (e) following FIG. 109 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and a ball pull error display The other part or the like of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. In addition, there may be a case where the movable body 1 overlaps with the display other than these by the movable body 1 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, any of these displays There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 109 (f) following FIG. 109 (e), after moving the movable body 1 back to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off It shows the state.

As described above, in the present effect example, only the movable body 1 located on the front side of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position falls to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.
FIG. 110 shows an example of presentation using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 110 (a) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 110 (b) following FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 110 (c) following FIG. 110 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is moved from the initial position to the front of approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position. There is. When the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a fourth pattern aa4 of the special figure 2, a button preview It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a drop-in-ball error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that when the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 110 (d) following FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 70 degrees clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 110 (e) following FIG. 110 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button preview h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these when the movable body 2 is deformed at a position substantially in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any of these displays may be used. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 110 (f) following FIG. 110 (e), after moving the movable body 2 back to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off It shows the state.

As described above, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit symbols are more likely to be finally displayed than when the effect example shown in FIG. 109 is performed. In the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 109 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be more easily finalized and displayed than in the case where it is displayed.
FIG. 111 shows an example of presentation using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 111 (b) following FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 111 (c) following FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start moving from the initial position and are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. When the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a second special figure 4 pattern aa4, common drawing reserve number aa5, part of common drawing 4 pattern aa6, part of button advance notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 Overlap with some of the In addition, when the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display of any one of them does not overlap. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are made the same. However, the movement end timing may be different.

  FIG. 111 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 111 (c), shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable parts 14 move downward, and a pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, the timing of the start of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  FIG. 111 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 111 (d), shows a state in which the movable elements 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is simultaneously terminated. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 14 moves downward, and the pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and the ball removal are newly added. Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these by the movable bodies 1 and 2 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be a case where one of the displays in the display does not overlap. In addition, the timing of completion | finish of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  In FIG. 111 (f) following FIG. 111 (e), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, the movement start to the initial position and the movement end are simultaneously performed. , And 2 show the state in which the respective light emitting means are simultaneously turned off. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before deformation | transformation may be started by separate timing, and may be complete | finished by separate timing. Further, even if the timing of the start of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the shape of the movable body 2 before the deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The start timing of the operation to return to the previous shape may be the same or the end timing may be different. In addition, there may be cases where the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ, or the timing of the start of the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ. It is also good. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The movement start timing may be the same or the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  Thus, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of simultaneously deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, even if it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily displayed finally in the end than when the effect example shown in FIG. 109 or the effect example shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the effect example shown in FIG. 109 or the effect example shown in FIG. 110 is performed than when the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 to FIG. 120, a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90 will be described. The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 112 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and Fig. 112 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 for rotating the movable body 90b, a rotary shaft d1, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion It has 90c3.

  In the LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 are provided in alignment in an arrangement of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows 1 column, 3 rows 1 column, 2 rows 6 columns , And the light emitting diode is not provided in the third row and the sixth column). A light emitting diode b1 to b4 is provided on the LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and a light emitting diode c1 is provided on the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c along the outer periphery of the arc portion To c4 are provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be all light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different colors), or a part may be a single color light emitting diode and another part may be a full color LED , All may be configured with full color LED. Further, as the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a, light sources other than the light emitting diodes may be used.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (g) show the initial operation of the movable body 90 which is performed when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on etc. in stages. In FIGS. 113 to 119, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where it is turned on is shown in light black. In addition, in FIGS. 113 to 119, the cover parts 90a3, 90b3 and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. The movable body 90 can be vertically moved by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. The cable connected to the movable body 90 may be disposed behind the arm so as not to be visible to the player. In addition, the character string "under preparation" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 113 (b) following FIG. 113 (a), the movable body 90 is moved to be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all of the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are mounted. The light emitting diode is shown in a lit state. In addition, the display of the character string “under preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 113 (c) following FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c are visible.

  FIG. 113 (d) following FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 113 (e) continued from FIG. 113 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 113 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 113 (d).

  FIG. 113 (f) following FIG. 113 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 113 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 113 (d).

  FIG. 113 (g) following FIG. 113 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of an effect example of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (n) show the effect example using the movable body 90 in stages.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 114 (b), which is continued from FIG. 114 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 114 (c) following FIG. 114 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  FIG. 114 (d) following FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 114 (e) continued from FIG. 114 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 114 (d).

  FIG. 114 (f) following FIG. 114 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d).

  FIG. 114 (g) following FIG. 114 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 114 (h) following FIG. 114 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 114 (i) continued from FIG. 114 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 114 (j) following FIG. 114 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 114 (k) continued from FIG. 114 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 114 (l) continued from FIG. 114 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90c becomes visible. The light of all the provided light emitting diodes is visible.

  FIG. 114 (m) following FIG. 114 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude of FIG. 114 (l), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude of FIG. 114 (l). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 114 (i) to 114 (l).

  FIG. 114 (n) following FIG. 114 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position, and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 115 to 118 is performed.

  An example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (n) show the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in stages. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows a state where the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 115 (b), which is continued from FIG. 115 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 115 (c) following FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously moved upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 115 (d) following FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 115 (e) following FIG. 115 (d) shows a state where all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished, and each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously moving downward. There is. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 115 (f) following FIG. 115 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original position. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

  FIG. 115 (g) following FIG. 115 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 115 (h), which is continued from FIG. 115 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 115 (i) continued from FIG. 115 (h), a portion of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90b by moving upward only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 115 (j) following FIG. 115 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the lights of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  In FIG. 115 (k) continued from FIG. 115 (j), a portion of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90c by moving upward only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) is visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 115 (l) following FIG. 115 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  FIG. 115 (m) following FIG. 115 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original position after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, there may be a case where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 115 (i) to 115 (l).

  FIG. 115 (n) following FIG. 115 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

  An example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (n) show the effect example using the modification of the movable body 90 in stages. In the present modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows a state where the modification of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 116 (b), which is continued from FIG. 116 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, and the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  FIG. 116 (d) following FIG. 116 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 116 (e) continued from FIG. 116 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 116 (d).

  FIG. 116 (f) following FIG. 116 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 116 (d).

  FIG. 116 (g) following FIG. 116 (f) shows the movable body 90 moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 116 (h) continued from FIG. 116 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 116 (i) continued from FIG. 116 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 116 (j) following FIG. 116 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 116 (k) continued from FIG. 116 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 116 (l) continued from FIG. 116 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 116 (m) following FIG. 116 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 116 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 116 (d). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 116 (i) to 116 (l).

  FIG. 116 (n) following FIG. 116 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

  An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  In FIG. 117 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a), the finalized display of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the hold icon a2 of the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b), the decorative symbol variation display by the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the predictive warning mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string "Press the button!", The button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed, and the notice effect of the button operation is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the fluctuation icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string of "press a button!", A button advance notice h110, and an operation expiration date h112 It is overlapped.

  In FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c), “decorative 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a by the player operating the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, and the sun's An image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (e) continued from FIG. 117 (d), “decorative 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c by the player operating the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, and the reach effect is displayed Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern and a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (f) following FIG. 117 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the SP reach effect display by the character display of the character who displayed the character string of "match!" Is started, and the decorative symbol display device At the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced size. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the Tono character display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (g) following FIG. 117 (f), the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display 208 The combination of symbols is reduced and temporary stop display is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is an effect display in which the character scene of "win", the character of the lord and the enemy character is ended and the character of the lord has won. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the effect display won by the character of the hall is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (h) continued from FIG. 117 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is made. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (i) continued from FIG. 117 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit game effect display of the first round of the 15 R special big hit game is displayed. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol "Decoration 7" which is a stop symbol of a big hit is displayed, and a character string of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right. A string of "80 balls" indicating the sum of the numbers and a string of "big hit counts: 1" indicating the number of big hits at the lower right are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R's big hit game effect indication is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (j) following FIG. 117 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the 15R special big hit game is over and the character string of "Dito" is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the “Dito” string is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (k) following FIG. 117 (j), the state is shifted to the power support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "right strike me!" And a symbol indicating that right strike is performed, a variation icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display and a part of the character string "Please hit right!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 117 (l) following FIG. 117 (k), the power supply state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "door open error", a character string of "ball full error", a fluctuation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 reservation icon ac2 of the prefetching notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full error", a part of fluctuation icon ad5 and a special figure 2 reserve icon A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in the present effect example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and game states. The movable body 90 may overlap all the displays shown above, or the movable body 90 may not overlap the displayed displays.
An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the announcement effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 114 is performed by the player pressing the chance button 136 in the operation valid period of the chance button 136 of the announcement operation of the button operation. It shows. Even when the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 114 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. . Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) are performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily determined and displayed as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) are not performed. It may be done. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

  FIG. 118 (b) shows a state in which a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 114 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is finished. Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a prefetch notice. Also, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) are not performed. If a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) are performed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed compared to the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) are performed. In the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) are performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) are performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 119, a modified example of how the movable body 90 is viewed at the initial position shown in FIG. 112 will be described. The movable body 90 is located rearward of the game board 125 having a game nail.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30a at the initial position. The structural body 30 a has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a portion of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a portion of the movable body 90b, and a portion of the movable body 90c are visible through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 119 (b) shows an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30b at the initial position. The structural body 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically elongated rectangular notch at a substantially central portion. The structure 30 b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c are provided via the notch of the structure 30b. It is visible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 119 (c) is an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30c at the initial position. The structural body 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, since the movable body 90 is overlapped with the structure 30 c, the movable body 90 can not be viewed by the player. By disposing the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structural body 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structural body 30c may be made more easily visible during non-display than in display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  With reference to FIG. 120, a modification of the position and movement operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described.

  FIG. 120A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a 208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down in front of the liquid crystal display device a 208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a 208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 120C is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The drawing on the left side in FIG. 120C shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are positioned at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is positioned behind the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle part of FIG. 120 (c) shows the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display c208 after the movable liquid crystal display c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is positioned in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c 208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, a rendering example using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 131. The structure 247 used in the effect example of FIG. 121 to FIG. 131 is a structure in which the shape of the front is substantially circular and the design of the family crest is applied to the surface, and vertical movement is possible. Also, in FIG. 121 to FIG. 130, the left figure shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left figure. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is a schematic for determining whether a predetermined character display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani or a display su1 of the sun) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be seen by the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the drawing, the line of sight by which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ○, and the line of sight by which the player can not visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example is determined by setting a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 to a predetermined eye angle (e.g., a general sitting height (e.g., a seating height of 70 cm to 100 cm) The angle of the line of sight in the normal gaming attitude of the player) may be designed to be calculated so as not to be visible. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 121 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 121 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of a decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 121 (b) continued from FIG. 121 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display SB of the sabothani at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, It is displayed to appear from the bottom. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 121 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonal upper view has the character of Sabohani A part of the display SB can be viewed. In the description of the player's eyes in the present example and in the following examples, the term “substantially front” defines the angle within the range of ± about 10 ° as the front when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper means that the angle of the eye is + about 20 ° or more as the substantially oblique upper, and the substantially oblique lower means the eye angle of −20 ° or less as the substantially oblique lower, but the present disclosure Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, the position of the line of sight should be higher than that of the substantially front with substantially diagonal upper, and the position of the line of sight should be lower than that with the substantially front with substantially diagonal lower.

  In FIG. 121 (c) continued from FIG. 121 (b), the whole of the sabothan character display SB is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 121 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB on the safari moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 121 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the Sabohani character display You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 121 (e) following FIG. 121 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, this example is an example in which movement display is performed from a position at which the character display SB of Sabohani used for prenoting the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to a position at which the character display SB is not overlapped. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 122 to 130 is performed. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 is not moved and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, leftward, rightward and rotation. The player who is generally seen from the front may be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani by performing one or a plurality of movements, and may be overlapped with the structure 247. At least any one or more of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or rotational movement of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed while moving and displaying the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at the position. In some cases, it may be possible for a player who is looking substantially from the front to be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of SaboHani.

  FIG. 122 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is subjected to variable display in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 122 (b) continued from FIG. 122 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani character is overlapped at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 122 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 122 (c) following FIG. 122 (b) shows a state in which the animated display in which the character display SB of the sabotee moves further upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 122 (d) continued from FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which the animated display in which the character display SB of the sabo hani moves downward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 122 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at a substantially diagonal top has the character display of Sabohani You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 122 (e), which follows FIG. 122 (d), shows a state in which the animated display in which the character display SB of the sabotee moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 122 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  Thus, the present example again overlaps the structure 247 after performing the movement display from the position at which the sabothani character display SB used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. In this example, the movement display is performed at the selected position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 130 is performed.

  FIG. 123 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 and the structure 50t in stages. The structure 50t is an opaque thin plate-like structure, and the title of the game console is displayed on the surface. The figure on the left side of FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 123 (b) continued from FIG. 123 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani character is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 123 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 123 (d) following FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the sabothani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 123 (e), which follows FIG. 123 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern. In the state of FIG. 123 (d), the player looking at the structure 50t from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal bottom shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In this way, this example is overlapped to the structure 50t after the movement display is performed from the position where the character character SB of Sabohani used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. This is an example of moving display at a position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 124 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of a decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of the safohani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 124 (c) following FIG. 124 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped.

  FIG. 124 (d) following FIG. 124 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 124 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 124 (e) following FIG. 124 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  As described above, in this example, the position that is not overlapped with the structure 247 after the movement display is performed from the position where it is not overlapped with the structure 247 to the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for warning of the change is overlapped. Is an example of moving display. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 125 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 125 (b), which is continued from FIG. 125 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani in this example is larger than the character display SB of Sabohani shown in FIG. 124 and the like.

  FIG. 125 (c) following FIG. 125 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right part of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 125 (d) following FIG. 125 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped. In the state shown in FIG. 125 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see the substantially upper half of the character display SB of the Sabohani, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 125 (e), which follows FIG. 125 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  Thus, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is not overlapped to the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not to be overlapped with the structure 247 later, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an effect example which is always visible from the player in a substantially front view. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 126 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  126 (b) continues on FIG. 126 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, the entire character display SB of Sabohani at the position overlapped with the structure 247, It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In FIG. 126 (c) continued from FIG. 126 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display su1 of the sun is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapped with the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 126 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the display su1 of the sun and the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the sun display su1 and at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB.

  In FIG. 126 (d) continued from FIG. 126 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the display su1 of the sun upward is displayed, and the display su1 of the sun moves upward Showing an animation display to be displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3.

  In FIG. 126 (e) continued from FIG. 126 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sun display su1 is upward while the Sabothani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  Thus, in the present example, only the display su1 of the sun is displayed after the display 2 of the character display SB of Sabohan and the display su1 of the sun, which are used to announce the change, are overlapped with the structure 247. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not overlapping with. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 127 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of a decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  127 (b) continues on FIG. 127 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the whole of the sabothan character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247. The entire display su1 is displayed as it appears from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 127 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the substantially front can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the Sabohan character display SB and at least a portion of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 127 (c) following FIG. 127 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun move upward on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A character display SB of Sabohan and a display su1 of the sun are displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 127 (d) following FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which only the display su1 of the sun moves downward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon a3. In the state of FIG. 127 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the display su1 of the sun, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the sun of the display su1. The whole is visible.

  FIG. 127 (e) continued from FIG. 127 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, with the safohani character display SB being displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, the sun display su1 is further down The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. The player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not see the display su1 of the sun, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top can see at least a part of the display su1 of the sun .

  Thus, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the notice of the change are displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun In this example, movement display is performed at a position where su1 is not overlapped with the structure 247, and thereafter movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 is overlapped with the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 128 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude from the structure 247 in a radial shape. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as the advance notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

  In FIG. 128 (b), which is continued from FIG. 128 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the decorative symbol variation display is approximately the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani at a position overlapping the structure 247. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to move upward so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the effect image ef1 of the player who can not view the character display SB of the sabothani, The player who is watching is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohan and a part of the effect image ef1.

  In FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the safari is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving up so as to appear from the bottom. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabohani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 121 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the Sabohani character display You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB and effect image ef1 are displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, the present example is an example in which movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped, but the character display SB of Sabohani is used. Is an example in which the effect image ef1 attached to the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position not overlapped by the structure 247 before it is displayed at a position overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 129 shows three example effects using the structure 247. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 129 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the character display h113 of the temple and the balloon display h114 of the character string of "chance found when character is!" It is displayed to overlap in part. The balloon display h114 of the character string of “If you find a character!” Is a display for predicting that the character display SB of Sabohani appears, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

  In FIG. 129 (b) continued from FIG. 129 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Further, in the balloon display h114, a character string "during character appearance!" Is displayed. The character string of “character appearing!” May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabo Hani, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In FIG. 129 (c) continued from FIG. 129 (b), a character display SB of a safohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is enlarged. In the balloon display h114, a character string "during character expansion!" Is displayed. May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front is able to visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

  As described above, in this example, before displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for the advance notice of the change at the position where the SABOHANI character display SB is overlapped to the structure 247, a display for previewing that the SABOHANI character display SB is displayed After the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it is overlapped to the structure 247, a display is made to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position to be overlapped to the structure 247 is performed. In this example, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed on the screen is enlarged, and a display is provided to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the size of the character display SB of Sabohani to be enlarged is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily displayed finally.

  The drawing on the left side of FIG. 129 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 129 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the character display SB1 of the sabo hani 1 and the sabo hani 2 serving as the advance notice of the variation is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a portion of the character display SB1 of the Sabo Hani 1 and at least a portion of the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. is there. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of the advance notices displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally.

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 129 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned forward of the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is positioned forward of the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In (a) of FIG. 129, decorative symbol variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 as a notice display of the variation is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. A character display SB2 of Sabohani 2, which is a preliminary display of the change, is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 129 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabo hani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the SaboHani 1, and the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of SaboHani.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapped with the body 50t. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapped by the plurality of structures is large, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  FIG. 130 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 130 (b) continued from FIG. 130 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  In FIG. 130 (d), which is continued from FIG. 130 (c), the structure 247 is moved upward and located at a position where it overlaps with the character display SB of Sabothani displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 130 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but a player looking at the substantially oblique lower view of the character display SB of Sabohani At least a part is visible.

  Thus, in this example, after displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for anticipating the change at a position overlapped with the structure 247, the character movement SB is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and then the structure is performed. In this example, the body 247 is moved, and the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. It is also good. In this example, the movement of the structure 247 is carried out behind the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani, which is the advance display, but it is always displayed on the character display SB of Sabohani according to the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani. The movement of the structure 247 may be performed so as to overlap, or the movement of the structure 247 may be performed first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohan may be delayed.

  FIG. 131 shows an example of effect using the structure 247. FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap the structure 247. FIG. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 131 (b), the structure 247 is viewed from the upper left to the lower right. The player visually recognizing the structure 247 from the front can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani although a part of the effect image ef1 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the player viewing the structure 247 from the upper left to the lower right views a portion of the effect image ef1 and the substantially entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player visually recognized from the front. In addition, the effect of this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 130 is performed. It is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141, an example of effect using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. The arrows in FIGS. 132 to 141 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the holding icon and the fluctuation icon, but the locus and movement of the holding icon and the fluctuation icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

  FIG. 132 shows two examples of the effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 132 shows an example of the pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 132 (h) and 132 (i) after FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (g) and FIG. 132 (j) after FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 132 (a)-(i). Fig. 132 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  132 (b) following FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  132 (c) continues to FIG. 132 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default figure special figure 2 reserve icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 132 (e), which follows FIG. 132 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  132 (f) continues to FIG. 132 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 reserved icon a3 is a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be The notice display m1 may be a notice display for giving a notice that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display that the SP reach effect is carried out.

  In FIG. 132 (g) continued from FIG. 132 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  132 (h) following FIG. 132 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 to return to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 132 (i) following FIG. 132 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the moving animation is finished. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 132 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 132 (j) following FIG. 132 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 132 (g) is finished and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base where the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  132 (k) following FIG. 132 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 is finished, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement It shows the condition that has been

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. It is. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 133 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 133 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 133 (h) to 133 (j) after FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (g) and FIGS. 133 (k) to 133 (g) to 133 (a) to 133 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 133 (a)-(j). Fig. 133 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 133 (b) following FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (c) continued from FIG. 133 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (d) following FIG. 133 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (e), which follows FIG. 133 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 133 (f) continued from FIG. 133 (e). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Recently, a vertically-long rectangular holding icon (hereinafter referred to as “the holding icon while going out” is displayed on the pedestal displaying the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 as the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 with the character string “on the go” "" Is displayed. In addition, it may replace with a pending icon while going out, and may use a default shaped pending icon with a lighter color.

  FIG. 133 (g) continued from FIG. 133 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  FIG. 133 (h) following FIG. 133 (g) displays the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 was displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 5 is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  Fig. 133 (i) continued from Fig. 133 (h). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the base before moving is finished with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3. The hold icon in the same manner as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon while out of the office.

  In FIG. 133 (j) continued from FIG. 133 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon during leaving is erased.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 2 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 133 (k)-(m).

  In FIG. 133 (k) following FIG. 133 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 133 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears Be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, the on-hold icon re-appearing animation in which the on-hold icon of the aspect (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps the on-going on-hold icon and reappears is displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 133 (l) continued from FIG. 133 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is not moved. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 133 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon is erased while out of the office.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. Is an example of provisionally displaying a pending icon of another aspect in place of the pending icon being moved. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.

  FIG. 134 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 134 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 134 (h) and 134 (i) after FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (g) and FIG. 134 (j) after FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 134 (a)-(i). 134 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 134 (b) following FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (c) continued from FIG. 134 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 134 (d) following FIG. 134 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (e) following FIG. 134 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  134 (f) continues to FIG. 134 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 reserved icon a3 is a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a suspension icon temporary movement animation in which the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily moved to the pedestal for which the special view 1 suspension icon a 3 is displayed is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, and is used as a notice of the change. May be displayed.

  134 (g) continued from FIG. 134 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. Moreover, in the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b 3 is temporarily displayed on the base on which the special figure 1 reserve icon a 3 was displayed most recently. Is displayed on. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  134 (h) following FIG. 134 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 208ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as the notice display m1 is the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement is finished, and the special view 1 The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement. In addition, the suspension icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 134 (j) and (k).

  134 (j) following FIG. 134 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 134 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 suspension icon a 3 reappears on the base where the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily displayed. The suspension icon re-appearing animation and the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 move toward the original pedestal. The icon temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 hold icon b 3, but the special view 2 hold icon b 3 is a hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation It may be displayed to overlap. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  134 (k) following FIG. 134 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 is ended, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement Then, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is ended, and the special view 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the move.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. In the example below, the pending icon on the right is temporarily displayed in place of the pending icon being moved, and when the pending icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed pending icon returns to the original position. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.

  FIG. 135 shows two examples of the effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 135 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 132 (h) and 132 (i) after FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (g) and FIG. 132 (j) after FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 135 (a)-(i). FIG. 135 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 135 (b) following FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (c) continued from FIG. 135 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 135 (d) following FIG. 135 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (e), which follows FIG. 135 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 135 (f), which is continued from FIG. 135 (e), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of a cassette.

  In FIG. 135 (g) continued from FIG. 135 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  135 (h) continues to FIG. 135 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed.

  FIG. 135 (i) following FIG. 135 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 reserved icon a3 and the movement animation has ended. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 135 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 135 (j) continued from FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 135 (g) ends and the notice display m1 disappears. And a special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base on which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed, and the character string "under preparation" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  In FIG. 135 (k) following FIG. 135 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement It shows the condition that has been

As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol fluctuation display is re-varied is performed when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the temporary notice display while the temporary stop display of the missing symbol is displayed. There is no example.
FIG. 136 shows an example of presentation using the hold icon in stages.

  136 (a) is the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 136 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 136 (b) following FIG. 136 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 136 (c) continued from FIG. 136 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 136 (d) following FIG. 136 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 136 (e) following FIG. 136 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 136 (f) continued from FIG. 136 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special view 1 reserved icon a3 being a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  136 (g) continued from FIG. 136 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  136 (h) following FIG. 136 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 136 (i) following FIG. 136 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 is displayed as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation to return to the position before movement is completed. .

  136 (j) following FIG. 136 (i) has shown the state as which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" was displayed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 136 (k) continued from FIG. 136 (j), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 136 (l) continued from FIG. 136 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  136 (m) following FIG. 136 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 136 (n) following FIG. 136 (m) shows the state in which the re-movement animation has returned to the position before movement, with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reservation icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 There is.

As described above, in this example, while the temporary stop display of the out pattern is displayed, the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle pattern of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display, and the decorative symbol variation display changes again and again. It is an example to do. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 137 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  FIG. 137 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 137 (b) following FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 137 (c) continued from FIG. 137 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 137 (d), which follows FIG. 137 (c), shows the state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  137 (e) following FIG. 137 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 137 (f) continued from FIG. 137 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5”, special view 1 reserved icon a3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  137 (g) continued from FIG. 137 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  137 (h) following FIG. 137 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 137 (i) following FIG. 137 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation has ended. .

  137 (j) following FIG. 137 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 137 (k) continued from FIG. 137 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special view 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 137 (l) continued from FIG. 137 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  137 (m) following FIG. 137 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 137 (n) shows a state in which the re-movement animation for returning to the position before movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the notice display m1 as the special figure 2 holding icon b3 following FIG. 137 (m) There is.

As described above, this example is an example in which the pseudo continuous notice is performed multiple times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. If there is not enough hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 138 shows an example of presentation using the hold icon in stages.

  138 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 138 (b) following FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 138 (c) continued from FIG. 138 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 138 (d) following FIG. 138 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 138 (e) following FIG. 138 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  138 (f) continues to FIG. 138 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  138 (g) continued from FIG. 138 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  138 (h) continues to FIG. 138 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 138 (i) following FIG. 138 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation has ended. .

  In FIG. 138 (j) following FIG. 138 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "reach!" Is displayed.

As described above, in this example, when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started It is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.
FIG. 139 shows an example of effects using the fluctuation icon in stages.

  Fig. 139 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 139 (b) following FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (c) continued from FIG. 139 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 139 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 139 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 139 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 139 (f) following FIG. 139 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon ad1 is displayed from the fluctuation icon display area 280 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". It shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out and moving as the advance notice m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 are the same display mode. Further, on the pedestal of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the fluctuation icon is not displayed. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a prefetch notice. May be

  In FIG. 139 (g) continued from FIG. 139 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m2 indicates a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  139 (h) continues to FIG. 139 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice m2 returning to the position (base) of the variation icon display area 280 is displayed. -The temporary stop display of "decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the advance notice m2.

  FIG. 139 (i), which follows FIG. 139 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 ends as the notice display m2 as the fluctuation icon ad1. .

  As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the variation icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the advance notice during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. In addition to the variation icon of the default mode, a variation icon of an aspect other than the default mode may be used as the advance notice m2 of this example. It shows.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 140 (b) following FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (c) continued from FIG. 140 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 140 (d) following FIG. 140 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (e), which follows FIG. 140 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 140 (f) continued from FIG. 140 (e), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the advance notice m1 is a display used as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 140 (g) continued from FIG. 140 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  140 (h) following FIG. 140 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed.

  FIG. 140 (i) following FIG. 140 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation is finished. .

  Drawing 140 (j) following Drawing 140 (i) shows the state where the next design variation was performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed, and the moving icon of the holding icon moves the holding icon to the left and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the changing icon display area 208 and the moving animation of the holding icon changes .

  FIG. 140 (k) following FIG. 140 (j) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 140 (l) continued from FIG. 140 (k), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 3" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 140 (m) following FIG. 140 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 2" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decorative 2" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 3" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 140 (n) following FIG. 140 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3 is displayed.

  FIG. 140 (o), which follows FIG. 140 (n), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  FIG. 140 (p) following FIG. 140 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol change display is displayed, and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the left and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. There is.

  FIG. 140 (q) following FIG. 140 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 140 (r) continued from FIG. 140 (q), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 are the same display mode, and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 140 (s) continued from FIG. 140 (r), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area It shows a state in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 7" which is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 8" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  140 (t) in FIG. 140 (s) displays the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (base) where the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 was displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3 "is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 140 (u) continued from FIG. 140 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is finished with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3; Reach production of is performed.

  As described above, this example is an example of developing a reach effect by continuously notifying that a predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. is there. The first and second notices appearing in this example are used as pre-reading notices, and the third notices appearing are used as notices of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the other effects shown in FIG. 132 to FIG. 141 is performed.

  FIG. 141 shows an example of presentation using the hold icon in stages. Fig. 141 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. Further, the special view 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of the character of the lord. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of the character of your character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 141 (b) following FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the form of the character of the statue is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (c) following FIG. 141 (b) is a special figure 2 in which a special character 1 is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 141 (d) following FIG. 141 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (e) following FIG. 141 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  141 (f) continues to FIG. 141 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 2 reservation icon b2 is a special view 1 and 2 pending icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out from special drawing 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2 and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out from the special view 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. All of the notice displays c1 to c3, the special view 2 suspension icon b2 and b3, and the special view 1 suspension icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b2, b3 and the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 141 (g) following FIG. 141 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 changes. It shows a state where it has changed to the advance notice c3 '. The advance notices c1 'to c3' are all the same display mode, and the display mode is such that the character of the large hall displayed is fighting with the Japanese sword removed. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display c1 'fights against "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped on the left symbol display area 208a, The battle animation is a battle animation in which the notice display c2 'fights with "decoration 4", which is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3', which is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, is displayed temporarily It is displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (h) following FIG. 141 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3 'changes to c3. The notice display c3 displayed the special view 2 hold icon b3 at the position at which the notice display c2 displayed the special view 1 hold icon a3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2. The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is ended, and a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown.

  In FIG. 141 (i) continued from FIG. 141 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special view 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is ended as the movement before the movement. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

  As described above, in the present example, when the plurality of reserved icons collide with the plurality of decoration symbols as the plurality of advance notices during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decoration symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started. Is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 132 to FIG. 140 is performed. When the number of pending icons used as the advance notice display of this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the advance notice display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 162. FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (c) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  142 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 142 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the hall is displayed in the approximate center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 142 (b) continued from FIG. 142 (a), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 142 (c) following FIG. 142 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the brow character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 143 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 143 (b) following FIG. 143 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple is displayed from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 143 (c) continued from FIG. 143 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed Shows the status displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon and the design of the sunny mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed) Then, after stopping display at the approximate center of the screen, it is possible to display the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark in order from the top of the character string, or even if all the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark are displayed at once. Good. The same configuration may be applied to other balloon display.

  In FIG. 143 (d) continued from FIG. 143 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 143 (e) continued from FIG. 143 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1 may be overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may be overlapped with the balloon display f2 .

  FIG. 143 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon animation f1 is moved upward and the balloon animation f2 is moved leftward at the same time.

  In FIG. 143 (f) following FIG. 143 (e), a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left and a moving animation is performed, and the balloon f1 is moved upward. The moving animation is performed, and the state displayed at the upper center of the screen is shown.

  143 (g) continued from FIG. 143 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and an operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 143 (h) following FIG. 143 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and height are different. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  Also, in FIG. 143 (h), due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, the movement display in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right are simultaneously performed.

  In FIG. 143 (i) continued from FIG. 143 (h), a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right, and a moving animation is performed to be displayed approximately at the center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward The moving animation is performed and displayed at the approximate upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows a state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, after the frame, the balloon display f2 of the wolf character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may delete the balloon display f3 after deleting the balloon display f2, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. At the same time, the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the n-th time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number It may be erased before the start of) or may be erased before displaying the temporary stop indication. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out gradually in the same place, or in the same manner as the balloon display f1 of the Tono character After displaying the moving animation moving upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction of each appearance. The same may be applied to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, the balloon display shown in the example of the effect of the present example and the subsequent example of the effect may be an advance notice display of the change, or may be a preview advance notice display. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed. In the balloon display described in the present example and the following drawings, patterns of each configuration (weather mark (fine mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) of the balloon display, display of character strings, frame, display of character name, character In each of the face images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or all may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character may crack may be displayed. The entire balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates and the animation display in which the display of the character string blinks and the animation display in which the character blinks. In addition, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and the animation display in which the character palpates may be displayed while the number of characters in the display of the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display may be repeated to rotate and return to the original posture, one animation display to return to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original may be moved after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one gloss display moving or changing may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display of the respective configurations of the balloon display may overlap with a part of another animation of each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 144 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 144 (b) continued from FIG. 144 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple is displayed from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 144 (c) continued from FIG. 144 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed. Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 144 (d) continued from FIG. 144 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 144 (e) continued from FIG. 144 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , A moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 144 (f) following FIG. 144 (e), the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 144 (g), which is continued from FIG. 144 (f), a balloon display f2 is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 144 (h) following FIG. 144 (g) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left and the moving animation is performed and the screen is displayed approximately at the center of the screen.

  In FIG. 144 (i) continued from FIG. 144 (h), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 144 (j) following FIG. 144 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. 11 shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 144 (k) continued from FIG. 144 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is done.

  In FIG. 144 (l) following FIG. 144 (k), the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 144 (m) following FIG. 144 (l) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, with a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 145 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 145 (b) following FIG. 145 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple from the left end of the screen is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 145 (c) continued from FIG. 145 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed. Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 145 (d) continued from FIG. 145 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 145 (e) continued from FIG. 145 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 145 (f) following FIG. 145 (e) shows a state in which the balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left and the moving animation is performed, and the screen is stopped and displayed substantially at the center . The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the hall character and the character image of "don" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 145 (g) continued from FIG. 145 (f), after the moving animation moving toward the left of the balloon display f2 is finished, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In FIG. 145 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the clear mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Approximately the upper half of can be seen. In addition, at a certain timing between FIG. 145 (f) and FIG. 145 (g), the balloon part of the balloon display f1 is in a state where a part of the pattern of the clear mark is displayed and the character string is not displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 145 (h) continued from FIG. 145 (g), the moving animation moving to the upper side of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 145 (i) continued from FIG. 145 (h), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 145 (j) following FIG. 145 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 145 (k) following FIG. 145 (j) shows a state in which the balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right and the moving animation is performed and the stop display is performed at the approximate center of the screen . The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the brow character and the character image of "爺" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 145 (l), which is subsequent to FIG. 145 (k), shows a state in which moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In FIG. 145 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and the part of the frame of the design of the cloud mark and the balloon part Approximately the upper half of can be seen. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 144 (m) following FIG. 145 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is done.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. 146 shows an example of the pattern 1 performing the effects of FIGS. 146 (n) to (q) after FIGS. 146 (a) to (m) and FIG. 146 (r) to (m) after FIGS. 146 (a) to (m) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
146 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  146 (b) continues from FIG. 146 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 146 (c) continued from FIG. 146 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 146 (d) continued from FIG. 146 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 146 (e) following FIG. 146 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 146 (f) following FIG. 146 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  146 (g) continued from FIG. 146 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 146 (h) following FIG. 146 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  146 (i) following FIG. 146 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  146 (j) following FIG. 146 (i) is a button preview display h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 146 (k) following FIG. 146 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of "Honey" displayed at a position overlapped with the Sabo Hani character image and the Sabo Hani character image, and a character string and pattern of "When reached" are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 or the like.

  146 (l) following FIG. 146 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The display is stopped at the position where the balloon part f4 appeared from the lower part of the screen has appeared, and the movement on the balloon display f3 is also interrupted and displayed once. In addition, the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper end of the screen.

  146 (m) continues to FIG. 146 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f2. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  146 (n) following FIG. 146 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which a character image of "Shippu" and a character string and a pattern of "Heating fever" displayed on the face image of the Gale character and the face image of the Gale character are displayed. It is an indication that includes. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 and the like.

  In FIG. 146 (o) following FIG. 146 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 146 (p) following FIG. 146 (o), scroll display of balloon displays f4 and f5 is performed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  146 (q) following FIG. 146 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
146 (r) following FIG. 146 (a) to (m) is displayed so that the balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and the balloon display f2 to f2, which has been stopped and displayed in FIG. 146 (m) It shows a state in which a moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect that the balloon displays f1 to f4 are scrolled upward in order is displayed, the effect that the balloon displays f2 to f5 are scrolled to the right is performed.

  In FIG. 146 (s) following FIG. 146 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to simultaneously come out from the right end of the screen .

  146 (t) following FIG. 146 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 147 shows an example of a pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 147 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 147 (a) to (j) and FIG. 147 (m) after FIGS. 147 (a) to (j) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Fig. 147 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 147 (b) following FIG. 147 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 147 (c) continued from FIG. 147 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 147 (d) continued from FIG. 147 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 147 (e) continued from FIG. 147 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 147 (f) following FIG. 147 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 147 (g) continued from FIG. 147 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 147 (h) following FIG. 147 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 147 (i) continued from FIG. 147 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  147 (j) continued from FIG. 147 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 147 (k) following FIG. 147 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

  FIG. 147 (l) following FIG. 147 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Thereafter, there may be a case in which reach effect is started while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are erased, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 147 (m) following FIGS. 147 (a) to (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112 are displayed. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 147 (n) following FIG. 147 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 has been temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 'appearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. After this, the balloon displays f1 'and f2 may be erased and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect or the reach effect may be started, or the animation in which the holding icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Good.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 148 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 148 (b) following FIG. 148 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  In FIG. 148 (c) continued from FIG. 148 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 148 (d) continued from FIG. 148 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 148 (e) following FIG. 148 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In (f) of FIG. 148, which is a continuation of FIG. 148 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 ′ was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 148 (g) continued from FIG. 148 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1' and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at the position where the action is made, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 148 (h) continued from FIG. 148 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen at the same time as the moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f2 is configured not to be displayed but to be erased above the position where the balloon display f1 'is displayed. Also, by displaying the balloon display f1 'in priority to the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving in a scroll display behind the balloon display f1, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured such that the overlapping parts of 'are not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the brow character of the balloon display f2 and the character image of the brow are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ', they are scrolled to the position of the upper end of the screen. As described above, in this example, when a balloon display having a high hit probability appears, the callout having a high reliability is left on the screen by prioritizing and deleting the balloon having the low hit reliability. It is configured.

  In FIG. 148 (i) continued from FIG. 148 (h), with the balloon display f1 'being stopped and displayed, a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed and the balloon display is performed. The state f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 ′ and f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 149 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 149 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 149 (b) following FIG. 149 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 149 (c) following FIG. 149 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 149 (d) continued from FIG. 149 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 149 (e) following FIG. 149 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. After the balloon display f2 by the キ ャ ラ ク タ character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In this example, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 is moved upward to perform a moving animation. Therefore, the balloon display f2 is approximately below the balloon display f1. Displayed to overlap in half.

  In FIG. 149 (f) following FIG. 149 (e), in the state where the substantially lower half of the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, a moving animation of moving upward together is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 149 (g), which is continued from FIG. 149 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and a chance is given to a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 149 (h) following FIG. 149 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of “balloon display f2” (“Today's weather”) The balloon part of the balloon display 2 by overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part (the character string of "Today's weather" or the frame part of the cloud mark or the balloon part ) Is configured to overlap with part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the rain mark and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters overlap in the balloon portion. There may be cases where the balloon part may overlap with the face image of the character, or there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the balloon part.

  In FIG. 149 (i), which is continued from FIG. 149 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 are moved upward is performed, and the upper end of the balloon f1 and the lower end of the balloon f3 fit on the screen Shows a state in which the moving animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or ended. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 to f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be possible. Further, in the present example, the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays are configured to be uniform, but the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays may be configured not to be even. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a presentation example of balloon display will be described. FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 150 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 150 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 150 (b) following FIG. 150 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 150 (c) continued from FIG. 150 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 150 (d) continued from FIG. 150 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 150 (e) continued from FIG. 150 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and part of each configuration of the balloon display (the weather pattern, characters, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be reduced to be different for each configuration.

  In FIG. 150 (f) following FIG. 150 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 150 (g) continued from FIG. 150 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 150 (h) following FIG. 150 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f3 by a princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before being moved upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the degree of reduction of the balloon display f1. In addition, one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced more or less than the other, or the configuration to be reduced between the one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 150 (i) following FIG. 150 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or ended and the stop display is performed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (k) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  151 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 151 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 151 (b) following FIG. 151 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 151 (c) following FIG. 151 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 151 (d) continued from FIG. 151 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 151 (e) following FIG. 151 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  In (f) of FIG. 151, which is a continuation of (e) of FIG. 151, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f1 ′ are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  151 (g) continued from FIG. 151 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ', and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1' The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 151 (h) continued from FIG. 151 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1 'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'is enlarged, and as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is floated instead. . In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "SP reach confirmation" are displayed. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased according to the change of the new balloon display f1 ′, but for example, it is moved in any of the left-right direction to be erased It may be overlapped, may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a which has changed without moving, and may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 151 (i) continued from FIG. 151 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to fit within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 151 (j) following FIG. 151 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 151 (k) following FIG. 151 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The character string "SP reach confirmation" is deleted and the character string "all rotation reach confirmation" is displayed. The character string “all rotation reach determination” is displayed as if it protrudes from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "all rotation reach confirmation" is a character image of a decorative symbol or a hallmark, a holding icon, a variation icon, a special figure 1 holding number aa1 or a special figure 1 fourth pattern aa2 or a special drawing 2 holding number aa3 There may be a case where the display of the second pattern aa4 of 2 and the common drawing reserve number aa5, the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the display of the character string of the tutorial display area tu1 or the display other than these may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  152 (b) continues from FIG. 152 (a) so that a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a character display m3 of a princess is displayed from the left end of the screen. Princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th design aa2 of special drawing 1, the special drawing 2 reservation number aa3, the 4th design aa4 of special drawing 2, the common drawing reservation number aa5, the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing There is.

  In FIG. 152 (c), which is continued from FIG. 152 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 152 (d) continued from FIG. 152 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of the character It is displayed to be. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  In FIG. 152 (e) continued from FIG. 152 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, an animation is displayed in which the princess character m3 moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed in the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the left character part of the balloon part f2 It is displayed to overlap.

  In FIG. 152 (f) following FIG. 152 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the middle character part of the balloon part f2 of the balloon display f2 It is displayed to be.

  In FIG. 152 (g) continued from FIG. 152 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the character part of the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern part of the sunny mark and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap with the character part of the right part and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button advance notice h110 and a part of the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 152 (h) following FIG. 152 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the image of the cloudy mark on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the rain on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f3 It is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the image of the mark and a part of the face image of the brow character.

  In FIG. 152 (i) continued from FIG. 152 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and is erased so as to come out from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the nephew character. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 153 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  153 (b) continues from FIG. 153 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Doun appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. The frame portion of the balloon display f1 is difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 153 (c) continued from FIG. 153 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 153 (d) continued from FIG. 153 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 153 (e) continued from FIG. 153 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 153 (f) following FIG. 153 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and the patterns of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 153 (g) continued from FIG. 153 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the sunny mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 153 (h) following FIG. 153 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the design of the cloudy mark, and a portion of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

  In FIG. 153 (i) continued from FIG. 153 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. By the structure 247, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position Alternatively, the balloon display may be configured to move, or may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 154 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  Continuing from FIG. 154 (a), FIG. 154 (b) is such that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the light emission display of the smiling character is performed on the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 154 (c) continued from FIG. 154 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 154 (d) continued from FIG. 154 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button advance display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 154 (e) continued from FIG. 154 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 154 (f) following FIG. 154 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 154 (g) continued from FIG. 154 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the clear mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 154 (h) continued from FIG. 154 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 154 (i), which is continued from FIG. 154 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, when light emission display is performed by the light emission panel positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 155 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 155 (b) following FIG. 155 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 155 (c) following FIG. 155 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 155 (d) continued from FIG. 155 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 155 (e) continued from FIG. 155 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the character of the character of the character, part of the character of the character "don", and part of the frame portion of the character balloon display f2. .

  In FIG. 155 (f) following FIG. 155 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord character, the whole of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the wolf character It overlaps with part of the image.

  In FIG. 155 (g) continued from FIG. 155 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a substantially entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the brow character, and the button preview h110 overlaps with all of the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 155 (h) continued from FIG. 155 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the first display, the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "hime" There is.

  In FIG. 155 (i), which is continued from FIG. 155 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the whole character string, the rain mark A part of the pattern of the part, a part of the face image of the princess character, and the whole of the character image of "hime" are overlapped.

  In this example, when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decoration pattern, the fourth pattern, the mini decoration pattern, the notice display, the prefetch notice display, the tutorial display, the pseudo link display, the reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive calls display, number of acquired balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of the light amount adjustment display, the button press display, the error display, the ball removal display, the door open display, and the abnormality occurrence display.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (h) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 156 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 156 (b) following FIG. 156 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1 ', the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the lord character and the face image of the character of the lord character, and the character string and pattern of "simulative chance!" It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  In FIG. 156 (c) following FIG. 156 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 reserve icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab.

  In FIG. 156 (d) following FIG. 156 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 156 (e) following FIG. 156 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 'by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1' moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of キ ャ ラ ク タ, a character string of “hold change” and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 156 (f) following FIG. 156 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is performed, and a movement in which the balloon display f2' appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2' is in the state of being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1' was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 156 (g) following FIG. 156 (f) shows a state in which the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special view 1, 2 suspension icon display area 280ab There is.

  In FIG. 156 (h) following FIG. 156 (g), the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 'is replaced with the special view 1 reserve icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special view 1 reserve icon a4. It is done. After this, the balloon display f1 ′, f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation may be performed in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. It is also good.

  The effect of the present example is an example in which continuous announcement by the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2' is performed. The balloon display f1 'is used for the advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for the advance notice. Moreover, in this example, the design of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved to be displayed as a hold icon, but the variation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part The notice icon to be used may be moved to the inside of the balloon and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon may be displayed so as to be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step. Further, in FIGS. 157 to 159, the sub liquid crystal a 208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b 208 is provided on the right side.

  Fig. 157 (a) shows the special liquid crystal a 208, special drawing 1 reservation number aa1, special drawing 1 pattern 4 aa2, special drawing 2 reservation number aa3, special drawing 2 pattern 4 aa4, common drawing reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 157 (b) continues from FIG. 157 (a), and the balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) At the same time as a part of f1 is displayed to appear, a balloon comes out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a 208 (a part at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) Another part of the display f1 is displayed to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather is" and a pattern of a sunny mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a character image of the character The character image of “don” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 157 (c) continued from FIG. 157 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the balloon display f1 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously directed upward. A moving animation to move is displayed, and it is shown in a stopped state at the approximate center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a 208 and displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (d) continued from FIG. 157 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 157 (e) continued from FIG. 157 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. While the time limit display h112 is deleted, a part of the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (a portion at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) It is displayed to be. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image and a face of an eyebrow character The character image of “爺” displayed above the face image of the character of “” and a part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 157 (f), which is continued from FIG. 157 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f1 is moved upward to move animation is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and it is stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  In FIG. 157 (g) continued from FIG. 157 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 and an operation expiration date h112 are displayed at a position where a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 overlap. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (h) continued from FIG. 157 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The time limit display h112 is erased, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b 208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which a character string of "afternoon weather" and a pattern of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess The character image of “Hime” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 157 (i), which is continued from FIG. 157 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is moved upward, and the moving animation is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows the special liquid crystal a 208, special drawing 1 number aa1 of holding, special symbol 4 aa2 of special drawing 1, special figure 2 holding number aa3, special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, general drawing number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 158 (b), which is continued from FIG. 158 (a), the balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The f1 is displayed as it appears. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In (c) of FIG. 158 (c), which is a continuation of FIG. 158 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 158 (d) continued from FIG. 158 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 158 (e) following FIG. 158 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 by a wolf character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  In (f) of FIG. 158 (e), which is continued from FIG. 158 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is up. The moving animation to move toward is performed, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed in a stopped state substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 continued to FIG. 158 (f), in FIG. 158 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are displayed. The button preview display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the overlapping positions, indicating a state in which a preview effect that urges the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 158 (h) following FIG. 158 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 already erased is displayed so as to be shrunk in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 158 (i) continued from FIG. 158 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 An animation is performed to move downward, and a balloon display is displayed so as to be stored under the sub liquid crystal b 208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b 208. When the sub liquid crystal b 208 is full of balloon display, it may be deleted from the old balloon display, or a new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. Half balloon display may be erased.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorative It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 159 (a) to 159 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  In FIG. 159 (a), the special liquid crystal a 208 includes the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 4 symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 159 (b) continues from FIG. 159 (a) from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b 208 (the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) A balloon display f1 is displayed to appear. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 159 (c) following FIG. 159 (b) shows a state in which, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 159 (d) following FIG. 159 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 159 (e), which follows FIG. 159 (d), the next change is started, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In (f) of FIG. 159 (e), which is continued from FIG. 159 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is upward Movement animation to move is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 159 (g) continued from FIG. 159 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 159 (h) continued from FIG. 159 (g), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 159 (i), which follows FIG. 159 (h), shows a state in which “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9” is stopped on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 159 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b 208, and the balloon display f3 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. .

  In FIG. 159 (j) following FIG. 159 (i), the next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon display f1 to f3 in the sub liquid crystal b208 Is taking place continuously.

  In FIG. 159 (k) continued from FIG. 159 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f6 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 has a character image of "Chibi princess" displayed on the face image of Chibi princess character and Chibi princess character's face image and "Evening weather" and "reach kana?" It is a display including the balloon part where the design of the clear mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice of the reach being performed in the change.

  In FIG. 159 (l), which is continued from FIG. 159 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen. At the stage when the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or ended.

  FIG. 159 (m) following FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the reach effect of “decor 4” is being performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, this example is an example in which the balloon display is continuously displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  FIG. 160 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 160 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 160 (i) to 160 (k) are performed after FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (h) and FIG. 160 (i ′) after FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs rendition of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 160 (a)-(k).

  FIG. 160 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 160 (b) following FIG. 160 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 160 (c) continued from FIG. 160 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 160 (d) continued from FIG. 160 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more same balloon displays may be continuous.

  In FIG. 160 (f) following FIG. 160 (e), movement animation is performed in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 160 (g) continued from FIG. 160 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of both balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the chance button 136 is imitated at a position overlapping both balloon display f1. The button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 160 (h) following FIG. 160 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and it is immediately before the both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a balloon display f1b is displayed from the bottom of the screen so as to appear. In the balloon display f1b, the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character of Tono and the character image of "don" displayed on the image of the character of the character It is a display that includes a balloon part in which a character string and a pattern are displayed that are visible and that are visible and stupid. In addition, the blowout part of the blowout display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 160 (i) following FIG. 160 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 160 (j) following FIG. 160 (i) shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1b is being performed.

  FIG. 160 (k) following FIG. 160 (j) shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 160 (i ′) to (l ′).

  FIG. 160 (i ') following FIG. 160 (a) to (h) shows a state in which the scroll display of the blowout part f1 b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 160 (j ') following FIG. 160 (i'), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button advance display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date showing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 by a gauge. It shows a state in which h112 is displayed.

  In FIG. 160 (k ′) continued from FIG. 160 (j ′), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon f1b is resumed. Ru.

  FIG. 160 (l ') following FIG. 160 (k') shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. In addition, every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, the button advance notice effect may be performed, or the button advance notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the strings of "When all on the person, it looks like a foolish wisdom, and what is below is something that looks like a foolish one." May be scrolled and not all may be scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (g) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 161 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 161 (b) following FIG. 161 (a), two balloon displays f1 are displayed from the upper right and lower right of the screen so as to simultaneously appear, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  In FIG. 161 (c) continued from FIG. 161 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, balloon displays f2 and f3 are simultaneously displayed from the right end of the screen, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. Also, animations of moving up to the left at the same speed with the upper and lower balloon displays f1 are started.

  In FIG. 161 (d) continued from FIG. 161 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 161 (e) continued from FIG. 161 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 161 (f), which follows FIG. 161 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed, and emerge from the left end in the order of appearance It is a state just before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all balloon displays move at the same speed in the same direction is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves at different speeds in different directions may be performed. Further, the balloon display used for the notice of the change and the advance notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice and the advance notice of the change, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  In FIG. 161 (g) continued from FIG. 161 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed, and comes out from the left end in the order of appearance Shows the state after being erased. After this, there may be a case where SP reach effect or all rotation reach effect may be started, or there may be an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 simultaneously started are simultaneously displayed, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may be ended, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may be faster in moving speed than the other. In addition, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are simultaneously displayed, the display may end simultaneously, but one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may have a moving speed faster than the other.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 162 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 162 (a) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 162A is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f2 can not be viewed simultaneously.

  FIG. 162 (b) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 162 (b) is an example of moving the balloon display f1 upward when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to simultaneously view the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f2.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 162.

  (E1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and for example (for example, FIG. 112) (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 112), and second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 112) A game console, wherein the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 112), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (See, for example, FIG. 112), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and in the first state, the first light emitting means Said second light emitting means One of them overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are the second movable means (See, for example, FIG. 113 (d)), the light emission mode of the first light emitting unit is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (eg, FIG. 113). The light emission mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 113 (b) and (d)). d) see), and a game console characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (E2) The game console according to e1, wherein the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), in the first state. A game console characterized in that a first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)).

  (E3) The game console according to e1 or e2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 119 (c) )), That is a game stand characterized by.

  (E4) The game console according to any one of e1 to e3, wherein in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), A game stand characterized by

  (E5) The game console according to any one of e1 to e4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of transitioning from the initial state to the second state via at least the first state. A game stand characterized by (see, for example, FIGS. 113 (a) to (d)).

  (E6) The game console according to any one of e1 to e5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, the movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 112), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third light emitting means. (See, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting unit does not overlap with the third movable (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)); A game stand characterized by

  (E7) The game console according to any one of e1 to e6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 112), In an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (E8) The game console according to e7, wherein the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)). Play table.

  (E9) The game console according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). A game console characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the cover (see, for example, FIG. 113A).

  (E10) The game console according to any one of e1 to e9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 113 (b)), A game stand characterized by the above.

  (E11) The game console according to any one of e1 to e10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (eg, FIG. 113 (c)). ~ (Refer to (e)), the game stand characterized by the above.

  (E12) The game console according to any one of e1 to e11, including a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 112 (b)), the substrate being the first light emission 112 and a second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), That the game stand characterized by.

  (E13) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e12, comprising a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 125) having a game nail, the first movable means being behind the gaming board Game means (see, for example, FIG. 119).

  (E14) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (E15) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(F1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and for example (for example, FIG. 112) (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 112), and second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 112) A game console, wherein the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 112), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (See, for example, FIG. 112), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and in the first state, the first light emitting means Said second light emitting means One of the overlap between the second movable unit (e.g., see FIG. 113 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)), the first light emitting means is , And means covered by the first cover (for example, the cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 112 (b)), and the second light emission means is means covered by the first cover (for example, , FIG. 112 (b)), and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (F2) The game console according to f1, wherein the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), in the first state. A game console characterized in that a first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)).

  (F3) The game console according to f1 or f2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 119 (c) )), That is a game stand characterized by.

  (F4) The game console according to any one of f1 to f3, wherein in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), A game stand characterized by

  (F5) The game console according to any one of f1 to f4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of transitioning from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game stand characterized by (see, for example, FIGS. 113 (a) to (d)).

  (F6) The game console according to any one of f1 to f5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, the movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 112), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third light emitting means. (See, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting unit does not overlap with the third movable (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)); A game stand characterized by

  (F7) The game console according to any one of f1 to f6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 112), In an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (F8) The game console according to f7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)). Play table.

  (F9) The game console according to any one of f1 to f8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, a cover 90b3) (see, for example, FIG. b) see, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means overlapping with the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), and a game console characterized by:

  (F10) The game console according to any one of f1 to f9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 113 (b)), A game stand characterized by the above.

  (F11) The game console according to any one of f1 to f10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, FIG. 113 (c)). ~ (Refer to (e)), the game stand characterized by the above.

  (F12) The game console according to any one of f1 to f11, including a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 112 (b)), wherein the substrate is the first light emission 112 and a second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), That the game stand characterized by.

  (F13) The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f12, comprising a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 125) having a game nail, wherein the first movable means is behind the gaming board Game means (see, for example, FIG. 119).

  (F14) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (F15) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

  (G1) A game console comprising a first movable means (for example, movable body 1) and a second movable means (for example, movable body 1), wherein the first movable means is a first movable means Of the second moving means (for example, an operation of moving downward). (See, for example, FIG. 110 (c)), the initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. ), The position of the second movable means having performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means having performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 111C). ), That the game stand characterized by.

  The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  (G2) The game console according to g1, wherein the moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation is the same as the moving direction of the second movable means in the second operation. (See, for example, FIG. 111 (c)),

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even while the second operation is being performed.

(G3) The game console according to g1 or g2, wherein at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means overlap in the front-rear direction, the second movable means The game console characterized in that the other part of is visible from the front.
It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(G4) The game console according to any one of g1 to g3, further comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the position of the display means is the same as the second operation performed. It is located behind the position of a 2nd movable means (for example, refer FIG.111 (c)), and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.
It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(G5) The gaming table according to g4, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string of "Please pull a ball") (for example, FIG. 111 (b), at least a portion of the first error indication may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 111 (c )), That is a game stand characterized by.
It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(G6) The game console according to g5, wherein the first error display is a display with no ball (see, for example, FIG. 111 (b)).
In some cases, it may be possible to change the appearance of the ball removal display.

  (G7) The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (G8) A gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.
The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.
-Both the first operation and the second operation may be performed simultaneously, one may be performed and the other may be performed, or only one or the other may be performed.
-Both the first and second movable means may simultaneously return to the initial position after both the first movement and the second movement are performed, and one after the other returns back. It is also good.
-One of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate while the other moves while returning to the initial position.
-The LED of the second movable means may emit light during the first operation, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-The LED of the first movable means may perform the light emission effect during the second operation, and may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even when the first movable means is positioned in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform the light emission effect, and the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means may be performed Good.

(H1) first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, refer to FIG. 112)
The first light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 112), the second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 112) And the first movable means is means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and the first movable means is the first movable means. The first movable means is a means having a light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112). One of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both of the two light emitting means are (See, for example, FIG. 113 (d)), in the initial state, at least a portion of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is a structure (eg, structure A game console which is overlapped with the body 30a) (see, for example, FIG. 119 (a)).

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (H2) The game console according to h1, wherein the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), in the first state. A game console characterized in that a first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)).

  (H3) The game console according to h1 or h2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 119 (c) )), That is a game stand characterized by.

  (H4) The game console according to any one of h1 to h3, wherein in the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), A game stand characterized by

  (H5) The game console according to any one of h1 to h4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of transitioning from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game stand characterized by (see, for example, FIGS. 113 (a) to (d)).

  (H6) The game console according to any one of h1 to h5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, the movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 112), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third light emitting means. (See, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting unit does not overlap with the third movable (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)); A game stand characterized by

  (H7) The game console according to any one of h1 to h6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 112), In an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (H8) The game console according to h7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)). Play table.

  (H9) The game console according to any one of h1 to h8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3), and in the initial state, the first movable means A game stand characterized in that a light emitting means is a means overlapping with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

  (H10) The game console according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 113 (b)), A game stand characterized by the above.

  (H11) The game console according to any one of h1 to h10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, FIG. 113 (c)). ~ (Refer to (e)), the game stand characterized by the above.

  (H12) The game console according to any one of h1 to h11, comprising: a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 112 (b)); 112 and a second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), That the game stand characterized by.

  (H13) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h12, comprising a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 125) having a game nail, wherein the first movable means is behind the gaming board Game means (see, for example, FIG. 119).

  (H14) A gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(H15) A gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

  (I1) A game console comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a structure (for example, a structure 247), wherein the display means has a first position (for example, a display area) Means for displaying the first display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani) at the lower center of the main body (for example, see FIG. 121 (c)), at least a part of the structure is The first display displayed at the first position, which is located at a position overlapping the part (for example, see FIG. 121), is a display that may be overlapped to the structure (for example, FIG. 121 (c)), The game stand characterized by the above.

  In some cases, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of changing the direction of watching the game stand to play a game, and to improve the player's interest.

  (I2) The game console according to i1, wherein the structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 130), and the first display displayed in the first position is the game console. It is a display which is not overlapped by the structure after the movement of the structure.

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (I3) The game console according to i1 or i2, wherein the display means is movable display means (see, for example, FIGS. 455 to 461), and the first displayed in the first position. Is a display that is not overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(I4) The game console according to any one of i1 to i3, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, the central portion of the display area). Yes,
The game console characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display not overlapping the structure (see, for example, FIG. 121 (e)).

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (I5) The game console according to i4, wherein the first display may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (for example, see FIG. 121), A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (I6) The game console according to any one of i1 to i5, wherein the first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 121).

  The appearance of the advance notice may be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

  (I7) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (I8) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display. It may be a character display or an error display.
The first indication displayed in the second position may be overlapped with the structure.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.
The structure may comprise display means, may comprise an LED substrate and may be movable.
The display means may be movable.
The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be performed behind the light emitting display of the light emitting panel.

  (Drawing) · Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it is overlapped to the structure to the second position where it does not overlap · The first time that the notice display is overlapped to the structure from the first position that is not overlapped Example of moving to the first position after moving to the second position-The warning indicator is overlapped to the other structure after moving to the second position not overlapped from the first position overlapped to the structure Example of moving to the third position ・ Example of moving to the fifth position not overlapped after moving from the fourth position where the warning display is not overlapped to the structure to the first position overlapped An example of displaying an example where a notice is displayed at a first position where it is overlapped by a structure, and another notice is moved to a second position where it is not overlapped. The indication is displayed in the second position, and the other notice display is moved to the first position. The notice display moves from the first position where it is overlapped to the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, An example where the effect display can be seen first ・ An example where the notice of the notice display is given before the notice display is displayed at the first position overlapped by the structure, an example where the notice display appears enlarged ・ The notice display is given second Display at the second position, and moving the display or moving the display means hides the second position preview.

  (J1) A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons; One of the icons is a reserved icon, and an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as "first animation" (for example, moving animation of the notice m1)) is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous change) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the first animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 132), Characterized by the game stand.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2) The game stand according to j1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a change icon.
In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of the hold icon and the change icon.

(J3) The game console according to j1 or j2, wherein the first animation is an animation including change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. A game stand characterized by
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4) The game console according to any one of j1 to j3, wherein the first animation is an animation including movement display of the icon (for example, FIG. 132 (f) i) See), A game console characterized by
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5) The game console according to any one of j1 to j4, wherein the first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icon (for example, FIG. 132 (f), ( g) see), and a game console characterized by
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6) The game console according to any one of j1 to j5, wherein the first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (for example, FIG. 132 (j), ( k) see), and a game console characterized by
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7) The game stand according to j6, wherein the increase display on one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (see, for example, FIG. 136), the game stand.
Sometimes you can enjoy the behavior of one icon more.

(J8) The game console according to any one of j1 to j7, wherein the first effect display is a pseudo continuous change display in the decorative symbol change display (for example, FIG. 132 (h )), That is a game stand characterized by.
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J9) The game console according to any one of j1 to j8, wherein the first effect display is a reach fluctuation display in the decorative symbol fluctuation display (for example, FIG. 138 (j) Reference), that the game stand characterized by.
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10) The game console according to any one of j1 to j9, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display, .
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J11) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j10, wherein the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 208ab). (See, for example, FIG. 133 (f)), and at least a portion of the display period of the first animation, another display in the icon display area (eg, There may be a case where an icon is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 133 (g)), and a game console characterized by the above.
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the display of the icon display area.

(J12) A game console according to any one of j1 to j11, wherein an animation by two or more of the icons (hereinafter referred to as "second animation") is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases (see, for example, FIG. 141 (f)), the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the second animation is displayed (eg, in FIG. 141 (h)). Reference), that the game stand characterized by.
In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons.

  (J13) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

-The icons may move so that nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, and other icons are moved and displayed (packed) May be
-When the icon is moved to the original icon display area and then displayed again (return display), the increase display may be performed, or may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or other icon displays It may be displayed to dismiss.
-The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, may be erased (destructed), or may be shifted from the fluctuation display to the variable display, or temporarily stop the special symbol in the middle symbol It is also good.
The first effect display may not be performed after the first animation.
A plurality of first animations may be performed during one decorative symbol variation display.
A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon between a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa.
The first animation may be performed more easily in the case of the full hold than in the non-full case, and vice versa.
-A notice may be displayed indicating that the first animation is to be performed.
A count advance notice (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed.
The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the change icon is digested.
The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

(Drawing) · Figs. 132 to 141 are examples in which the holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol during swing fluctuation of the out-of-latter symbol, and the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating (pseudo linked).
FIG. 133 shows an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on the holding base while the holding icon is moving.
FIG. 134 is an example in which when the hold icon is moving, the back hold icon is packed and returned to the original position when coming back.
FIG. 135 is an example of the caste effect that does not develop even if the hold icon is hit.
FIG. 136 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation multiple times in one change.
FIG. 137 is an example in which different pending icons perform the first animation in one change.
FIG. 138 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 139 is an example in which the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
FIG. 140 is an example in which the same held icon collides with multiple changes and develops into reach.
FIG. 141 is an example in which a plurality of reserved icons simultaneously reach the decorative pattern and reach.

  (K1) A game console comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is a display , The first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, refer to FIG. 143 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (See, for example, FIG. 143 (f)), the second balloon display may be started to be displayed while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area (for example, FIG. e) see at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display in some cases (see, for example, FIG. 143 (e));

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, it is possible to concentrate on the game and improve the player's interest.

  (K2) The game console according to k1, wherein the display means is an animation of movement of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first animation of movement” (for example, animation of movement upward). It is a means that can be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)), and the first movement animation is displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area. In some cases (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)), a game console characterized by the above.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

  (K3) The game console according to k2, wherein the display means is referred to as a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, movement animation moving to the left). And a second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 143 (f)).

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4) Another moving animation of the first balloon display according to k2 or k3 (hereinafter referred to as "third moving animation" (e.g., moving animation moving to the right)) Is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (b) and (c)).
The first moving animation and the third moving animation may be different in moving direction of the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 143).

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the moving direction different depending on the moving animation.

  (K5) The game console according to any one of k1 to k4, wherein at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, as shown in FIG. 143 (e)), and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6) The game console according to any one of k1 to k5, in which at least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display For example, refer to FIG. 143 (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(K7) The game console according to any one of k1 to k6, wherein the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the second balloon display is A display that includes a character (eg, your character)
In some cases, the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 160 (f) and (g)).

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(K8) The game console according to any one of k1 to k7, comprising an operation means (for example, chance button 136), wherein the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In this case, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  (K9) The gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (K10) A gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, an open ball display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  (Drawing) FIG. 142 shows an example of conversation announcement. FIG. 143 shows an example of conversation notice and horizontal movement of the appearing animation, and vertical movement when the new speech balloon appears (vertical animation of the new speech balloon and animation of the old speech balloon simultaneously). FIG. 144 shows an example of conversation notice and horizontal movement of an appearing animation, and an example of vertical movement (a variation of timing, an animation of an old speech balloon and an animation of a new speech balloon) when a new speech balloon appears. FIG. 145 shows an example of conversation notice and horizontal movement of an appearing animation, and vertical movement (an example of timing change and animation of a new speech balloon and old speech of an old speech balloon) when the new speech balloon appears. FIG. 146 shows an example of the speech advance notice, an example of the vertical movement of the animation animation, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from the normal half and double. FIG. 147 shows an example of conversation announcement, an example in which a lost character returns, and an example in which the content changes when it returns. FIG. 148 is an example in which an example of a speech advance notice and a specific speech balloon (for example, a speech balloon with a high degree of expectation) are not deleted. FIG. 149 shows an example of the speech announcement and the speech balloon overlapping. FIG. 150 shows an example of conversation announcement and an example in which an old speech balloon is reduced. FIG. 151 shows an example of conversation announcement, an example in which the balloon of the same character continues, an example in which the balloon is expanded, and an example in which the content of the balloon is out of the balloon. FIG. 152 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving. FIG. 153 shows an example of conversation announcement and an example in which the balloon moves with the movable body operating. FIG. 154 shows an example of conversation announcement and an example in which the balloon moves in a state where the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light. FIG. 155 shows an example in which the speech balloon moves in a state where an example of the speech advance notice and the first display is displayed. FIG. 156 shows an example of a speech notice and an example of a speech balloon for pre-reading notice (changing the hold icon to the pre-reading icon). FIG. 157 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the character and the balloon are displayed on different display means. FIG. 158 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the balloon is moved to another display means. FIG. 159 shows an example of an announcement of speech and an example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of changes.

  (L1) A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is a display , The first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, refer to FIG. 143 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (See, for example, FIG. 143 (f)), the second balloon display may be started to be displayed while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area (for example, FIG. e) See, during display of the second balloon display, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (e) and (f)) A game stand characterized by

  By displaying the first balloon display in another display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, the player can easily grasp the relevance of the two balloon displays, so that it is possible to concentrate on the game and make the player's interest It can be improved.

  (L2) The gaming table according to l1, wherein the display means is a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as "first moving animation" (eg, moving animation upward)). It is a means that can be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)), and the first movement animation is displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area. In some cases (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)), a game console characterized by the above.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

  (L3) The game stand according to l1 or l2, wherein the display means is a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, "second movement animation" (e.g., movement animation moving to the left) ) And the second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 143 (f)), and the game is characterized by Stand.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

  (L4) The game console according to any one of l1 to l3, wherein at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, as shown in FIG. 143 (e)), and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5) The game console according to any one of l1 to l4, in which at least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display For example, refer to FIG. 143 (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

  (L6) The game console according to any one of l1 to l5, wherein the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the second balloon display is It is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the character of the first balloon display may be the same as the character of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 160 (f) and (g)). , A game stand characterized by.

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(L7) The game console according to any one of l1 to l6, comprising an operating means (for example, a chance button 136), wherein the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed In this case, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

(L8) The game console according to any one of l1 to l7, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, a balloon display f5) (for example, FIG. 146 (q)),
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 146 (n)). The width is the same as the width of the second balloon display, and the width of the first balloon display is different from the width of the third balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 146 (q)). Game console.

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the width of the balloon display different.

  (L9) The gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (L10) The gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, an open ball display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  FIGS. 163 to 173 are diagrams showing in stages the change effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 is an example of the effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect example shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 is shown in the other drawings. Various effects are also feasible. Furthermore, in FIGS. 163 to 173, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N may be used, and in this case, the second The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Also, in FIGS. 163 to 173, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed.

  Reference numerals shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used heretofore are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 192 to 193 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  Although the description in FIGS. 163 to 173 can be applied to any of the presentation examples in this specification, the application to the presentation examples described using FIGS. 14 to 19 is preferable.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the effect icon takes action on the change icon h0.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163, first, in the figure (a), the variation display of the decoration pattern ends in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the combination of the decoration patterns of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3" -"Decoration 2" is stopped. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a), a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and on the right base icon bIr, in FIG. 163 (a), the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navi character YM shown in FIG. 163 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn. That is, at least a part is displayed in blue. In other words, all may be displayed in blue, or only a portion (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in FIG. 163 (a), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 4, and the first reservation icon h11, the second reservation icon h12, the third reservation icon h13, and the fourth reservation icon h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. ing. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of all the hold icons is displayed in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed. It is reported that

  Further, FIG. 163 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. is there. The fluctuation icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the lost decorative symbols is finalized and displayed. The navigation character YM does not disappear even at the timing when it is determined and displayed, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed even during the determined display.

  In FIG. 163 (b), the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special view 1 is completed. As a result, in the pending icon display area HIS, three pending icons of the first pending icon h11, the second pending icon h12 and the third pending icon h13 are displayed, and in the variation icon display area CIS, the first pending icon The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. Any of the hold icons h1 to h3 and the change icon h0 are display modes of default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front so far. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 163 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the fluctuating icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the subsequent FIG. 163 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, and in FIG. 163 (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the smoke image effect image Eh0, and the fluctuation icon h0. Are more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (f), the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a blue display mode identical to the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 163 (e) is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing shown in FIG. 163 (f) (effect image It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 163 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before the same figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of the big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed remains displayed, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Note that the variation icon h0 in which the display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the A-th color (blue) (the icon of the navy character YM of the lord) changes the default variation display icon to the A-th color. This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example shown second from the left in FIG. 163 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping description may be omitted. Also in the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown in the left end of FIG. 163 may be omitted, but the description in the example shown in the left end of FIG. 163 applies. In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 163, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a blue kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (E), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a red smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163F, the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a red display that is the same as the embodiment of the effect image Eh0 It is changing to the aspect. The fluctuation icon h0 changed to the red display mode is at least partially displayed in red. In other words, all may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, an area inside a black edge line) may be displayed in red. The variation icon h0 is changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the variation icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the mode (red mode) of the variation icon h0 after change is different from the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 163 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the A-th color (blue color) (the icon of the navy character YM of the lady) has a variation icon of the default display mode. It is an example of changing to the color of B (red) at the Bth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the A frequency and the B frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163 may be such that the A frequency may be higher than the B frequency, or the A frequency may be higher than the B frequency. The Bth frequency may be higher than the frequency, or the Ath frequency and the Bth frequency may be the same.

  Subsequently, an example shown third from the left in FIG. 163 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown third from the left in FIG. 163, the same diagram (a) to (d) is the same as the diagram (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (e), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a smoke image of blue similar to the aspect of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is viewed before being covered It is difficult. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 163 (f), in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default (white) display mode. Thus, even if the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, it may not only change but also not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the display mode of the icon changes may be regarded as a success animation, and an animation in which the display mode of the icons does not change may be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may always change. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is lower. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  Subsequently, an example illustrated in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 163 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping description may be omitted. In FIG. 163 (c) shown at the left end, the variation icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be a blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 163 (c) is a blue display mode, and in FIG. 163 (d1), the display mode navigation of the display mode wearing a blue kimono The character YM swings a sword toward the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 163 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, all may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, an area inside a black edge line) may be displayed in blue. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (e1), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is the same as the kimono aspect of the navigation character YM, and is also the same as the display aspect of the variation icon h0. The covered icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (f1), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0, which was the display mode of blue until before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to the display mode of red. That is, the variation icon h0 is changed to an aspect different from the aspect (blue aspect) of the kimono of the navigation character YM as well as the effect image Eh0. Also in this example, after this, the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is that it is a false notice.

  Subsequently, an example illustrated in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 163 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping description may be omitted. In FIG. 163 (c) shown at the left end, the variation icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be a blue display mode. In addition, in the case of the display mode in which the blue character Kimono is worn, the display character in the red kimono may be possible. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 163 (c) is a blue display mode, and it is an example of the display mode in which the you-like navi character YM is in a red kimono. In (d2), the lord-like navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings the sword toward the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, all may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, a kimono part) may be displayed in red. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (e2), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is It is difficult to see. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 163 (f2), there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in this example, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the blue display mode. The variation icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) that the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 163 are all examples for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target.

  In addition, as an aspect, white, blue and red have been described as an example, but other colors and patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes showing the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or no pattern aspect (A aspect), a blue or diagonal aspect (B aspect), a green or diamond aspect (C aspect), red or The lattice pattern aspect (D aspect) and the golden color and vertical line pattern aspect (E aspect) become higher in order, and the rainbow color and horizontal line aspect aspect (F aspect) become the highest aspect . Although a plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. That is, white in the example described with reference to FIG. 163 may be replaced with blue. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 163 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the display character with a blue kimono may have been a display with a white kimono, or may have a green kimono with a blue kimono. The effect image Eh0 which is the display mode of may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the display character with the blue kimono may be a display with the red kimono or may be the display with the golden kimono. It may be a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the effect image Eh0 which is a blue display mode may be a red display mode or a gold display mode, or a rainbow It may be a color display mode. In addition, when the aspect is roughly divided, the aspect (the C aspect) of the green or diamond pattern, the following aspects (the first group which is the group of the A aspect, the B aspect, the C aspect), the red color and the Lattice Pattern Aspect (D Aspect) The above aspect (D aspect, E aspect, F group second group) can be divided. Here, the aspect belonging to the first group can not be changed to the aspect belonging to the second group, and the aspect belonging to the second group can not be altered to the aspect belonging to the first group. On the other hand, while exchanging of the aspect in a 1st group is enabled, the exchange of an aspect in a 2nd group may also be enabled. Furthermore, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be represented by the difference in size and number. In addition, the player's advantage is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state or / and a short time state), that a premier effect is likely to be started, or a big hit finalization effect is started. It may be easy. In addition, it is also included that it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear. Matters relating to the aspect described in this paragraph are the same as in the previous examples and the subsequent examples.

  Furthermore, the aspect of each icon may be the aspect of the entire icon (entire area) or the aspect of only a part of the icon (partial area).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 163, the normal notice based on the change icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navy character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action on the variation icon h0.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 164 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (a), the navi character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed.

  In FIG. 164 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 164 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture up to that point, faces the variation icon h0 in the white display mode, It changes to the pose which is pulling out the sword and waving. In FIG. 164 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, and in FIG. 164 (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the blue smoke image effect image Eh0 The icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164 (f), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a blue display that is the same as the embodiment of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. Also in this example, after this, the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is false notice It will have been.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164 described above, the A-th presentation icon (the icon of the navigation character YM of the main character) of the B-th color (red) is the variation icon of the default display mode. Blue) is an example of changing with the Cth frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example shown second from the left in FIG. 164 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 164, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 164, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 164 (E), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a red smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until it is covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a red display mode. That is, the variation icon h0 is changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 164 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the B-th color (red color) (the icon of the do-you-so navi character YM) is a variation icon of the default display mode. It is an example of changing to the color (red) of D at the Dth frequency (probability). In addition, not the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode, for example, the fluctuation icon h0 of the green display mode may be used. In this case, the A-th presentation icon of the B-th color (red) (the icon of the navigation character YM of the lord) changes the display icon of the C-th color (green) to the B-th color (red) ) At the Dth frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example illustrated third from the left in FIG. 164 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 164, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown third from the left in FIG. 164, the same diagram (a) to (d) is the same as the diagram (a) to (d) described above, and red kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 164 (e), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (f) of FIG. 164, the variation image h0 which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0 is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0 in the gold color display mode Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown third from the left in FIG. 164 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the B-th color (red color) (the icon of the do-you-so navi character YM) is a variation icon of the default display mode. It is an example of changing to the color (gold) at frequency E (probability). Here, the relationship between the Cth frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164, the Dth frequency in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 164C, and the Eth frequency is the Dth frequency. It may be a relationship of> Eth frequency> Cth frequency. Alternatively, the Dth frequency may be less than the Eth frequency, or the Dth frequency may be the Eth frequency. Also, the Cth frequency may be zero.

  Furthermore, the Dth frequency may be the Bth frequency in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 163, or the Ath frequency in the example shown on the left end of FIG. 163> the Cth frequency. It may be.

  Next, an example shown at the right end of FIG. 164 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Also in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 164, the same figure (A) to the same figure (E) are the same as the figure (a) to the figure (d) described above, and a display with a red kimono A state of the lord-like navi-character YM points to the variation icon h0 in the default (white) display manner, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 164 (O), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164 (), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the white display mode. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (G), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is lower. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 164 are all examples for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target. In addition, as an aspect, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. The mode of each of the fluctuation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold color. The display mode may be iridescent or iridescent. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 164, the normal notice by the change icon h0 in which the display mode has changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and may be a true notice.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing some examples in which the display mode of the icons changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, first, in the same figure (a), the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The number of reservations shown in FIG. 1 is two, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 165 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes.

  In (b) of FIG. 165, the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 have default (white) display modes. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0 Is reported. In the effect icon display area DIS, no icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the blue effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 165 (d), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is blue in the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 165 described above is an example in which the fluctuation icon of the default display mode changes to the A-th color (blue) at the F-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example shown second from the left in FIG. 165 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 165, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 165, the same figure (A) to the same figure (B) are the same as the figure (a) to the figure (b) described above, and the default (white) The fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 165 (C), with no icon displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, an icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is an effect image that is a red smoke image Covered by Eh0, the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 165 (D), the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is red in the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (E), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed The normal notice with the fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 165 described above, the variation icon in the default display mode changes to the B-th color (red) at the G-th frequency (probability).

  Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 165 (B '), the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed, and in the same figure (C'), the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the variation icon h0 is red. Is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 165 (D ′), the variation icon h0, which was a blue display mode until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a red display mode which is the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh0. It is changing. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Also in this example, after this, the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is that it is a false notice.

  Subsequently, an example shown third from the left in FIG. 165 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown third from the left in FIG. 165, the same (a) to (b) are the same as the previously described (a) to (b), and the default (white) The fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 165 (c), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (d) of FIG. 165, the variation icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, is the same as the display mode of the effect image Eh0. Has changed. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice with the fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  The example shown from the left of FIG. 165 described above is an example in which the change icon in the default display mode changes to the Cth color (gold) at the Hth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the Fth frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, the Gth frequency in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 165, and the Hth frequency is the Fth frequency. It may be a relation of> Gth frequency> Hth frequency.

  Next, an example shown at the right end of FIG. 165 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Also in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 165, the same (A) to (B) are the same as the (A) to (C) described above, and the display mode of the default (white) The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 165, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (e) of FIG. 165, the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (O), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change in the stage of FIG. Is lower. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 165 are all examples for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target. In addition, as an aspect, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. The mode of each of the variation icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a blue display mode, may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a golden color. It may be a display mode, or may be a rainbow display mode. In addition, the effect image Eh0, which is a gold display mode, may be a rainbow display mode, and in this case, the display mode of the variation icon h0 after change may be a gold display mode. And may have a rainbow color display mode. Furthermore, the effect image Eh0, which is the display mode of the gold color, may be the display mode of the red color, or may be the display mode of the white color, or may be the display mode of the blue color, the display mode of the green color It may be

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 165, the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and may be a true notice.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing several examples in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions to the change icon h0 in one change display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, first, with the combination (“decor 2”-“decor 3”-“decor 2”) of the lost design symbols stopped being displayed in FIG. The number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Also, FIG. 166 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In (b) of FIG. 166, the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 166 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the change icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 166 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, and in FIG. 166 (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh0 The icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 166 (f), the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the display mode. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 166 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (f), the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 166 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 166 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before the same figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating The animation may be viewed only as (d) to (e), or as the animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decor 4" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has started to shake. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (j) that follows, the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 166 (k), during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In the figure (l), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 166 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 166 (n), the variation image h0 disappears from the effect image Eh0 and is a red display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, and changes to a gold display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. doing. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 166 (k) and may be considered to end immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated. It may be considered as an animation performed only in ((l) to (m) in the figure) or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed, and the second icon change animation is It is started after reaching the reach state, that is, in the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and a display (pseudo linked symbol) showing pseudo continuous effect is displayed. It may be hours, it may be when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0, it may be at the time of operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, etc., the variation display of the decorative symbol has ended It may be time (during stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during swing fluctuation of three decorative symbols, start of operation effects (such as button effects) using operation means such as chance button 136 It may be during or after the operation of the effect moving means such as the family crest item 224E, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character article 224Gd, and the one-man box character article 224H. The start timing of the icon change presentation described here is the same as the icon change presentation described before, and the same applies to the icon change presentation described later.

  Further, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a success animation in which the display mode of the icons changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a success animation in which the display mode of the icon changed. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation continued in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation described here is not only twice but once. That is, it can also be viewed as starting from FIG. 166 (c) and ending immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may once disappear between FIG. 166 (g) and FIG. 166 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 166 (g), or disappears immediately after the figure (g), and is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or redisplayed in the figure (k) In this case, the separation of the two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 166 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 166, the same diagrams (A) to (D) are the same as the diagrams (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The main character's navigation character YM in the display mode is directed to the change icon h0 in the display mode of the default (white color), the pose is removed by pulling out the sword, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 166 (E), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 166 (F), there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in this example, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  From (H) to (L) in FIG. 166, the same as (h) to (h) described above except that the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. It is the same as figure (l), and after reaching the reach state, the character of the lord of the display style wearing red kimono, YM, faces the variation icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls the sword out The pose changes to a swinging pose, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 166 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 166 (N), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not changed, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the white display mode. The navi character YM shown in FIG. 166 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not performed. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the icons does not change. That is, it is an example in which the failure animation is continuous in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 166, in which the navigation character YM has taken a plurality of actions with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. .

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 167 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 167, the figures (a) to (d) are the same as the figures 166 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The main character's navigation character YM in the display mode is directed to the change icon h0 in the display mode of the default (white color), the pose is removed by pulling out the sword, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (e), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 167 (f), there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in this example, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  From FIG. 167 (h) to FIG. 167 (l), FIG. 166 (h) to FIG. 166 described above except that the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. It is the same as figure (l), and after reaching the reach state, the character of the lord of the display style wearing red kimono, YM, faces the variation icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls the sword out The pose changes to a swinging pose, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (n), the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0 is the same as the effect image Eh0 in the golden display mode. It is changing. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, blue or red) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the icon display mode does not change, whereas the second icon change animation changes the icon display mode Was a successful animation. That is, this is an example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is first displayed in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 167 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 167, the same figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The main character's navigation character YM in the display mode is directed to the change icon h0 in the display mode of the default (white color), the pose is removed by pulling out the sword, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (E), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a red smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (F), the variation icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, is in the red display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It is changing. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (preliminarily) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the change of the icon (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  FIGS. 167 (H) to (L) are the same as (h) to (l) described above, and a display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state The character of the dragon character YM faces the variation icon h0 in the red display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (N), although the effect image Eh0 disappears, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 whose aspect has changed is that it is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the icon display mode changes, whereas the second icon change animation changes the icon display mode Not a failure anime. That is, this is an example in which a failure animation is displayed after the success animation is displayed first in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, white, red, and gold have been described as examples. However, other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. The mode of each of the variation icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a golden color. It may be a display mode, or may be a rainbow display mode. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono.

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but it is a big hit and it is a true notice Good. Here, to summarize the example described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, an example in which successful animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 166 (hereinafter referred to as a “continuous example of continuous failures”), an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 167, is a failure after the success animation is displayed first There are cases where animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success and failure cases"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final manner, is the most likely to be the case of continuous success. High then high, if successful success cases have been made, then High if Gong failures is performed, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be a loss by all means (big hit probability is 0%), and there may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Also, in any of the examples described using FIG. 166 and FIG. 167, although the icon change animation is performed only twice in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, the one variable display of the decorative symbol is In the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

Furthermore, in the case where the change in the display mode fails, the default color white smoke image effect image Eh0 may always be displayed, or conversely, the white smoke image effect image Eh0 may be displayed. There may be a case where the display mode changes successfully.
FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating two examples of the icon change effect.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 168, the icon change effect performed even if the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect using the navigation character YM described in FIG. It is an example performed in the variable display of time.

  First, in Fig. 168 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2 with the combination ("decor 2"-"decor 3"-"decor 2") of the decorative patterns of the lost being stopped and displayed. The first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Also, FIG. 168 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes.

  In (b) of FIG. 168, the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 have default (white) display modes. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. In the effect icon display area DIS, no icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 168 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the red effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

  In (d) of FIG. 168, the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is red in the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. In this example, in the effect icon display area DIS, no icon is displayed and the navigation character YM is not displayed, but even if the navigation character YM is displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol A period during display (for example, a period during super reach, a period during dark display where the display screen becomes dark), a period during which the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with another display (preliminary display or error display) In some cases, the navigation character YM may be hidden or invisible, and even in such a case, icon change animation as shown in FIG. 168 (c) may be performed.

  In FIG. 168 (e), there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (f), the animation for increasing the hold icon is completed, and the second hold icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0.

  In (g) of FIG. 168, there is one more ball in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (h), the animation for increasing the hold icon is completed, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Furthermore, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears according to the number of reservations. That is, when the number of reservations is N (N = 3 here), the navigation character YM appears (display is started), and when the number of reservations becomes M (here M = 2), the navigation character YM disappears (display ends) To do). The relationship between N and M in this condition of the navigation character YM may be in the relationship of N> M, and may be N = 4, M = 1, and so on. Note that this condition can be applied to the previous examples, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples, but may not be applied. In (h) of FIG. 168, on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, a navy character YM of a display manner wearing a red kimono appears in an initial posture. And, the navigation character YM is attached with a display of a balloon of "One more remaining with reserve". Further, in FIG. 168 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. The navigation character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the navigation character YM appears after the variation display of the decorative symbol starts and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed or after reaching the reach state, that is, appears during the reach state You may In addition, it may appear at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, may appear when the display (pseudo sequence symbol) showing the pseudo continuous effect is displayed, or when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0 It may appear, it may appear at the time of operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, etc., and it may appear when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished (during stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during swing fluctuation of three decorative symbols, start of operation effects (such as button effects) using operation means such as chance button 136 It may appear during or after the operation of the effect moving means such as the family crest item 224E, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd, and the one-man box character article 224H. About the appearance timing of the navigation character YM demonstrated here, it is applicable also to the example demonstrated before this, and is applicable also to the example demonstrated after this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (j) that follows, the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed with the initial posture.

  In FIG. 168 (k), during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In the figure (l), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 168 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 168 (n), the change image h0 disappears from the effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 which was the display mode of red until it is covered with the effect image Eh0 changes to the display mode of gold which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. doing. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 168, the icon change effect to be performed even if the navigation character YM is not displayed is only one change, but even if multiple changes are performed. Also, even with the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 168, the icon change animation using the navigation character YM is performed twice in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the first and second times, the navigation character YM This is an example in which the display mode is different.

  First, in Fig. 168 (A), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination ("decor 2"-"decor 3"-"decor 2") of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed. , And four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (A), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Also, FIG. 168 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 168 (B), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (B), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 168 (C), the navi character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the fluctuating icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 168 (D), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, and in the same figure (E), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 has the same blue smoke image as the kimono aspect of the navigation character YM. Covered by the effect image Eh0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 168 (F), the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the display mode. The fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (F), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 168 (F) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 168 (C) and may be considered to end immediately before (FIG. G) (immediately returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (D) to (E), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (H), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has started to shake. In FIG. 168 (H), the navigation character YM is covered by the effect image EYM which is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than before being covered. The navigation character YM0 may be partially covered by the effect image EYM or may be entirely covered by the effect image EYM. In FIG. 168I, the effect image EYM disappears, and the navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono before being covered with the effect image EYM, is a red display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. The change effect of the navigation character YM which is the effect icon may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may be started in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the change effect is started after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state, that is, during the reach state It may be done. In addition, it may be started according to the change display start of the decorative symbol, it may be started when the display (pseudo run symbol) indicating the pseudo run effect is displayed, and the timer of the timer notice becomes 0 It may be started at the time, may be started at the time of operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, etc., and may be started when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished (during stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during swing fluctuation of three decorative symbols, start of operation effects (such as button effects) using operation means such as chance button 136 It may be started later, during or after operation of the effect movable means such as a family crest item 224E, a first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to a fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd, and a one-man box character article 224H. The start timing of the change presentation of the presentation icon (here, the navigation character YM) described here is also applicable to the example described before this, and is also applicable to the example described thereafter.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (I), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (J) that follows, the word display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM changed to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 168 (K), during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 168 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is the same red smoke image as the changed aspect of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is not It is more difficult to see. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (N) of FIG. 168, the variation image h0 disappears from the effect image Eh0 and is a display manner in blue until it is covered with the effect image Eh0 in the red display manner being the same display manner as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It is changing. The fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Even in the second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect (here, blue) as the display aspect of the fluctuation icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 168 (K) and may be considered to be finished immediately before the same figure (O) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated The animation may be viewed as being performed only in ((L) to (M) in the figure, or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  It should be noted that, when a change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) is performed, and a display mode of the effect icon changes, a change effect of the display mode of the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. May be Furthermore, the display mode of the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as the changed display mode of the presentation icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the A-th display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B-th display mode are performed in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 168, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the A-th display mode is only one change, but multiple changes may be performed, and Also in the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B-th display mode, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

  Although the example described with reference to FIG. 168 is an example in which the change icon h0 is targeted, the same applies to the case in which the hold icon is targeted. In addition, as an aspect, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. The mode of each of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a golden color. It may be a display mode, or may be a rainbow display mode. In addition, the display character with the blue kimono may be a display with the white kimono, or may be the display with the green kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a red kimono, the display mode wearing a golden kimono, or the display mode wearing a rainbow kimono. Furthermore, the display character navi-character YM, which is a display mode wearing a red kimono, may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or a display mode wearing an iridescent kimono Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing several examples in which the navigation character YM has taken action on the hold icon a plurality of times in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, first, with the combination (“decor 2”-“decor 3”-“decor 2”) of the lost design symbols stopped being displayed in FIG. The number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 169 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In (b) of FIG. 169, the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 169 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 169 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In (e) of FIG. 169, at least a part of the first variation icon h11 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh1, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 169 (f), the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the red display mode. The first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 169 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 169 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before the same figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has started to shake. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (j) that follows, the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In the reach state, the second icon change animation is started in the reach state in FIG. 169 (k), and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the left side, and in FIG. , The wave is oscillated from the sword. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first holding icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 169 (m), at least a portion of the first reserved icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 169 (n), the first hold icon h11, which is a red display mode until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is a golden display mode in which the same mode as the current effect image Eh1 is displayed. Has changed. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the first hold icon h11 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 169 (k) and may be considered to have ended immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated It may be considered as an animation performed only in the same figure (l) to the same figure (m) or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a success animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation continued in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation described here is not only twice but once. That is, it can be viewed as starting from FIG. 169 (c) and ending immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may once disappear between FIG. 169 (g) and FIG. 169 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 169 (g), or disappears immediately after the figure (g), and is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k) or redisplayed in the figure (k) In this case, the separation of the two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 169 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 169, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navigation character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 169E, at least a portion of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 169F, the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  From (H) to (L) in FIG. 169, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the same as (h) described above except that the display mode is not white but red. ~ Same as in Figure (l), after reaching reach, the character Nayomi YM of the display manner wearing a red kimono turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and shook Waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first holding icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 169 (M), at least a portion of the first reserved icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 becomes less visible than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In (N) of FIG. 169, the effect image Eh1 disappears, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. (1) The change display of the decoration symbol (the change display of the decoration symbol to be started next) performed when the suspension is digested may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode did not change from the default display mode, the pre-reading advance notice by the 1st hold icon h11 is not performed, and it is possible to lose rather than the big hit in the next fluctuating display of the decoration symbol. Sex is high.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. That is, it is an example in which the failure animation is continuous in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 169, in which the navigation character YM takes action on the hold icon a plurality of times in one time variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 170 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 170, the figures (a) to (d) are the same as the figures 169 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navi-character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and extends from the sword of the navi-character YM through the variation icon h0 to the front of the first hold icon h11. The wave is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (e), at least a portion of the first storage icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In (f) of FIG. 170, the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In (h) to (l) of FIG. 170, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of white instead of the display mode of red, and the previously described FIG. 169 (h) ~ Same as in Figure (l), after reaching reach, the character Nayomi YM of the display manner wearing a red kimono turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and shook A wave extending from the sword of the navigation character YM through the variation icon h0 to the front of the first hold icon h11 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (m), at least a portion of the first storage icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In (n) of FIG. 170, the first reserve icon h11, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold which is the same as the effect image Eh1. It is changing to the aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, blue, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested. There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Was a successful animation that changed. That is, this is an example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is first displayed in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 170 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 170, the same diagrams (A) to (D) are the same as the diagrams (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navi-character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and extends from the sword of the navi-character YM through the variation icon h0 to the front of the first hold icon h11. The wave is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a red smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In (F) in FIG. 170, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red that is the same as the effect image Eh1. It is changing to the aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, green, gold, or rainbow color) different from the aspect after the change of the icon. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (G) has returned to its initial posture.

  FIGS. 170 (H) to (L) are the same as (h) to (l) described above, and a display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state The character changes from the sword of the navigation character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 from the sword of the navigation character YM by turning to the pose where the character of the character of the dragon YM turns to the left and withdraws the sword. It is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (M), at least a portion of the first reserved icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 becomes less visible than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 170 (N), although the effect image Eh1 disappears, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. A big hit may be made with the variation display of the decoration pattern (the variation display of the decoration pattern started next) which is performed by being digested by the first suspension. That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Is a failure animation that does not change. That is, this is an example in which a failure animation is displayed after the success animation is displayed first in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, white, red, and gold colors have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. In addition, the modes of the reserve icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. For example, the hold icon that is the white display mode may be the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display It may be an aspect or may be an iridescent display aspect. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono. Furthermore, the holding icon is not limited to the first holding icon h11, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 may change. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display mode of a plurality of hold icons or the display mode of the change icon h0 and the display mode of one or more hold icons change.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, the prefetch notice by the hold icon whose display mode is changed is a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the example described using FIG. 169 and FIG. 170, an example in which the success animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. “A continuous success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 169, an example where a failure animation is continuous (hereinafter referred to as “a continuous failure example”), an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 171, is a failure after the success animation is displayed first There are cases where animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success and failure cases"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final manner, is the most likely to be the case of continuous success. High then high, if successful success cases have been made, then High if Gong failures is performed, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be a loss by all means (big hit probability is 0%), and there may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, the icon change animation is performed only twice in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, but the one variable display of the decorative symbol is In the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

  FIG. 171 is a view showing several examples in which the navigation character YM causes a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, first, with the combination (“decor 2”-“decor 3”-“decor 2”) of the lost design symbols being stopped and displayed in FIG. The number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 171 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In FIG. 171 (b), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 171 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shook. In the following FIG. 171 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and also passes through the first holding icon h11 and extends to the front of the second holding icon h12. In FIG. 171 (e), at least a part of the second variation icon h12 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh2, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. The effect image Eh2 may also overlap at least a part of another icon (a change icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 171 (f), the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh2, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the red display mode. The second reserve icon h12 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 171 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 171 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (right before returning to the initial posture) of FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost (“decor 4” − “decor 4” − “decor 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 171 (i), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons such as the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (i), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. When the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 171 (i).

  Figure 171 (j) ~ Figure (l), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, in Figure 171 (m), the second icon change animation is in the state that the display of the navigation character YM remains off It has been started. In FIG. 171 (m), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1, which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 171 (n), the first display icon h11, which is the display mode of red until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is the gold display mode in which the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time Has changed. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the first hold icon h11 before the change (here, red)). As shown in FIG. 171 (o), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost (“decor 4” − “decor 5” − “decor 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is digested There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a success animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. That is, in a plurality of variable display of the decorative symbol, the successful animation is an example in which it is continuous. Moreover, although the holding icon whose display mode changes according to the icon change animation is a holding icon indicating the same holding, it may be a holding icon indicating a different holding (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 171 (m), which was the third hold icon h12 in FIG. 171 (f), may change.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 171 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 171, the same drawings (A) to (D) are the same as the drawings (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navigation character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0, and also passes through the first hold icon h11 and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 171 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. Although the effect image Eh2 disappears in FIG. 171 (F), in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 171 (I), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. Whether the two pending icons or the variation icon h0 is a default (white) display mode. Further, when the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 171 (I).

  From (J) to (L) in FIG. 171, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the same as (j) described above except that the display mode is not white but red. ~ Same as in Figure (l), with the display of the navigation character YM turned off, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in Fig. 171 (M), the second icon change as it is. The animation has been started. In FIG. 171 (M), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the white display mode is covered with the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. Although the effect image Eh1 disappears in FIG. 171 (N), there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 171 (O), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the first suspension is digested. In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol to be performed (the variation display of the decorative symbol to be started next), there may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode did not change from the default display mode, the pre-reading advance notice by the 1st hold icon h11 is not performed, and it is possible to lose rather than the big hit in the next fluctuating display of the decoration symbol. Sex is high.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. That is, it is an example in which the failure animation is continuous in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 171, in which the navigation character YM takes action on the hold icon a plurality of times in the plural times of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 172 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 172, the figures (a) to (d) are the same as the figures 171 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn In the display mode, the lord-like navi character YM turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and from the sword of the navi character YM, it passes the variation icon h0 and also passes the first holding icon h11 (2) A wave extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 172 (e), at least a part of the second reserved icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. Although the effect image Eh2 disappears in FIG. 172 (f), in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 172 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 172 (i), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. Whether the two pending icons or the variation icon h0 is a default (white) display mode. Further, when the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 171 (I).

  In the following FIGS. 172 (j) to (l), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not the red display mode but the white display mode, and the previously described FIG. 171 (i The same as in the figure (l), and with the display of the navigation character YM turned off, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 172 (m), the second icon remains unchanged in that state. Change animation has been started. In FIG. 172 (m), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 172 (n), the first reserved icon h11, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same as the effect image Eh1. It is changing to the aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, blue, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. As shown in FIG. 172 (o), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested. There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Was a successful animation that changed. That is, this is an example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is first displayed in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 172 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 172, the same diagrams (A) to (D) are the same as the diagrams 171 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn In the display mode, the lord-like navi character YM turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and from the sword of the navi character YM, it passes the variation icon h0 and also passes the first holding icon h11 (2) A wave extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 172 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a red smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 172F, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red, which is the same as the effect image Eh2 It is changing to the aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, green, gold, or rainbow color) different from the aspect after the change of the icon. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 172 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 172 (I), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In addition, when the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 172 (I).

  The following FIGS. 172 (J) to (L) are the same as FIGS. 171 (i) to (l) described above, and the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and the variation of the decorative symbol The display is continued, and in FIG. 172 (M), the second icon change animation is started in the state as it is. In FIG. 172 (M), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. Although the effect image Eh1 disappears in FIG. 172 (N), there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11 here, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 172 (O), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested. There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Is a failure animation that does not change. That is, this is an example in which a failure animation is displayed after the success animation is displayed first in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, white, red, and gold colors have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. Further, the modes of the reserve icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. For example, the hold icon that is the white display mode may be the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display It may be an aspect or may be an iridescent display aspect. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono. Furthermore, the holding icon is not limited to the first holding icon h11, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 may change. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display mode of a plurality of hold icons or the display mode of the change icon h0 and the display mode of one or more hold icons change.

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the prefetch notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed is a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the example described using FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, an example in which the success animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. “A continuous success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 171, an example where a failure animation is continuous (hereinafter referred to as “a continuous failure example”), an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 172, is a failure after the success animation is displayed first There are cases where animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success and failure cases"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final manner, is the most likely to be the case of continuous success. High then high, if successful success cases were made, then If successful failures is performed it is high, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be a loss by all means (big hit probability is 0%), and there may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the icon change animation is performed only once in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, but the one variable display of the decorative symbol is In the inside, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times. That is, even if the icon change animation is performed multiple times in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and further, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times in the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol. Good.
FIG. 173 shows two examples of icon change animation.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 173 is an example in which the icon to be changed in the icon change animation can be easily recognized.

  First, in Fig. 173 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. , And four special icon 1 hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 173 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 173 (b), the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and the display of variation of the decorative pattern is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special view 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).
In FIG. 173 (c), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 173 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the blue kimono is worn. The wave in this case extends to the front of the second holding icon h12 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11. Furthermore, an arrow also extends from the point of the sword toward the second holding icon h12. Since the wave shown in FIG. 171 (d) passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11, the fluctuation icon h0 can be seen as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 can also be seen as a change target . On the other hand, the wave shown in FIG. 173 (d) does not have such a thing because it avoids the fluctuation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11, and the second holding icon h12 is the change target by the display of the arrow. It is clearer that there is something.

  In FIG. 173 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh2, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. The effect image Eh2 may also overlap at least a part of another icon (a change icon or another reserved icon).

  In FIG. 173 (f), the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, is the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh2 Has changed to the display mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, white, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 173 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears.

  In FIG. 173 (g), there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 173 (i), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is done. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done.

  In FIG. 173 (j), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 173 (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM that was in the initial posture is facing the left side and the sword is removed. It changes to the pose you are shaking. In the following FIG. 173 (l), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the blue kimono is worn. The wave in this case extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0. Furthermore, an arrow also extends from the point of the sword toward the first holding icon h11. Since the wave shown in FIG. 173 (l) also avoids the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is not seen as a change target, and furthermore, the first hold icon h11 is a change target by the display of the arrow. Is becoming clearer.

  In FIG. 173 (m), at least a part of the first suspension icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon).

  In FIG. 173 (n), the first display icon h11, which is a display mode of red until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is a gold display mode in which the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh1 Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested. There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 173, the effect icon (navi character YM) of the A-th display mode (display mode wearing a blue kimono) is the B-th display mode (red kimono) shown in FIG. This is an example in which the icon to be changed is more easily recognized than the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode of

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 173 is an example in which the display mode changes again with the hold icon whose display mode has changed becoming a change icon.

  First, in FIG. 173 (A), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. , And four special icon 1 hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 173 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In FIG. 173 (B), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the moving animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (B), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 173 (C), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is removed and shaken. In the following FIG. 173 (D), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. The wave here passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 173E, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh1, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon).

  In FIG. 173F, the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the red display mode. The first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (F), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 173 (F) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears.

  In FIG. 173 (G), there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (H), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 173 (I), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is done. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous change has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (J), the reach state is formed, and the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM changed to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 173K, during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the variation icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 173 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 173 (N), the change image h0 disappears and the change icon h0 which was the display mode of red until it is covered with the effect image Eh0 changes to the gold display mode which is the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh0. doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 173, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed multiple times. In addition, the icon change presentation is performed only once for the variation icon, but may be performed multiple times. That is, after an icon change effect is performed one or more times on a certain hold icon, the hold icon may become a change icon, and an icon change effect may be performed one or more times on the change icon. May be

  In the above description, the navigation character YM appears when the number of reservations becomes N (N = 3 here) and disappears when the number of reservations becomes M (M = 2 here), but the navigation character YM , May be always displayed. However, even if it is always displayed, the navigation character YM may disappear or can not be seen for a certain period during the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, in a period during super reach, a period during dark display in which the display screen is dark, or a period in which the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with another display (notice display or error display), the navigation character YM is It may disappear or disappear. In addition, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the special drawing is 0 and the symbol variation display (variation display of the decoration symbol) is finished, a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as "demonstration display") is displayed. That is, the demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped and displayed. The demonstration display includes a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a game console title and the like is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display. Also in these demonstration displays, the navigation character YM may be displayed. Further, in the display period of the demonstration display, the navigation characters YM of all the display modes may be displayable, or only the navigation characters YM of the display modes belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the navigation character YM in the white, blue, and green display modes may be displayed. Alternatively, only the navigation character YM of the white display mode may be displayed, or only the navigation character YM of the blue display mode may be displayed in the display period of the demonstration display, or the navigation of the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

  Also, although the description has been made only for the example of presentation using the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the presentation icon, the effect icon is not limited to the navigation character YM of the character of the lord, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. It may be an icon of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b).

Also, the icon to be changed may be a change icon or a hold icon. In the case of the hold icon, it may be the first hold icon, the second hold icon, the third hold icon, or the fourth hold icon. . Furthermore, the type of the change target icon may be the type of the hold icon or the change icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).
In the above description,

“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S] and the display means is a means by which a certain icon [for example, the change icon h 0 or the hold icon h 11 to h 14] may be displayed, and the certain icon An icon relating to a symbol variation display, wherein the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode], and the certain icon is a second icon It is an icon that may be displayed in the display mode [for example, red display mode], and a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed. Is more likely to finally display the big hit symbol form than when a certain icon of the first display form [for example, the blue display form] is displayed [for example, the expectation of the big hit is high ] The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed, and the presentation icon is an icon different from the certain icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], and the presentation icon Is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lady wearing a red kimono], which is displayed in the first display mode by the effect icon of the fourth display mode When the effect of changing the icon is performed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [eg, FIG. 168 (N)], and the effect eye of the fourth display mode is displayed. Con is an icon including an area [eg, an area of kimono] displayed in an aspect [eg, red], and an icon of the second display aspect is an aspect [eg, red] Is an icon including an area displayed at [for example, an area inside the edge line], and an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. Also, there is also a case where the display mode of the certain icon does not change to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 163 (f2)]. It explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a result different from the expectation of the player who expects to change to the second display mode.

  Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. And some combinations may be used.

  In the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain mode may be a part, or the area may be entirely displayed in the certain mode.

  Further, a certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color or an area displayed in the certain mode.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S Etc.], and the display means is a means by which a certain icon [for example, the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed, and the certain icon is An icon related to symbol variation display, the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode], and the certain icon is a second display It is an icon that may be displayed in a mode [for example, red display mode], and a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed However, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when a certain icon of the first display mode [eg, the blue display mode] is displayed [eg, the expectation of the jackpot is high], The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed, the presentation icon is an icon different from the certain icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], and the presentation icon is It is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lady wearing a red kimono], and an icon of the first display mode according to an effect icon of the fourth display mode When the effect of changing the icon is changed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [eg, FIG. 168 (N)], and the effect of the fourth display mode is displayed. Is an icon including an area [eg, a kimono area] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red], and a certain icon of the second display mode is a certain mode [for example, red] It is an icon including an area to be displayed [for example, an area inside an edge line], and when an effect is performed in which a certain icon of the first display mode is changed in a period when the effect icon is not displayed, There is a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 165 (D ′)], there is provided a game console. It explained about.

  According to this game stand, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even if the change effect by the effect icon is not performed, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. And some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good. In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed in a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good.

In addition, the above-mentioned effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a statue wearing a blue kimono].
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode], and the default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode. The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon, and the default display mode is the display mode of the third display mode. When an effect of changing a certain icon is performed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode at a first frequency [for example, an A-th frequency (A-th probability)] 163 (a) to 163 (h)], when an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the icon is displayed. Changes to the second display mode at a second frequency [for example, the B-th frequency (B-th probability)] [for example, FIG. 163 (A) to FIG. (H)], the second frequency Characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the first frequency Gaming table to be. I also explained about.
The frequency referred to here may be a probability (the same applies hereinafter).

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S Etc.], and the display means is a means by which a certain icon [for example, the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed, and the certain icon is An icon related to symbol variation display, the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode], and the certain icon is a second display It is an icon that may be displayed in a mode [for example, red display mode], and a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed However, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when a certain icon of the first display mode [eg, the blue display mode] is displayed [eg, the expectation of the jackpot is high], The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed, the presentation icon is an icon different from the certain icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], and the presentation icon is It is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode for a lady wearing a blue kimono], and the effect icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a lady wearing a red kimono The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes, and the first display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes. When an effect of changing a certain icon of the display mode is performed, there is a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 168 (N)], and the fourth display An effect icon of an aspect is an icon including an area [eg, an area of kimono] displayed in an aspect [for example, red], and an icon of the second display aspect is an aspect [for example, , Red] is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line], and the effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode by the effect icon of the third display mode is There is a case where the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 163 (f1)] when it is performed, the game console being characterized. It explained about.

  According to this game stand, when an icon of the second display mode may be displayed even from the change effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Also, one aspect may be only one of color, pattern, size, shape, type of character, all or part of character, or a combination of all of them. Some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good.

Also,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode], and the default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode. The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon, and the default display mode is the display mode of the third display mode. When an effect of changing a certain icon is performed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode at a first frequency [for example, an A-th frequency (A-th probability)] 163 (a) to 163 (h)], when an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the icon is displayed. Changes to the second display mode at a second frequency [for example, the B-th frequency (B-th probability)] [for example, FIG. 163 (A) to FIG. (H)], the second frequency Characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the first frequency Gaming table to be. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and a certain icon in the fifth display mode [for example, a gold display mode] is displayed. However, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when a certain icon of the second display mode [eg, red display mode] is displayed [eg, the expectation of the big hit is high], When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the third display mode [eg, the third display mode] , Cth frequency (the Cth probability)] [for example, FIG. 164 (a) to FIG. 16 (h)], and by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, a certain display mode of the default display mode is selected. Performance to change the icon When one of the above is performed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode at a fourth frequency [for example, the Dth frequency (the Dth probability)] [for example, FIG. In the figure (H)], when an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, a display mode of the icon is the fifth display mode. To a fifth frequency [for example, the frequency of E (the probability of E)] [for example, FIG. 164 (A) to (D)], the fifth frequency is more than the third frequency. Is higher, and the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. I also explained about.

  "The third frequency is 0," a game console characterized by: I also explained about.

  "A game console characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. I also explained about.

  "A game console characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. I also explained about.

  In addition, even if the effect icon is not displayed, the certain icon may be transmitted from the default display mode to the first display mode to a sixth frequency [e.g., the Fth frequency (Fth probability) [E.g., FIG. 165 (a) to FIG. 165 (e)], the above-mentioned certain icon is displayed from the default display mode to the second display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. The seventh frequency [for example, the Gth frequency (Gth probability)] changes [for example, FIG. 165 (A) to FIG. (E)], and the above-mentioned presentation icon is displayed for the certain icon Even if it does not exist, the display mode changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, H-th frequency (probability of H)] [for example, FIG. E)], the seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency, The higher of the sixth frequency than the seventh frequency, the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  In addition, the above-mentioned certain icon is an icon which may be displayed in plural [for example, reserved icons h11 to h14], and in the effect that the certain icon is changed by the effect icon, the certain icon is displayed in plural If the display mode of a certain icon to be changed is changed and the certain icon is changed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the effect icon of the third display mode is selected. The effect of changing the certain icon according to is easier to recognize which certain icon among the plurality of displayed certain icons is a certain icon to be changed [e.g. A wave and arrow shown in α 11 (d) and FIG. I also explained about.

  Here, the certain icon to be changed may be one or a plurality of icons.

  In addition, “the display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as“ demonstration display ”) may be displayed, and in the case of the demonstration display, the number of reservations is 0, and a special symbol display [ For example, the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 may be displayed in a stopped state, and the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed. It may be displayed in the display period of the said demonstration display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, the demonstration display includes a symbol demonstration display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including the title of the game stand is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display.

  Moreover, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the difference in displayed words, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It does not have to be a difference depending on the presence or absence.

  The display means may be means for displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as a "demo display") without fail. Further, the demonstration display may be a display which is always displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demonstration display.

  "The display means is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG, giant panda," Navira character change "by a spider character The change effect display may be displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, and it may be displayed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed. When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. Figure 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), Figure 83 (G 1-3-1) to the same drawing (G 1-3-4), shown in Figure 91 Meter effect, Fig. 89 (Shi 2-2-1) ~ same (2-2-3)] When the second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [For example, FIG. 75 (A 3-2-1) to FIG. (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (G 1-3-1) to the same (G 1-3-3 b 2)] Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  The display means may be means for displaying the change effect display without fail. In addition, after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed without fail.

  In addition, during the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times by the effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, and the display of the variation display is being performed. In some cases, the display mode of the certain icon may change one or more times depending on the effect by the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 168 (A) to FIG. (P)], Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  In addition, during the display of the single variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon may change a plurality of times depending on the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIG. 166 (a) to FIG. p)], The game stand characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  In addition, while the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the certain icon succeeds for the first time and the second time, and the variation display There is a case (hereinafter referred to as “the first case”) which is completed [for example, FIG. 166 (a) to FIG. (P)], the effect icon is displayed during display of one change display of the decorative symbol. In the displayed state, there is also a case where the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails for the first time and succeeds for the second time, and the variable display ends (hereinafter referred to as "second case"). [For example, FIG. 167 (a) to FIG. 167 (p)], while the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, when the display mode of the certain icon is changed In the case where the first successful and the second fail, and the fluctuation display ends (hereinafter, “ In the case where the effect icon is displayed during the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, for example, in the case of FIG. 167 (A) to FIG. (P)). The change in the display mode of an icon may fail either the first time or the second time, and the variable display may end (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth case”) [eg, FIG. 166 (A) to FIG. (P)] In the third case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display], In the second case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed in a final display than in the third case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display], and in the first case Is a big hit map in the end than in the second case. A game table characterized in that a handle type is easily displayed in a fixed manner [for example, it is easy to make a big hit by the variable display or the subsequent variable display]. I also explained about.

  The description of the game stand here is in the case where the display mode of the certain icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the one variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It becomes limitation about the ease of the big hit.

  In addition, while the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times, and the display of the certain variation display is performed during the display of the variation display. There may be a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times in a state where the effect icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 168 (a) to FIG. (P)], a game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  Also, “the certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red], and the effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an area displayed in the certain color [for example, a kimono area]. , And an icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside a line of an edge] Stand. I also explained about.

  Here, in the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the area may be entirely displayed in the certain color. Further, a certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color or an area displayed in the certain color.

  Also, “the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over continuous symbol variation display [eg, the example shown in FIG. 77 (1) to FIG. (12), FIG. 173, etc.] Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about. The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over the continuous symbol variation display.

  Also, “the display means is a means by which a third change animation may be displayed, and the third change animation may be another icon [for example, an icon of a treasure box shown in FIG. I1] is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without accompanying the effect by I1], and the third change animation is an effect image [eg, smoke image of the certain mode [eg, red] A game console characterized by an animation [eg, FIG. 79 (E2) to FIG. (E3-2)] at least to be displayed. I also explained about.

  The display means may be means for displaying the third change animation without fail. The third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. May be

  Also, “the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode], and the fourth display mode [for example, in a red kimono When an effect of changing an icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon [eg, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.] displayed in the display mode], the display mode of the icon is the second The game console may be changed to a display mode of [for example, a red display mode] [for example, FIG. 164 (F)]. I also explained about.

  When an effect of changing a certain icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. It may change.

  In addition, “the display unit is a unit in which a fourth change animation may be displayed, and the fourth change animation is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIG. 77 (i) to FIG. 11 (i), FIG. 163 (c) to FIG. 163 (f), FIG. 163 (C) to FIG. It is a means that may be displayed, and the non-changing animation is an animation that performs an effect that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [eg, FIG. 77 (4-1) to FIG. (6), 163 (c) to the same figure (f), etc.], The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  The display means may be means for displaying the fourth change animation without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the non-change animation without fail.

"The display means is a means in which a change icon [for example, a change icon h0] may be displayed, and the change icon is an icon related to symbol change display being executed, and An icon is the said fluctuation icon, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.
The display means may be means for displaying the fluctuation icon without fail.

“The display means is a means by which a hold icon [eg, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed, and the hold icon is an icon related to symbol variation display to be started later, The holding icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holdings, and the certain icon is the holding icon. I also explained about.
The display means may be means for displaying the hold icon without fail.

  "The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100]". I also explained about.

In the above description, “display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (including all of them) , The second display device 208S, etc.], wherein the display means is a means by which a change icon [eg, change icon h0] may be displayed, and the display means is a hold icon [ For example, a pending icon h11 to h14] may be displayed, the variation icon is an icon related to symbol variation display being executed, and the pending icon is a symbol variation to be started later An icon relating to display, the hold icon means an icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold, and the variation icon is a first display It is an icon that may be displayed in an aspect [for example, a blue display aspect], and the variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display aspect [for example, a red display aspect], The case where the variation icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed is more than the case where the variation icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol form is likely to be finalized and displayed [for example, the degree of expectation of the big hit is high], the display means is a means in which a presentation icon may be displayed, and the presentation icon is the variation icon Another icon [e.g., an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], the effect icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and the effect icon has a fourth display mode [ Eg to a icon that may be displayed in a display manner on the lord wearing a red kimono,
When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes to the second display mode [eg, FIG. 168 (N)], and the effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [eg, a kimono area] displayed in a certain mode [eg, red], and the second display mode The fluctuation icon is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red], and the hold icon is changed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode There is a case where the display mode of the holding icon changes to a display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode [for example, FIG. 169 (f)] when an effect to be performed is performed. Table. It explained about.

  According to this game console, after the change of the hold icon, the hold icon of the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the interest of the player may be improved. .

  Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. And some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying the fluctuation icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the hold icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when the effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed to the second display mode without fail . In addition, when an effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the hold icon always changes to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. Good.

  In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lady wearing a blue kimono]", and the variation icon is a default display mode [for example, White color display mode], the default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode, and the default display mode is the second display mode. The display mode different from the display mode is the display mode having the highest possibility of being displayed among all the display modes of the variable icon, and the display mode according to the third display mode When the effect of changing the change icon of the default display mode is performed, the display mode of the change icon is transmitted to the first display mode at a first frequency [for example, the A frequency (Ath probability)] [for example, FIG. 163 (a) to FIG. (H)], the effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the default display mode by the effect icon of the third display mode is When it is performed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes to the second display mode at a second frequency [for example, the Bth frequency (Bth probability)] [for example, FIG. 163 (A) to FIG. (H)] A game console characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. I also explained about.

Also, “the variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode
The case where the variation icon of the fifth display mode [for example, the gold display mode] is displayed is more than the case where the variation icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed. Finally, the big hit symbol form is easily displayed with certainty [eg, the expectation of the big hit is high], and when the effect icon for changing the default display mode is changed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode The display mode of the variation icon changes to the first display mode at a third frequency [eg, the Cth frequency (Cth probability)] [eg, FIG. 164 (a) to FIG. 164 (h) When the effect of changing the change icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the change icon changes to the second display mode of the fourth frequency [e.g. , Change with frequency of D (D probability) [for example, from FIG. 164 (A) to FIG. (H)], change icon of the display mode of the default by the presentation icon of the fourth display mode When the effect to be displayed is performed, the display mode of the variation icon changes to the fifth display mode at a fifth frequency [for example, the frequency of E (probability of E)] [for example, FIG. (C)], The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency, and the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. I also explained about.

Also,
The third frequency is 0, the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  "A game console characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. I also explained about.

  "A game console characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. I also explained about.

Also, even if the effect icon is not displayed, the fluctuation icon may change from the default display mode to the first display mode to a sixth frequency [eg, the Fth frequency (Fth probability)]. [E.g., FIG. 165 (a) to FIG. 165 (e)], the change icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode even when the effect icon is not displayed. Change at a frequency of [for example, G frequency (G probability)] [for example, from FIG. 165 (A) to FIG. (E)], the fluctuation icon is displayed even if the effect icon is not displayed Change from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [eg H frequency (H probability)] [eg FIG. 165 (a) to FIG. (E)] The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The gaming machine characterized in that the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the fluctuation icon is an icon which may be displayed in plural [for example, hold icon h11 to h14], and in the effect of changing the fluctuation icon by the effect icon, a plurality of the fluctuation icons are displayed. In this case, the variation icon is changed by the effect icon of the third display mode rather than the effect of changing the change icon by the effect icon of the fourth display condition by changing the display mode of the change icon to be changed. It is easier for the effect to be changed to recognize which fluctuation icon among the plurality of displayed fluctuation icons is the fluctuation icon to be changed [for example, FIG. 11 (d) or FIG. Waves and arrows shown in)], a game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  In addition, “the display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as“ demonstration display ”) may be displayed, and in the case of the demonstration display, the number of reservations is 0, and a special symbol display [ For example, the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 may be displayed in a stopped state, and the effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed. It may be displayed in the display period of the said demonstration display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, the demonstration display includes a symbol demonstration display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including the title of the game stand is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display.

  Moreover, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the difference in displayed words, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It does not have to be a difference depending on the presence or absence.

  The display means may be means for displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as a "demo display") without fail. Further, the demonstration display may be a display which is always displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demonstration display.

  "The display means is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG, giant panda," Navira character change "by a spider character The change effect display may be displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, and it may be displayed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed. When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. Figure 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), Figure 83 (G 1-3-1) to the same drawing (G 1-3-4), shown in Figure 91 Meter effect, Fig. 89 (Shi 2-2-1) ~ same (2-2-3)] When the second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [For example, FIG. 75 (A 3-2-1) to FIG. (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (G 1-3-1) to the same (G 1-3-3 b 2)] Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  The display means may be means for displaying the change effect display without fail. In addition, after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed without fail.

  In addition, during the display of the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times by the effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, and during the display of the variation display The display mode of the variation icon may change one or more times depending on the effect by the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 168 (A) to FIG. (P)], Play table. I also explained about.

  In addition, during the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon may change a plurality of times depending on the effect by the effect icon [eg, FIG. 166 (a) to FIG. 166 (p ], That the game stand characterized by. I also explained about.

  In addition, while the effect icon is being displayed during the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds for the first time and the second time, and the variation display is ended. (Hereinafter referred to as the “first case”) [for example, FIG. 166 (a) to FIG. (P)], the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol In the state in which the change display mode of the change icon is changed the first time fails and the second change succeeds, and the change display ends (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"). Fig. 167 (a) to (p)], while the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variable icon is performed for the first time In the case where the second display fails and the variable display ends (hereinafter referred to as “ In the case where the effect icon is displayed during the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, for example, in the case of FIG. 167 (A) to FIG. (P)). The change display mode of the change icon may fail both the first time and the second time, and the change display may end (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth case”) [for example, FIG. 166 (A) to FIG. P)] In the third case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easy to hit the big display in the variable display or the subsequent variable display], In the second case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed in a final display than in the third case [for example, it is easy to make a big hit in the variable display or the subsequent variable display]; The final big-hit figure than the second case A game table characterized in that a handle type is easily displayed in a fixed manner [for example, it is easy to make a big hit by the variable display or the subsequent variable display]. I also explained about.

  The description of the game stand here is in the case where the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed only twice while the effect icon is being displayed while the one fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It becomes limitation about the ease of the big hit.

  In addition, while the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times, and during the display of the variation display, the effect is displayed There may be a case where the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes one or more times in a state where the icon is not displayed [for example, FIG. 168 (a) to FIG. (P)], and a game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  Also, “the certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red], and the effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an area displayed in the certain color [for example, a kimono area]. , And the variation icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line] . I also explained about.

  Here, in the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the area may be entirely displayed in the certain color. Further, the variation icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color or an area displayed in the certain color.

  Also, the certain aspect may be a display aspect using a certain character, or may be a display aspect using a certain kind of pattern.

  Also, “the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over continuous symbol variation display [eg, the example shown in FIG. 77 (1) to FIG. (12), FIG. 173, etc.] Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over the continuous symbol variation display.

  Also, “the display means is a means by which a third change animation may be displayed, and the third change animation may be another icon [for example, an icon of a treasure box shown in FIG. I1] is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without accompanying the effect by I1], and the third change animation is an effect image [eg, smoke image of the certain mode [eg, red] A game console characterized by an animation [eg, FIG. 79 (E2) to FIG. (E3-2)] at least to be displayed. I also explained about.

  The display means may be means for displaying the third change animation without fail. The third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. May be

  In addition, “the fluctuation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode], and the fourth display mode [for example, a display of a red kimono When the effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM etc.] displayed in the mode], the display mode of the fluctuation icon is the second display mode [For example, it may change to a red display mode] [for example, FIG. 164 (F)], and a game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon always changes to the second display mode. May be

  In addition, “the display unit is a unit in which a fourth change animation may be displayed, and the fourth change animation is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon [eg, FIG. (11) to (11), Figure 163 (c) to (f), Figure 163 (C) to (F), etc.], and the display means displays an animation without change. The non-change animation is an animation that performs an effect that does not change the display mode of the change icon [eg, FIG. 77 (4-1) to FIG. (6), FIG. C) ~ Figure (f), etc.], the game stand characterized in that. I also explained about.

  The display means may be means for displaying the fourth change animation without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the non-change animation without fail.

  "The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100]". I also explained about.

  Next, the explanation of the icon change effect will be continued. The icon change effect referred to here changes the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the notice icon, the mini game icon, and the icon change notice icon in addition to the hold icon and the change icon. It is an effect.

  FIG. 174 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 174 (a) is a flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is out without reaching the reach state. FIG. 7B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is a big hit or a loss after reaching the reach state.

  In FIG. 174 (a), after the start (variation start) of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol stops being decided after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In addition, in the following description, although the stop order of a decorative symbol is made in order of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol in principle, it is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop may be performed simultaneously according to the notice (the change notice and the advance notice), the mini game and the effect of the dummy game, etc., or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed simultaneously. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the finalized stop 11) can be expressed in some cases. In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of rendering that will be out without reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (11) -1”, “Figure XX (11) -2” ... as branch numbers in the drawings. Etc. may be used, and these branched numbers can be mutually replaced. Further, there are cases where effects that can be combined as various effects in the timing chart shown in FIG. 174 (a) can be performed in a period shown by "(11)" (for example, a Gasse notice, etc.). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or from the third stop to the decision stop, perform false eye announcement (preceeding notice) by pseudo-gaze effect, same color (same kind) symbol stop, etc. There are also cases where you can do it. This is a concept that is also applicable to each effect example of the embodiments described above.

  Figure 174 (b), after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation start), through the formation of reach state, transition to the super reach (SP reach), derived results of the reach production, the decorative symbol is removed or big hit It shows the flow until it is decided and stopped in the aspect of, and then the big hit game is over. Here, a period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by a period of “(1)”, and a period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to the SP reach is the period of “(2)” The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of reach production is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the result of the reach production to derivation is from "(4) In some cases, it may be possible to represent the period from the decision stop to the end of the big hit game by the period "(5)". In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of an effect that becomes a big hit or lose after reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (2) -1” and “Figure XX (2) -2” as branch numbers in the drawings. There are cases where “Figure XX (3) -1”, “Figure XX (3) -2”, etc. are used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, various notices including mini games and advance notices may be performed in the period of “(1)”, and effects such as pseudo-links may be performed in the period of “(2)”. If a notice or group notice may be made by the display of a normal reach or a cut-in image, or if there is a chance up notice during SP reach or a notice by a cut-in image displayed in the period of (3). In the period of "(4)", there may be swing fluctuation, revival big hit effect, wipe display, etc. In the period of "(5)", the effect during the big hit game is performed, and the big hit There may be a case in which a probability change notification or a hold sequence notification etc. is performed during the game. In the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is performed. In addition, these notices and effects may be combined and performed, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) is overlapped with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, portions described with the same branch numbers can be replaced as appropriate.

  FIGS. 175 through 180 are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner the change effect centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 are effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 is various types shown in the other drawings. An effect is also feasible. Furthermore, although the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided in FIGS. 175 to 180, although these are not shown, they are illustrated in FIGS. 175 to 180. The effect example may be an effect example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. In FIGS. 175 to 180, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. A transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Reference numerals shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used heretofore are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 174 or the technical idea shown in the other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIG. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 174 or the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In addition, although the description in FIGS. 174-180 is applicable to any presentation example of this specification, application to the presentation example described using FIGS. 14-174 is preferable.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example in which the navigation character NJ of the ninja in the default display mode takes action on the hold icon.

  First, in FIG. 175 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") It is displayed stopped. Although the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Α (a), it may be displayed.

  In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (a), a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and various displays such as icons and mini items are performed on the right base icon bIr, but in FIG. 175 (a) The character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a type of display of the effect icon, and is also a type of icon change notice display. The navigation character is also a display for giving notice that one of the icons may change, and depending on the animation using this navigation character, one of the icons may actually change.

  The navi characters NJ of the ninja shown in FIG. 175 (a) are displayed in the default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. A plurality of display modes are prepared for the navigation character NJ of the ninja, and the default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, and may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. In addition, as the above-mentioned plural types of display modes, as modes showing the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit, the mode of white or no pattern (A mode), the blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode ), Green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), red or lattice aspect (D aspect), gold or vertical line aspect (E aspect), iridescent or transverse line aspect (C) The Fth aspect is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect having the lowest player's degree of advantage and the expectation of the jackpot is the A aspect, and the B aspect, the C aspect, the D aspect and the E aspect. The order F becomes higher, and the F-th mode becomes the mode in which the player's degree of advantage and the expectation of the big hit are the highest. In addition, the player's advantage referred to here is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a definite change state or / and a short time state), that a premier presentation is easy to be started, or a big hit finalization presentation It may be easy to be started. In addition, it is also included that it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear. Furthermore, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be represented by the difference in size and number.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in FIG. 175 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 are both 0, and neither the holding icon nor the variation icon is displayed. Therefore, the white ninja navigation character NJ may be displayed even during a period when the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and may be displayed even when the number of reservations is 0. is there. In addition, even if it is a navigation character NJ of a ninja in other display modes (for example, a red display mode etc.), the number of reservations may be displayed if it is displayed during a period when the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed. It may be displayed in a period of 0. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed in the period in which the number of reservations is zero. In this case, the ninja's navigation character NJ of the display mode other than the default display mode during a period (period of stop display or finalized display) in which the number of reservations is 1 or more and the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed May also be displayed. In addition, the period during which the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed may be limited to the navigation character NJ of the white ninja which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of reservations.

  In addition, the second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (0) -1, and the number of reservations for Special Figure 1 and the number for Special Figure 2 are also 0. It is informed that there is.

  In FIG. 175 (11) -1, there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -1, the animation for increasing the holding icon is completed, and the first holding icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed only for a moment. Further, in the upper right second number-of-holds display, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 becomes 1 only for a moment. In (175) -2 of FIG. 175, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the change display of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the number of reservations is 0, a message display of “Welcome” is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the start of the change is congratulated. Also, in FIG. 175 (11) -2, the moving animation of the reserve icon of the special view 1 is completed, and the icon of the first reserve icon h11 displayed earlier for a moment is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. This variation icon h0 is also a display mode of default (white).

  In FIG. 175 (11) -3, the special figure 1 starting opening 230 has one ball entered again, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -3, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Also, in the upper right second number-of-holds display, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is one. During the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 175 (11) -2, entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 continues to occur, and the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 175 (11) -4 In the device 208L, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, four hold icons (first hold icon h11 to fourth hold icon h14) are displayed, and in the second hold number display in the upper right, the number of holds for special figure 1 is It is four. Furthermore, a message display of "HOLD MAX" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ. Each of the four hold icons is a default (white) display mode hold icon.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -5, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. That is, the "decoration 7" has started to fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -6, the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is In the same figure (11) -7 which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of the decorative patterns of lost is fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 175 (11) -8, the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  In the following FIG. 175 (11) -1, the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 1 is completed. doing. As a result, in the pending icon display area HIS, three pending icons of the first pending icon h11, the second pending icon h12 and the third pending icon h13 are displayed, and in the variation icon display area CIS, the first pending icon The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13, the change icon h0 is also a display mode of default (white). In the upper right second number-of-retentions display, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed, and this navigation character is displayed across continuous symbol variation display. The ninja navigation character NJ is displayed in the initial posture facing the front so far, but the ninja navigation character NJ may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 175 (11) -2 that follows, a message display of “Tell me attention” is added to the navigation character NJ of the ninja, and an icon change effect is started. That is, although the start timing of the icon change effect here is after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, it may be simultaneous with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, it can be said that it is after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before the first stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before the start of reach effect start . This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ, and in the following FIG. 175 (11) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ previously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS However, the character moves to the upper left corner, and in the same figure (11) -4, the white ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. In addition, although the aspect of the shuriken is an aspect different from the display aspect of the navi character NJ of the ninja, it may be the same aspect (here, white). In FIG. 175 (11) -5, the three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the reserved icon display area HIS but also the variation icon display area CIS, and even the variation icon h0 may be difficult to view. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0. In FIG. 175 (11) -6, the effect image EHI disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any one of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, and three suspension icons h11 All ~ h13 remain the default (white) display mode. In this manner, the icon may be covered by the effect image EHI, and may not only change but not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the display mode of the icon changes may be regarded as a success animation, and an animation in which the display mode of the icons does not change may be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may always be changed. In addition, the effect image EHI may not occur even if the shuriken flies to a completely misplaced place, disappears on the way, or reaches the effect display area 208d, and in this case, in this case, It also becomes a failure animation. However, the icon may be changed even if it is not covered by the effect image EHI. If the icon changes, it becomes a successful animation.

  In FIG. 175 (11) -7, the white ninja navigation character NJ, which has been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and on the right base icon bIr Display of failure message is added. The icon change effect (animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ) is a effect performed in the period of FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. 175 (11) -7, but moves from the effect icon display area DIS It may be considered that the effect is performed only during the same period ((11) -3 to (11) -6), or until the effect image EHI disappears after the shuriken is thrown (FIG. (11)-4-It may be considered as the effect currently performed only in the same figure (11)-6), and may be regarded as the effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -8, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and FIG. 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 6) -6, a second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either, and the same figure continues In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the lost, is fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 175 (11) -11, the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  In Fig. 175 (1) -1 that follows, the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon which has been the first suspension icon h11 so far in the variation icon display area CIS Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. The two pending icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are also default (white) display modes. In the upper right second number-of-retentions display, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 1) -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. A message display of "reach" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 175 (2) -1.

  However, as shown in FIG. 175 (4) -1, in the third stop, "decoration 3" rather than "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and "decoration 2"-"decoration 3" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost. -"Decoration 2" is fluctuating. And in FIG. 175 (4) -2, finalization display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  Here, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the hold icon as well as the navi characters NJ of the ninja, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. It is a display mode. In addition, as a display mode of a plurality of types in the hold icon, a white or no pattern (A mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode), a green or a diamond pattern as a display mode of the preview preview Aspect (the C aspect), red or lattice aspect (the D aspect), golden or vertical line aspect (the E aspect), iridescent or horizontal line aspect (the F aspect) It is prepared. Among these embodiments, the embodiment with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the A embodiment, and the B embodiment, the C embodiment, the D embodiment and the E embodiment are in the order of highest. The Fth aspect becomes an aspect (for example, an aspect of the big hit determination) in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest.

  FIG. (11) -6 ′ shown at the right end of FIG. 175 is an example different from FIG. (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in FIG. Of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the blue display mode. That is, although the example shown in FIG. 175 (11) -6 ′ is an example of a successful animation, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit is lower than the case of changing to the red display mode.

  Further, FIG. (11) -6 ′ ′ shown at the right end of FIG. 175 and FIG. (11) −6 after the effect image EHI shown in FIG. Each of the three reserve icons h11 to h13 has only the first reserve icon h11 changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 175 (11) -6 ′ ′ is also an example of a successful animation, and a big hit is expected compared to the case where the display mode is changed to blue (in the case of FIG. (11) -6 ′). Degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

  As described above, in the icon change effect which is an animation using the navi character NJ of the default display mode, the change of the icon may be successful or may fail. In addition, in the icon change effect which is an animation using the navigation character NJ of the ninja of blue (the B mode), it is more than the icon change presentation which is an animation using the navigation character NJ of the ninja of the white (the A mode). The probability of success in changing the icon is high, and in the icon change effect that is an animation using the green (Nth C mode) ninja navigation character NJ, the blue (Bth mode) ninja navigation character NJ is used. The probability of success in changing the icon is higher than that of the icon change effect that is the animation used.

  Similarly to the variation icon h0, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, which are the same as the modes A to E. Also in the display mode in the variation icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. In addition, each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal advance notice) regarding a big hit in the currently displayed variable display, and represents an expectation (reliability) of the big hit. In other words, the mode with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the A mode, and the B mode, the C mode, the D mode, and the E mode become higher in the order of The aspect of F becomes the aspect with the highest expectation of the big hit (for example, the aspect of the big hit determination).

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example in which the red ninja navigation character NJ takes action on the hold icon.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 175 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  Fig. 176 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in the figure corresponds to (11) in the second column from the left in the figure to Fig. 175 (0) -1. It is the same as -3 and all three pending | holding icons h11-h13 are display modes of default (white), and the fluctuation icon h0 is also a display mode of default (white). In addition, in FIG. 176 (11) -2, a message display of “Focus on me” is added to the navigation character NJ of the white ninja, an icon change effect is started, and in the next FIG. 176 (11) -3, white is displayed. 'S ninja navigation character NJ is moving to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 176 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the effect image EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only part of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH, or all of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 176 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ of the ninja who has been a white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH changes to a red display mode. Although the mode of the effect image EIH is different from the display mode of the navi character NJ after the change, the mode may be the same mode (red here).

  In FIG. 176 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). In FIG. 176 (11)-7, the three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208 d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. Although the mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the navi character NJ of the ninja, it may be the same mode (here, red). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the reserved icon display area HIS but also the variation icon display area CIS, and even the variation icon h0 may be difficult to view. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0. In FIG. 176 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a success animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a success animation in which one or more of the hold icon and the change icon must be changed. Here, the mode to be changed (the mode after change) may be determined in advance to be the same mode as the navigation character NJ, that is, red, or may not be determined to the mode after change. However, it is changed to a mode that the reliability of the big hit increases. Therefore, there may be a case where the game is changed to a big hit finalized rainbow aspect. In addition, in the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, it may be surely changed to the same mode as the mode of the effect image EHI covering the icon. Even in the case of an animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, a case of failure animation (the form of the icon does not change) may be intentionally provided.

  In FIG. 176 (11) -9, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and "do it" on the right base icon bIr. Display of success message has been added. In this example, in the icon change presentation, the change presentation of the navigation character is also performed. It should be noted that it is possible to think of the icon change effect and the change effect of the navigation character separately, and in this case, the change effect of the navigation character is as shown in FIG. 176 (11) -3 to (11) -5. The icon change effect is as shown in FIG. 176 (11) -6 to the same figure (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  176 (11) -10 to (11) -13, it is assumed that the navi character NJ of the ninja is in the red display mode and that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is also the red display mode. Except for the above, it is the same as FIG. 175 (11) -8 to FIG. (11) -11 explained above, and it is a combination of the decorative designs of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2 Is displayed.

  In Fig. 176 (1) -1 that follows, the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon display area CIS is the red first suspension icon h11. Icon is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Although a red fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in FIG. 176 (1) -1, this red fluctuation icon h0 is larger than the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 175 (1) -1. , Larger than the hold icon. Note that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are display modes of default (white). Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 11) -3, a second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and a reach state is formed. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 175 (2) -1 is added with a red “superheat” message display instead of a “reach” message display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (2) -2, at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the presentation icon display area DIS is started with the advance notice of the sabo hani group. , Sabohani is overlapping. The navigation character may overlap with at least a portion of the sabothani without the sabothani overlapping. Also, at least a portion of the "superheat" message display may overlap with the SaboHani, and conversely, the "superheat" message display may overlap with at least a portion of the SaboHani. In the following FIG. 176 (2) -3, a message display of “SP is developed” in red is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja, and it is reported that it will develop into a super reach. In addition, when the Sabohani group advance notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second number-on-hold display. In this example, even if the sabothani group announcement is started, the hold icon, the fluctuation icon, and the navi character remain without disappearing, but when the sabohani group announcement is started, the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4 At the same time, the display of the hold icon may disappear, and the base icon hs0 may disappear as well. Also, the navigation character may also disappear. Furthermore, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be displayed continuously.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (3) -1, the screen is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the hostess swordsman confront each other is displayed. In addition, a message display of “Ken-Age Reach” is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the enemy character swordsman is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the enemy character swordsman.

  In response to the development to the super reach, as shown in FIG. 176 (3) -2, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a deca-button image 136ab which is a large image imitating the chance button 136. This big button image 136ab overlaps with all of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman, which are displayed as a super reach effect display, so that the Yoshimune and the swordsman can not be seen. The deca-button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character is less visible than before being overlapped. Furthermore, the deca-button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being overlapped. Further, in the deca-button image 136ab, characters of “push” for promoting the operation are displayed large according to the size of the deca-button image 136ab. Furthermore, the red ninja navigation character NJ is added with a message display "It is a big button" in place of the message display of "Swordsman Reach".

  In FIG. 176 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136ab disappears, and the display is switched to the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character NJ is less visible than before being overlapped. Furthermore, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being overlapped. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "strong cut-in" in place of the message display of "It's a big button", but a message display of "Kengo reach" is added again. It is also good.

  In addition, normally, the operation effective period which receives operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect will be performed after the operation effective period has elapsed. You may

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene where the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy player swordsman is displayed with the word “win”, and the first decoration In the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, the "decorative 2" to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" Is notified.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol which has been reduced and displayed below the second number-on-hold display is returned and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to swing fluctuation. . It should be noted that no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, but a message display of “big hit” may be added. If the hold icon or the change icon has disappeared, the display is returned at this timing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a definite manner. The red variation icon h0 is erased at the timing of this finalized display. The red fluctuation icon h0 is a true advance notice. Also, the red ninja navigation character NJ is returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variation display started in FIG. 176 (1) -1 corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 at the timing of FIG. 176 (11) -8) is ended. The red ninja navigation character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variable display ends and the final display is performed, the red ninja navigation character NJ returns to the default display mode.
FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of selection of an icon change notice display and a change in the form.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 177 is an example in which the type of icon change notice display is selected from the demonstration display, and in (0) -1 of FIG. Is finished, and the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 177 (0) -1, the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 177 (0) -1 is displayed in the default display mode.

  If a new symbol variation display is not started before a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the final display of the special symbol stop symbol is performed with the special symbol hold being 0, the first decorative symbol display A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, while the background of the symbol variation display is being performed, the combination of the symbol demo display in which the combination of the stopped decoration symbols continues to be displayed and the combination of the stopped decoration symbols disappear and the symbol variation display is performed. There is an animation demo display in which a dedicated animation is displayed by switching from the background screen. In addition, a dedicated background screen may be displayed even in the symbol demo display. Although an animation demonstration display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (0) -2, an animation demonstration display may be displayed via the symbol demonstration display, or a symbol demonstration display An animation demo display may be displayed without going through. In the animation demo display shown in FIG. 177 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in a large size is displayed, and in the lower part, it is informed that a menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. There is.

  In FIG. 177 (0) -3, the chance button 136 is operated, and a menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. In FIG. 177 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icon is displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. . Further, in the option menu screen, a picture of operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  In the state where the menu screen is displayed, when the down key 137d is operated once, as shown in FIG. 177 (0) -4, the cursor icon cs displayed so far in the effect customization icon moves down by one This time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon lights up in red. In the state where the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, when the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 177 (0) -5, the character selection screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 177 (0) -5, the character of the lord, the character of the leader and the character of the ninja are all displayed in the default display mode, and the character of the currently selected lord is selected. , Selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF is moved, and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. In this state, when the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 177 (0) -7, a character selection decision screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 177 (0) -6. Of the three characters shown in, only the character of the ninja is displayed large, and the message display of the large "I leave it alone" is added. Thereafter, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L once returns to the screen before the animation demo display is displayed, and is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 177 (0) -8. Is displayed with the white ninja navigation character NJ added with a message of “thank you”.

  In the selection of the character by the player, the type of the character can be selected, but the display mode of each character can not be selected, and the display mode of each character is the default display mode. However, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 177 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed, and when the character is selected, the display mode different from the default display mode is initially displayed from the beginning It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and when the character which is the default display mode on the character selection screen is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIG. 177 (0) -7, the default display is performed. The character may be automatically changed to a character different from the character, and may be displayed from the beginning in the effect icon display area DIS in a manner different from the default display manner, or the display of the character selection decision screen is the default. When the character that was the mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the default display There may be a case where automatically changing the character of the different aspects and like. In these cases, the display mode is determined internally by the lottery regarding the effect.

  The example shown second from the left in FIG. 177 is an example in which the type of icon change notice display is selected from the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display of the decorative symbols is finished when the number of reservations is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. The second column in FIG. 177 (0) -1 to (11) -2 is the same as FIG. 175 (0) -1 to FIG. , And the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

  In FIG. 177 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character BC of the default display mode is displayed. In this state, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is determined to be the character of the Bancho character as the navigation character, and a message display of "Yoshaa" is added to the navigation character BC of the Pancho.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -4, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. In this example, the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the change is possible until the first stop is performed in the change display of the decorative symbol, and the tutorial display is displayed until then. When the stop is made, the above tutorial display disappears. It should be noted that the character change of the navigation character by cross key operation during the change may be possible until the second stop is performed, or may be possible until it shifts to the reach state, or from the start of the variable display It may be possible for a fixed period of time, or may be possible until the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either, In the same figure (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, is fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 177 (11) -7, the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reservations of the special drawing is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 177 to (11) -10 in the fourth column (right end) in the same figure, (11) -10 in FIG. 175 (0) -1 in the same figure The same applies to -2, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and all three display icons h11 to h13 of the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 177 (11) -10, the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display of “focus on attention” is added. Here, the change effect directed to the navigation character NJ of the ninja is started instead of the icon change effect directed to the hold icon or the variation icon.

  In FIG. 177 (11) -11, the white ninja navigation character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, but at least a part of the ninja navigation character NJ on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, Covered by the effect image EIH, the navigation character NJ is less visible than before being covered. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIIH. In FIG. 177 (11) -12, the navi character NJ of the ninja, who was in a white display mode until the effect image EIH disappears and is covered with the effect image EIH, is on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. And the display mode is changed to red. The mode of the effect image EIH may be the same (here, red) as the display mode of the navi character NJ after the change. The navigation character NJ changed to the red display mode is added with a message display such as "Atsushi".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and 11) At the second stop is performed at 11) -14, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped at the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either, and the third figure at the same figure (11) -15. A stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost are shaking and fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 177 (11) -16, the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon or the change icon is not started.

  In Fig. 177 (1) -1 that follows, the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode is the default (white) display mode regardless of whether the first hold icon h11 or the second hold icon h12 is set. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 177, and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character.

  In FIG. 178 (1) -2 continued from FIG. 177 (1) -1, the icon change effect is started, and in the next FIG. 176 (11) -3, the navigation character NJ of the red ninja is an effect icon display area Moving from DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 178 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is throwing three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). In FIG. 178 (1) -4, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the hold icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS The flash effect image is covered by EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two reserve icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0 is covered by the flash effect image EHI, and the respective icons h11, h12 and h0 become less visible than before being covered. ing. In addition, only one part of these three icons h11, h12 and h0 may be covered by the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). Note that the flash effect image EHI covers only the change icon display area CIS of the reserved icon display area HIS and the change icon display area CIS, and only the change icon h0 may be difficult to view. In FIG. 178 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and among the three icons h11, h12 and h0, only the change icon h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size also It is getting bigger. The size may be changed as it is and only the color may be changed, or the color may be the same and increased by the size. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ here is a success animation. In FIG. 178 (1) -6, the navigation character NJ of the red ninja who had moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and "do it" on the right base icon bIr. Display of success message has been added.

  Fig. 178 (1) 7-10 to Fig. (4)-2 are the same as Fig. 176 (1)-2 to Fig. (4)-2 described above, and the reach state is reached. A group notice is given, and then it is developed into a super reach, and a deka buttoned presentation is performed during a sword strike, and finally, a combination of a decorative pattern of a big hit "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" Is displayed. The navi character NJ of the ninja who was in the red display mode is returned to the white display mode at the timing of the final display.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 178 is a view showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reservations of the special drawing is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 178 to (11) -4 in the fourth column (right end) in the same figure, (11) -4 in FIG. 176 (0) -1 in the same figure The same as with -4, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and all three display icons h11 to h13 of the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 178 (11) -2, the white ninja navigation character NJ is integrally displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display of “focus on fine” is added. There is. Subsequently, in FIG. 178 (11) -3, the navy character NJ of the integral white ninja moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 178 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the three effect images EIH, and the navigation character NJ is less visible than before being covered. . The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIIH. In FIG. 178 (11) -5, the three effect images EIH disappear and the navi characters NJ of the ninja who were in the integral white display mode before being covered with the effect images EIH are three in the same white It has increased to the body. That is, the same number of navigation characters NJ as white ninjas are displayed as the number of reservations of the special view. The number of effect images EIH is also the same as the number of suspension of the special view.

  Continuing on, in FIG. 178 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ throws a shuriken toward the effect display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the effect display area 208d. It is going on. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, it is white). In FIG. 178 (11) -7, the three thwarves reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the reserved icon display area HIS but also the variation icon display area CIS, and even the variation icon h0 may be difficult to view. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0.

  In FIG. 178 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a success animation. Also, in FIG. 178 (11) -8, at least a portion of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered by three or more multiple effect images EIH, and the three white ninja navigation characters Each of the NJs is less visible than before being covered. Note that each of the navy characters NJ of the three white ninjas may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or all may be covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 178 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappear, and the three white ninja navigation characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappear and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS An integral white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and on the right base icon bIr, a display of a success message of "I did it" is added. In addition, among the navy characters NJ of the three white ninjas, only one may be the navy characters NJ of the red ninja. Moreover, the position of the navigation character NJ of the red ninja may be at the right end according to the position of the held icon which has been changed, and by doing this, the icon to be changed in the mode and display position of the navigation character NJ The display mode after the change can be suggested (predicted) by the navigation character NJ.

  Also in this example, in the icon change presentation, the change presentation of the navigation character is also performed, and the icon presentation and the navigation presentation of the navigation character can be considered separately. In this case, the change of the navigation character The effects are as shown in FIG. 178 (11) -3 to (11) -5, and the icon change effects are as shown in FIG. 178 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Also, in this example, in FIG. 178 (11) -9, the navigation character NJ of three white ninjas is returned to the navigation character NJ of an integral white ninja, but the navigation characters of three white ninjas are returned. NJ may continue to be displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS as it is.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 178 and another rendering example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (11) -10 continued from FIG. 178 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a "(11) -11, the second stop is performed, and" decoration 2 "is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either, and the same figure continues. At (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, are fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 179 (11) -13, the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon or the change icon is also performed.

  The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 179 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. Fig. 179 (11)-4 'is an example different from Fig. 178 (11)-4 continued from Fig. 178 (11)-3, and at least a portion of the navigation character NJ of the white ninja moved to the upper left The navigation character is covered with a plurality of effect images EIH and is less visible than before being covered. Note that only part of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH, or all of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH. In (179) -5 'of FIG. 179, all of the plurality of effect images EIH disappear, and a navigation character having a red display mode and a large display size is displayed. Here, although a plurality of modes (color and size) change simultaneously, the plurality of modes (color and size) may change at different timings. In addition, the navigation character NJ of the ninja may remain white and only the display size may be greatly changed. Further, the size of the display size corresponds to the expectation (reliability) of the big hit, and the larger the display size, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit.

  In FIG. 179 (11) -6 ′, the large red navy navigation character NJ is throwing a shuriken toward the effect display area 208d. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). In FIG. 179 (11) -7, the three thwarves reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red).

  In FIG. 179 (11) -8 ′, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 displays the ninja navigation character NJ from the display mode of the default (white). It has changed to the same red display mode as the mode. Also, in FIG. 179 (11) -8, the large red navy ninja navigation character NJ is covered by a large number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be covered with the effect image EIH, or all of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 179 (11) -9 ′, many effect images EIH disappear, and the large red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappears, and the original image is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The white ninja navigation character NJ returned to the size of is displayed, and on the right base icon bIr, the display of the success message "I did it" is added.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of a notice animation using a navigation character. In the leftmost column (11) -1 to (1) -3 in FIG. 179, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3 but decreases to 3 to 2 The first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 179 (1) -1 is the same as (11) -8 in the lower end of the third row in FIG. 178 to (11) -2 in FIG. 178 except for the points. In the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the default (white) display mode are displayed. Further, in FIG. 179 (1)-2, the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS with the message display of “Take care of yourself”. .

  In FIG. 179 (1) -3, the navy character NJ of the white ninja moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 179 (1) -4, the mini game is started. That is, a large message display indicating that the possibility of a big hit is high is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left corner when the chance button 136 is pressed and the third eye of the dice comes out. Subsequently, in FIG. 179 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect is started . In addition, the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 179 (1) -5 is added with a message message of “press” prompting the user to press the chance button 136. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 179 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (1) -7, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays an image of the third eye of the dice, and the white ninja navigation character NJ of “Heyshaa” The message display is added first, and then the message display of "superheat" is added (FIG. 179 (1) -8). In this example, you hit a mini game. In FIG. 179 (11) -9, the image of the third eye of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner is returned on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. . A message display of "superheat" is added to the navi character NJ of the ninja who has returned to the effect icon display area DIS. The above-described animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIGS. 179 (1) -4 to (1) -9 is not an animation that changes an icon, but is a decorative pattern currently being performed. It is a notice animation about a big hit in a variable display. Here, by displaying the third eye image of the dice, it is predicted that the possibility of a big hit is high, and it is a preview animation by a mini game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 11), the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (2) -2, the advance notice of the sabohani group is started. Before the Sabohan group notice is started, or at the same time as the Sabohan group notice is started, or after the Sabohan group notice is started, a change character of the navi character is performed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The navi characters NJ of the ninja who were in the white display mode are changed to the red display mode. The change of the navi character may be performed when hit in the mini game or may be performed independently of the result of the mini game. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, which has been the default display mode, also changes, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. Is changing to a combined display mode. The change of the display mode of the variation icon may be performed when the player plays in the mini game, or may be performed independently of the result of the mini game. Further, in FIG. 179 (2) -2, on the right base icon bIr, a message display of “Change of icon” in red is added. Although the change timing of the display mode of the change icon h0 is after the end of the change effect of the navi character, it may be before the start of the change effect of the navi character, or even during the change effect of the navi character Good.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (2)-2, at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is overlapped with Sabo Hani. The navigation character may overlap with at least a portion of the sabothani without the sabothani overlapping. Moreover, although the message display of "icon change" overlaps with at least one part of Sabo Hani, conversely, Sabo Hani may overlap with at least one part of the message display of "Icon change". In addition, although the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed does not overlap the Sabo Hani, the Sabo Hani may overlap with at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and conversely, the variation icon h0 may be at least a portion May overlap. In addition, if a sabothani group advance notice is started, the display of the decoration symbol is reduced and displayed under the 2nd number-on-hold display.

  Continuing on, in FIG. 179 (2) -3, a message display of “premier” of red is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja, and it is informed that the premiere effect is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (3) -1, the super reach (Kenou reach) production is started earlier than the premiere production, and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the hostile swordsman are confronted is displayed. There is. In addition, a message display of “Ken-Age Reach” is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the enemy character swordsman is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the enemy character swordsman. In addition, although at least a part of the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is overlapped with the enemy character swordsman, at least a part of the enemy character swordsman may be overlapped with the fluctuation icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (3) -2, the premiere effect is started from the middle of the kana great reach effect. Here, the premiere effect is an effect in which the variation icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is enlarged and displayed, and an image in which a red letter V is combined with a pattern on which a character rides a motorcycle is displayed large at the center of the screen The image of the main character, Yoshimune, and the enemy of the swordsman match, the image overlaps and the display of the swordsman reach production is more difficult to see than before it is overlapped. With the premiere production, the jackpot is finalized or almost finalized.

When the premiere effect is finished, the image which has been largely displayed at the center of the screen is reduced and displayed again as the fluctuation icon h0 (FIG. 179 (3) -5). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy player, the sword, is displayed with the word "win", and the middle symbol in the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. “Decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At least a part of the re-displayed variation icon h0 is overlapped with the display of "decor 2" which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern.
FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 179.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -1 continued from FIG. 179 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol which has been reduced and displayed under the second number-of-holds display is returned and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to swing fluctuation. . It should be noted that no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, but a message display of “big hit” may be added. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display. Also, the red ninja navigation character NJ is returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  Although in FIG. 179 (1)-4 to (1)-9 the navigation character NJ of the white ninja is used, not the animation for changing the icon but the announcement animation by the mini game is executed. Animations that change icons may also be played mini games that may or may not succeed. That is, if the mini game succeeds, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game fails, the white ninja navigation character NJ is the red ninja navigation character NJ The white ninja navigation character NJ remains the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  Here, to summarize the animation that can be executed, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is an animation that may change the change icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the advance notice mode (A An animation (B), which is an animation (for example, a preview animation etc.) that has nothing to do with the aspect change and is an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode as a result. can do. In addition, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is completely related to the animation (C animation) in which the change icon and the hold icon must be changed from the default mode to the advance mode (C animation). It can also be classified as an animation (D animation) that is not an animation (for example, an announcement animation etc.) and results in an animation that does not change from the default mode to the announcement mode. Furthermore, changing the display mode of the navigation character can also be classified into a successful animation (Eth animation) and a failing animation (Fth animation). In addition, even if it is the same preview animation, the preview animation (G G animation) that does not change the display mode of the navigation character, and the preview animation (H that does not change the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon) Can also be classified as Furthermore, there is also an animation (the first animation) in which the change icon or the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the advance notice mode without using the navigation character. As this first animation, for example, the animations shown in FIGS. 165 (a) to (e), the animations shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to (E), and FIGS. 165 (a) to FIG. As in the animation shown in (E), an animation in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes corresponds.

  Here, the Gth animation and the Eth animation may be animations in which the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, or a part (for example, the first part) The included part may be animation performed in the same manner. Also, the Gth animation may be an animation that does not change the change icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the advance notice mode.

  Also, the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be used. They may be common, or the type, color, shape, or size may be common to displays (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ.

  Also, the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Also, the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations in which parts including the first part are performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which a navigation character is used in common, or in addition, background images or some scenes may be common. The type, the color, the shape, and the size may be the same for displays (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character.

  Also, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Also, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which parts including the first part are performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the Dth animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least the navigation character may be displayed in common. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be in common, and the type, color, shape and size of the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the navigation character are common. It may be

  Also, the Dth animation and the Hth animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Further, the Dth animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Furthermore, in the example of changing the hold icon in FIGS. 175 to 180, the change icon may be changed instead of the hold icon, and in the example of changing the change icon in FIGS. The hold icon may be changed.

  Moreover, although neither of the examples shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 is an example of changing the icon etc. of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the icon of the mini item instead of the holding icon or the change icon There may be cases where various icons are changed.

  In the above description, the game console is provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, white (default) is suspended] The icon h11, or the white (default) fluctuation icon h0, or the icon of the white meter rising item UpI], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [eg, red (for example, read ahead notice Mode), or a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr icon], and the display means is a first mode [eg, white (default) mode] Display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, the first animation using the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] It is a means that can be displayed, and the display means can display a second animation using the certain display [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] The first display is a display which may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game], One animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 '' to FIG. Icon change animation shown in (11) -7, and icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, and the second animation is the first displayed Change the icon to the second icon Animation [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIG. 176 (11) -2 to the same figure (11) -9, the icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (1) -2 to the same figure (1) -6], The game console characterized in that the given display is a display selected from a plurality of types of displays [for example, FIG. 177 (0) -5 to FIG. (0) -8]. It explained about.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain the player by giving a notice on the display selected by the player.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon into the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first animation. It is animation which changes an icon into the second icon by all means.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. The first display may be a display that is always displayed in a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

  Also, “the first aspect is the default aspect, and the first aspect is most likely to be displayed in the certain display than in the other aspects including the second aspect. In the aspect, when the player selects the certain display, the first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 177 (0) -6 to FIG. (0) -8], Game console. I also explained about.

  Also, the above-mentioned certain display is a display which may be selectable even during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being performed [eg, FIG. 177 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -3 ], That the game stand characterized by. I also explained about. For example, although it can always select in a period before becoming a reach state after decoration symbol variation display is started, it may be impossible to select in a period after becoming a reach state.

  Further, the certain display may be a display which can be selected even during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. That is, it may be selectable at any time over the entire period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be an always selectable display. The certain display may be a display which is always selected during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

  Also, “the certain display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied, and the certain condition is a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 177 (0) -2]. A game stand characterized by being. I also explained about.

  Here, a plurality of conditions may be prepared as the certain condition. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, the condition that a certain big hit game is in progress (for example, while in the big hit with big change with probability change, while in the big hit with no big change, in round, during an interval between rounds) The condition may be that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has not reached the big hit game but has reached a certain number It may be the condition that.

  Also, only one condition may be prepared as the certain condition. One of the conditions may be the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, or the condition that the big hit game is in progress, or the cumulative number of times the decorative symbol variation display has been executed. It may be a condition that the number of times has been reached, or a condition that the number of times of execution of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number without performing a big hit game.

  Further, the demonstration display is a display that is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. More specifically, it is a display that is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where there is no suspension of the special drawing, and the symbol whose stop is displayed. There is a video demo display in which an animation including a demo display and a game console title is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display. Note that the certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description, “the game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon [eg, a white (default) hold icon h11, or a white (default) change icon h0, and an icon of a white meter rising item UpI]. Yes, one of the plurality of types of icons is the second icon [eg, red (previous preview mode) hold icon h11, or red variation icon h0, further, red icon of meter up item UpIr] And the display means is a display of the first aspect [for example, white (default) aspect] (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] is a means capable of displaying a first animation, and the display means is a unit according to the second aspect [eg, red aspect]. Display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) [for example, a unit capable of displaying a second animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ], the display unit is configured to display the first display. The third animation to be changed to the second display [e.g., the character change animation shown in FIG. 176 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -5, FIG. 177 (11) -11 to FIG. Character change animation shown in FIG. 178, character change animation shown in FIG. 178 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -5, character change animation shown in FIG. 179 (11) -4 'to FIG. ], And the first display may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game] And the first animation is , An animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 '' to FIG. (11)- Icon change animation shown in FIG. 178, and icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (11) -2 to FIG. 178 (11) -9, and the second animation is the first icon being displayed. Animation to change into two icons [eg, icon change animation shown in FIG. 176 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, icon change shown in FIG. 178 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -6 Animation, icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, icon change animation shown in FIG. 179 (11) -4 ′ to FIG. Second The animation may be an animation that may start to be displayed after the display of the third animation is started [eg, the icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -6]. A game console characterized by It explained about.
According to this game console, it is possible to draw attention to the certain display.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon into the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first animation. It is animation which changes an icon into the second icon by all means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed from the beginning besides the case of changing from the first display according to the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (display start) in the second mode.

  Further, the second animation may be an animation whose display is always started after the display of the third animation is started.

  In addition, the second animation may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the third animation is displayed on a second display different from the second display of the second animation which has been started earlier. The first display may be changed.

  Further, the first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, after the first display is displayed, a scene in which the first display is changed to the second display is displayed. The first display may be started simultaneously with the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. It may be.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. Furthermore, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

  In addition, “the third animation is a decoration symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decoration symbol variation display shown in FIG. 176 (11) -1 to the same diagram (11) -13, Fig. 178 (11) -1-Fig. 179 (11)-13 Decorative symbol variation display, Fig. 179 (11)-4 '~ same figure (11)-9' same decorative symbol variation display The display may be started on the display, the game console characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  The display of the third animation may be always started in the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

  [The third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 177 (1) -1 to FIG. 178 (4) -2] There may be a case where the display is started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the above [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 177 (11) -9 to FIG. (11) -16]. I also explained about.

  For example, the display of the third animation may be started in the decorative symbol variation display prior to the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started. The scene to be changed to the second display and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed in different decorative symbol variation display Good. The display of the third animation may be always started in the decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

  Also, the third animation is a animation in which a mini game is performed with success and failure, and the mini game succeeds and changes the first display to the second display. The display means is a means capable of displaying a fourth animation, and the fourth animation is played with the mini game, the mini game fails, and the first display is the second display. It is an animation that does not change to, a game stand characterized by I also explained about. The display means may be means for displaying the fourth animation without fail.

  “The display means is a means capable of displaying a fifth animation, and the fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display, and The five animations are animations relating to the advance notice [for example, the animations shown in FIG. 179 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -9], and the fifth animation and the third animation have certain items [ For example, a game table characterized in that it is an animation in which a white (default) ninja navi character NJ is used in common. I also explained about.

  Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon into the second icon. In addition, as an example of “some matters”, appearing characters, background images, some scenes, displays having the same color, shape and size, and the like can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations in which parts including the first part are performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner in the middle. Also, the "notice" referred to herein may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, even if the jackpot is not directly connected to the jackpot, it may be a notice (for example, a timer announcement or the like) that the effect to be indirectly connected to the jackpot is executed. As "representation" here, SP reach presentation with high reliability of a big hit may be sufficient. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a notice regarding a big hit. The display means may be means for displaying the fifth animation without fail.

  In the above description, the game console is provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, white (default) is suspended] The icon h11, or the white (default) fluctuation icon h0, or the icon of the white meter rising item UpI], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [eg, red (for example, read ahead notice Mode), or a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr icon], and the display means is a first mode [eg, white (default) mode] Display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, the first animation using the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] The display means is a displayable means, and the display means is a display of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] (hereinafter referred to as "second display") [for example, a navigation character NJ of a red ninja ] Is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the second symbol, and the first display is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game] An animation that may be displayed, and the first animation may change the first icon being displayed to the second icon [eg, FIG. 175 (11) -2 Icon change animation shown in (11) -6 ′ ′ to (11) -7 in the same figure, icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, and the second The animation of the first is being displayed An animation for changing an icon to the second icon [eg, icon change animation shown in FIG. 176 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, FIG. 178 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -6 Icon change animation shown in the above, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display, and the sixth animation is the first icon displayed Is the animation that does not change to the second icon, and the sixth animation is the animation related to the advance notice [for example, the animation shown in FIG. 179 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -9]. , A game stand characterized by. It explained about.

  Here, the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, but may be an animation in which the first display does not change to the second display.

  Also, the "notice" referred to herein may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, even if the jackpot is not directly connected to the jackpot, it may be a notice (for example, a timer announcement or the like) that the effect to be indirectly connected to the jackpot is executed. As "representation" here, SP reach presentation with high reliability of a big hit may be sufficient. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a notice regarding a big hit.

  In addition, the sixth animation may be an animation about a tutorial, not an animation about an advance notice. For example, the animation may be animation that describes effects, or animation that describes operation methods (e.g., how to hit left or right).

  Also, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations in which certain matters are in common. That is, they are common in that at least the "first display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the “first display”. May be in common.

  Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. The first display may be a display that is always displayed in a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be means for sure to display a sixth animation using the first display.

"The display means is a means capable of displaying a seventh animation using the second display, and the seventh animation is displaying the first icon being displayed as the second icon" And the seventh animation is an animation related to the notice,
A game stand characterized in that the seventh animation is easier to be displayed than the sixth animation. I also explained about.

  Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, they are common in that at least the "second display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from the “second display”. May be in common. Furthermore, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, they are common in that at least "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (for example, a character or icon) displayed separately from the "a certain display". May be common. Further, the first animation and the second animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the first animation and the second animation may be animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be animation performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, they are common in that at least "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (for example, a character or icon) displayed separately from the "a certain display". May be common. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  The display means may be means for displaying a seventh animation using the second display without fail.

In the above description,
A game console comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [eg white (default) hold icon h11, or white ( Default icon of fluctuation icon h0, and further, a white meter rising item UpI], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (predictive notice mode) of reserved icon h11 Or an icon of a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr], the display means is a display of the first aspect [eg, a white (default) aspect] It is a means that can display the first animation using [1] (eg, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ). The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the display of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ], One display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game], and the first animation is a display In the animation shown in FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6 '' to FIG. (11) -7, the first icon being displayed may be changed to the second icon. FIG. 178 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9) The icon change animation shown in FIG. 178 (11) -2 to FIG. An animation that changes to an icon [Ex. Icon (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, and FIG. 178 (1) -2 to icon change animation shown in FIG. Is a means capable of displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display, and the eighth animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, An animation shown in FIGS. 165 (a) to (e), an animation shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to (E), and an animation shown in FIGS. 165 (a) to (e)], A game stand characterized by It explained about.

  Here, although the eighth animation is an animation in which the first icon displayed is always changed to the second icon, the first icon in which the eighth animation is displayed May be an animation with or without changing the icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. The first display may be a display that is always displayed in a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be means for sure to display an eighth animation not using the certain display.

  Also, one or more icons may be displayed as the first icon, one or more icons may be displayed as the second icon, and the second icon A gaming machine characterized in that the icon has a higher reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon. I also explained about.

  Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change a plurality of displayed first icons into the second icons, and the second animation is displayed In some cases, it is an animation in which a plurality of the first icons are changed to the second icons. One or more icons may be displayed as the first icon, and one or more icons may be displayed as the second icon.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of icons may be a third icon [for example, a blue (predictive preview mode) hold icon h11, or a blue variation icon h0, and an icon of a blue meter rising item UpIb And one or more icons may be displayed as the third icon,
The third icon is an icon having a higher reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon, and the second icon has a reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the third icon. Is a high icon, and the first animation may change the displayed first icon to the third icon [eg, FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. )-6 '~ icon change animation shown in the figure (11)-7], The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Note that one or more icons may be displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation in which the displayed first icon is changed to the third icon.

  "The second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the third icon." I also explained about.

  "The display means is a means capable of displaying a first unchanged animation using the first display, and the first unchanged animation displays the first display. An animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6 to FIG. (11) -7 It is an icon change failure animation shown], The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is An animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be means for displaying the first invariable animation using the first display without fail.

  "The first non-change animation is characterized in that the first non-change animation is the same animation as the first animation [eg, FIG. 175 (11)-2 to (11)-5]. Game console. I also explained about.

  Here, the display means is a means capable of displaying a second unchanged animation using the second display, and the second unchanged animation displays the second display, The animation may fail to change the displayed first icon into the second icon. Still further, the second unchanged animation may be the same animation as the second animation halfway through. Or, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may always change to the second icon.

  Moreover, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed. Even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. May be Also, the failed animation may be an animation in which an effect display is displayed, and may be an animation in which the display mode has not changed although the effect display is displayed. That is, animations in which the first icon does not change to the second icon without displaying the effect display may be excluded. However, the failing animation may include an animation in which the first icon does not change to the second icon without displaying the effect display. I also explained about

  Also, “the display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed, and the hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds, and the first icon is A first holding icon [for example, white (default) holding icon h1 shown in FIG. 175 (11) -1 etc.], and the second icon is a second holding icon [for example, FIG. 176 (11) It is a reserve icon h1 of red (pre-reading advance notice mode) shown in -8 grade, A game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  "The display means is a means in which a change icon may be displayed, and the change icon is an icon related to the decorative symbol change display being executed, and the first icon is Of the second variation icon [eg, white (default) variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 178 (1) -2 etc., and the second icon is a second variation icon [eg, FIG. 178 (1) -5 It is a red variation icon h0 shown in the etc., and a game stand characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed according to the second animation is final rather than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed according to the first animation” In some cases, the jackpot symbol form is likely to be finalized and displayed, and a game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed according to the second animation is final rather than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed according to the first animation. The big hit design feature may be easy to be determined and displayed.

  Also, the first display may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 175 (0) -1 to FIG. 4 (4) -2]. A game stand characterized by being. I also explained about.

  Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol change displays, or the variable display of the predetermined number of decorative symbols. Or even a display that may disappear temporarily.

  The second display may be a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. In addition, the second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays, or the predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays Even if it is between, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily. In addition, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. In addition, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation display, or between the predetermined number of variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. Even, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily. In addition, the said 1st display may be a display always displayed straddling multiple continuous decorative symbol fluctuation display.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in a certain period, and the certain period may be a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of reservations is 0 [for example, FIG. 177 (0) -1, FIG. (0) -8], and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  Here, the second display may be displayed in a certain period, and the certain period may be a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of reservations is 0. Good. Note that the first display may be always displayed in the certain period.

  "A game console characterized in that the first aspect and the second aspect are different in at least one of color, pattern, size, and shape. I also explained about.

  Therefore, the color, the pattern, the size, and the shape may be different only by one, or all may be different, or the combination of two or three may be different. It is also good.

  "The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100]". I also explained about.

  Here, an operation means is provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display related to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, When the operation means is operated, the first display may be changed to the second display.

  In addition, before the display of the first animation is started, it may be notified that the displayed first icon is in a state of being easily changed.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is an icon of a display mode that suggests that it may change. The icon of may change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be a first animation, a second animation, or any other animation.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, and the fifth icon is an icon of a display mode indicating that the fourth icon has failed to change, The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be a first animation, a second animation, or any other animation.

  In addition, although the said display means is a means which can display the 2nd non-change animation using the said 2nd display, although the said 2nd display is displayed, the said 2nd non-change animation is a display. The animation may fail to change the first icon being displayed to the second icon.

  Here, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may always change to the second icon.

  Moreover, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed. Even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. May be

  In addition, the second invariable animation may be the same animation as the second animation in the middle.

  Furthermore, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 181 through 200 are basically used only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 181 through 200, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 181 (1). At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 and the common figure reservation number aa5 , The fourth pattern aa6 of the common figure is displayed. The special figure 1 reserve number aa1 is a display representing the reserve number of the special figure 1 by a number, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3 is a display representing the reserve number of the special figure 2 by a number, and the common drawing reserve number aa5 is a common drawing Is a display representing the number of reservations of In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area c capable of displaying a variation icon is provided. The right side of the variation icon display area c is the hold icon display area, and in the example shown in FIG. 181 (1), the special view 1 hold icon a 1, a 2, a 3, a 4 and the special view 2 hold icon b 1, b 2, b 3 Are displayed side by side so that they alternate in this order from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine in which a mechanism is provided on the game board in which gaming balls are alternately winning at the special figure 1 starting opening and the special figure 2 starting opening. . In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided. In the display area d, a tutorial display, a message display and the like are displayed, and in the case where there is no content to be displayed in particular, a character string image of “under preparation” is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 181 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 181 (1) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "department 3-decoration 4-decoration 8", which is an out-of-pattern aspect, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 181 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). There is. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 displayed in the reserve icon display area becomes the variation icon c1 and moves to the variation icon display area c The special view 1 reserve icon a2 to a4 and the special view 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 181 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 181 (4) shows the state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 181 (5) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation advance notice is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice may be started or may not be started at a predetermined probability.

FIG. 181 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a character image of a brow (hereinafter, referred to as "browsing") g2 is displayed. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 181 (7) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.
FIG. 181 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 181 (9) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 is changed to an eyelid character image (hereinafter referred to as an eyelid) g1 while the eyelid g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 181 (10) shows a state where the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2.

FIG. 181 (11) shows a state in which display of a character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h 1 including a character image of “「 ”is started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h1 has moved to the left.
FIG. 181 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 181 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 181 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 181 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the hall g1 and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the hall g1.

  FIG. 181 (16) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the display g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 181 (16), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (17) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 181 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (18) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i 1. In FIG. 181 (18), a character string image of “morning weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (19) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as speech display.

  FIG. 181 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed.

  FIG. 181 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 181 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 181 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 181 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right.
FIG. 181 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 181 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 181 (27) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 181 (28) shows a state where display of the character name h2 including the character image of “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 181 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 181 (30) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 181 (31) shows the character name display h 2 and the balloon display i 2 moving to the right.

  FIG. 181 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the eyelid g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the eye g2.

  FIG. 181 (33) shows a state in which speech display as a speech (line) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 181 (33), the character image of "o" is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 181 (34), a character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 181 (35), a character string image of “Having a weather for lunch” is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed.

  FIG. 181 (37) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the conversation advance notice display is ended.

  FIG. 181 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c after the conversation advance notice display is ended. Although illustration of the following is omitted, in the present example, reach effect with “decoration 7” is started thereafter. In addition, reach presentation may not be started after the end of conversation advance notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is the first display (the first serif announcement display shown in FIG. 181 (19)) and the second display (the second display (FIG. 181 (36)). The notice can be displayed. The first display includes a hall g1 displayed in FIG. 181 (19), a balloon display i1, a speech display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1. The second display includes the eyelid g2, the balloon display i2, the dialog display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 181 (36). A first conversation notice is displayed on the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are preliminary display of the change. Further, in the present example, the first display is displayed after the eyelid g2 is displayed in FIGS. 181 (6) to (8).爺 g2 may be displayed prior to the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including the g 2 is displayed. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 182 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 182 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 182 (1) to 182 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIGS. 182 (7) to (10) show a state where the hall g1 is moving to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 182 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the toe g1 is displayed from the beginning before the serif display of the toe is displayed in FIG. 182 (19), and no other character such as the toe g2 is displayed. Thus, 爺 g2 may not be displayed prior to the display of the first display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 183 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 183 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (22), the description will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation advance notice is continued, a princess character image g3 (hereinafter referred to as "hime") is displayed. The princess g3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 183 (24) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.
FIG. 183 (25) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 183 (26) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the eyebrow g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the right.爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 183 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (27) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 183 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by giving a preliminary notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 183 (36). In some cases, it is possible to show the player's intention and to improve the player's interest.

Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 184 (1) to (38). FIGS. 184 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 184 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.
FIG. 184 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 184 (7) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 184 (8) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 184 (9) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 184 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character not appearing in the first display shown in FIG. 184 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by giving a preliminary notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 184 (10). In some cases, it is possible to show the player's intention and to improve the player's interest.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 185 (1) to (38). 185 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 185 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (25), the description will be omitted.

FIG. 185 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.
FIG. 185 (27) shows a state in which the princess g3 has stopped.

  FIG. 185 (28) shows a state where the display of the character name h3 including the character image of "Hime" is started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 185 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 185 (30) shows the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 moving to the right.

  FIG. 185 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 185 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

FIG. 185 (33) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 185 (33), the character image of "afternoon" is displayed.
FIG. 185 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 185 (34), a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

  FIG. 185 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 185 (35), a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

  FIG. 185 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "mark of rain" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 185 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and (38), the description will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is the first display (the first serif notice display shown in FIG. 185 (19)) and the second display (the second display (FIG. 185 (36)). The notice can be displayed. The first display includes the display g1 displayed in FIG. 185 (19), the balloon display i1, the speech display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the princess g3 displayed in FIG. 185 (36), the balloon display i3, the speech display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3. A first conversation notice is displayed on the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are preliminary display of the change. Further, in this example, after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 185 (6) to 185 (8), 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 185 (23) to (25). It is a Gase notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by giving a preliminary notice that displays the 爺 g2 that does not appear in the conversational notice display, it is possible to make the character different when the conversational advance display is displayed, and poke the player's will In some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 186 (1) to (38). FIGS. 186 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 186 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 186 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed first. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 186 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moved to the left.

  FIG. 186 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving leftward. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 186 (9) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 186 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description thereof is omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 186 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during movement animation (during movement display) of the character, and movement display of three character images is displayed. Note that, in the present example, the message is displayed in the order of 爺 g2, the princess g3, and the temple g1, but the message may be displayed in the order of the princess g3, 爺 g2, and the temple g1. In addition, four or more character images may be displayed during movement display of the character image.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 187 (1) to (38). FIGS. 187 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 187 (1) to 187 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (5), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 187 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 187 (7) shows a state in which the temple g1 changes to 爺 g2 while the temple g1 moves to the left.爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 187 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 187 (9) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 187 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (6) to (10), three characters go round in the order of character g1, g2, g3, and g1 during the movement animation display of the character. Is displayed. Note that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make a round or a half round while displaying the movement animation of the character. In addition, a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make one round during the movement animation display of characters shown in FIGS. 187 (23) to (27).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 187 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 187 (1) to 187 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (5), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 188 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 188 (7) shows a state in which the temple g1 changes to 爺 g2 while the temple g1 moves to the left.爺 g2 is moving to the left. In addition, at the time when the entire display g1 shown in FIG. 188 (6) is not displayed, the display g1 may be changed to display g2.

  FIG. 188 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 188 (9) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the eyebrow g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 188 (10) shows a state in which the toe g1 is stopped after the toe g2 changes to the toe g1 while the toe g2 is moving to the left. Note that it may be changed to g1 after or when g2 stops.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 188 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (38), the description thereof is omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 188 (6) to (10), three characters are looped in the order of the character images g1, g2, g3, g2, and g1 during the movement animation display of the character. It will be displayed as The character may change in the reverse direction such as princess g 3, 爺 g 2, and hall g 1 after changing in the order of hall g 1, 爺 g 2, and princess g 3. In addition, during the movement animation display of the character, four or more characters may make a round and may be displayed so as to change in the opposite direction to the round. Further, during the movement animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 188 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 188 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 189 (1) to (38). 189 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 189 (1) to 189 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 189 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed first. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 189 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the left. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 189 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 189 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the temple g1 changes is displayed while the temple g1 moves to the left. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 189 (10) shows a state in which the temple g1 stops after the expression of the temple g1 changes. Note that an animation may be displayed in which the expression of the hall g1 changes after the hall g1 stops or simultaneously with the stop. Further, in this example, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the speech g1 displayed in the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 189 (19) is longer than the display period of the gage g2. Thus, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation advance notice may be the longest.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 189 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (22), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 189 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 189 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

FIG. 189 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.
FIG. 189 (26) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes while the eyelid g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 189 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped. Note that an animation may be displayed in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes after or when the eyelid g2 stops.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 189 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (38) to (38), the description will be omitted. As in the present example, a display may be displayed in which the mode (for example, expression) of the character changes while the movement animation of the character is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 (1) to (40), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 190 (1) to (40) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the state shown in FIG. 190 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 184 (36), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 190 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 190 (3) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c.

  FIG. 190 (4) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of the pseudo-series is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 a. The decoration symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo ream is performed. The pseudo ream is an effect of performing pseudo fluctuation as if variable display of a decorative symbol has been performed a plurality of times during one special figure fluctuation game, and is a notice effect of the fluctuation. After the decorative symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second of the variable display of the decoration symbol (the second time of pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 190 (5) shows a state in which the second run of the pseudo run is started. In addition, the movable body 700 moves upward and stops. Further, during the second execution of the pseudo run, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d, and it is informed that the second run of the pseudo run is being performed.

  FIG. 190 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 190 (7) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 190 (8) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is started to be displayed. The first conversation advance notice display is the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 190 (1). Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the second conversation announcement may be started, or the second conversation announcement may not be started at a predetermined probability. May be

FIG. 190 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation announcement display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 190 (10) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 190 (11) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 190 (12) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 190 (13) shows a state where the princess g3 has stopped. The character movement animation shown in FIGS. 190 (9) -190 (13) is shown in FIGS. 181 (6)-(10), 183 (6)-(10) and 184 (6)-(10), respectively. 185 (6) to (10), Fig. 186 (6) to (10), Fig. 187 (6) to (10), Fig. 188 (6) to (10), and Fig. 189 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 190 (14) shows a state where display of the character name display h3 has been started. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 190 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 190 (16) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 190 (17) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 190 (18) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 190 (19) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 190 (19), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (20) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 190 (21), the character string image of "afternoon" is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (21) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 190 (21), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (22) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "mark of rain" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  FIG. 190 (23) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed.

  FIG. 190 (24) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 190 (25) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 190 (26) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 190 (27) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right.
FIG. 190 (28) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 190 (29) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.
FIG. 190 (30) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 190 (31) shows a state where display of the character name h2 including the character image of “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 190 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 190 (33) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 190 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 190 (35) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the eyelid g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the eye g2.

  FIG. 190 (36) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 190 (36), the character image of "o" is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (37) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 190 (37), the character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (38) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 190 (38), a character string image of “Having for the weather of noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (39) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed. Further, the aspect of the balloon display i2 is changing from white to blue, and the aspect of the character name display h2 is changing from white to blue. The big hit reliability is set higher for blue than for white. As described above, in the second conversation advance notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 190 (40) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208 a and 208 c after the conversation advance notice display is ended. Although illustration of the following is omitted, in the present example, reach effect with “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation announcement display (first conversation announcement display) shown in FIG. 190 (1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 190 (39), the second conversation announcement display (second Conversation notice is displayed. In this manner, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure change game. Note that the jackpot reliability may be set to be higher as the number of times of conversation advance notice display is larger.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 (1) to (38). 191 (1) to (38) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 191 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 191 (16) to 191 (18) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the speech display is displayed. The speech display moves from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left in the balloon display h1. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  FIG. 191 (19) shows a state in which the speech display has stopped within the balloon display h 1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 191 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (20) to (32), the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 191 (33) to (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the speech display is displayed. The speech display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left in the balloon display h2. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  FIG. 191 (36) shows a state in which the speech display has stopped within the balloon display h 1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 191 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the moving animation of the speech display is displayed. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 (1) to (38). FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to 192 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 192 (7) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.
FIG. 192 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 192 (9) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to an eyebrow's character image (hereinafter referred to as an eyebrow) g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 192 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 192 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2.

  FIG. 192 (11) shows a state where display of a character name display (hereinafter referred to as "character name display") h1 including a character image of "ten" is started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 192 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 192 (13) shows the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 moving to the left.

  FIG. 192 (14) shows the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 moving to the left.

  FIG. 192 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the hall g1 and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the hall g1.

  FIG. 192 (16) shows a state in which the speech display which is a speech (line) of the temple g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 192 (16), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 192 (17) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 192 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

  FIG. 192 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 192 (18), a character string image of “morning weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 192 (19) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as speech display. In this example, compared with FIG. 181 (19), a hallmark g1, a character name display h1, a balloon display h1, and a serif display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 192 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed overlapping with a part (a part of the first display) of the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 192 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 192 (22) shows that the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 192 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation in which the character g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 192 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with part of the display g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 192 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 192 (26) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 192 (27) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is stopped and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 192 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, at the start of the display of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation advance display, an animation in which the first display such as 殿 j1 moves is displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 193 (1) to (38). FIGS. 193 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 193 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (22), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 193 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation in which the character g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

FIG. 193 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with part of the display g1 and the balloon display h1.
FIG. 193 (25) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

FIG. 193 (26) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display stop.
FIG. 193 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 is stopped.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 193 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed as in the states shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping with the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1 and the speech display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation advance display is displayed overlapping with the first display such as jj1.

  FIGS. 193 (32) to (35) show the state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display h 2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 181 (32) to (35).

  FIG. 193 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed. In this example, the speech display in the balloon display h2 and the speech display in the balloon display h2 are displayed overlapping the speech display in the balloon display h1 and the speech display in the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 193 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 193 (37) and (38), the description thereof is omitted. In this example, the second display such as 爺 g2 of the conversation advance display is displayed overlapping the first display such as jj1.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 194 (1) to (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 194 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 194 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 194 (6) to (10) show a state in which the character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10). In this example, the display sizes of the g2 and g1 are displayed in larger sizes than the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10).

  FIGS. 194 (11) to (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed as in FIGS. 181 (11) to (19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is displayed in a larger size than the example shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 194 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 194 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.
FIG. 194 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 194 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, simultaneously with the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation is displayed in which the display size of the display g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 194 (24) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right and the display size of the speech display is reduced as well as the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 194 (25) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right and the display size of the display g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced.

  FIG. 194 (26) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right, and the display size of the speech display is reduced as well as the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 194 (27) shows a state in which the animation in which the display size of the display g1 is stopped, the display size of the character display h1 and the speech display is reduced is stopped. The display sizes of the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (36).

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 194 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (38), the description thereof is omitted. In this example, the first display of the message g1 and the like in the conversation advance notice display is enlarged and displayed until the second display of the message g2 and the like starts to be displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 194 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h2, and in this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display The display size may be overlapped with part of h2.

Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 195 (1) to (38). 195 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIGS. 195 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 195 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (1).

  FIG. 195 (2) shows a state in which the timer advance notice display j has been started. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer announcement display j performs countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, predetermined effects (for example, operation of the movable body and predetermined announcement display) are performed. Before the countdown is started, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 195 (3) and (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (3) and (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 195 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (5).

  FIG. 195 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started as in FIG. 192 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started with the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIG. 195 (6) to (19), the conversation advance notice display is displayed as in FIG. 192 (6) to (19), and in the present example, the countdown display of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 195 (6) to (19), the timer advance notice display j is displayed overlapping the characters g1 and g2 and the character name display h1, the balloon display i1 and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 195 (14) and later, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

FIGS. 195 (20) and (21) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 195 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (5).

  FIG. 195 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued similarly to FIG. 192 (23). Also, in FIG. 192 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer advance display j is 36.99 seconds.

  In FIGS. 195 (24) to (36), the conversation advance notice display is displayed as in FIG. 192 (24) to (36), and in this example, the countdown indication of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 195 (24) to (36), the timer advance notice display j is displayed overlapping the character 爺 g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 195 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  FIGS. 195 (37) and (38) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. As described above, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer advance notice display j, other indications may be displayed (eg, a ball removal error indication, a door open error indication, another notice indication, a change effect indication of the hold icon) or the like. In addition, as shown in the timer advance notice display j, the length of the display period of the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 195 (6) to (10) is as shown in FIG. 195 (19) to (36). The display h 1, the balloon display i 1, and the display period of the conversation notice display including the speech notice display are shorter than the display period.

Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 196 (1) to (38). 196 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIGS. 195 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 196 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (1).

  FIG. 196 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the start of the display of the conversation advance notice display. The movable body k may reciprocate vertically and horizontally in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 between the start of the symbol variation display and the start of the reach effect.

196 (3) and (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 195 (3) and (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 196 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (5).

  In FIG. 196 (6) to (19), the conversation notice display is displayed as in FIG. 192 (6) to (19), and in this example, the movable body k displays characters g1 and g2 and character name display At least a part of the h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display becomes invisible from the player.

196 (20) and (21) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 196 (20) and (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 196 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (22).

  FIG. 196 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued as in FIG. 192 (23). In FIG. 196 (24) to (36), the conversation notice display is displayed as in FIG. 192 (24) to (36), and in this example, the movable body k displays characters g1 and g2 and character name display At least a part of h1 and h2, the balloon display i1 and i2, and the speech display become invisible to the player.

  FIG. 196 (37) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 196 (38) shows a state in which reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. Thus, the moving effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation advance notice display.

Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 197 (1) to (38). 197 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIG. 197 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 197 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 192 (1).

  FIG. 197 (2) shows a state in which the design indication m is displayed by the light guide plate disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, a light guide plate is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern display m can be displayed by light emission of the light guide plate. The pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIGS. 197 (2) to (37). For example, as shown in FIG. 197 (36), the pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the first display such as the g1 and the like and the second display such as the g2 and the like.

  FIG. 197 (38) shows a state in which reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is erased. Thus, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 (1) to (38). FIGS. 198 (1) to 198 show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 198 (1) to 198 (5) show the same states as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (5), so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 198 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the frame of the square are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of the big hit reliability. In FIG. 198 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white. Note that the conversation advance notice display of this example is the same as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 181 except that the character is displayed within a square frame.

  FIG. 198 (7) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 198 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 198 (9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to g1 while g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left. The square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 198 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 199 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in white. Thus, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue and white. In addition, the order of the change of this color can be set arbitrarily. Note that this color change is performed during the character movement animation.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 198 (11) to (21), the hall g1 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and except for the point that the inside of the frame is white, the states shown in FIGS. The description is omitted because it is the same as the state shown in).

  FIG. 198 (22) shows a state where the player operates the chance button 136.

  FIG. 198 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 198 (24) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 198 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 198 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.
FIG. 198 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 is stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 198 (28) to (36), the eyelid g2 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and except for the fact that the frame is blue, FIGS. Since it is the same as the state shown to), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 198 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 181 (37) and (38). In this example, the character of the conversation advance notice is displayed in a frame, and the inside of the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. A big hit reliability is set by the color in the said frame.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 199 (a1) to (a20). FIGS. 199 (a1) to (a20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 199 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), so the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 199 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 199 (a6), the bag g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display differs from the character in that the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 199 (a7) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. In addition, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 199 (a8) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 199 (a9) shows a state where the eyelid g2 is changed to the eyelid g1 while the eyelid g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 199 (a10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation advance notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 or the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  FIGS. 199 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 199 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 199 (a12), the bag g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 199 (a15) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 199 (a16) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed.

FIG. 199 (a17) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.
FIG. 199 (a18) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation advance notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  FIGS. 199 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and (38). As in this example, during the movement animation of the character, the movement animation of the character name display or the balloon display may be displayed. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a speech display from the beginning of the display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 199 (b1) to (b20). FIGS. 199 (b1) to (b20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 199 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), so the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 199 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 199 (b6), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display differs from the character in that the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. Also, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue and green respectively. At the time point shown in FIG. 199 (b6), the square image on the left side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The left square image is white, and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

  FIG. 199 (b7) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b7), a square image on the left, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the right are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 199 (b8) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 199 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 199 (b9) shows a state where the eyelid g2 is changed to the eyelid g1 while the eyelid g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 199 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

  FIG. 199 (b10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. In addition, the frame g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame in the frame. Thus, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in one of the three squares displayed during the movement animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue and green in descending order of the jackpot reliability.

  FIGS. 199 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 199 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 199 (b12), the bag g2 and the character name display h2 move to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Also, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue and green respectively. At the time point shown in FIG. 199 (b14), the square image on the right side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The right square image is green and the middle square image is white. These square images also move to the right with the character.

  FIG. 199 (b15) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. At the time point shown in FIG. 199 (b7), a square image on the right, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left are displayed. The right square image is white, the middle square image is green, and the left square image is blue. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 199 (b16) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The inside of the balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. As shown in FIG. 199 (b16), the square image on the right is blue, the square image in the middle is white, and the square image on the left is green. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 199 (b17) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right. At the time point shown in FIG. 199 (b17), the square image on the right is green, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the left is white.

  FIG. 199 (b18) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a blue frame in the frame. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. The display colors are white, blue and green in the descending order of the big hit reliability.

  FIGS. 199 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the character movement animation are candidate displays of display colors in a frame enclosed by the character after stopping. As in this example, candidates for display colors in a frame enclosed by the character after being stopped may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 200 (a1) to 200 (a5). FIGS. 200 (a1) to 200 (a5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 200 (a1) to 200 (a5) show movement animations of characters shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 200 (a1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started.爺 g2 appeared and moved to the left.

  FIG. 200 (a2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 200 (a3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. During the movement of 2 g2 to the left, the mark g1 is displayed. The mark g1 is displayed on the left of the mark g2, and a part of the mark g2 is displayed overlapping. In addition, for example, the transmittance is displayed at 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 200 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. A part of オ ー バ ー g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1. In addition, for example, in the case of 表示 g2, the transmittance is displayed at 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, the character may increase during the character movement animation. In this example, the characters are increased by one but may be two or more. In addition, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Also, one character may be displayed overlapping the entire other character.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 200 (b1) to 200 (b5). FIGS. 200 (b1) to 200 (b5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 200 (b1) to 200 (b5) show movement animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 200 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 appear and move to the left. The mark g1 is displayed on the left of the mark g2, and a part of the mark g2 is displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 200 (b2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1.

  FIG. 200 (b3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A portion of the hall g1 is displayed overlapping the eye g2.

  FIG. 200 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1.

  FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternately change between one character and another character.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 200 (c1) to 200 (c5). FIGS. 200 (c1) to 200 (c5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 200 (c1) to 200 (c5) show movement animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 200 (c1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

FIG. 200 (c2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.
FIG. 200 (c3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 200 (c4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, one character may be erased one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 200 (d1) to 200 (d5). FIGS. 200 (d1) to 200 (d5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 200 (d1) to 200 (d5) show movement animations of characters shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 200 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 200 (d2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess G4 is displayed in place of Princess G1 and ninja g5 is displayed in place of Princess g3. The characters may be entirely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 200 (d3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Ninja g4 has been erased.

  FIG. 200 (d4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended. Little Princess g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, and another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, and then the characters are sequentially erased, and the last One character may remain in the. Also, a plurality of characters may be erased at one time.

  FIG. 200 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display to be executed in the effect control process. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 181 is “Conversation notice 1”, and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 182 is “Conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute any conversation notice from among a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, it is possible to combine and execute a plurality of conversational announcements such as “conversational announcement 1” and “conversational announcement 2”. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can display the speech notice display during the conversation notice display of the present example, and can also display the speech notice display of the present example and the speech notice display in combination.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is selected from among one of the conversation announcements when one of a plurality of effects omitted from illustration in “***” of the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 200 (e) is selected. It is possible to display any balloon display of FIG. 181 to FIG. 200 as a second balloon display after displaying any balloon display of FIG. 181 to FIG. 200 as a first balloon display. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is selected from among one of the conversation announcements when one of a plurality of effects omitted from illustration in “***” of the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 200 (e) is selected. After displaying a balloon display combining a plurality of elements of any of the balloon displays in FIGS. 181 to 200 as a first balloon display, any one of FIGS. 181 to 200 as a second balloon display. It is possible to display a balloon display in which a plurality of elements of the balloon display are combined. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, 3 or more as a conversation notice of 1 when one of a plurality of effects omitted in the illustration of "***" in the table for determining the conversation effect of FIG. 200 (e) is selected. The balloon display of can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of the plural effects which are not illustrated in the “***” of the conversation effect determination table in Figure 200 (e) is selected, the pattern fluctuation display of one time It is possible to display two or more conversation announcements in a period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when the balloon display is being displayed or the conversation announcement is being performed, the display condition is satisfied when the execution condition of the other effect display or the error display described in the embodiment or the drawing or the movable body rendering operation is satisfied. And the operation can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a speech warning display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed, or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute an advance notice effect during preparation and a timer advance notice effect. For example, during the preparation of the notice of the conversation notice or within the same symbol variation display as the notice of the conversation notice, the notice effect during preparation or the timer notice effect may be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the meter increase effect and the item application effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during display of the conversation advance notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, as in the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 120 (k), the display size is different from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and 120 (e) etc. (small display size, large display size) The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to (f), in the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the moving distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the moving distance of the balloon display f2. And may display a conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is ended at the time shown in FIG. 120 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed overlapping the other display so as to display the conversation notice The display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to (f), at the start of display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed, and FIGS. As shown in (t), when the balloon display f1 and f2 end display, the balloon display starts and ends so that the balloon animation f1 and f2 move toward the right. The direction of movement of the balloon display may be different at the time of. The pachinko machine 100 may change the moving direction at the time of the display start and the display end of at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing pseudo-series effects. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed during display of the conversation advance notice display, or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 181 to 200.

  (B1) A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a diagram) 181 (19), and one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 181 (36)), and the first display The display is a display including a first line (for example, morning weather is "fine mark"), and the first display is a display including a first character (for example, hall g1); The second display is a display including a second line (for example, the weather for lunch is "cloud mark"), and the second display is a display including a second character (for example, 爺 g2), The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed, There is a case where the second character is displayed before the display of the serial first display, amusement machine, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, by anticipating that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (B2) A game stand according to B1, wherein a third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display. .

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, by giving a preliminary notice of displaying a character not appearing on the first display, it is possible to make the character when the first display is displayed different and to poke the player's will In some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  (B3) In the game console according to B2, the display of one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 190 ()), the third The display is a display including a third line (for example, the weather in the afternoon is "rain mark"), and the third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3), The second display may be displayed after the third display may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 190 (9)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  By making the third character appear not in the second display but in the third display, it is possible to catch the player's mind, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  (B4) In the game console according to B3, the display of one of the plurality of displays is a first conversation announcement display (for example, conversation announcement shown in FIG. 190 (1)), One of the displays is a second conversation announcement (for example, conversation announcement shown in FIG. 190 (39)), and the first conversation announcement is a display including the first indication. The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display, and the second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

  According to the game stand having the configuration, by causing the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display to appear in the second conversation notice display, it is possible to catch the player's will, and the player's interest is displayed. May be able to improve.

  (B5) The second conversation notice display is displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed during the period in which one certain symbol variation display is displayed in the game stand described in B4. A game console that may be played.

  According to the game stand having the configuration, by causing the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display to appear in the second conversation notice display, it is possible to catch the player's will, and the player's interest is displayed. May be able to improve.

  (B6) The game console according to any one of B1 to B5, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a character movement animation), The first animation display is displayed prior to the display of the first display, the first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character, and the first animation display is the first animation display. It is a display including a character, and the first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

  According to the game stand having the configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, the player is expected to expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. There is a possibility.

  (B7) The gaming machine according to B6, wherein the first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in a display period of the first animation display. Characterized by the game stand.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, it may be possible for the player to be entertained by reasoning about which character the first display is displayed.

  (B8) The game stand according to B6 or B7, wherein the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character in the first animation display. To play with.

  According to the game stand having the configuration, when the first display is displayed by the second character, it may be possible to make the player think so as to be entertained.

  (B9) The game console according to any one of B6 to B8, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, a character movement animation), The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display, the second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character, and the second animation display is the second animation display. It is a display including a character, and the second animation display is a display not including the first character.

  According to the gaming stand having the configuration, there are cases where it is possible to cause the character appearing in the first display to appear and the player can play the game without waking up.

  (B10) The game console according to B9, wherein the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's expectation by the player by reducing the character candidates in the second display.

  (B11) The gaming machine according to B9 or B10, wherein the first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first displayed character in the first animation display. Characterized by the game stand.

  By reducing the character candidates in the second display, it may be possible to increase the accuracy of the player's expectation of the character and entertain the player.

  (B12) The game console according to any one of B9 to B11, wherein the length of the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the length of the display period of the first display. A game stand characterized by

  (B13) The game console according to any one of B1 to B12, wherein the first display is a display including a first color (for example, white), and the second display Is a display including a second color (eg, blue), and the reliability in the first color is a reliability different from the reliability in the second color, and the display of the first display A display including the second color may be displayed before the game console.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, by announcing the reliability of the second display, it is possible to expect the reliability when the second display is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are times when you can.

  (B14) The game console according to B13, wherein the reliability in the second color is a reliability higher than the reliability in the first color.

  According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, it may be possible to make the player expect that the second display is displayed by increasing the reliability of the second display to be displayed later.

  (B15) The game console according to any one of B1 to B14, wherein the first speech is displayed prior to the display of the first display.

  According to the game stand having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player is expected to expect the first character to appear by the first dialog. There is a possibility.

  (B16) The game console according to any one of B1 to B15, wherein the first display is a display including a first name (for example, "ten"), the first name Is a name of the first character, and the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the game stand having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player is expected to expect the first character to appear by the first name. There is a possibility.

  (B17) The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B16, comprising: operation means (for example, chance button 136) operable by the player, wherein the operation is performed while the first display is displayed. The second display is displayed when the means is operated.

  (B18) The game console according to any one of B1 to B17, wherein the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.

  (B19) The game console according to any one of B1 to B18, comprising a movable body (for example, a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping with the display means, the first display And the movable body may overlap in at least one of the second display and the second display.

  (B20) A game console according to any one of the above B1 to B19, in which a display overlaps with at least one of the first display and the second display. There is a game that is characterized by.

  (B21) The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B20, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (B22) The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B20, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000, 2000).

  The first display may be overlapped with another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is such that the first display is overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, it is possible to make the second animation pay attention to the second display by largely overlapping the first display during the second animation, and to ensure the relevance to the first display while the second display is displayed. There are times when you can.

The area in which the first line is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area in which the first line is overlapped by the second display. In this case, it is possible to make the second animation pay attention to the second dialogue by largely overlapping the first dialogue during the second animation, and secure the relevance to the first dialogue while the second display is displayed. There are times when you can.
There may be cases where the lines of the speech advance notice do not match.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and a character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be sequentially started to be displayed in the first animation, and the order may be circled in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be sequentially started to be displayed in the first animation, and each character may perform animation in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and a character may change in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters are reduced by one or more in the first animation. After the second display is displayed, transition to reach effect corresponding to the second character may be made. A conversation notice display is performed for each of the pseudo variation display, a first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo variation display, and a second conversation in the second pseudo variation display after the first pseudo variation display. An advance notice may be displayed. The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variation display, a part of the first conversation notice may overlap the movable, and a part of the second conversation notice may overlap the movable. A portion of the first conversation announcement may overlap the timer announcement and a portion of the second conversation announcement may overlap the timer announcement.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 201 to 254. FIG. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 201 to 254 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 201 to 254, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203, an example of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described.
FIG. 201 shows an example of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 201 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 201 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode. In FIG. 201 to FIG. 203, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emit light, they are represented in light black, and when the light emitting means is not emitting light, they are represented in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 201 (b) following FIG. 201 (a) shows a state in which each of the light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 201 (c) following FIG. 201 (b) shows a state where the movable body 1 is moved from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position There is. When the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the common drawing reserve number aa5, the part of the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the button advance notice h110 , And a part of the ball extraction error display h111, the operation expiration date display h112, and the preview display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that the movable body 1 may overlap with displays other than these as the movable body 1 is positioned approximately at the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 201 (d) following FIG. 201 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 30 degrees from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 201 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 201 (d), shows a state in which the deformation operation is completed with the movable body 1 positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and a ball pull error display The other part or the like of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. In addition, there may be a case where the movable body 1 overlaps with the display other than these by the movable body 1 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, any of these displays There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 201 (f) following FIG. 201 (e), after moving the movable body 1 back to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off. It shows the state.

As described above, in the present effect example, only the movable body 1 located on the front side of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position falls to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.
FIG. 202 shows an example of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 202 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 202 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 202 (b) following FIG. 202 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 202 (c) following FIG. 202 (b) shows a state where the movable body 2 is moved from the initial position to approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position There is. When the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a fourth pattern aa4 of the special figure 2, a button preview It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a drop-in-ball error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that when the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 202 (d) following FIG. 202 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 70 degrees clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 202 (e), which follows FIG. 202 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deforming operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button preview h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these when the movable body 2 is deformed at a position substantially in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any of these displays may be used. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 202 (f) continues on FIG. 202 (e). After moving the movable body 2 back to the shape before deformation, it moves to the initial position and turns off the light emitting means of each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 It shows the state.

  As described above, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When the present effect example is performed, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed in a final display than in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 201 is performed. In the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 201 is performed, the jackpot symbol may eventually be more likely to be finalized and displayed than when it is displayed.

FIG. 203 illustrates the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.
FIG. 203 (a) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 203 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 203 (b) following FIG. 203 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 203 (c) following FIG. 203 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start moving from the initial position and are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. When the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a second special figure 4 pattern aa4, common drawing reserve number aa5, part of common drawing 4 pattern aa6, part of button advance notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 Overlap with some of the In addition, when the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display of any one of them does not overlap. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are made the same. However, the movement end timing may be different.

  FIG. 203 (d) following FIG. 203 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable parts 14 move downward, and a pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, the timing of the start of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  FIG. 203 (e) following FIG. 203 (d) shows a state in which the movable elements 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is simultaneously terminated. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 14 moves downward, and the pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and the ball removal are newly added. Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these by the movable bodies 1 and 2 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be a case where one of the displays in the display does not overlap. In addition, the timing of completion | finish of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  In (f) of FIG. 203, which is continued to FIG. 203 (e), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, the movement start to the initial position and the movement end simultaneously. , And 2 show the state in which the respective light emitting means are simultaneously turned off. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before deformation | transformation may be started by separate timing, and may be complete | finished by separate timing. Further, even if the timing of the start of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the shape of the movable body 2 before the deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The start timing of the operation to return to the previous shape may be the same or the end timing may be different. In addition, there may be cases where the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ, or the timing of the start of the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ. It is also good. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The movement start timing may be the same or the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  Thus, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of simultaneously deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 201 or the effect example shown in FIG. 202 is performed. It is better that the jackpot symbol is finally determined and displayed more easily when the effect example shown in FIG. 201 or the effect example shown in FIG. 202 is performed than when the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 204 to FIG. 212, a movable body 90 and a rendering example using the movable body 90 will be described.

  The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 for rotating the movable body 90b, a rotary shaft d1, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion It has 90c3.

  In the LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 are provided in alignment in an arrangement of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows 1 column, 3 rows 1 column, 2 rows 6 columns , And the light emitting diode is not provided in the third row and the sixth column). A light emitting diode b1 to b4 is provided on the LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and a light emitting diode c1 is provided on the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c along the outer periphery of the arc portion To c4 are provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be all light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different colors), or a part may be a single color light emitting diode and another part may be a full color LED , All may be configured with full color LED. Further, as the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a, light sources other than the light emitting diodes may be used.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (g) sequentially show the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on or the like. In FIGS. 205 to 211, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where it is turned on is shown in light black. In addition, in FIGS. 205 to 211, the cover parts 90a3, 90b3 and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 205 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. The movable body 90 can be vertically moved by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. The cable connected to the movable body 90 may be disposed behind the arm so as not to be visible to the player. In addition, the character string "under preparation" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 205 (b), which is continued from FIG. 205 (a), the movable body 90 is moved to be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all of the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are mounted. The light emitting diode is shown in a lit state. In addition, the display of the character string “under preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 205 (c) following FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c are visible.

  FIG. 205 (d) following FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 205 (e) continued from FIG. 205 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the attitude of FIG. 205 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the attitude of FIG. 205 (d).

  FIG. 205 (f) following FIG. 205 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 205 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 205 (d).

  Drawing 205 (g) following Drawing 205 (f) shows the state where movable object 90 moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (n) show an example of effects using the movable body 90 in stages.

  FIG. 206 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 206 (b), which is continued from FIG. 206 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 206 (c) following FIG. 206 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  Drawing 206 (d) following Drawing 206 (c) shows the state where operation which each of movable object 90b and 90c provided in movable object 90 rotates was performed. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 206 (e) continued from FIG. 206 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 206 (d).

  FIG. 206 (f) following FIG. 206 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 206 (d).

  Drawing 206 (g) following Drawing 206 (f) shows the state where movable object 90 moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 206 (h) continued from FIG. 206 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 206 (i) continued from FIG. 206 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 206 (j) following FIG. 206 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 206 (k) continued from FIG. 206 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 206 (l) continued from FIG. 206 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90c becomes visible. The light of all the provided light emitting diodes is visible.

  FIG. 206 (m) following FIG. 206 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 206 (l), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 206 (l). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 206 (i) to 206 (l).

  FIG. 206 (n) following FIG. 206 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 207 to 210 is performed.

  An example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (n) show the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in stages. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 207 (a) shows a state where the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 207 (b), which is continued from FIG. 207 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 207 (c) following FIG. 207 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 207 (d) following FIG. 207 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 207 (e) following FIG. 207 (d) shows a state where all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished, and each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously moving downward. There is. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 207 (f) following FIG. 207 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original position. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

  FIG. 207 (g) following FIG. 207 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 207 (h) continued from FIG. 207 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 207 (i) continued from FIG. 207 (h), by moving upward only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90, a part of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90b is obtained. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 207 (j) following FIG. 207 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the lights of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  FIG. 207 (k), which is continued from FIG. 207 (j), shows a part of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90c by moving only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) is visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 207 (l) following FIG. 207 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  FIG. 207 (m), which follows FIG. 207 (l), shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to its original position after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so as to return the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 207 (i) to 207 (l).

  FIG. 207 (n) following FIG. 207 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

  An example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (n) show the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in stages. In the present modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 208 (b), which is continued from FIG. 208 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, and the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 208 (c) following FIG. 208 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  Drawing 208 (d) following Drawing 208 (c) shows the state where operation which each of movable object 90b and 90c provided in movable object 90 rotates was performed. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 208 (e) continued from FIG. 208 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the attitude of FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the attitude of FIG. 208 (d).

  FIG. 208 (f) following FIG. 208 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 208 (d).

  Drawing 208 (g) following Drawing 208 (f) shows the state where movable object 90 moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 208 (h), which is continued from FIG. 208 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 208 (i) continued from FIG. 208 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 208 (j) following FIG. 208 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 208 (k) continued from FIG. 208 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 208 (l) continued from FIG. 208 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 208 (m) following FIG. 208 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 208 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 208 (d). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 208 (i) to 208 (l).

  FIG. 208 (n) following FIG. 208 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

  An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 209 (a) to (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  In FIG. 209 (a), a decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (b) following FIG. 209 (a), the finalized display of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the hold icon a2 of the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (c) following FIG. 209 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display by the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string "Press the button!", The button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed, and the notice effect of the button operation is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the fluctuation icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string of "press a button!", A button advance notice h110, and an operation expiration date h112 It is overlapped.

  In FIG. 209 (d) continued from FIG. 209 (c), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and the sun's An image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (e) continued from FIG. 209 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach effect is displayed. Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern and a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (f) following FIG. 209 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the SP reach effect display by the character display of the character who displayed the character string of "match!" Is started, and the decorative symbol display device At the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced size. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the Tono character display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (g) following FIG. 209 (f), the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display 208 The combination of symbols is reduced and temporary stop display is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is an effect display in which the character scene of "win", the character of the lord and the enemy character is ended and the character of the lord has won. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the effect display won by the character of the hall is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (h), which is continued from FIG. 209 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (i), which is continued from FIG. 209 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit game effect display of the first round of the 15 R special big hit game is displayed. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol "Decoration 7" which is a stop symbol of a big hit is displayed, and a character string of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right. A string of "80 balls" indicating the sum of the numbers and a string of "big hit counts: 1" indicating the number of big hits at the lower right are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R's big hit game effect indication is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (j) following FIG. 209 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the 15R special big hit game is over and the character string of "Dito" is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the “Dito” string is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (k) following FIG. 209 (j), the state is shifted to the power support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "right strike me!" And a symbol indicating that right strike is performed, a variation icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display and a part of the character string "Please hit right!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 209 (l) continued from FIG. 209 (k), the power supply state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "door open error", a character string of "ball full error", a fluctuation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 reservation icon ac2 of the prefetching notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full error", a part of fluctuation icon ad5 and a special figure 2 reserve icon A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in the present effect example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and game states. The movable body 90 may overlap all the displays shown above, or the movable body 90 may not overlap the displayed displays.
An example of effects using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described using FIG.

  FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the announcement effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 206 is performed by the player pressing the chance button 136 in the operation effective period of the chance button 136 of the announcement effect of the button operation. It shows. Even when the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 206 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. . Note that a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) are performed, it is configured that final big hit symbols are easier to be determined and displayed than when a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) are not performed. It may be done. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

  FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 206 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is completed. Note that a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a prefetch notice. Also, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) is performed, it is configured that final big hit symbols are easier to be determined and displayed than when a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) are not performed. If a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) are performed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed compared to the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) are performed. In the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) are performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) are performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

  A variation of how the movable body 90 is viewed at the initial position shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 90 is located rearward of the game board 125 having a game nail.

  FIG. 211 (a) shows an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30a at the initial position. The structural body 30 a has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a portion of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a portion of the movable body 90b, and a portion of the movable body 90c are visible through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 211 (b) is an example in which the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30 b at the initial position. The structural body 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically elongated rectangular notch at a substantially central portion. The structure 30 b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c are provided via the notch of the structure 30b. It is visible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 211 (c) is an example where the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structural body 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, since the movable body 90 is overlapped with the structure 30 c, the movable body 90 can not be viewed by the player. By disposing the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structural body 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structural body 30c may be made more easily visible during non-display than in display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  A variation of the position and movement of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 212A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a 208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down in front of the liquid crystal display device a 208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a 208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 212 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 212 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The drawing on the left side in FIG. 212 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is positioned behind the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 212 (c) shows the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 212 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display c208 after the movable liquid crystal display c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is positioned in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c 208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, an effect example using the structure 247 will be described using FIGS. 213 to 223. FIG. The structure 247 used in the effect example of FIG. 213 to FIG. 223 is a structure in which the shape of the front is substantially circular and the design of the family crest is applied to the surface, and vertical movement is possible. Also, in FIG. 213 to FIG. 222, the left figure shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left figure, the structure 247. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is a schematic for determining whether a predetermined character display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani or a display su1 of the sun) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be seen by the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the drawing, the line of sight by which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ○, and the line of sight by which the player can not visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example is determined by setting a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 to a predetermined eye angle (e.g., a general sitting height (e.g., a seating height of 70 cm to 100 cm) The angle of the line of sight in the normal gaming attitude of the player) may be designed to be calculated so as not to be visible. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 213 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 213 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 213 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 213 (b), which is continued from FIG. 213 (a), a character display SB of a sabothani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247 while the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal upper view has the character of the Sabo Hani A part of the display SB can be viewed. In the description of the player's eyes in the present example and in the following examples, the term “substantially front” defines the angle within the range of ± about 10 ° as the front when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper means that the angle of the eye is + about 20 ° or more as the substantially oblique upper, and the substantially oblique lower means the eye angle of −20 ° or less as the substantially oblique lower, but the present disclosure Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, the position of the line of sight should be higher than that of the substantially front with substantially diagonal upper, and the position of the line of sight should be lower than that with the substantially front with substantially diagonal lower.

  In FIG. 213 (c), which is continued from FIG. 213 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 213 (d), which follows FIG. 213 (c), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking from substantially diagonally above will display the Sabohani character You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 213 (e) following FIG. 213 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, this example is an example in which movement display is performed from a position at which the character display SB of Sabohani used for prenoting the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to a position at which the character display SB is not overlapped. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 214 to 222 is performed. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 is not moved and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, leftward, rightward and rotation. The player who is generally seen from the front may be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani by performing one or a plurality of movements, and may be overlapped with the structure 247. At least any one or more of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or rotational movement of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed while moving and displaying the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at the position. In some cases, it may be possible for a player who is looking substantially from the front to be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of SaboHani.

  FIG. 214 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is subjected to variable display in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 214 (b) continued from FIG. 214 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 214 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 214 (c) following FIG. 214 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 214 (d) following FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 214 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the Sabohani character display. You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 214 (e), which follows FIG. 214 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 214 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  Thus, the present example again overlaps the structure 247 after performing the movement display from the position at which the sabothani character display SB used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. In this example, the movement display is performed at the selected position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 222 is performed.

  FIG. 215 shows an example of presentation using the structure 247 and the structure 50t in stages. The structure 50t is an opaque thin plate-like structure, and the title of the game console is displayed on the surface. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 215 (b), which is continued from FIG. 215 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 215 (c) following FIG. 215 (b) shows a state in which the animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 215 (d) following FIG. 215 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the sabothani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 215 (e) following FIG. 215 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern. In the state shown in FIG. 215 (d), the player looking at the structure 50t from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabohani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonally lower is the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In this way, this example is overlapped to the structure 50t after the movement display is performed from the position where the character character SB of Sabohani used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. This is an example of moving display at a position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 216 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The figure on the left side of FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 216 (b), which is continued from FIG. 216 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to appear from the lower left of the screen There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 216 (c) following FIG. 216 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped.

  FIG. 216 (d) following FIG. 216 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 216 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 216 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 216 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  As described above, in this example, the position that is not overlapped with the structure 247 after the movement display is performed from the position where it is not overlapped with the structure 247 to the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for warning of the change is overlapped. Is an example of moving display. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 217 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 217 (b), which is continued from FIG. 217 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani in this example is larger than the character display SB of Sabohani shown in FIG.
FIG. 217 (c) following FIG. 217 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right part of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 217 (d) following FIG. 217 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped. In the state shown in FIG. 217 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see the substantially upper half of the character display SB of the Sabohani, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 217 (e) following FIG. 217 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  Thus, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is not overlapped to the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not to be overlapped with the structure 247 later, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an effect example which is always visible from the player in a substantially front view. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 218 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 218 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of a decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 218 (b), which is continued from FIG. 218 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani character is overlapped with the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 218 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonal upper view has the character of Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 218 (c) following FIG. 218 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire display su1 of the sun appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapped with the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 218 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the display su1 of the sun and the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the sun display su1 and at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB.

  In FIG. 218 (d) continued from FIG. 218 (c), in the decoration symbol display device 208, an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws up the display su1 of the sun is displayed, and the display su1 of the sun moves upward. Showing an animation display to be displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3.

  In FIG. 218 (e), which is continued from FIG. 218 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the character display SB of the safohani is displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped, the display su1 of the sun is upward The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  Thus, in the present example, only the display su1 of the sun is displayed after the display 2 of the character display SB of Sabohan and the display su1 of the sun, which are used to announce the change, are overlapped with the structure 247. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not overlapping with. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 219 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 219 (b) following FIG. 219 (a) is the whole of the sabothan character display SB and the sun at a position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 The entire display su1 is displayed as it appears from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 219 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the Sabohan character display SB and at least a portion of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 219 (c) following FIG. 219 (b) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohan and the display su1 of the sun are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the animation display moves upward. A character display SB of Sabohan and a display su1 of the sun are displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 219 (d) following FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which only the display su1 of the sun moves downward on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon a3. In the state of FIG. 219 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the display su1 of the sun, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the sun of the display su1. The whole is visible.

  In FIG. 219 (e), which is continued from FIG. 219 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sun display su1 is further down while the sabothani character display SB is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247. The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. The player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not see the display su1 of the sun, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top can see at least a part of the display su1 of the sun .

  Thus, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the notice of the change are displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun In this example, movement display is performed at a position where su1 is not overlapped with the structure 247, and thereafter movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 is overlapped with the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 220 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 220 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude from the structure 247 in a radial shape. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as the advance notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

  In FIG. 220 (b), which is continued from FIG. 220 (a), the upper half of the character display SB of the sabothani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to move upward so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 220 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the effect image ef1 of the player who can not view the character display SB of Sabohani, but from a substantially diagonal top The player who is watching is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohan and a part of the effect image ef1.

  In FIG. 220 (c) continued from FIG. 220 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the safari is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving up so as to appear from the bottom. In the state shown in FIG. 220 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 220 (d) following FIG. 220 (c) shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 213 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking from substantially diagonally above will display the Sabohani character You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 220 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 220 (d), shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB and effect image ef1 are displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, the present example is an example in which movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped, but the character display SB of Sabohani is used. Is an example in which the effect image ef1 attached to the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position not overlapped by the structure 247 before it is displayed at a position overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good.

FIG. 221 shows three example effects using the structure 247. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 221 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. In FIG. 221 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the temple and the balloon display h114 of the character string of “chance found when the character is!” Are decorative symbols. It is displayed to overlap in part. The balloon display h114 of the character string of “If you find a character!” Is a display for predicting that the character display SB of Sabohani appears, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.
In FIG. 221 (b), which is continued from FIG. 221 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Further, in the balloon display h114, a character string "during character appearance!" Is displayed. The character string of “character appearing!” May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabo Hani, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state shown in FIG. 221 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabohani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal upper view has the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In FIG. 221 (c) continued from FIG. 221 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display SB of the safohani displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 is enlarged. In the balloon display h114, a character string "during character expansion!" Is displayed. May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 220 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

  As described above, in this example, before displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for the advance notice of the change at the position where the SABOHANI character display SB is overlapped to the structure 247, a display for previewing that the SABOHANI character display SB is displayed After the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it is overlapped to the structure 247, a display is made to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position to be overlapped to the structure 247 is performed. In this example, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed on the screen is enlarged, and a display is provided to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the size of the character display SB of Sabohani to be enlarged is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily displayed finally.

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 221 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 221 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the character display SB1 of the sabo hani 1 and the sabo hani 2 serving as the advance notice of the variation is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 221 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabo hani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a portion of the character display SB1 of the Sabo Hani 1 and at least a portion of the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. is there. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of the advance notices displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally.

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 221 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In (a) of FIG. 221, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohan 1 that is the advance notice of the variation is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. A character display SB2 of Sabohani 2, which is a preliminary display of the change, is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 221 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the sabo hani 1 and the character display SB2 of the sabo hani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the SaboHani 1, and the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of SaboHani.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapped with the body 50t. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapped by the plurality of structures is large, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  FIG. 222 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is subjected to variable display in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 222 (b) continued from FIG. 222 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani character is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 222 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

FIG. 222 (c) following FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.
In FIG. 222 (d), which is continued from FIG. 222 (c), the structure 247 moves upward and is located at a position where it overlaps with the character display SB of the safari that is displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 222 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but a player looking at the substantially oblique lower view of the character display SB of Sabohani At least a part is visible.

  Thus, in this example, after displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for anticipating the change at a position overlapped with the structure 247, the character movement SB is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and then the structure is performed. In this example, the body 247 is moved, and the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner as compared to the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. It is also good. In this example, the movement of the structure 247 is carried out behind the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani, which is the advance display, but it is always displayed on the character display SB of Sabohani according to the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani. The movement of the structure 247 may be performed so as to overlap, or the movement of the structure 247 may be performed first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohan may be delayed.

  FIG. 223 shows an example of effect using the structure 247. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap the structure 247. FIG. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 223 (b), the structure 247 is viewed from the upper left to the lower right. The player visually recognizing the structure 247 from the front can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani although a part of the effect image ef1 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 223 (b), the player viewing the structure 247 obliquely from the upper left to the lower right views a portion of the effect image ef1 and the substantially entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player visually recognized from the front. In addition, the effect of this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 222 is performed. It is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 233, a presentation example using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. The arrows in FIGS. 224 to 233 are for explaining the locus of the reserve icon and the change icon and the direction of movement, but the locus of the reserve icon and the change icon and movement on the decorative symbol display device 208 It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

  FIG. 224 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 224 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 224 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 224 (a) to (g) and FIG. 224 (j) after FIGS. 224 (a) to (g) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 224 (a)-(i). Fig. 224 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Moreover, FIG. 224 (a) has shown the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 224 (b) following FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 224 (c), which is continued from FIG. 224 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3, the special view 2 hold icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 224 (d), which follows FIG. 224 (c), shows the state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 224 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 224 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 224 (f), which is continued from FIG. 224 (e), the special symbol 1 reserve icon a3 is special image 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be The notice display m1 may be a notice display for giving a notice that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display that the SP reach effect is carried out.

  In FIG. 224 (g) continued from FIG. 224 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (h) of FIG. 224 (h) following FIG. 224 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (pedestal) where the Special Figure 1 suspension icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 224 (i) following FIG. 224 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation is finished. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 224 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 224 (j) following FIG. 224 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 224 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base where the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 224 (k) continued from FIG. 224 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement It shows the condition that has been

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. It is. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 225 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 225 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 225 (h) to 225 (j) after FIGS. 225 (a) to 225 (g) and FIGS. 225 (k) to 225 (k) to FIG. The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 225 (a)-(j). FIG. 225 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 225 (b) following FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 225 (c) continued from FIG. 225 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 225 (d) following FIG. 225 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 225 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 225 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 225 (f), which is continued from FIG. 225 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Recently, a vertically-long rectangular holding icon (hereinafter referred to as “the holding icon while going out” is displayed on the pedestal displaying the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 as the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 with the character string “on the go” "" Is displayed. In addition, it may replace with a pending icon while going out, and may use a default shaped pending icon with a lighter color.

  In FIG. 225 (g) continued from FIG. 225 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  225 (h) continues to FIG. 225 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 5 is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  225 (i) continues to FIG. 225 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice that the notice display m1 is the special view 1 reservation icon a3 and the moving animation returning to the base before the movement ends, and the base is displayed on the base The hold icon in the same manner as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon while out of the office.

  In FIG. 225 (j) continued from FIG. 225 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the on-going hold icon is erased.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 2 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 225 (k)-(m).

  In FIG. 225 (k) following FIG. 225 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 225 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 disappears Be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, the on-hold icon re-appearing animation in which the on-hold icon of the aspect (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps the on-going on-hold icon and reappears is displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 225 (l) continued from FIG. 225 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is not moved. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 225 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon is erased while out of the office.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. Is an example of provisionally displaying a pending icon of another aspect in place of the pending icon being moved. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

  FIG. 226 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 226 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 226 (h) and 226 (i) after FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (g) and FIG. 226 (j) after FIGS. The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 226 (a)-(i). 226 (a), in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  226 (b) following FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  226 (c) following FIG. 226 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon a3, the special figure 2 reserve icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 226 (d) following FIG. 226 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 226 (e) following FIG. 226 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  226 (f) continues to FIG. 226 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 reserved icon a3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a suspension icon temporary movement animation in which the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily moved to the pedestal for which the special view 1 suspension icon a 3 is displayed is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, and is used as a notice of the change. May be displayed.

  226 (g) following FIG. 226 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. Moreover, in the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b 3 is temporarily displayed on the base on which the special figure 1 reserve icon a 3 was displayed most recently. Is displayed on. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  226 (h) following FIG. 226 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 208ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  226 (i) continues to FIG. 226 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice that the notice display m1 is the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation to return to the position before the movement ends, special view 1 The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement. In addition, the suspension icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 (j) and (k).

  226 (j) following FIG. 226 (a)-(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 226 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 suspension icon a 3 reappears on the base where the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily displayed. The suspension icon re-appearing animation and the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 move toward the original pedestal. The temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 hold icon b 3, but the special view 2 hold icon b 3 is a hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation It may be displayed to overlap. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  226 (k) following FIG. 226 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement Then, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is ended, and the special view 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the move.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. In the example below, the pending icon on the right is temporarily displayed in place of the pending icon being moved, and when the pending icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed pending icon returns to the original position. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

  FIG. 227 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 227 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIG. 224 (h) and (i) are performed after FIGS. 227 (a) to (g) and FIG. 224 (j) after FIGS. 227 (a) to (g) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 227 (a)-(i). FIG. 227 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4 in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  227 (b) following FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  227 (c) continues in FIG. 227 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, in the default mode special diagram 2 suspension icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 227 (d), which follows FIG. 227 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  227 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 227 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  227 (e) continues, FIG. 227 (f) shows the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 during the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of a cassette.

  227 (g) continued from FIG. 227 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  227 (h) continues to FIG. 227 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed.

  227 (i) following FIG. 227 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 is displayed as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation to return to the position before movement is finished .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 227 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 227 (j) continued from FIGS. 227 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 227 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears. And the special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base on which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed, and the character string "under preparation" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  227 (k) following FIG. 227 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement It shows the condition that has been

As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol fluctuation display is re-varied is performed when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the temporary notice display while the temporary stop display of the missing symbol is displayed. There is no example.
FIG. 228 gradually shows an example of presentation using the hold icon.

  228 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 228 (b) following FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 228 (c) continued from FIG. 228 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 228 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 228 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 228 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 228 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 228 (f), which is continued from FIG. 228 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5” in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  In FIG. 228 (g) continued from FIG. 228 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  228 (h) continues to FIG. 228 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 228 (i), which follows FIG. 228 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the moving animation ends. .

  FIG. 228 (j) following FIG. 228 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 228 (k) continued from FIG. 228 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5”, special drawing 1 reserved icon a3 is special drawing 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  228 (l) continues on FIG. 228 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 228 (m), which is continued from FIG. 228 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  228 (n) shows a state in which the re-movement animation for returning to the position before movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 following FIG. 228 (m) There is.

As described above, in this example, while the temporary stop display of the out pattern is displayed, the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle pattern of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display, and the decorative symbol variation display changes again and again. It is an example to do. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed. May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 229 shows the effect example using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 229 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 229 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 229 (b) following FIG. 229 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 229 (c) continued from FIG. 229 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon a3, the special view 2 reserve icon b3 of the default mode. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 229 (d) following FIG. 229 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 229 (e) following FIG. 229 (d) has shown the state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" was displayed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  229 (e), FIG. 229 (f), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  In FIG. 229 (g) continued from FIG. 229 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5”, the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 229 (h) following FIG. 229 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 229 (i) following FIG. 229 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation returning to the position before the movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3. .

  FIG. 229 (j) following FIG. 229 (i) has shown the state as which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" was displayed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 229 (k) continued from FIG. 229 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed, the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special view 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 229 (l) continued from FIG. 229 (k), the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 229 (m) following FIG. 229 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (base) at which the special view 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 229 (n) following FIG. 229 (m) shows a state in which the re-movement animation for returning to the position before movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 with the notice display m1 as the special view 2 reservation icon b3. There is.

As described above, this example is an example in which the pseudo continuous notice is performed multiple times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed. May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. If there is not enough hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 230 shows an example of presentation using the hold icon in stages.

  FIG. 230 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 230 (b) following FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 230 (c) continued from FIG. 230 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 230 (d) following FIG. 230 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 230 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 230 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 230 (f), which is continued from FIG. 230 (e), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  In FIG. 230 (g) continued from FIG. 230 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (h) of FIG. 230 (h) following FIG. 230 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (pedestal) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 230 (i), which follows FIG. 230 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  In FIG. 230 (j) following FIG. 230 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "reach!" Is displayed.

As described above, in this example, when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started It is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed. May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.
FIG. 231 shows the effect example using the variation icon in stages.

  Fig. 231 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 231 (b) following FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 231 (c) continued from FIG. 231 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 231 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 231 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 231 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 231 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  231 (f) continues from FIG. 231 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the fluctuation icon ad1 is displayed from the fluctuation icon display area 280 It shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out and moving as the advance notice m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 are the same display mode. Further, on the pedestal of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the fluctuation icon is not displayed. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a prefetch notice. May be

  In FIG. 231 (g) continued from FIG. 231 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m2 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  231 (h) continues to FIG. 231 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice m2 returning to the position (base) of the variation icon display area 280 is displayed. -The temporary stop display of "decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the advance notice m2.

  FIG. 231 (i), which is subsequent to FIG. 231 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position of the variation icon display area 280 ends as the advance notice m2 as the variation icon ad1. .

  As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the variation icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the advance notice during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. In addition to the change icon of the default mode, a change icon of an aspect other than the default mode may be used as the advance notice m2 of this example. FIG. 232 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon in stages It shows.

  Fig. 232 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 232 (a) shows a state where decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  232 (b) following FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  232 (c) continues to FIG. 232 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (d) following FIG. 232 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 232 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 232 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 232 (f), which is continued from FIG. 232 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the advance notice m1 is a display used as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 232 (g) continued from FIG. 232 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (h) of FIG. 232 (h) following FIG. 232 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (pedestal) where special icon 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (i) following FIG. 232 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the moving animation ends. .

  FIG. 232 (j) following FIG. 232 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed, and the moving icon of the holding icon moves the holding icon to the left and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the changing icon display area 208 and the moving animation of the holding icon changes .

  232 (k) following FIG. 232 (j) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 232 (l), which is continued from FIG. 232 (k), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 3" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 232 (m) following FIG. 232 (l), the notice display m1 displays a middle symbol display area while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” in the decorative symbol display device 208 A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 2" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decorative 2" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 3" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (d) of FIG. 232 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (base) where the special icon 1 suspension icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed.

  232 (o) following FIG. 232 (n) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 is displayed as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation to return to the position before movement is completed. .

  FIG. 232 (p) following FIG. 232 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol change display is displayed, and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the left and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. There is.

  FIG. 232 (q) following FIG. 232 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  232 (r) continues to FIG. 232 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the display of temporary stop display of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8", special figure 1 reserved icon a3 is special figure 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 are the same display mode, and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 232 (s), which is continued from FIG. 232 (r), the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 7" which is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 8" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (d) of FIG. 232 (s), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (base) where the special icon 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3 "is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 232 (u), which is continued from FIG. 232 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position before movement is finished with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reservation icon a3; Reach production of is performed.

  As described above, this example is an example of developing a reach effect by continuously notifying that a predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. is there. The first and second notices appearing in this example are used as pre-reading notices, and the third notices appearing are used as notices of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

  FIG. 233 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages. Fig. 233 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. Further, the special view 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of the character of the lord. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of the character of your character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 233 (b) following FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the form of the character of the statue is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 233 (c) continued from FIG. 233 (b), and it is a special figure 2 in which a special character 1 is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 233 (d) following FIG. 233 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 233 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 233 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  233 (f) continues to FIG. 233 (e), the special figure 2 reservation icon b2 is a special figure while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 and 2 pending icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out from special drawing 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2 and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out from the special view 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. All of the notice displays c1 to c3, the special view 2 suspension icon b2 and b3, and the special view 1 suspension icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b2, b3 and the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 233 (g) following FIG. 233 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 changes. It shows a state where it has changed to the advance notice c3 '. The advance notices c1 'to c3' are all the same display mode, and the display mode is such that the character of the large hall displayed is fighting with the Japanese sword removed. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display c1 'fights against "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped on the left symbol display area 208a, The battle animation is a battle animation in which the notice display c2 'fights with "decoration 4", which is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3', which is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, is displayed temporarily It is displayed.

  In FIG. 233 (h) following FIG. 233 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3 'changes to c3. The notice display c3 displayed the special view 2 hold icon b3 at the position at which the notice display c2 displayed the special view 1 hold icon a3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2. The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is ended, and a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown.

  In FIG. 233 (i) continued from FIG. 233 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special view 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is ended as the movement before the movement. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

As described above, in the present example, when the plurality of reserved icons collide with the plurality of decoration symbols as the plurality of advance notices during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decoration symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started. Is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The character may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 232 is performed. When the number of pending icons used as the advance notice display of this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the advance notice display.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIGS. 234 to 254. FIG.
FIGS. 234 (a) to (c) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  234 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  As for FIG. 234 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the hall is displayed in the approximate center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 234 (b) continued from FIG. 234 (a), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

In FIG. 234 (c) following FIG. 234 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the brow character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIG. 235 (a) to (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  235 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 235 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 235 (b) following FIG. 235 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple from the left end of the screen is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 235 (c) continued from FIG. 235 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from the left to the right is displayed. Shows the status displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon and the design of the sunny mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed) Then, after stopping display at the approximate center of the screen, it is possible to display the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark in order from the top of the character string, or even if all the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark are displayed at once. Good. The same configuration may be applied to other balloon display.

  In FIG. 235 (d) continued from FIG. 235 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 235 (e) continued from FIG. 235 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1 may be overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may be overlapped with the balloon display f2 .

  FIG. 235 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation of moving upward is performed due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon animation f1 is moved upward and the balloon animation f2 is moved leftward at the same time.

  In (f) of FIG. 235 (e), which is continued from FIG. 235 (e), a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved toward the left, and a moving animation is performed. The moving animation is performed, and the state displayed at the upper center of the screen is shown.

  In FIG. 235 (g) continued from FIG. 235 (f), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 235 (h), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to delete the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and height are different. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  Also, in FIG. 235 (h), due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, the state of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 moving upward is performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right are simultaneously performed.

  In (i) in FIG. 235 (i), a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right, and a moving animation is performed, and the balloon f2 is moved upward. The moving animation is performed and displayed at the approximate upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows a state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, after the frame, the balloon display f2 of the wolf character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may delete the balloon display f3 after deleting the balloon display f2, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. At the same time, the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the n-th time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number It may be erased before the start of) or may be erased before displaying the temporary stop indication. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out gradually in the same place, or in the same manner as the balloon display f1 of the Tono character After displaying the moving animation moving upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction of each appearance. The same may be applied to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed. In the balloon display described in the present example and the following drawings, patterns of each configuration (weather mark (fine mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) of the balloon display, display of character strings, frame, display of character name, character In each of the face images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or all may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character may crack may be displayed. The entire balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates and the animation display in which the display of the character string blinks and the animation display in which the character blinks. In addition, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and the animation display in which the character palpates may be displayed while the number of characters in the display of the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display may be repeated to rotate and return to the original posture, one animation display to return to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original may be moved after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one gloss display moving or changing may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display of the respective configurations of the balloon display may overlap with a part of another animation of each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 236 (a) to 236 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  236 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 236 (b), which is continued from FIG. 236 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple from the left end of the screen is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 236 (c) continued from FIG. 236 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed. Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 236 (d) continued from FIG. 236 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 236 (e) continued from FIG. 236 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , A moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 236 (f) following FIG. 236 (e), the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

In FIG. 236 (g), which is continued from FIG. 236 (f), a balloon display f2 is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that
FIG. 236 (h), which is subsequent to FIG. 236 (g), shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  In FIG. 236 (i) continued from FIG. 236 (h), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 236 (j) following FIG. 236 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. 11 shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 236 (k) continued from FIG. 236 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is displayed.

  In FIG. 236 (l) following FIG. 236 (k), a balloon display f3 by a princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 236 (m) following FIG. 236 (l) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, with a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 237 (a) to 237 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 237 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 237 (b) following FIG. 237 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple is displayed from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 237 (c) following FIG. 237 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation is displayed in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 237 (d) continued from FIG. 237 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 237 (e) following FIG. 237 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 237 (f) following FIG. 237 (e) shows a state where the balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved and moved to the left, and the stop animation is performed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the hall character and the character image of "don" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 237 (g) continued from FIG. 237 (f), after the moving animation moving to the left of the balloon display f2 is finished, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In FIG. 237 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string of "morning weather is" and the pattern of the clear mark and the frame portion of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f2 Approximately the upper half of can be seen. At a certain timing between FIG. 237 (f) and FIG. 237 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 is in a state in which a part of the pattern of the clear mark is displayed and the character string is not displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 237 (h) following FIG. 237 (g), the moving animation moving to the upper side of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 237 (i) continued from FIG. 237 (h), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 237 (j) following FIG. 237 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 237 (k) following FIG. 237 (j) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left end of the screen moves toward the right is performed and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen . The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the brow character and the character image of "爺" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 237 (l) following FIG. 237 (k) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In FIG. 237 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and the part of the pattern of the cloud mark or the frame of the balloon part Approximately the upper half of can be seen. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 236 (m) following FIG. 237 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward on the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen It is done.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 238 shows an example of the pattern 1 performing the effects of FIGS. 238 (n) to (q) after FIGS. 238 (a) to (m) and FIGS. 238 (r) to (h) after FIGS. 238 (a) to (m) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
238 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  238 (b) continues from FIG. 238 (a) so that a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  238 (c) continues to FIG. 238 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 238 (d) continued from FIG. 238 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 238 (e) following FIG. 238 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In (f) of FIG. 238 (e), the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  238 (g) continues to FIG. 238 (f). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the position where the balloon display f1 overlaps the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 238 (h) following FIG. 238 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 238 (i), which is continued from FIG. 238 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  238 (j) continues to FIG. 238 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 238 (k) following FIG. 238 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of "Honey" displayed at a position overlapped with the Sabo Hani character image and the Sabo Hani character image, and a character string and pattern of "When reached" are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 238 (l) following FIG. 238 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The display is stopped at the position where the balloon part f4 appeared from the lower part of the screen has appeared, and the movement on the balloon display f3 is also interrupted and displayed once. In addition, the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper end of the screen.

  238 (m) continues to FIG. 238 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f2. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 238 (n) following FIG. 238 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which a character image of "Shippu" and a character string and a pattern of "Heating fever" displayed on the face image of the Gale character and the face image of the Gale character are displayed. It is an indication that includes. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 and the like.

In (o) in FIG. 238 (o), which is subsequent to FIG. 238 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.
In FIG. 238 (p) following FIG. 238 (o), scroll display of the balloon displays f4 and f5 is performed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  238 (q) following FIG. 238 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 238 (r) following FIG. 238 (a) to (m), a balloon display f5 is displayed from the left end of the screen so that the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed in FIG. 238 (m). It shows a state in which a moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect that the balloon displays f1 to f4 are scrolled upward in order is displayed, the effect that the balloon displays f2 to f5 are scrolled to the right is performed.

  In FIG. 238 (s) following FIG. 238 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to simultaneously come out from the right end of the screen .

  FIG. 238 (t) following FIG. 238 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. 239. FIG. 239 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 239 (k) and (l) are performed after FIGS. 239 (a) to (j) and FIG. 239 (m) after FIGS. 239 (a) to (j) The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 239 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 239 (b) continues from FIG. 239 (a) so that a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 239 (c) continued from FIG. 239 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 239 (d) continued from FIG. 239 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 239 (e) following FIG. 239 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 239 (f) following FIG. 239 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 239 (g) following FIG. 239 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 overlaps the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 239 (h) following FIG. 239 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 239 (i) continued from FIG. 239 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 239 (j) following FIG. 239 (i) is a button preview display h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 239 (k) following FIG. 239 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

  FIG. 239 (l) following FIG. 239 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 has been temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Thereafter, there may be a case in which reach effect is started while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are erased, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 239 (m) following FIG. 239 (a) to (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation expiration date h112 are displayed. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 239 (n) following FIG. 239 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 'appearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. After this, the balloon displays f1 'and f2 may be erased and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect or the reach effect may be started, or the animation in which the holding icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Good.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 240 (a) to 240 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 240 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 240 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 240 (b) following FIG. 240 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  In FIG. 240 (c) continued from FIG. 240 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 240 (d) continued from FIG. 240 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 240 (e) continued from FIG. 240 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In (f) of FIG. 240, which is a continuation of FIG. 240 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 ′ was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 240 (g) continued from FIG. 240 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1' and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at the position where the action is made, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 240 (h), which is subsequent to FIG. 240 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen at the same time as the moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f2 is configured not to be displayed but to be erased above the position where the balloon display f1 'is displayed. Also, by displaying the balloon display f1 'in priority to the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving in a scroll display behind the balloon display f1, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured such that the overlapping parts of 'are not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the brow character of the balloon display f2 and the character image of the brow are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ', they are scrolled to the position of the upper end of the screen. As described above, in this example, when a balloon display having a high hit probability appears, the callout having a high reliability is left on the screen by prioritizing and deleting the balloon having the low hit reliability. It is configured.

  In FIG. 240 (i) continued from FIG. 240 (h), with the balloon display f1 'being stopped and displayed, a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed and the balloon display is performed. The state f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 ′ and f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 241 (a) to 241 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 241 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  Continuing from FIG. 241 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1, 2 suspension icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In (c) of FIG. 241 (c), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 241 (d) continued from FIG. 241 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 241 (e) continued from FIG. 241 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. After the balloon display f2 by the キ ャ ラ ク タ character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In this example, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 is moved upward to perform a moving animation. Therefore, the balloon display f2 is approximately below the balloon display f1. Displayed to overlap in half.

  In FIG. 241 (f) following FIG. 241 (e), in the state where the substantially lower half of the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, a moving animation of moving upward together is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 241 (g) continued from FIG. 241 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted and a chance is made to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.
In FIG. 241 (h) following FIG. 241 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of “balloon display f2” (“Today's weather”) The balloon part of the balloon display 2 by overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part (the character string of "Today's weather" or the frame part of the cloud mark or the balloon part ) Is configured to overlap with part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the rain mark and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters overlap in the balloon portion. There may be cases where the balloon part may overlap with the face image of the character, or there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the balloon part.

  In FIG. 241 (i) following FIG. 241 (h), a moving animation is performed to move the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward, and the upper end of the balloon f1 and the lower end of the balloon f3 fit on the screen Shows a state in which the moving animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or ended. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 to f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be possible. Further, in the present example, the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays are configured to be uniform, but the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays may be configured not to be even. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 242 (a) to 242 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  242 (a), in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Moreover, FIG. 242 (a) has shown the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  242 (b) continues from FIG. 242 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  242 (c) continues to FIG. 242 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 242 (d) continued from FIG. 242 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 242 (e) following FIG. 242 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and part of each configuration of the balloon display (the weather pattern, characters, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be reduced to be different for each configuration.

  In FIG. 242 (f) following FIG. 242 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

242 (g) continued from FIG. 242 (f). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted and a chance is given to a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.
In FIG. 242 (h) following FIG. 242 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f3 by a princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before being moved upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the degree of reduction of the balloon display f1. In addition, one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced more or less than the other, or the configuration to be reduced between the one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 242 (i) following FIG. 242 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or ended and the stop display is performed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 243 (a) to 243 (k) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  243 (a), in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 243 (b) following FIG. 243 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  243 (c) following FIG. 243 (b) displays a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 243 (d) continued from FIG. 243 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 243 (e) following FIG. 243 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  In (f) of FIG. 243 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 243 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f1 ′ are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  243 (g) continued from FIG. 243 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ', and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1' The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 243 (h) following FIG. 243 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1 'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'is enlarged, and as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is floated instead. . In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "SP reach confirmation" are displayed. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased according to the change of the new balloon display f1 ′, but for example, it is moved in any of the left-right direction to be erased It may be overlapped, may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a which has changed without moving, and may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 243 (i) continued from FIG. 243 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to fit within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 243 (j) following FIG. 243 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 243 (k) following FIG. 243 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The character string "SP reach confirmation" is deleted and the character string "all rotation reach confirmation" is displayed. The character string “all rotation reach determination” is displayed as if it protrudes from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "all rotation reach confirmation" is a character image of a decorative symbol or a hallmark, a holding icon, a variation icon, a special figure 1 holding number aa1 or a special figure 1 fourth pattern aa2 or a special drawing 2 holding number aa3 There may be a case where the display of the second pattern aa4 of 2 and the common drawing reserve number aa5, the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the display of the character string of the tutorial display area tu1 or the display other than these may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 244 (a) to 244 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 244 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 244 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 244 (b) following FIG. 244 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a character display m3 of a princess is displayed from the left end of the screen. Princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th design aa2 of special drawing 1, the special drawing 2 reservation number aa3, the 4th design aa4 of special drawing 2, the common drawing reservation number aa5, the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing There is.

  In FIG. 244 (c) continued from FIG. 244 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 244 (d) continued from FIG. 244 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of the character It is displayed to be. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  In FIG. 244 (e) continued from FIG. 244 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, an animation is displayed in which the princess character m3 moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed in the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the left character part of the balloon part f2 It is displayed to overlap.

  In (f) of FIG. 244 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 244 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the middle character part of the balloon part f2 of the balloon display f2 It is displayed to be.

  FIG. 244 (g) continued from FIG. 244 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the character part of the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern part of the sunny mark and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap with the character part of the right part and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button advance notice h110 and a part of the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 244 (h) following FIG. 244 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the image of the cloudy mark on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the rain on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f3 It is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the image of the mark and a part of the face image of the brow character.

  In FIG. 244 (i) following FIG. 244 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and is erased so as to come out from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the nephew character. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 245 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 245 (a) shows a state where decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 245 (b) following FIG. 245 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. The frame portion of the balloon display f1 is difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 245 (c) following FIG. 245 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 245 (d) continued from FIG. 245 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

  In FIG. 245 (e) following FIG. 245 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In FIG. 245 (f) following FIG. 245 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and the patterns of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 245 (g) following FIG. 245 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the sunny mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 245 (h) following FIG. 245 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the design of the cloudy mark, and a portion of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

  In FIG. 245 (i) following FIG. 245 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. By the structure 247, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position Alternatively, the balloon display may be configured to move, or may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  246 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 246 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  246 (b) continues from FIG. 246 (a) so that a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the light emission display of the smiling character is performed on the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  246 (c) continues to FIG. 246 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 246 (d) continued from FIG. 246 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button advance display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 246 (e) following FIG. 246 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In (f) of FIG. 246 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 246 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  246 (g) continues to FIG. 246 (f). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the clear mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 246 (h), which is continued from FIG. 246 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 246 (i) following FIG. 246 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, when light emission display is performed by the light emission panel positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG. 247.

  247 (a)-(i) show the example of a presentation which used the balloon display in steps.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 247 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 247 (b) continues from FIG. 247 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 247 (c) continued from FIG. 247 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 247 (d) continued from FIG. 247 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 247 (e) continued from FIG. 247 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the character of the character of the character, part of the character of the character "don", and part of the frame portion of the character balloon display f2. .
In FIG. 247 (f) following FIG. 247 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord character, the whole of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the wolf character It overlaps with part of the image.

  FIG. 247 (g) continued from FIG. 247 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a substantially entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the brow character, and the button preview h110 overlaps with all of the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 247 (h) following FIG. 247 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the first display, the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "hime" There is.

  In FIG. 247 (i) continued from FIG. 247 (h), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the whole character string, the rain mark A part of the pattern of the part, a part of the face image of the princess character, and the whole of the character image of "hime" are overlapped.

  In this example, when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decoration pattern, the fourth pattern, the mini decoration pattern, the notice display, the prefetch notice display, the tutorial display, the pseudo link display, the reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive calls display, number of acquired balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of the light amount adjustment display, the button press display, the error display, the ball removal display, the door open display, and the abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 248 (a) to (h) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Figure 248 (a), in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the special figure 4 fourth pattern aa2, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 248 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 248 (b) following FIG. 248 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1 ', the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the lord character and the face image of the character of the lord character, and the character string and pattern of "simulative chance!" It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern.

  In (c) of FIG. 248 (c) following FIG. 248 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. Shows the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 reserve icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab.

  In FIG. 248 (d) continued from FIG. 248 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 248 (e) following FIG. 248 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 'by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1' moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of キ ャ ラ ク タ, a character string of “hold change” and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In (f) of FIG. 248 (f), which is a continuation of FIG. 248 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is performed, and a movement in which the balloon display f2' appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2' is in the state of being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1' was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 248 (g) following FIG. 248 (f) shows a state in which the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special view 1, 2 suspension icon display area 280ab There is.

  In FIG. 248 (h) continued from FIG. 248 (g), the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 'is replaced with the special view 1 reserve icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special view 1 reserve icon a4. It is done. After this, the balloon display f1 ′, f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation may be performed in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. It is also good.

The effect of the present example is an example in which continuous announcement by the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2' is performed. The balloon display f1 'is used for the advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for the advance notice. Moreover, in this example, the design of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved to be displayed as a hold icon, but the variation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part The notice icon to be used may be moved to the inside of the balloon and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon may be displayed so as to be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 249 (a) to 249 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step. Further, in FIG. 249 to FIG. 251, the sub liquid crystal a 208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b 208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 249 (a) shows the special liquid crystal a 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special pattern 4 aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 249 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 249 (b) following FIG. 249 (a) is a balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) At the same time as a part of f1 is displayed to appear, a balloon comes out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a 208 (a part at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) Another part of the display f1 is displayed to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather is" and a pattern of a sunny mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a character image of the character The character image of “don” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 249 (c) continued from FIG. 249 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the balloon display f1 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously directed upward. A moving animation to move is displayed, and it is shown in a stopped state at the approximate center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a 208 and displayed.

  In FIG. 249 (d) continued from FIG. 249 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 249 (e) continued from FIG. 249 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. While the time limit display h112 is deleted, a part of the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (a portion at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) It is displayed to be. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image and a face of an eyebrow character The character image of “爺” displayed above the face image of the character of “” and a part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 249 (f) continued from FIG. 249 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f1 is moved upward to move animation is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and it is stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  In FIG. 249 (g) continued from FIG. 249 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 and an operation expiration date h112 are displayed at a position where a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 overlap. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 249 (h) continued from FIG. 249 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The time limit display h112 is erased, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b 208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which a character string of "afternoon weather" and a pattern of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess The character image of “Hime” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 249 (i) continued from FIG. 249 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is moved upward, and the moving animation is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the approximate center of the screen.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

In FIG. 250 (a), the special liquid crystal a 208 includes the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 4 symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 250 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.
In FIG. 250 (b), which is continued from FIG. 250 (a), the balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) The f1 is displayed as it appears. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 250 (c), which is continued from FIG. 250 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 250 (d) continued from FIG. 250 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 250 (e) continued from FIG. 250 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 by a wolf character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  In FIG. 250 (f) following FIG. 250 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is on the top The moving animation to move toward is performed, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed in a stopped state substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 subsequent to FIG. 250 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are performed. The button preview display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the overlapping positions, indicating a state in which a preview effect that urges the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 250 (h) continued from FIG. 250 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 already erased is displayed so as to be shrunk in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 250 (i) continued from FIG. 250 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 An animation is performed to move downward, and a balloon display is displayed so as to be stored under the sub liquid crystal b 208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b 208. When the sub liquid crystal b 208 is full of balloon display, it may be deleted from the old balloon display, or a new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. Half balloon display may be erased.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorative It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 251 (a) shows the special liquid crystal a208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 symbol 4 aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 symbol 4 aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 251 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  Figure 251 (b) continues from Figure 251 (a) from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b 208 (the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) A balloon display f1 is displayed to appear. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 251 (c), which follows FIG. 251 (b), shows a state in which a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 251 (d) following FIG. 251 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 251 (e) following FIG. 251 (d), the next change is started, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In (f) of FIG. 251 (f), which is continued to FIG. 251 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is upward Movement animation to move is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 251 (g) continued from FIG. 251 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 251 (h) continued from FIG. 251 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 251 (i), which follows FIG. 251 (h), shows a state in which the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the stop of “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9”. In FIG. 251 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b 208, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. .

  In FIG. 251 (j) following FIG. 251 (i), the next change is started, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon display f1 to f3 in the sub liquid crystal b208 Is taking place continuously.

  In FIG. 251 (k) following FIG. 251 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f6 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 has a character image of "Chibi princess" displayed on the face image of Chibi princess character and Chibi princess character's face image and "Evening weather" and "reach kana?" It is a display including the balloon part where the design of the clear mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice of the reach being performed in the change.

  In FIG. 251 (l) continued from FIG. 251 (k), scroll display of balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, At the stage when the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or ended.

  FIG. 251 (m), which follows FIG. 251 (l), shows a state in which the reach effect of “decor 4” is being performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, this example is an example in which the balloon display is continuously displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.

  FIG. 252 shows two examples of the effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 252 shows an example of a pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 252 (i) to 252 (k) after FIGS. 252 (a) to 252 (h) and FIG. 252 (i ') after FIGS. 252 (a) to 252 (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs rendition of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 252 (a)-(k).

  252 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 252 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  252 (b) continues from FIG. 252 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  252 (c) continues to FIG. 252 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 252 (d) continued from FIG. 252 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 252 (e) continued from FIG. 252 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more same balloon displays may be continuous.

  In FIG. 252 (f) following FIG. 252 (e), a moving animation is performed in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 252 (g) continued from FIG. 252 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of both balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the chance button 136 is imitated at a position overlapping both balloon display f1. The button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 252 (h) continued from FIG. 252 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and it is immediately before the both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a balloon display f1b is displayed from the bottom of the screen so as to appear. In the balloon display f1b, the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character of Tono and the character image of "don" displayed on the image of the character of the character It is a display that includes a balloon part in which a character string and a pattern are displayed that are visible and that are visible and stupid. In addition, the blowout part of the blowout display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 252 (i) continued from FIG. 252 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  252 (j) following FIG. 252 (i) shows the state where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 b is being performed.

  FIG. 252 (k) following FIG. 252 (j) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 2 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 252 (i ')-(l').

  252 (i ') following FIG. 252 (a)-(h) has shown the state in which the scroll display of the blowing part f1 b has stopped temporarily. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 252 (j ') continued from FIG. 252 (i'), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button advance display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date showing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 by a gauge. It shows a state in which h112 is displayed.

  In FIG. 252 (k ') continued from FIG. 252 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon f1b is resumed. Ru.

  252 (l ') following FIG. 252 (k') shows the state where scroll display of the balloon display f1 b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1 b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. In addition, every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, the button advance notice effect may be performed, or the button advance notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the strings of "When all on the person, it looks like a foolish wisdom, and what is below is something that looks like a foolish one." May be scrolled and not all may be scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.
FIGS. 253 (a) to 253 (g) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 253 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 253 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 253 (b) following FIG. 253 (a), two balloon displays f1 are displayed simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  In FIG. 253 (c) continued from FIG. 253 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, balloon displays f2 and f3 are simultaneously displayed from the right end of the screen, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. Also, animations of moving up to the left at the same speed with the upper and lower balloon displays f1 are started.

  In FIG. 253 (d) continued from FIG. 253 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 253 (e), which is continued from FIG. 253 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 253 (f) continued from FIG. 253 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed, and comes out from the left end in the order of appearance It is a state just before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all balloon displays move at the same speed in the same direction is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves at different speeds in different directions may be performed. Further, the balloon display used for the notice of the change and the advance notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice and the advance notice of the change, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  In FIG. 253 (g), which follows FIG. 253 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed, and emerge from the left end in the order of appearance Shows the state after being erased. After this, there may be a case where SP reach effect or all rotation reach effect may be started, or there may be an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 simultaneously started are simultaneously displayed, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may be ended, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may be faster in moving speed than the other. In addition, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are simultaneously displayed, the display may end simultaneously, but one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may have a moving speed faster than the other.

The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 is performed.
Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIG. 254 (a) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 254A is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f2 can not be viewed simultaneously.

  FIG. 254 (b) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 254 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to simultaneously view the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f2.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.

(E1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and for example (for example, FIG. 204) (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 204), and second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 204) In the game console, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 204),
The first movable unit is a unit having the first light emitting unit (for example, see FIG. 204), and the first movable unit is a unit having the second light emitting unit (for example, FIG. 204), in the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)); In the state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)), the light emitting aspect of the first light emitting means is The same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 205 (b) and (d)), and the light emission mode of the second light emission means is the first light The light emission mode is the same in both the state and the second state (for example, FIG. 205 (b), d)), the gaming table characterized by capital.

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (E2) The game console according to e1, wherein the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), in the first state. A game console characterized in that a first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)).

  (E3) The game console according to e1 or e2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 211 (c) )), That is a game stand characterized by.

  (E4) The game console according to any one of e1 to e3, wherein in the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)), A game stand characterized by

  (E5) The game console according to any one of 1 to e4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of transitioning from the initial state to the second state via at least the first state. There is a game console (see, for example, FIGS. 205 (a) to (d)).

  (E6) The game console according to any one of e1 to e5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 204), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third light emitting means. (See, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)); A game stand characterized by

  (E7) The game console according to any one of e1 to e6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 204), In an initial state, the first light emitting unit overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (E8) The game console according to e7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)). Play table.

  (E9) The game console according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)). And, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means which overlaps the cover (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

  (E10) The game console according to any one of e1 to e9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 205 (b)), A game stand characterized by the above.

  (E11) The game console according to any one of e1 to e10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, FIG. 205 (c)). ~ (Refer to (e)), the game stand characterized by the above.

  (E12) The game console according to any one of e1 to e11, comprising a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 204 (b)), the substrate being the first light emission A substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b) ), That the game stand characterized by.

(E13) A game board according to any one of e1 to e12, comprising a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 211).

  (E14) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (E15) The gaming machine according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

  Note that the light emission mode of the first light emission means may be the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission mode of the second light emission means is the first state and the second state. The light emission mode may be the same in both of the two states.

The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

  (F1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and for example (for example, FIG. 204) (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 204), and second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 204) A game console, wherein the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 204), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (See, for example, FIG. 204), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204), and in the first state, the first light emitting means Said second light emitting means In the second state, both of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are the second movable means in the second state, one of which overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)). (See, for example, FIG. 205 (d).) The first light emitting means is a means covered by the first cover (eg, the cover 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)). The second light emitting means is a means to be covered by the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), a game console.

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (F2) The game console according to f1, wherein the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), in the first state. A game console characterized in that a first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)).

  (F3) The game console according to f1 or f2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 211 (c) )), That is a game stand characterized by.

  (F4) The game console according to any one of f1 to f3, wherein in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)), A game stand characterized by

  (F5) The game console according to any one of f1 to f4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of transitioning from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. There is a game console (see, for example, FIGS. 205 (a) to (d)).

  (F6) The game console according to any one of f1 to f5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 204), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third light emitting means. (See, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)); A game stand characterized by

  (F7) The game console according to any one of f1 to f6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 204), In an initial state, the first light emitting unit overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (F8) The game console according to f7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)). Play table.

  (F9) The game console according to any one of f1 to f8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, a cover 90b3) (for example, FIG. b) see, in an initial state, the first light emitting means is a means which overlaps the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

  (F10) The game console according to any one of f1 to f9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 205 (b)), A game stand characterized by the above.

  (F11) The game console according to any one of f1 to f10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, FIG. 205 (c)). ~ (Refer to (e)), the game stand characterized by the above.

  (F12) The game console according to any one of f1 to f11, comprising a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 204 (b)), the substrate being the first light emission A substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b) ), That the game stand characterized by.

  (F13) The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f12, comprising a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 125) having a game nail, wherein the first movable means is behind the gaming board A game console characterized in that it is an operable means (see, for example, FIG. 211).

  (F14) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (F15) The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Note that the light emission mode of the first light emission means may be the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission mode of the second light emission means is the first state and the second state. The light emission mode may be the same in both of the two states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.

The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

  (G1) A game console comprising a first movable means (for example, movable body 1) and a second movable means (for example, movable body 1), wherein the first movable means is a first movable means Means (for example, an operation for moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 201 (c)), and the second movable unit is a second operation (for example, an operation for moving downward). (See, for example, FIG. 202 (c)), the initial position of the second movable unit is positioned behind the initial position of the first movable unit (see, for example, FIG. ), The position of the second movable means having performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means having performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c) ), That the game stand characterized by.

  The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  (G2) The game console according to g1, wherein the moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation is the same as the moving direction of the second movable means in the second operation. (See, for example, FIG. 203 (c)),

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even while the second operation is being performed.

(G3) The game console according to g1 or g2, wherein at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means overlap in the front-rear direction, the second movable means The game console characterized in that the other part of is visible from the front.
It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(G4) The game console according to any one of g1 to g3, further comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the position of the display means is the same as the second operation performed. It is located behind the position of a 2nd movable means (for example, refer FIG. 203 (c)), and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.
It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(G5) The gaming table according to g4, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string of "Please pull a ball") (for example, FIG. 203 (b), at least a portion of the first error indication may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c )), That is a game stand characterized by.
It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(G6) The game console according to g5, wherein the first error display is a display with no ball (see, for example, FIG. 203 (b)).
In some cases, it may be possible to change the appearance of the ball removal display.

  (G7) The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (G8) A gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Note that the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and a component in the front-rear direction or It may be a direction including at least one of the left and right direction component and the up and down direction component.
The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.

-Both the first operation and the second operation may be performed simultaneously, one may be performed and the other may be performed, or only one or the other may be performed.
-Both the first and second movable means may simultaneously return to the initial position after both the first movement and the second movement are performed, and one after the other returns back. It is also good.
-One of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate while the other moves while returning to the initial position.
-The LED of the second movable means may emit light during the first operation, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-The LED of the first movable means may perform the light emission effect during the second operation, and may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even when the first movable means is positioned in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform the light emission effect, and the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means may be performed Good.

  (H1) first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and for example (for example, FIG. 204) (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 204), and second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 204) A game console, wherein the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 204), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (See, for example, FIG. 204), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204), and in the first state, the first light emitting means Said second light emitting means In the second state, both of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are the second movable means in the second state, one of which overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)). In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is a structure (eg, the structure 30a). (See, for example, FIG. 211 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above.

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (H2) The game console according to h1, wherein the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), in the first state. A game console characterized in that a first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)).

  (H3) The game console according to h1 or h2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 211 (c) )), That is a game stand characterized by.

  (H4) The game console according to any one of h1 to h3, wherein in the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)), A game stand characterized by

  (H5) The game console according to any one of h1 to h4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of transitioning from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state. There is a game console (see, for example, FIGS. 205 (a) to (d)).

  (H6) The game console according to any one of h1 to h5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34), The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 204), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third light emitting means. (See, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)); A game stand characterized by

  (H7) The game console according to any one of h1 to h6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 204), In an initial state, the first light emitting unit overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  (H8) The game console according to h7, wherein in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)). Play table.

  (H9) The game console according to any one of h1 to h8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3), and in the initial state, the first movable means A game stand characterized in that light emitting means is means overlapping with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

  (H10) The game console according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 205 (b)), A game stand characterized by the above.

  (H11) The game console according to any one of h1 to h10, wherein the second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (for example, FIG. 205 (c)). ~ (Refer to (e)), the game stand characterized by the above.

(H12) A game console according to any one of h1 to h11, comprising a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 204 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (See, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), A game console characterized by.

  (H13) The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h12, comprising a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 125) having a game nail, wherein the first movable means is behind the gaming board A game console characterized in that it is an operable means (see, for example, FIG. 211).

  (H14) A gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (H15) A gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Note that the light emission mode of the first light emission means may be the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission mode of the second light emission means is the first state and the second state. The light emission mode may be the same in both of the two states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.

The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

  (I1) A game console comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a structure (for example, a structure 247),

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani) at a first position (for example, the lower center of the display area) (for example, see FIG. 213 (c)).

  At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (for example, see FIG. 213), and the first display displayed at the first position is the structure Is a display that may be overlapped with (see, for example, FIG. 213 (c)), and a game console characterized by the above.

  In some cases, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of changing the direction of watching the game stand to play a game, and to improve the player's interest.

  (I2) The game console according to i1, wherein the structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 222), and the first display displayed at the first position is the game console. It is a display which is not overlapped by the structure after the movement of the structure.

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (I3) The game console according to i1 or i2, wherein the display means is a movable display means.

  The game console characterized in that the first display displayed at the first position is a display which is not overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (I4) The game console according to any one of i1 to i3, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, the central portion of the display area). And the first display displayed at the second position is a display which is not overlapped with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 213 (e)).

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  (I5) The game console according to i4, wherein the first display may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (for example, see FIG. 213), A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(I6) The game console according to any one of i1 to i5, wherein
The first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 213), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  The appearance of the advance notice may be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

  (I7) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (I8) The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Note that the first display may be a pre-reading advance notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a change. It may be an icon display, a character display, or an error display.
The first indication displayed in the second position may be overlapped with the structure.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.
The structure may comprise display means, may comprise an LED substrate and may be movable.
The display means may be movable.
The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be performed behind the light emitting display of the light emitting panel.

  (Drawing) · Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it is overlapped to the structure to the second position where it does not overlap · The first time that the notice display is overlapped to the structure from the first position that is not overlapped Example of moving to the first position after moving to the second position-The warning indicator is overlapped to the other structure after moving to the second position not overlapped from the first position overlapped to the structure Move to third position

Example of moving from the fourth position where the preliminary indication is not overlapped to the structure to the first position where it is overlapped After moving to the fifth position where it is not overlapping Example of when the partial indication is always visible Example of moving to the second position where the other notice display is not overlapped is displayed in the first position overlapped to the structure, and the notice display is displayed in the second position, and the other notice display is the first Example of moving to the position of-Moves from the first position where the notice is overlapped to the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the example of the effect display can be seen first-The notice is overlapped to the structure An example of giving a notice of a notice display before it is displayed in the first position, an example of the notice display appearing enlarged and a notice display are displayed at a second position, and the structure is moved or the display means is moved. Advance notice display of the second position is hidden Te Example

  (J1) A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons; One of the icons is a reserved icon, and an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as "first animation" (for example, moving animation of the notice m1)) is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous change) may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the first animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 224), Characterized by the game stand.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2) The game stand according to j1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a change icon.
In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of the hold icon and the change icon.

(J3) The game console according to j1 or j2, wherein the first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 233 (f) and (g)) A game stand characterized by
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

  (J4) The game console according to any one of j1 to j3, wherein the first animation is an animation including movement display of the icon (for example, FIGS. i) See), A game console characterized by You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5) The game console according to any one of j1 to j4, wherein the first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icon (for example, FIG. 224 (f), ( g) see), and a game console characterized by
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.
(J6) The game console according to any one of j1 to j5, wherein

The first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 224 (j) and (k)), a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.
You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7) The game console according to j6, wherein the increase display on one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (see, for example, FIG. 228).
Sometimes you can enjoy the behavior of one icon more.
(J8) The game console according to any one of j1 to j7, wherein

The first effect display is a pseudo continuous change display in the decorative symbol change display (see, for example, FIG. 224 (h)), a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.
(J9) The game console according to any one of j1 to j8, wherein

The first effect display is a reach change display in the decorative symbol change display (see, for example, FIG. 230 (j)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10) The game console according to any one of j1 to j9, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display, .
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J11) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j10, wherein the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 208ab). (See, for example, FIG. 225 (f)), and at least a portion of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, "Preparing") in the icon display area May be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 225 (g)), and a game console characterized by.
In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the display of the icon display area.

(J12) A game console according to any one of j1 to j11, wherein an animation by two or more of the icons (hereinafter referred to as "second animation") is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. There may be a case (see, for example, FIG. 233 (f)), and the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the display of the second animation (eg, FIG. 233 (h) Reference), that the game stand characterized by.
In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons.

  (J13) The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

Note that the icon may move and nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, or a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or the other icons are moved (packed) It may be displayed.
-When the icon is moved to the original icon display area and then displayed again (return display), the increase display may be performed, or may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or other icon displays It may be displayed to dismiss.
-The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, may be erased (destructed), or may be shifted from the fluctuation display to the variable display, or temporarily stop the special symbol in the middle symbol It is also good.
The first effect display may not be performed after the first animation.
A plurality of first animations may be performed during one decorative symbol variation display.
A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon between a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa.
The first animation may be performed more easily in the case of the full hold than in the non-full case, and vice versa.
-A notice may be displayed indicating that the first animation is to be performed.
A count advance notice (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed.
The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the change icon is digested.
The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.
(Drawing)

FIGS. 224 to 233 show examples in which the holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol while the swing symbol of the out-of-the-round symbol fluctuates, and the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuated (simulated).

FIG. 225 is an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on the holding base while the holding icon is moving.
FIG. 226 is an example of returning to the original position when the hold icon behind is moving back while the hold icon is moving.
FIG. 227 is an example of a caste effect that does not develop even if the hold icon is hit.

FIG. 228 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation multiple times in one change.

FIG. 229 is an example in which different pending icons perform the first animation in one change.
FIG. 230 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 231 is an example in which the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 232 is an example in which the same held icon collides with multiple changes and develops into reach.

FIG. 233 shows an example in which a plurality of hold icons simultaneously hit the decorative pattern to reach.

  (K1) A game console comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is a display , The first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, refer to FIG. 235 (f)), one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (See, for example, FIG. 235 (f)), the second balloon display may be started to be displayed while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area (for example, FIG. e) See at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display in some cases (see, for example, FIG. 235 (e)).

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, it is possible to concentrate on the game and improve the player's interest.

  (K2) The game console according to k1, wherein the display means is an animation of movement of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first animation of movement” (for example, animation of movement upward). It is a means that can be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), and after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation is displayed In some cases (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), a game console characterized by the above.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

  (K3) The game console according to k2, wherein the display means is referred to as a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, movement animation moving to the left). And a second balloon display is displayed after the second moving animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 235 (f)), and a game console.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

  (K4) Another moving animation of the first balloon display according to k2 or k3 (hereinafter referred to as "third moving animation" (e.g., moving animation moving to the right)) And the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (b) and (c)), and the first moving animation and the third moving animation The movement direction of one balloon display may be different (see, for example, FIG. 235), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the moving direction different depending on the moving animation.

  (K5) The game console according to any one of k1 to k4, wherein at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, as shown in FIG. 235 (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6) The game console according to any one of k1 to k5, in which at least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display For example, refer to FIG. 235 (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

  (K7) The game console according to any one of k1 to k6, wherein the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the second balloon display is It is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the character of the first balloon display may be the same as the character of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 252 (f) and (g)) , A game stand characterized by.

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(K8) The game console according to any one of k1 to k7, comprising an operation means (for example, chance button 136), wherein the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  (K9) The gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (K10) A gaming machine according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Note that the balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball drop display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).

-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.
(Drawing) FIG. 234 is an example of a conversation notice.

• FIG. 235 shows an example of the conversation notice. The animated feature moves horizontally, and the animation when the new speech bubble appears is vertically moved (the animation of the new speech bubble and the animation of the old speech bubble are simultaneous).
FIG. 236 shows an example of conversation notice. An animation moving sideways, an animation at the time of a new speech balloon appearing is an example of a vertical movement (a variation of timing, an animation of an old speech bubble and an animation of a new speech bubble).

FIG. 237 is an example of the conversation notice. The animation moving sideways, the animation at the time of the new speech balloon appearing is an example of the vertical movement (a variation of timing, an animation of an old speech balloon after an animation of a new speech balloon).

FIG. 238 is an example of the speech advance notice, an example of the vertical movement of the appearing animation, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from the normal half and twice.

FIG. 239 is an example of a conversation announcement, an example in which a lost character comes back, and an example in which the content changes when it returns.

FIG. 240 is an example of a speech notice. An example in which a specific balloon (for example, a balloon with a high degree of expectation) is not deleted.
FIG. 241 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example of the speech balloon overlapping.
FIG. 242 shows an example of a speech notice. An example of an old speech balloon being reduced.

FIG. 243 shows an example of announcing a conversation, an example in which a balloon of the same character continues in sequence, an example in which a balloon is expanded, and an example in which the content of the balloon is out of the balloon.
-Fig. 244 is an example of the speech advance notice-An example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving.

-Fig. 245 is an example of conversation announcement-An example in which the balloon moves with the movable body operating.

-Fig. 246 is an example of conversation announcement-An example in which the balloon moves with the light emission panel in front of the display device emitting light.

FIG. 247 is an example of the speech balloon moving with the first display being displayed.

FIG. 248 is an example of a speech notice. A speech balloon is an example of a prefetch notice (a hold icon is changed to a look-ahead icon).

FIG. 249 is an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the character and the balloon are displayed on different display means.
FIG. 250 shows an example of the speech advance notice and an example in which the balloon moves to another display means.
FIG. 251 is an example of the speech advance notice, and an example in which the balloon is displayed over a plurality of changes.

  (L1) A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is a display , The first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, refer to FIG. 235 (f)), one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (See, for example, FIG. 235 (f)), the second balloon display may be started to be displayed while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area (for example, FIG. e) See, during display of the second balloon display, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (e) and (f)) A game stand characterized by

  By displaying the first balloon display in another display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, the player can easily grasp the relevance of the two balloon displays, so that it is possible to concentrate on the game and make the player's interest It can be improved.

  (L2) The gaming table according to l1, wherein the display means is a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as "first moving animation" (eg, moving animation upward)). It is a means that can be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), and after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation is displayed In some cases (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), a game console characterized by the above.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

  (L3) The game stand according to l1 or l2, wherein the display means is a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, "second movement animation" (e.g., movement animation moving to the left) ) And the second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 235 (f)), and the game is characterized by Stand.

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

  (L4) The game console according to any one of l1 to l3, wherein at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, as shown in FIG. 235 (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5) The game console according to any one of l1 to l4, in which at least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display For example, refer to FIG. 235 (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

  (L6) The game console according to any one of l1 to l5, wherein the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the second balloon display is It is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord), and the character of the first balloon display may be the same as the character of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 252 (f) and (g)) , A game stand characterized by.

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(L7) The game console according to any one of l1 to l6,
When the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is provided and the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, Fig. 235 (d) (see (e)), and a game console characterized by the above.
There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  (L8) The game console according to any one of l1 to l7, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, a balloon display f5) (for example, FIG. 238 (q)), while the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 238 (n)); The width of the first balloon display is the same as the width of the second balloon display, and the width of the first balloon display is different from the width of the third balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 238 (q). ), That the game stand characterized by.

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the width of the balloon display different.

  (L9) The gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  (L10) The gaming machine according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Note that the balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball drop display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.

The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  Each event (each effect) may be performed in series or in parallel.

  Note that each event (each effect) can be a combination of part or all of a certain event (some effect) and part or all of another event (other effect).

Each event (each effect) may be performed in series or in parallel.
Each event (each effect) may only be performed in series.
Each event (each effect) may only be performed in parallel.

  Here, execution in series means that an event (some effect) ends and another event (an other effect) starts, and execution in parallel means an event (or ) And other events (other effects) at the same time, the start timing and end timing of a certain event (some effects), and the start timing of other events (other effects) A combination of the and the end timing is possible as appropriate.

  Also, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or in series only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without being distinguished by state .

  The certain state may be a state in which transition is made by a player operation, or a state in which transition is made without a player operation (for example, transition is made without a player operation after a player operation If you do, it may be the final trigger or the first trigger.)

  Here, "to shift without using the player's operation" may shift based on a lottery, or may be shifted to correspond to the control state, or a combination of both. It may be

  Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the player's advantage, or may be a lottery not related to the player.

  Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the degree of advantage for the player, or a state not related to the degree of advantage for the player (for example, control state 1 and control state 2) And the degree of advantage to the player may or may not be different.

  Specifically describing the state in which the degree of advantage for the player is different, if there is a difference between the control state 1 and the control state 2 that the user is staying in the control state N, then the user is in fact staying. There are cases where the degree of advantage does not differ, and there may be differences in the degree of advantage in the state after the stay, which may be either.

  The image used in the description of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation, and of course, it may be another image, for example, an image of a tombstone (male character) It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character).

  In addition, even if the image for explaining a certain effect and the image for explaining another effect are the same image, the image for explaining another effect is replaced with another image, and Other renditions can also be performed in parallel and / or in series.

  In addition, in the case where an image for explaining a certain effect and an image for explaining another effect are the same image, it is possible to carry out alternatively instead of enabling parallel and / or serial execution. It is also good.

  In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super reach effect production) and the place is the same (for example, both the hold display areas).

  Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, it may be performed in series in the first half and the second half of the super reach, or even in the same place, it may be parallel in different places. You may run in series or in the first half of the Super Reach in the same place.

  Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (representation means). A certain means (rendering means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (plurality devices). Each event (each effect) performed in each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed in one device (an effect device). Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices). As devices (rendering devices), display devices such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, movable objects 700, 702, etc. The movable body of

  In addition, there may be a case where one device (rendering device) is described as an example for each event (each effect). For example, in the case of notification, it is applied to another device (rendering device) capable of notifying Is possible. Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices). Moreover, when it is configured to be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices), a part or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices). Each configuration in each event (each effect) may be merely illustrated, and even if only one of the events (each effect) has a configuration, the other may have its configuration. Or the combination may be possible, or the combination may be possible after deleting a configuration provided only on one side. Also, the combination may be denied depending on the difference in configuration.

  FIGS. 255 to 270 are diagrams showing in stages the change effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 is an example of effect to be executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect example shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 is shown in the other drawings. Various effects are also feasible. Furthermore, in FIGS. 255 to 270, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N may be used, and in this case, the second The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Also, in FIG. 255 to FIG. 270, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed.

  Reference numerals shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 indicate common components when the same reference numerals as those used heretofore are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In addition, although the description in FIGS. 255-270 is applicable to any presentation example of this specification, the application to the presentation example described using FIGS. 14-158 is preferable.

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing some examples in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 255 (A1) to FIG. 255 (A8), first, in FIG. 255 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost (“decorative 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is displayed stopped. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A1), the second decorative symbol of a size smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In the example of effect, for the sake of describing the position of the icon display area HN1 for the sake of convenience, it is surrounded by a broken line, but in actuality, it is not visible. Also, in the icon display area HN1, the variation icon is an area where the standby animation can be executed, and the same applies to the icon display area HN1 in FIGS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 255 (A1), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 4, and the first reservation icon h11, the second reservation icon h12, the third reservation icon h13, and the fourth reservation icon h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. ing. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of all the hold icons is displayed in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A1), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that

  Further, FIG. 255 (A1) shows a state in which the combination is displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2"), and the fluctuation icon is deleted.

In FIG. 255 (A2), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01, the display mode is default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported.
In FIG. 255 (A3), a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears from the center upper end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state of falling in the vertical direction is shown . The second variation icon h02 in this example of presentation has the same size as the first variation icon h01, but is different in color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 255 (A4) to FIG. (A6), the second variation icon h02 continues to fall and is shown to overlap with a part of the first variation icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (A6), when all of the second change icon H02 overlaps with all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 255 (A7), the first change icon h01 is erased. The second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode).

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 255 (A3) and may end immediately before FIG. (A7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (A6). In addition, during the display of the icon change animation, the first decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display may be performed only in the second decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display is performed only in the first decorative symbol. May be performed. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be all of the period during the display of the icon change animation, or may be a partial period.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of the big hit in the change display of the decoration symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is fixed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is changed to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8) and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown in FIG. 255 (A1) to FIG. (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the example shown in FIG. 255 (A1) to FIG. Is true. In the example shown in FIG. 255 (B1) to FIG. (B8), FIGS. (B1) to (B4) are the same as FIG. 255 (A1) to FIG. (A4) described above, It is shown that the second variation icon h02 falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 255 (B5), after all of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with all of the first fluctuation icon 01, the falling in the vertical direction is further performed without staying in the icon display area HN1, and the display screen It is shown how to start the frame out from the lower end of. Thereafter, FIGS. 255 (B6) to (B7) show that the second change icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the change icon is not changed. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIG. 255 (C1) to FIG. (C8), first, in FIG. 255 (C1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration" 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is displayed stopped. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C1), the second decorative symbol of a size smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C1). The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In the example of effect, for the sake of describing the position of the icon display area HN1 for the sake of convenience, it is surrounded by a broken line, but in actuality, it is not visible. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 255 (C1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4, and the first reservation icon h11, second reservation icon h12, third reservation icon h13, and fourth reservation icon h14 of Special Figure 1 are displayed. ing. In this presentation example, only the second hold icon h12 of the four hold icons is displayed in blue, and the display mode of the prefetch notice is displayed, but all the other hold icons are displayed as default (white) It is an aspect. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C1), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that

  Furthermore, FIG. 255 (C1) is a state in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2"), and the fluctuation icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 255 (C2), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In this presentation example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, but the other hold icons h12 and h13 and the first variation icon h01 are the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported.

  In FIG. 255 (C3), a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears from the center upper end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state of falling in the vertical direction is shown . The second variation icon h02 in this presentation example has a size larger than that of the first variation icon h01, is different in color, and is a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 255 (C4) to FIG. (C6), the second variation icon h02 is continuously dropped and is shown to overlap with a part of the first variation icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (C6), when a part of the second change icon H02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 255 (C7), the second change icon h02 is reduced. The first change icon h01 is displayed in the same size as the first change icon h01, the first change icon h01 is erased, and the second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1. A state of changing to (display mode of blue) is shown. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 255 (C6), the second change icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps with the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, in this effect example, the second change icon h02 may overlap the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the advance notice, and the second change icon h02 may overlap the advance notice.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 255 (C3) and may end immediately before FIG. (C7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (C6).

  Due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this effect example, the hold change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is finalized, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be finalized and displayed. It is also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIG. 255 (C1) to FIG. (C8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is the Ath color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the example shown in FIG. 255 (D1) to FIG. (D8) will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in FIG. 255 (C1) to FIG. There is. In the effect examples shown in FIG. 255 (C1) to (C8), a part of the hold icons is set as the advance notice mode, but in the effect examples shown in FIG. 255 (D1) to (D8) , All pending icons are the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 255 (D1) to FIG. (D8), the same diagrams (D1) to (D4) are the same as FIG. 255 (C1) to FIG. (C4) described above, A state is shown in which the second fluctuation icon h02, which is larger than the first fluctuation icon h01, falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 255 (D5), after a part of the second change icon h02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, the second change icon h02 is displayed in the vertical direction without animation being displayed in a reduced size. Dropping is further performed, and it is illustrated that frame-out is started from the lower end of the display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 255 (D6) to (D7), the second variation icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variation icon is not changed. There is. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. In addition, after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, an animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is reduced and displayed is performed, and thereafter, the second fluctuation icon h02 is the lower end of the display screen You may frame it out. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 255 are examples for the variation icon, but may be performed for the suspension icon.

  In addition, as the aspect of the second variation icon h02, blue has been described as an example, but other colors such as green and red may be used, or other patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes showing the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or no pattern aspect (A aspect), a blue or diagonal aspect (B aspect), a green or diamond aspect (C aspect), red or The lattice pattern aspect (D aspect) and the golden color and vertical line pattern aspect (E aspect) become higher in order, and the rainbow color and horizontal line aspect aspect (F aspect) become the highest aspect . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the fluctuating icon and the hold icon, but each mode is not limited to the mode described using FIG. That is, white in the example described using FIG. 255 may be replaced with blue. For example, the first variation icon h01, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the first variation icon h01, which is a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 255 may be replaced with white or green. In addition, when the aspect is roughly divided, the aspect (the C aspect) of the green or diamond pattern, the following aspects (the first group which is the group of the A aspect, the B aspect, the C aspect), the red color and the Lattice Pattern Aspect (D Aspect) The above aspect (D aspect, E aspect, F group second group) can be divided. Here, the aspect belonging to the first group can not be changed to the aspect belonging to the second group, and the aspect belonging to the second group can not be altered to the aspect belonging to the first group. On the other hand, while exchanging of the aspect in a 1st group is enabled, the exchange of an aspect in a 2nd group may also be enabled. Furthermore, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be represented by the difference in size and number. In addition, the player's advantage is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state or / and a short time state), that a premier effect is likely to be started, or a big hit finalization effect is started. It may be easy. In addition, it is also included that it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear. Matters relating to the aspect described in this paragraph are the same as in the previous examples and the subsequent examples.

  Furthermore, the aspect of each icon may be the aspect of the entire icon (entire area) or the aspect of only a part of the icon (partial area).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 255, the normal advance notice by the change icon whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice. In addition, even when the on-hold change effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon fails, it may be a big hit, or may be always off.

  FIG. 256 shows several other examples in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is. In addition, the effect example shown in FIG. 256 (A1) to the figure (A8), the effect example shown in FIG. 256 (B1) to the figure (B8), the effect example shown in FIG. 256 (C1) to the figure (C8) In the effect example shown in FIGS. 256 (D1) to (D8), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player can see the icon display area. HN2 is made visible. An example of effect shown in FIG. 256 (A1) to FIG. (A8), an example of effect shown in FIG. 256 (B1) to FIG. 256 (B8), an example of effect shown in FIG. 256 (C1) to FIG. The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the effect examples shown in (A1) to (A8) of FIG. 255, except for the aspect of the icon display area. The effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIG. 255 (C1) to FIG. (C8), and the effect example shown in FIG. 255 (D1) to FIG. (D8) are respectively the same. Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 256 (D5), when the on-hold change effect fails, the second change icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram showing another example in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed.

  First, an example of effects shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to FIG. 257 (A8) will be described. It is to be noted that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A2) are the same as FIG. 255 (A1) except that the navigation character YM of the display mode in which the blue kimono is worn is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is the same as the effect shown in). Here, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to FIG. 257 (A2) is displayed in a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn. That is, at least a part is displayed in blue. In other words, all may be displayed in blue, or only a portion (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later. The navigation character YM is displayed in an initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 257 (A3), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls the sword and shakes it. Change to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears above the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation showing a situation of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variation icon h02 in this example of presentation has the same size as the first variation icon h01, but is different in color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 257 (A4) to (A6), the second change icon h02 continues to move to the icon display area HN1, and overlaps with a part of the first change icon h01. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (A6), when all of the second change icon H02 overlaps with all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 257 (A7), the first change icon h01 is erased. The second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, it is shown that the first variation icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variation icon h02 which is the same display mode (display mode in blue) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the change icon after change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 257 (A3) and may end immediately before FIG. 257 (A7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (A6).

  Due to the change in the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (A8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is set to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the examples shown in FIG. 257 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on differences from the examples shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to (A8) and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to FIG. 257 (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the example shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to FIG. Is true. In the example shown in FIG. 257 (B1) to FIG. (B8), FIGS. (B1) to (B4) are the same as FIG. 257 (A1) to FIG. (A4) described above, It is shown that the second variation icon h02 moves to the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 257 (B5), after all of the second variation icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variation icon h01, the second variation icon h02 drops downward without staying in the icon display area HN1, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen It is shown how to start the Thereafter, FIGS. 257 (B6) to (B7) show that the second change icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the change icon is not changed. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.
Next, an example of effects shown in FIG. 257 (C1) to FIG. 257 (C8) will be described. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 257 (C1) to (C2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to (A2), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 257 (C3), the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts an icon change animation, turns to the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls the sword and shakes it. Change to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears above the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation showing a situation of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variation icon h02 in this presentation example has a size larger than that of the first variation icon h01, is also different in color, and is a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 257 (C4) to (C6), when a part of the second change icon h02 overlaps with the entire first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 257 (C7), The second variation icon h02 is reduced and displayed to be the same size as the first variation icon h01, the first variation icon h01 is erased, the second variation icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variation icon is default A state of changing from the display mode of (1) to the advance display mode (display mode of blue) is shown. That is, it is shown that the first variation icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variation icon h02 which is the same display mode (display mode in blue) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the change icon after change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 257 (C6), the second change icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the notice may be overlapped with the second variation icon h02.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 257 (C3) and may end immediately before FIG. 257 (C7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (C6).

  Due to the change in the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decoration symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (C8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this effect example, the hold change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is finalized, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be finalized and displayed. It is also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 257 (C1) to (C8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is set to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the examples shown in FIG. 257 (D1) to (D8) will be described focusing on differences from the examples shown in FIG. 257 (C1) to (C8) and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 257 (D1) to FIG. (D8), the same diagrams (D1) to (D4) are the same as FIG. 257 (C1) to FIG. (C4) described above, A state is shown in which a second change icon h02 larger in size than the first change icon h01 moves toward the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 257 (D5), after a part of the second change icon h02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, the second change icon h02 drops downward without an animation in which a reduction display is performed. , Starting frame out from the lower end of the display screen is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 257 (D6) to (D7), the second variation icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variation icon is not changed. There is. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. In addition, after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, an animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is reduced and displayed is performed, and thereafter, the second fluctuation icon h02 is the lower end of the display screen You may frame it out. Moreover, in this example of presentation, after the second fluctuation icon h02 is out of frame, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 257 are examples for the change icon, but may be performed for the hold icon.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 257, the normal advance notice by the change icon whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but it may be a big hit and may be a true advance notice. In addition, even when the on-hold change effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon fails, it may be a big hit, or may be always off.

  FIG. 258 shows several other examples in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 258 (A1) to (A8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 258 (B1) to (B8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 258 (C1) to (C8), and In the effect example shown in FIG. 258 (D1) to FIG. (D8), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player can see the icon display area. HN2 is made visible. The effect example shown in FIG. 258 (A1) to the same figure (A8), the effect example shown in FIG. 258 (B1) to the same figure (B8), the effect example shown in FIG. 258 (C1) to the same figure (C8) The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the effect examples shown in (A1) to (A8) of FIG. 257 (A1) to (A8) except for the aspect of the icon display area. The effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIG. 257 (C1) to FIG. (C8), and the effect example shown in FIG. 257 (D1) to FIG. . Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 258 (D5), when the on-hold change effect fails, the second change icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

In FIG. 259 (A1) to (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 259 (A1) to FIG. 2 (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 255 (A1) to FIG.
In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A3), the frame change animation is started, and the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. ing. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while performing the reduction display gradually as shown in FIG. 259 (A3) to FIG. 2 (A5). In this production example, while the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased, and the variable display is performed only in the second decorative symbol, but the second decorative symbol is erased and the first ornament is displayed. The variable display may be performed only on the symbol. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be all of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed, or may be a partial period. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variation icon h01, the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. The copy fluctuation icon h01 ′ may or may not execute the standby animation in the fluctuation icon display area HN1. In addition, the first change icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation in at least a part of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed. In addition, the first change icon h01 may or may not perform the standby animation in at least a part of a period during which the reduced display after the frame change animation is performed is displayed. The same applies to during and after the frame change animation in FIGS.

  When the reduction display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 259 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A7), a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (second fluctuation icon h02) and the three holding icons (holding icons h21, h22, h23). However, the second frame image FL2 includes a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1, and the display mode is also a blue display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 259 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen Do. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. In addition, the second variation icon h02 may or may not perform the standby animation in at least a part of the displayed period of the reduced display. In addition, the variation icons of both or one of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 may or may not perform standby animation. The same applies to the display of the reduced display in FIGS.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 259 (A11) to (A12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out of the screen.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A13), enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 259 (A13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 ′ and the copy suspension icons h11 ′, h12 ′ and h13 ′ overlap the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second The change icon h02 is changed to indicate that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the on-hold change advance notice has succeeded by switching the frame image.

  Due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A16) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. Further, in this example, the first frame image FL1 is moved in parallel to move out of the frame, and the second frame image FL2 is moved in parallel to move in the frame. While rotating in the direction (which may be the right direction), the first frame image FL1 rotates in the left direction and disappears in the left depth direction, and the second frame image FL2 appears in the right depth direction and is left direction It may be a display of an aspect of rotating to. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIGS. 259 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 259 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this presentation example, after the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are displayed side by side in FIG. 259 (B9), they move to the left direction of the display screen respectively, but FIG. 259 (B9) to FIG. As shown in B10), the third frame image FL3 different from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 is framed in from the right side of the display screen so as to be adjacent to the right side of the second frame image FL2. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the third frame image FL3 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (third fluctuation icon h03) and the three holding icons (holding icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes the third change icon h03 different from the first change icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and the second change icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2. The display mode is the same as the default display mode as the first variation icon h01. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h31, h32 and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 259 (B10) to (B12), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the third frame image FL3 is a display screen Move towards the center of the At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, and a period in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed is generated. In addition, the third change icon h03 may or may not perform the standby animation in at least a part of the displayed period of the reduced display. In addition, the variation icon of both or one of the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 may or may not perform standby animation. The same applies to the display of the reduced display in FIGS.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 259 (B11) to (B12), while the movement of the third frame image FL3 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 continue to the left. Move in the direction and frame out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (B13), enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 259 (B13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 ′ and the copy suspension icons h11 ′, h12 ′ and h13 ′ are overlapped with the third frame image FL3 and difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (B15), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is the first fluctuation icon h01 to the third fluctuation icon h01. It changes to the change icon h03, and it is shown that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the third variation icon h03 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 260 (A1) to (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 260A1 to 260A, the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 259A1 to 16A16 and the first frame image FL1 are displayed in a reduced size. It is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to (A16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 260 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. The effect examples shown in FIG. 260 (B1) to FIG. 260 (B16) are the holding example when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIG. 259 (B1) to FIG. This is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 259 (B1) to FIG. (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIGS. 261A1 to A16, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In the effect example shown in FIG. 261 (A1) to FIG. (A16), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player is an icon The display area HN2 is made visible. The effect examples shown in FIG. 261 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIG. 259 (A1) to (A16) except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

  In FIG. 261 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In the effect example shown in FIG. 261 (B1) to FIG. (B16), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player is an icon The display area HN2 is made visible. The effect examples shown in FIG. 261 (B1) to (B16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIG. 259 (B1) to (B16) except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

  In FIG. 262 (A1) to FIG. (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 262 (A1) to FIG. 262 (A16) are the holding example when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIG. 261 (A1) to FIG. This is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 261 (A1) to FIG. (A16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 262 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 262 (B1) to FIG. (B16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIG. 261 (B1) to FIG. This is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 261 (B1) to FIG. (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 263 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. The effects shown in FIG. 263 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A2) are the same except that the display mode of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is a display mode wearing a white kimono Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 257 (A1) to FIG. 257 (A2), the description is omitted. In addition, the navigation character YM of the display mode which wore a white kimono is a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being displayed by being gradually reduced as shown in FIG. 263 (A3) to FIG. 26 (A5). In the first frame image FL1, besides the first variation icon h01, the navigation character YM and the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduction display of the first frame image FL1. Be done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. In addition, a copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 263 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A7), the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a holding frame UI that includes a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23) and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similarly to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 is the default display mode (wearing a white kimono), but even the display mode wearing a blue kimono Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 263 (A7) to FIG. 26 (A9), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 both move in the left direction. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 263 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, the navigation included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture is performed. The navigation character YM included in the character YM and the second frame image FL2 starts an icon change animation, turns to the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02, changes to a pose in which the sword is removed and swung Do. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM, and at least a portion of the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and at least a portion of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 The first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02, which are covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image respectively, are less visible than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that only part of the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02, which are default (white) display modes until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, are the same display modes as the kimono of the navigation character YM. Is changing to the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 is the display mode of the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 after the change. It is something to suggest (preliminary).

  When the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed after the effect image Eh0 is deleted, as shown in FIG. 263 (A9) to FIG. 26 (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resumes moving to the left. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 263 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 263 (A11) to FIG. 26 (A12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out of the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A13), enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 263 (A13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 ′ and the copy suspension icons h11 ′, h12 ′ and h13 ′ overlap the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second The change icon h02 is changed to indicate that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the on-hold change advance notice has succeeded by switching the frame image.

  Due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A16) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 263 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 263 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A9), the description will be omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 263 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the first change icon h01 Although the second variation icon h02 appears, neither the first variation icon h01 nor the second variation icon h02 has changed from the display mode of the default (white). That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, when the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 263 (B9) to FIG. 26 (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 turn to the left. Resume the movement of Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 263 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 263 (B11) to (B12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out of the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (B13), enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 263 (B13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 ′ and the copy suspension icons h11 ′, h12 ′ and h13 ′ overlap the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (B15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second It changes to the change icon h02, and it is shown that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the second variation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 264 (A1) to FIG. (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 264 (A1) to (A16), the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 263 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is displayed in a reduced size. It is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 263 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 264 (B1) to FIG. (B16), both the first variation icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variation icon h02 displayed separately from the first variation icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 264 (B1) to (B16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 (B1) to (B16). It is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 263 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 265 (A1) to FIG. (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 265 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A8), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture. Of the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 start the icon change animation and turn to the second variation icon h02, It changes to the pose which is thrown out and waved. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. Then, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, The fluctuation icon h02 is more difficult to view than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that only part of the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. Thereafter, the second variation icon h02, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same as the kimono of the navigation character YM in the blue display mode It is changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variation icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

  When the second variation icon h02 is displayed after the effect image Eh0 is erased, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are directed leftward, as shown in FIG. 265 (A9) to FIG. (A10). Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 265 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. Thereafter, effects shown in FIG. 265 (A11) to FIG. 265 (A16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 265 (A11) to FIG. 26 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (A11) to FIG.

  In FIG. 265 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 265 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B8), the description will be omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 265 (B9), an icon change animation is performed by the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 is not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 265 (B9) to FIG. (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume the movement in the left direction. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 265 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 265 (B11) to FIG. 265 (B16) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 265 (B11) to FIG. 26 (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (B11) to FIG. 26 (B16), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 266 (A1) to FIG. (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 266 (A1) to (A16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 265 (A1) to (A16). It is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 265 (A1) to FIG. (A16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 266 (B1) to FIG. (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 266 (B1) to (B16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 265 (B1) to (B16). It is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 265 (B1) to FIG. (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 267 (A1) to (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 267 (A1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A2), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the moving animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01, the display mode is default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A2), the characters “attention!” Are displayed on the timer notice display TM, and notice that the timer display countdown is started is notified. In addition, the timer notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern in the variable display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while performing the reduction display gradually as shown in FIG. 267 (A3) to FIG. 267 (A5). In the first frame image FL1, besides the first variation icon h01, the navigation character YM and the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduction display of the first frame image FL1. Be done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. In addition, a copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 267 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM, and it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, it is presented that a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A4), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM is “39.99”, and the timer display is continuously counted down. In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1.

  When the reduction display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 267 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A7), the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a holding frame UI that includes a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23) and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similarly to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. At this time, the first change icon h01 and the hold icons h11 to h13 included in the first frame image FL1 are overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and are viewed more visually than when the timer notice display TM is not displayed. It is considered difficult. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 267 (A7) to (A9), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 both move in the left direction. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture. Of the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 start the icon change animation and turn to the second variation icon h02, It changes to the pose which is thrown out and waved. On the other hand, although the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and is difficult to visually recognize, the icon change animation is not started with the initial posture. Then, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, The fluctuation icon h02 is more difficult to view than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that only part of the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. Thereafter, the second variation icon h02, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same as the kimono of the navigation character YM in the blue display mode It is changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variation icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

  When the second variation icon h02 is displayed after the effect image Eh0 is erased, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are directed to the left as shown in FIG. 267 (A9) to (A10). Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 267 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. In addition, when the second frame image FL2 moves in the left direction, the second frame image FL2 is displayed so as to be overlapped on the timer notice display TM, which is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped on the timer notice display TM. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A10), the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the timer notice display TM, and it is determined that visual recognition is difficult. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "35.00". Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 267 (A11) to FIG. 267 (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 267 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIG. 263 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed across the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo connected effect starts . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "32.00".

  In FIG. 267 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 267 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 is not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 267 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume moving in the left direction. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 267 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 267 (B11) to FIG. 267 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 267 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (B11) to (B16) except that the timer display is counted down in the timer advance notice display TM. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 268 (A1) to (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 268 (A1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 263 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A2), the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01, the display mode is default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A2), the characters “attention!” Are displayed on the timer notice display TM, and notice that the countdown of the timer display is started is notified. In addition, the timer notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern in the variable display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually shrunk and displayed. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being displayed by being gradually reduced as shown in FIG. 268 (A3) to FIG. 268 (A5). In the first frame image FL1, besides the first variation icon h01, the navigation character YM and the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduction display of the first frame image FL1. Be done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. In addition, a copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 268 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer advance display TM, and it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, it is presented that a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A4), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM is "39.99", and the timer display is continuously counted down. In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A4) to FIG. 268 (A5), a state is shown in which the navigation character YM is overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM.

  When the reduction display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 268 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A7), the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a holding frame UI that includes a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23) and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similarly to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Note that the second fluctuation icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are overlapped on the timer notice display TM, and are considered to be more difficult to see than when the timer notice display TM is not displayed. ing. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 268 (A7) to FIG. 268 (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move in the left direction. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture. Among the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts icon change animation, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM. The situation is considered to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. In this effect example, although the icon change animation overlapped in the timer notice display TM and performed in the second frame image FL2 is not visible, when the icon change animation is completed, the display mode is the default (white). The second variation icon h02 changes to a blue display mode which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 268 (A9) to FIG. 268 (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume moving to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (A10), the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are made visible. Although the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, it is overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM and can not be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIG. 268 (A11) to the same figure (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 268 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed across the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo connected effect starts . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "32.00".

  In FIG. 268 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 268 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 268 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 268 (B9) in this presentation example, the icon change animation is performed in the second frame image FL2, and it is overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and the appearance thereof can not be visually recognized, but the second variation The icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 268 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume the movement in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (B10), the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are made visible. Although the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, it is overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM and can not be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (B10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "35.00". Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 268 (B11) to FIG. (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 268 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIG. 263 (B11) to (B16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed across the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo connected effect starts . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (B16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "32.00".

  FIG. 269 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. . The effects shown in FIGS. 269 (A1) to (A12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 260 (A1) to (A12), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 269 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A13) is different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the third frame image FL3 is moved in to the position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similarly to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL2 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (third fluctuation icon h03) and the three holding icons (holding icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes the third variation icon h03 different from the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2, and the display mode is also a red display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the reserve icons h31, h32, h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 It has become. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving in the left direction, and as shown in FIG. 269 (A14) to FIG. (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period occurs in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 269 (A15) to (A16), when the third frame image FL3 reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is stopped and displayed, and only the second frame image FL2 is left Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A18), enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 269 (A18) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is the first fluctuation icon h01 to the third fluctuation icon h01. The change icon h03 is changed to indicate that the change icon is changed from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (red display mode). That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the on-hold change advance notice has succeeded by switching the frame image.

  Due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A21) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) in which the display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  FIG. 270 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. . In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 270 (A1) to FIG. 270 (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 260 (A1) to FIG.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed and the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction as shown in FIG. 270 (A6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A7) It is shown that a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. The second frame image FL2 in this presentation example includes the display of the holding frame UI including the variation icon (the second variation icon h02) and the three holding icons (the holding icons h21, h22 and h23). Each of the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the frame image FL2 has a default display mode as in the first frame image FL1. On the other hand, in the second frame image FL2 in this presentation example, the background color is not the default background color (for example, white) as in the first frame image FL1, but is the background color for notice (for example, blue), It functions as a big hit notice. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the announcement presentation is performed by changing the elements other than the fluctuation icon. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 270 (A7) to FIG. (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen Do. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 270 (A11) to (A12), when the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, only the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A13), a third frame image different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the frame FL3 is moved in and is moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similar to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL3 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (third fluctuation icon h03) and the three holding icons (holding icons h31, h32, h33). The third variation icon h03 and the hold icons h31, h32 and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all in the default display mode. On the other hand, the third frame image FL3 in this example of presentation has a background color different from that of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, and is a red background color. The red background color in the third frame image FL3 is the background color of the advance notice, and is the background color that is more highly hit-hit than the blue background color. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the announcement presentation is performed by changing the elements other than the fluctuation icon. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving in the left direction, and as shown in FIG. 270 (A14) to FIG. (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period occurs in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 270 (A15) to (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is left Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 270 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A18), enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 270 (A18) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is the first fluctuation icon h01 to the third fluctuation icon h01. The state of changing to the fluctuation icon h03 is shown. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the background color is changed by the switching of the frame image, and thereby the advance notice is performed. In this example of presentation, the advance notice is given by changing the display mode other than the change icon, but the display mode of the change icon may be changed.

In this presentation example, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given by the change of the background color, but the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 270 (A21) In the device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) is erased. In the case where the background color is changed, when the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon may be erased and the background color may be returned to the default display mode. In the example of the effect, the background color is changed and the combination of the lost design symbols is determined and displayed. However, the combination of the big hit decoration symbols may be determined and displayed.
In the above description, the game console is provided with “display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”.

  The display means can display an icon (hereinafter referred to as "a variation icon [eg, a first variation icon h01, a second variation icon h02, etc. shown in FIG. 255 (A3)]) related to symbol variation display being executed. It is a means,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in a display area [for example, the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 255 (A3)] in the display area of the display means [for example, FIG. As shown in (A3), the first change icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],

  The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),

  One of the two change icons is a first change icon [eg, the first change icon h01 shown in FIG. 255 (A3)],

  One of the two change icons is a second change icon [eg, the second change icon h02 shown in FIG. 255 (A3)],

  The second change icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 255 (A3), the second change icon h02 is in an area other than the icon display area HN1. It is displayed, etc.], and the game stand characterized by the above. It explained about.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may make a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variation icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variation icon. Further, the display means may display the fluctuation icon without fail or may not display the fluctuation icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change icon in a display area of the display areas of the display means, and the display means may be other than the change icon in a display area of the display areas. May also be displayable. In addition, the display means may always display the fluctuation icon in a display area of the display areas of the display means, or display the fluctuation icon in a display area of the display area in the display means. It may not be possible.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying the fluctuation icon only in a certain display area of the display areas in the display means, or a display area other than a certain display area in the display areas in the display means Also, it may be capable of displaying a fluctuation icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only two variation icons, or may be capable of displaying other than two variation icons. Further, the display means may always display two change icons, or may not display two change icons.
Further, the display means may be capable of displaying three or more change icons.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first variation icon and the second variation icon, or may be capable of displaying variation icons other than the first variation icon and the second variation icon. It may be In addition, the display means may always display the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon, and may not display the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon. It is also good.

In addition, the second variation icon may be able to be displayed only in a display area other than a certain display area, or can be displayed in a display area other than a display area other than a certain display area. It may be Also, the second variation icon may be necessarily displayed in a display area other than a certain display area, or may not be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area. It may be.
Also, the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area.

  In addition, “an animation in which the second fluctuation icon moves during a period in which the first fluctuation icon is displayed (hereinafter,“ second movement animation [for example, FIG. 255 (A3) to FIG. The icon change animation shown and the moving display etc. of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 260 (A7) to FIG. 260 (A15) may be displayed. Game console. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the movement animation of the second fluctuation icon can make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and in some cases, the expectation to the big hit can be improved.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Also, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  In addition, there may be a case where the second variation icon is displayed in the certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [eg, FIG. (A3) The second change icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1 after the icon change animation shown in (A3) to (A6) is displayed, etc.]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the second variation icon in a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variation icon, and it may be possible to further improve the expectation for a big hit.

  Here, after the second moving animation is displayed, the second variation icon may be displayed only in a certain display area, or after the second moving animation is displayed, the second variation is displayed. The icon may be displayed on a display area other than a certain display area. In addition, after the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon may be displayed in a certain display area, or after the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon is displayed. It may not be displayed in the area.

  In addition, after the second moving animation is displayed, only the second changing icon may be displayed in a display area, or after the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon may be displayed. Other variation icons may be displayed in a display area.

  In addition, the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area only after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. The variation icon of may be displayed in a display area.

  Also, in the first case, the size of the second variation icon displayed in the certain display area is displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. The size of the second change icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 255 (C3) to (C6) is different from the size of the change icon. For example, the second change icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 Larger than the size of, etc.], that the game stand characterized by. I also explained about.

According to this game stand, by varying the size of the second variation icon, it is possible to make various effects by the variation icon, and it may be possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the big hit.
Note that the size of the second change icon displayed in a certain display area may be smaller than the size of the second change icon displayed in the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, It may be large.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of a period during which the second movement animation is displayed [eg, FIG. As shown in FIG. (A6), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first change icon h01 during display of the icon change animation, and so on]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, when the fluctuation icons overlap, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may make a big hit.

  Here, the second variation icon may overlap only with the first variation icon during at least a part of the period during which the second variation animation is displayed, and the second variation animation is displayed. The second variation icon may also overlap other than the first variation icon during at least a portion of the period being performed. Also, the second variation icon may always overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the period during which the second movement animation is displayed The second variation icon may not overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period of.

  In addition, only the second change icon may overlap the first change icon during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation is displayed. During at least a part of the period, a variation icon other than the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon.

  In addition, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon only during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation may be displayed. The second change icon may overlap the first change icon also in a period other than at least a part of the period.

  Note that the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon during part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during the entire period of the period.

  In addition, the second change icon may overlap with the advance notice during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 255 (C6), The second variation icon h02 is overlapped with the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice etc. during the display of the change animation, etc.]. I also explained about.

  According to this game console, when the second change icon and the advance notice display overlap, the effect by the change icon can be made colorful, and it may be expected that the change may be a big hit.

  Here, the second variation icon may overlap only with the advance notice display in at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variation icon may also overlap the display other than the advance notice display in at least a part of the period. In addition, the second variation icon may always overlap with the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second change icon does not overlap with the advance notice during the period.

  In addition, only the second change icon may overlap with the notice display in at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where a change icon other than the second change icon may overlap with the notice display in a certain period.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap with the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the advance notice also in a period other than a partial period.

  Note that the second change icon may overlap with the advance notice in a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the entire period during which the second animation is displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the advance notice.

  In addition, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed [eg, FIG. And the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first change icon h01 in the display mode of the preview notice while displaying the icon change animation, etc.], Game console. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, when the second fluctuation icon overlaps with the first fluctuation icon and the notice display, various effects can be produced by the fluctuation icon, and it may be expected that the fluctuation may be a big hit. is there.

  Here, the second change icon may overlap only with the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move The second variation icon may overlap with the first variation icon and the display other than the advance notice during at least a part of the period during which the animation is displayed. In addition, the second variation icon may always overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second variation animation is displayed, or the second variation animation is displayed. The second change icon may not overlap with the first change icon and the advance notice during at least a part of the period.

  In addition, only the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation may be displayed. In at least a part of the period in which the is displayed, there may be a case where the change icons other than the second change icon overlap the first change icon and the notice display.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap with the first variation icon and the notice display only during at least a part of a period during which the second variation animation is displayed, or the second variation animation may be displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display also in a period other than at least a part of the period in which the is displayed.

  Note that the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display during a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, and the second move animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the advance notice during the entire duration of the period.

  In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 260 (A2) etc. according to the execution of the symbol variation display], The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, variation display of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 260 (A2)] according to execution of the symbol variation display. The decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays, and the first decorative symbol is displayed during at least a part of a period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases, only one of the variation display and the second decoration symbol variation display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the frame change animation In the displayed period , Gaming table where the first decorative symbols equal to only the display change according to the second decoration symbol is erased is being performed, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  According to this gaming machine, the player is concentrated on the moving animation by displaying only one of the first decorative symbol fluctuation display and the second decorative symbol fluctuation display during the period of the moving icon moving animation. There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display Other displays may also be displayable. In addition, the display means may always display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or displays the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be possible.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, and other than the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display The display of may also be displayable. In addition, the display means may always display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or displays the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be possible.

  In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed only during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases, and one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be also in a period other than at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. Only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. Also, during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is always displayed. It is also preferable that only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is not displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, there may be a case where only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be, or only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed. May be

  In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 260 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,

  The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 260 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the first frame The moving display of the second frame image FL2 is started after the moving display of the image FL1 is started, etc.]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, by displaying a plurality of movement animations of the fluctuation icon, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. In addition, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, only the display of the second moving animation may be started, or after the display of the first moving animation is started, the second movement may be started. Display other than the animation display may also be started. Also, the display of the second moving animation may always be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation is after the display of the first moving animation is started It may not be started.

  In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 260 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed, characterized by the fact that. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, the movement animation of the first fluctuation icon can make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may make a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. In addition, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  "The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 264], and the certain display is a display which can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 264 (A1)], and the display of the plurality of types One of the modes is the second display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 257 (A1)], and the first moving animation is displayed. A moving display of the certain display of the first display mode is displayed during at least a part of the

  A game display characterized in that a movement display of the certain display of the second display mode is displayed during at least a part of a period during which the second movement animation is displayed. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the big hit expectation during the movement animation period of the fluctuation icon, various effects of the fluctuation icon can be made, and it may be expected that the fluctuation may cause a big hit. is there.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a certain display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a certain display. Further, the display means may always display a certain display, or may not display a certain display.

  In addition, a certain display may be displayable only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be a display mode other than the plurality of display modes. In addition, a certain display may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  Further, a certain display may be capable of displaying only the first display mode and the second display mode, or may be capable of displaying display modes other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be In addition, a certain display may be necessarily displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. May be

  In addition, the movement display of a certain display of a 1st display aspect may be displayed in the one part period of the period while the 1st movement animation is displayed, and the period when the 1st movement animation is displayed. The movement display of a certain display of the first display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

  Moreover, the movement display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the period during which the second movement animation is displayed. The movement display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

  In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [eg, FIG. 260 (A2) to FIG. 260 ( As shown in A3), when movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first change icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area different from the icon display area HN1, etc.] A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first change icon in a display area different from a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the change icon, and to expect that the change may be a big hit. There is a possibility.

  Here, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. After that, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area other than the display area other than the one display area. In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon may be always displayed in a display area other than a display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started Later on, the first variation icon may not be displayed in a display area other than a display area.

  In addition, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from a display area only after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the first moving animation is started The first variation icon may be displayed in a display area other than the display area other than the rear.

  In addition, during the execution of one pattern change display, when the second state is changed to the second state and then the second state is changed to the third state (hereinafter, “the second case” And the first state is a state in which only the first fluctuation icon of the two fluctuation icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 260 (A5), The state in which only the first change icon h01 of the icon h01 and the second change icon h02 is displayed], and the second state is a state in which both of the two change icons are displayed [ For example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A9), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, etc.], and the third state is the two change icons. Of the second of the Of the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 of the second change icon h02, for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A12). , A game stand characterized by. I also explained about.

  According to this game console, by changing the number of fluctuation icons, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may cause a big hit.

  Here, during the execution of one pattern variation display, there may be a case where it becomes from the second state to the third state after the first state becomes the second state, or one time During execution of the symbol variation display, there may be cases where the second state does not change to the third state after the first state changes to the second state. In addition, during the execution of one pattern variation display, it may be possible to change from the second state to the third state only after the first state becomes the second state, or one time During the execution of the symbol variation display, the second state may be changed to the third state other than after the first state is changed to the second state. Also, only during execution of one pattern variation display, there may be a case where the second state changes to the third state after changing from the first state to the second state, or one time Even during execution of the symbol variation display, the second state may be changed to the third state after changing from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, “the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a third change icon [for example, the third change icon h03 shown in FIG. 269 (A17)]”, and the third change icon is the first change icon. The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the variation icon, and the third variation icon is a variation icon different from the second variation icon, and after the second case, the third state to the fourth The fourth state to the fifth state may occur after the second state is entered, and the fourth state is a state in which the second change icon and the third change icon are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 269 (A14), a state in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed], and the fifth state is the second state Change icon and the third change A state in which only the third variation icon of the icon is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 269 (A17), only the third variation icon h03 of the second variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03 It is a display state etc.], The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. I also explained about.

  According to this game console, by changing the number of fluctuation icons, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may cause a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third variation icon, or may be capable of displaying variation icons other than the third variation icon. Further, the display means may display the third fluctuation icon without fail or may not display the third fluctuation icon.

  Also, the third variation icon may be partially different from the first variation icon, or may be entirely different.

  Also, the third variation icon may be partially different from the second variation icon, or may be entirely different.

  In addition, after the second case, the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state to the fifth state may occur, or the second case After reaching the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state to the fifth state may not occur. In addition, after the second case, the fourth state to the fifth state may occur only after the third state to the fourth state, or the second case In addition to the above, the third state to the fourth state may be followed by the fourth state to the fifth state. Also, only after the second case has been reached, there may be a case where the fourth state to the fifth state may occur after the third state has become the fourth state, or the second state may be the second state. Other than after the case, there may be a case where the fourth state to the fifth state may be reached after the third state to the fourth state.

  In addition, during at least a part of the period during which the two variation icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in the certain display area [eg, FIG. 260 (A9) As shown, during the period in which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed, none of the variation icons are displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.]. I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, by not displaying the fluctuation icon in a certain display area, the effect by the fluctuation icon can be made colorful, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

  Here, in a part of a period in which two variation icons are displayed, there may be a period in which none of the two variation icons is displayed in a display area, or two variation icons are displayed. During the entire period, there may be a period in which none of the two change icons is displayed in a display area.

  In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to the suspension of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon [for example, pending icons h11, h12, h13 shown in FIG. 260 (A2)]). A period during which the two change icons are displayed [eg, a period during which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 260 (A7) to FIG. The number of pending icons [for example, six etc.] in [] is displayed before the two variation icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A6), the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 The game console characterized by having more than the number [for example, three etc.] of the reservation icons in a period in which only the first variation icon h01 is displayed. I also explained about.

  According to this game console, there are cases where various effects can be made by changing the number of holding icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may display the hold icon without fail or may not display the hold icon.

  In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to the suspension of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon [for example, pending icons h11, h12, h13 shown in FIG. 260 (A2)]). Yes, the display means can display a display number (hereinafter referred to as "number hold display [for example, second hold number display shown in FIG. 260 (A2), etc.]") displaying the number of held symbol fluctuation display as a numeral. The number of reservations indicated by the number suspension display [eg, in the period in which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 260 (A7) to FIG. 260 (A10) , And the number of reservations of the special view 1 in the second number of reservations display indicates “3”, etc.] indicates the number of the reservation icons during the period in which the two variation icons are displayed [eg, FIG. 260 (A7 ~ As shown in FIG. 10 (A10), in the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, six hold icons are displayed, etc.]. Game console. I also explained about.

  According to this game console, there are cases where various effects can be made by changing the number of holding icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may display the hold icon without fail or may not display the hold icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number hold display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number hold display. Further, the display means may always display the number hold display or may not display the number hold display.

  In addition, during at least a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed, the moving display of the hold icon is displayed, and at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. A moving display of the hold icon is displayed during a period of time. I also explained about.

According to this game console, there may be cases where various effects can be made by the hold icon.
Here, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed in a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, or in the entire period in which the first moving animation is displayed. , And a movement display of the hold icon may be displayed.

  In addition, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or during the entire period during which the second movement animation is displayed, A movement display of the hold icon may be displayed.

In addition, “the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like],” a gaming machine characterized in that I also explained about.
The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
It is a game stand provided with an image display means, wherein the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain effect is performed, and the display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second display. The second display is a display which may predict that the time until the certain effect starts is changed, and the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed. A game console characterized by

  Here, "a certain effect" may be an effect by display or effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, a light guide plate, etc.).

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is a game stand according to appendix 1, wherein, when the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed. , A game stand characterized by.

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2, wherein the image display means is a means constituted by a plurality of image display means, and one of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means Image display means, and one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, and the second image display means is more than the first image display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be in the foreground.

(Supplementary Note 4)
In the game stand according to appendix 3, the second display may be displayed on the second image display means,
A game console characterized in that the first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means on which the second display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4, and also when the second display is displayed, the time indicated by the first display is advanced. Stand.

(Supplementary Note 6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 5, wherein a display different from the second display is displayed after the timer reaches 0.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6, which is more easily hit by a second display than in the case where the second display is not displayed.

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 1 thru | or 7, Comprising: The display of 1 type of the display of several types is a 3rd display, The said certain effect is the said image display means The third display displayed by the second display, and the display of the substitute sign is an effect display.

(Appendix 9)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 7, and is provided with effect movable means, and the effect movable means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, and among the plurality of types of operations, One type of operation is a rendering operation, and the certain rendering is a rendering operation by a rendering movable means.

  Here, operations other than the rendering operation may be executed, and there are, for example, an operation at the time of power on, an initial position returning operation, or a retraction operation as an operation other than the rendering operation. Also, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on the frame (front door), for example.

(Supplementary Note 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 9, wherein the case where the certain effect occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case where no effect occurs.

(Supplementary Note 11)
It is a game board according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, and a hot effect display may be displayed between the display of the first display and the display of the second display. A game console characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game stand provided with the image display means, Comprising: The said image display means is a means which can display multiple types of display, The display of one type among the said multiple types of display is a 1st presentation of effect The display of one type among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display, the period display is a display displayed in a certain period during reach, and the period display is It is a display for informing the timing (hereinafter referred to as "first timing") in which the first effect display may be displayed, and the period display is erased before the first timing is reached. There is a game console that is characterized by

  Here, the displayed period of the period display is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or jackpot. Also, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Supplementary Note 15)
It is a game stand according to appendix 14, wherein one type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display, and the timing at which the third effect display is displayed by the period display is There may be cases where no notification is given, and during the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed, and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of a prepaid card, light emission by an LED, a rendering operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is a game stand according to appendix 15, and the third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in symbol fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as “big hit symbol fluctuation”) in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit. A game console characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game stand according to appendix 16, and the third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change (hereinafter referred to as "the lost symbol change") in which the result of the pass / fail determination is an end. The gaming table is characterized in that the big hit symbol variation is displayed with a higher frequency at which the third effect display is displayed than the lost symbol variation.

(Appendix 18)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 15 thru | or 17, Comprising: A presentation movable means is provided, The said presentation movable means is a means which may perform presentation operation, The display of the said 3rd presentation is carried out The game stand characterized in that the turnout movable means may perform the effect operation.

(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 14 to 18, wherein the period display is in an easily viewable state after the period display is not displayed.

(Supplementary Note 20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein the period display is not displayed until a certain period during the reach is over.

(Supplementary Note 21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein the period display is a display which is necessarily displayed during a certain period during the reach.

(Supplementary Note 22)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 14 thru | or 21, Comprising: The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth "a 2nd timing") which displays a 2nd presentation of effect. , A game stand characterized by.

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance up is notified in response to the reach may be fixed, such as always reporting the chance up three times when a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs, the same reach When it is, the part which reports a chance up may be made to fluctuate so that it may notify three times and may notify only once once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be easy to lose. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit.

(Supplementary Note 23)
It is a game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 22, and the image display means is a means constituted by a plurality of image display means, and one image display of the plurality of image display means The means is the first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, and the first image display means is an image display means which may display the period display, The second image display means is an image display means which may perform a rendering operation, and at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means. Play table.

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 23, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 25)
It is a game stand provided with the image display means, Comprising: The said image display means is a means which can display multiple types of display, The display of one type among the said multiple types of display is a 1st presentation of effect The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display, and the display of one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the period The display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach, and the period display indicates a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first timing"). At least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display before reaching the first timing.

(Appendix 26)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The said display means is a means which can display a 1st display, According to progress of time, the display mode of at least one part of the said 1st display is 1st The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display, and the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at a second speed according to the passage of time A game machine characterized in that the first speed and the second speed are different.

(Appendix 27)
26. A game stand according to appendix 26, wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a time display, the time The display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, and one of the time displays is the first display. A game console characterized in that one of the time displays is the second display.

(Appendix 28)
27. A game console according to appendix 26 or 27, wherein the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 29)
Supplementary note 26 to 28. The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 26 to 28, wherein the first display is a display in which a display mode changes until a first time elapses, and the second display is a second display The display mode changes until the second time elapses, the third display is displayed when the first time elapses, and the fourth display is displayed when the second time elapses , A game stand characterized by.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Also, the third display may have a higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have a higher reliability than the third display.

(Supplementary note 30)
Supplementary note 26 to 29, wherein the display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display as the display of the first type. A game console characterized by having the first display and the second display.
Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand according to appendix 30, wherein the first type of display is a timer advance display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display. The gaming machine is characterized in that the timer advance notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game stand according to appendix 30, and comprises operation means, the display of the first type means operation effective period display, and the operation effective period display enables operation of the operation means. It is a display which shows a period to make, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix 33)
It is a game stand according to appendix 30, wherein the first type of display is a period display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display. The period display is a display that may notify a timing (hereinafter referred to as a "first timing") in which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period. The gaming machine, wherein the first timing is notified between the start of the first period and the end of the first period.

(Appendix 34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 33, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display, and the countdown The display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be performed, and the time notification is performed by the countdown display. The display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode, and when the time notification is performed by the count gown display, the countdown display may be displayed from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change to a display mode of, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Supplementary note 36)
35. A game stand according to appendix 35, wherein the first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size, and the second display mode is: It is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size, and the second display size is larger than the first display size.

(Appendix 37)
A game stand according to appendix 35 or 36, characterized in that when the display of the countdown display is started, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode.

(Appendix 38)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, characterized in that when the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. Game console.

(Appendix 39)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, and the jackpot finally changes when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, rather than being displayed in the first display mode. A game stand characterized in that a symbol is easily displayed.

(Appendix 40)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 39, wherein the start and end of the countdown display are performed within a period of one time of symbol variation display.

(Appendix 41)
Supplementary note 35 to 40, wherein the countdown display moves when the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. Play table.

(Appendix 42)
A game stand according to appendix 41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is continued even while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 43)
A game stand according to appendix 41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 44)
Supplementary note 35 to 43, wherein the time until the certain effect is performed is zero, and the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is zero. A notification indicating that there is a notification is given, and the notification that the time until the given effect is given is indicated to be 0 is given by the countdown display, and then the countdown display is erased. , A game stand characterized by.

(Appendix 45)
A game stand according to appendix 44, characterized in that the specific display is displayed and then hidden when the time until the given effect is reduced to zero.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 45, which may not change to the second display mode.

(Supplementary Note 47)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 46, wherein the display means is composed of a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first display means. The display means is one of the plurality of display means is the second display means, and the first display means may display the countdown display of the first display mode. A game console characterized by

(Appendix 48)
It is a game stand according to appendix 47, and the countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix 51)
A game console comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and the first display is a period display, The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of a period during which the reach effect display is performed, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display. The second display is a notice display, the first display is a display for notifying a first timing, and the first display is a display start of the second display. It is a possible timing, and the first display may be erased before the first timing is reached after the display of the first display is started. Stand.

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand according to appendix 51, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, the third display is an effect display, and the third display is the The second display is a display different from the second display, and the third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached, and the first display starts the display of the third display. It is a display which does not alert | report a timing, and the said 1st display is erase | eliminated during the display of the said 3rd display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix 53)
52. A game console according to appendix 52, wherein the third display is a notice display.

(Appendix 54)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note 53, and the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the third display is displayed than when the third display is not displayed. To play with.

(Appendix 55)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 52 to 54, and comprises effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, one of the plurality of types of operations being a first operation ,
The first operation is a rendering operation, and the first operation may be performed during display of the third display.

(Appendix 56)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 55, characterized in that the first display is displayed again after the first display is erased. To play with.

(Appendix 57)
Appendices 51 to 55, wherein the game console is configured such that the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix 58)
Supplementary note 51 to 55, wherein the game console according to any one of claims 51 to 55, wherein the first display is redisplayed before the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased. A game stand characterized in that.

(Supplementary note 59)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 58, wherein the certain period is a period during which super reach is being performed.

(Appendix 60)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 59, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, and the fourth display is an effect display, The fourth display is a display different from the second display, the first display is a display that may also notify the second timing, and the second timing is the fourth display. The game console is characterized in that it is the timing when the display of may be started.

(Supplementary Note 61)
50. A game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 60, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 62)
A game console comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and the first display is a display including a countdown display The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and the timing notification is a notification that is performed by updating the display of the countdown display when a certain effect is performed. A game console characterized in that the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 63)
62. A game console according to appendix 62, wherein the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game stand according to appendix 63, wherein the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size, and the second display mode Is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size, and in the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger , A game stand characterized by.

(Appendix 65)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 64, characterized in that the first display is displayed in the first display mode when the display of the countdown display is started. Play table.

(Appendix 66)
Supplementary note 62 to 65, wherein the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed. A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 67)
A game stand according to any one of Appendices 62 to 65, wherein the first display is more than the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game console characterized by the fact that the big hit symbol is likely to be finally displayed finally when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode.

(Appendix 68)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 67, characterized in that the display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol change display. .

(Supplementary Note 69)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 68, wherein the first display is a display that may change a display position.

(Appendix 70)
It is a game board according to appendix 69, wherein when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes. Play table.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a game console.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note 69 or 70, wherein the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed, and the display position of the first display is changed by the moved display. To play with.

(Appendix 72)
It is a game stand according to appendix 71, and the update display of the countdown display is continued even while the display of the movement display is performed.

(Appendix 73)
It is a game stand according to appendix 71, and the update display of the countdown display is interrupted while the display of the movement display is carried out.

(Appendix 74)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 73, wherein the countdown display is a display of a countdown of time.

(Appendix 75)
It is a game stand according to supplementary note 74, wherein the timing notification is a notification to notify that the timing to perform the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. And a game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 76)
A game stand according to appendix 74 or 75, wherein the countdown display is configured to be erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.

(Supplementary Note 77)
It is a game stand according to appendix 76, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the second display is a display not included in the certain effect, When the display which shows 0 is displayed in the said countdown display, after said 2nd display is displayed, it is comprised so that this countdown display may be erase | eliminated.

(Supplementary Note 78)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 77, wherein the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first Display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, and when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display means A display is displayed on the first display means.

(Appendix 79)
A game stand according to appendix 78, wherein the first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.

(Appendix 80)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A1)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays, and one of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display. The one meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display, and the first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and the plurality of the plurality of meter displays in the first meter display One of the types of states is a first state, one of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a third state, and the first meter display is The display may change from the first state to the third state, and the fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and the plurality of types in the fourth meter display One of the four states is the fourth In the state, one of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state, and the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display may change from the first state to the third state. When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth meter display indicates the fourth meter display when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the state does not change. The gaming machine is characterized in that the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the fourth state does not change to the sixth state.

(Appendix A2)
In the gaming table according to appendix A1, the expectation for the fourth meter display to change from the fourth state to the sixth state is the first meter display from the first state to the third The game console characterized in that it is higher than the expected degree of changing to the state of.

(Appendix A3)
It is a game board according to appendix A1 or A2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and the first meter display may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped. It is a display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the fourth meter display is a display started to be displayed in the fourth state.

(Appendix A5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4, wherein one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state, and the first meter display Is a display that may change from the first state to the second state, and the first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state The first meter display is a display that may be started to be displayed in the first state, and the first meter display is a display that may be started to be displayed in the second state. The game is characterized in that the expectation of the jackpot is higher when the display is started in the second state than when the display of the first meter is started in the first state. Stand.

(Appendix A6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first icon, and the first meter display is the first icon Is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by being displayed a first number of times, and the fourth meter display displays the first icon a second number of times Thus, the display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, and the second number is a number smaller than the first number.

(Appendix A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a big hit display, and the third state in the first meter display is the third state. It is a state of indication which shows that the big hit indication is indicated in change of the decoration design where three states are indicated, the sixth state in the fourth meter indication indicates the sixth state It is a state of the display which shows that the said big hit display is displayed in the fluctuation | variation of the said decorative symbol made, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A8)
It is a game stand according to appendix A7, and the second condition of the first meter indication may be indicated as the big hit indication in the variation of the decorative symbol where the second condition is indicated. And the fifth state of the fourth meter display may indicate that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed. It is a state of a display which shows, and the said big hit display is easier to be displayed when the said 5th state is displayed rather than the said 2nd state.

(Appendix A9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, wherein one of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo continuous effect, and the pseudo continuous notification is the first meter display The display may be started when it changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state , A game stand characterized by.

(Appendix A10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A9, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means, and the operation promotion display is the first display. The display may be started when the meter display changes to the third state, and the operation prompting display may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A game console characterized by having a display.

(Appendix A11)
The game console according to any one of appendices A1 to A10, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects includes The certain effect is an effect that the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the certain effect is displayed, and the certain effect is the first meter display being the one It is an effect that may start being displayed when it changes to the third state, and the certain effect is an effect that may start being displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A12)
A game console comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a period display, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. In the effect display, one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display, and the period display is a display for notifying the start of a certain period in a period in which the reach effect display is performed, the period The display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, and the first timing is the start of the first effect display during the display of the reach effect display. The possible timing is that the notice display is a display for giving a notice that the first timing is notified by the period display, and the start of the certain period is displayed by the period display. Notification Before, gaming table that the in some cases predictive display is displayed, characterized in that.

(Appendix A13)
The game console according to appendix A12, wherein the period display is a display including a cursor display, and the cursor display is a third position (end) from the second position (start position) through the first position. From the start to the end of the first period is notified by moving to the position), the second position is a position before the first position, The first position is a position before the third position, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing. To play with.

(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A13, wherein the period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed, and the chance up display is the first timing. And a display position corresponding to the first position when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing. The game machine is characterized in that the chance-up display is displayed.

(Appendix A15)
Supplementary note A12. The gaming table according to any one of A12 to A14, wherein the period display is a display which may be displayed for movement.

(Appendix A16)
A game stand according to appendix A15, wherein the movement display is performed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.

(Appendix A17)
A game stand according to appendix A15 or A16, wherein a display position of the period display changes when the movement display is performed.

(Appendix A18)
The gaming stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A17, wherein the advance notice may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and a display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode. It is a display mode, and one display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode, and the direction when the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode is the first display mode. A game console characterized in that the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finalized (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) finally than in the case of being displayed in one display form.

(Appendix A19)
In the gaming machine according to appendix A18, the first timing when the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode is lower than when the advance notice is displayed in the first display mode. The game stand characterized in that the first effect display is likely to be started when it becomes.

(Appendix A20)
A game stand according to appendix A18 or A19, wherein the advance notice displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode.

(Appendix A21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A20, wherein the period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and a display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode. There are three display modes (for example, a defamometer), one of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter), and the period display is the fourth display mode. The game console according to the present invention is characterized in that the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed finally when displayed in the third display mode than when displayed in the third display mode.

(Appendix A22)
The gaming machine according to appendix A21, wherein the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or in the fourth display mode depending on the display mode of the advance notice display. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A23)
The gaming machine according to claim A21 or A22, wherein the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode as compared to when the advance notice is displayed in the first display mode. A game console characterized in that a period display is easily displayed in the fourth display mode.

(Appendix A24)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A23, the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode when the advance notice is displayed in the first display mode. The game apparatus is characterized in that the period display is easier to be displayed in the third display mode than in the case where it is displayed.

(Appendix A25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A24, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display, and the notice display is a first notice display. The game console may be notified that the first notice display is displayed by the second notice display.

(Appendix A26)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note A25, and the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed becomes a big hit compared to the case where the first notification display is not notified by the second notification display. Easy-to-play, characterized by game consoles.

(Appendix A27)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A26, and in the case where the advance notice is displayed before the time display is displayed, the notice is made before the time display is displayed. A game console characterized by the fact that the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed finally than when the display is not displayed.

(Appendix A28)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A27, wherein the advance notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A27, wherein the notice display is a display different from the period display.

(Appendix A30)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A29, and it is notified that the period display is displayed by being notified that the reach effect display is displayed by the advance notification display. , A game stand characterized by.

(Appendix A31)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A30, wherein the advance notice may be displayed with the same symbol change display as the period display.

(Appendix A32)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A31, and the advance notice may be made in a symbol change display prior to the symbol change display in which the period display is performed. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix A33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein the advance notice is also displayed during a period in which symbol stop display is performed.

(Appendix A34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein the advance notice is not displayed during a period in which the symbol stop display is performed.

(Appendix A35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A12 to A34, wherein the advance notice is a display that may be displayed while the reach effect display is displayed.

(Appendix A36)
The above-mentioned notice display is a display which may be displayed before the above-mentioned reach production display is started, A game stand characterized by things.

(Appendix A37)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The said display means is a means which may display a 1st display, The said 1st display is the timing when a certain presentation may be started The display means is a means by which the A-th display may be displayed as a certain effect, and the timing at which the A-th display is started (hereinafter referred to as “the A-th timing” In some cases, the display A may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display. Here, a certain effect may be the A-th display. Moreover, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The game console according to appendix A37, wherein the first display is a display of a period, and the display of the period notifies a timing at which the display of the A is likely to be displayed in a certain period. The display mode of at least a part of the period display changes in accordance with the passage of time of a certain period, and the display of the A th is displayed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. It is notified that the timing of the start of the game.

(Appendix A 39)
It is a game stand according to appendix A38, wherein the period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed, and the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing. The display of B is displayed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A40)
The game console according to appendix A37, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a display for notifying a timing at which the A-th display is displayed, and a lapse of time According to the present invention, when the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes and the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the A-th display is displayed. Stand.

(Appendix A41)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A37 to A40, and when the Ath timing is reached, the Ath display may be displayed, and the Ath timing is reached. In some cases, the display of the A may not be displayed.

(Appendix A42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A37 to A40, wherein the display of the A is always displayed when the A timing is reached.

(Appendix A43)
The game console according to any one of appendices A37 to A42, wherein the display means is a means that may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. It is a display for noticing that it is displayed, a game console characterized by the above.

(Appendix A44)
The game console according to any one of appendices A37 to A43, wherein the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed, and the first display is performed when the movement display is performed. The display position of is changed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A45)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A44, wherein a display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time, and the first display is a display. After the game is performed, the movement display may be performed before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed.

(Appendix A46)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A44, wherein a display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time, and at least the first display During the change of a part of display modes, the movement display may be performed.

(Appendix A47)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A37 to A46, Comprising: When the said A display is displayed at the said A timing, at least the said 1st display is carried out by the said A display. A game console characterized in that a part is overlapped.

(Appendix A48)
The game console according to any one of appendices A37 to A47, wherein the first display is not displayed when the A display is displayed at the A timing. The game display is characterized in that the display A is displayed in an area overlapping with at least a part of the area where the display of is displayed.

(Appendix A 49)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A37 to A48, wherein the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of image display means, and one image display of the plurality of types of image display means The means is a first image display means, and one of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means, and the second image display means is the first image display means. Means provided on the front side of the image display means, and the first display is displayed by the first image display means, and the A-th display is displayed by the second image display means. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A50)
It is a game stand according to appendix A49, and the second image display means is a means that may perform a rendering operation, and the first display is displayed by the first image display means. The game stand characterized in that the second image display means may perform the rendering operation in the previous period when the A timing is reached.

(Appendix A51)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A37 to A50, comprising: operation means, wherein the A-th display is a display concerning the operation means.

(Appendix A52)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A37 to A51, and the display means is a means in which a Cth display may be displayed as a certain effect, and the Cth display is started. A game console characterized in that the Cth display may be displayed at a certain timing (hereinafter referred to as "the Cth timing").

(Appendix A53)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A52, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A 54)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A52, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A55)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The said display means is a means which may display a 1st display, The said 1st display is a display which alert | reports the timing when a certain presentation is started And the first display is a display which may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(Appendix A56)
The game console according to appendix A55, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a timing when a certain effect may be started in a certain period (hereinafter referred to as “ And a display mode for displaying at least a part of the display of the period changes according to the passage of time of a certain period. During the change, the timing at which the certain effect is started is informed.

(Appendix A 57)
It is a game stand according to appendix A56, wherein the period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed, and the B-th is displayed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing. A display is displayed, the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A58)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A55, wherein the first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes according to the passage of time, and the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display When finished, the above-mentioned effect is started, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A59)
It is a game board according to any one of appendices A55 to A58, and when the predetermined timing is reached, the certain effect may be started, and when the predetermined timing is reached, The game console characterized in that the certain effect may not be started.

(Appendix A60)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A55 to A58, wherein the certain effect is always started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A61)
The game console according to any one of appendices A55 to A60, wherein the display means is a means that may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. It is a display for noticing that it is displayed, a game console characterized by the above.

(Appendix A62)
The game console according to any one of appendices A55 to A61, wherein the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed, and the first display is performed when the movement display is performed. The display position of is changed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A 63)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A62, wherein a display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time, and the first display is a display. After the game is performed, the movement display may be performed before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed.

(Appendix A64)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A62, wherein a display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time, and at least the first display During the change of a part of display modes, the movement display may be performed.

(Appendix A65)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A55 thru | or A64, Comprising: The display of the said 1st display is started in the 1st symbol fluctuation display of the said several symbol fluctuation display, The said several display In the second symbol fluctuation display of the symbol fluctuation display, the timing when the certain effect is started is informed, and the first symbol fluctuation display is performed before the second symbol fluctuation display It is a variable display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A66)
It is a game stand given in appendix A65, and it is constituted so that a display mode of at least one copy of the first display may change according to progress of time in a certain period, and the second symbol change In the display, the certain period is started, and in the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured so as not to change.

(Appendix A67)
It is a game stand given in appendix A65, and it is constituted so that a display mode of at least one copy of the above-mentioned 1st display may change according to progress of time in a certain period, and the above-mentioned first symbol change In display, said certain period is started, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A 68)
It is a game stand according to appendix A67, and from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, a display mode of the first display The game is characterized in that no change takes place.

(Appendix A 68)
It is a game stand according to appendix A67, and from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, at least one of the first indications A change of the display mode of the unit may be performed.

(Appendix A 69)
The game console according to appendix A65, wherein the display means is a means which may display a second display, and the second display gives notice that the first display is displayed. It is a display and said 2nd display is a display which may be displayed in said 1st symbol variation display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A71)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A69, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A72)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The display means is a means which may display a first display, and the first display is a timing when a certain effect may be started ( Hereinafter, it is a display for notifying “a certain timing.)), And the display mode of at least a part of the first display changes according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. In some cases, before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, the first display causes the advance notice to be displayed. A game console that is characterized by being

(Appendix A 73)
The game console according to appendix A72, wherein the first display is a display of a period, the display of the period is a display notifying of the certain timing, and the display of the display is based on the passage of a certain period of time. And a display mode of at least a part of the period display is changed, and the certain timing is notified during a change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display.

(Appendix A74)
The gaming stand according to appendix A73, wherein the period display is a display in which a B display may be displayed, and the B display is performed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing. A display is displayed, the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A 75)
It is a game stand according to appendix A72, wherein the first display is a timer display, the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and the timer is displayed according to the passage of time. The game console characterized in that the certain effect is started when at least a part of the display mode of the display changes and the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends.

(Appendix A 76)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A75, and when the predetermined timing is reached, the predetermined effect may be started, and when the predetermined timing is reached, The game console characterized in that the certain effect may not be started.

(Appendix A 77)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A75, wherein the certain effect is always started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A 78)
The game console according to any one of appendices A72 to A77, wherein the display means is a means that may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. It is a display for noticing that it is displayed, a game console characterized by the above.

(Appendix A 79)
The game console according to any one of appendices A72 to A78, wherein the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed, and the first display is performed when the movement display is performed. The display position of is changed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A80)
The gaming stand according to appendix A79, wherein the movement display is performed after the display of the first display and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed. In some cases, it is characterized by a game stand.

(Appendix A81)
A game stand according to appendix A79, wherein the movement display may be performed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A 82)
The gaming stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A81, wherein the notice display is a display for giving notice of a time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started, A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 83)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A82, comprising operation means, wherein the advance notice is a display concerning the operation means.

(Appendix A 84)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A83, wherein a time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display after the advance notice is displayed. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A85)
Supplementary note A72 of the game console according to any one of A72 to A84, wherein a change in a display mode of at least a part of the first display according to an elapse of time until the certain effect starts Before being played, a notice display is always performed by the first display.

(Appendix A 86)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A72 to A85, and when the first display is displayed, the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started A change of the display mode of at least a part of is started,

(Appendix A 87)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A 88)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A 89)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The said display means is a means by which a 1st display may be displayed, A said 1st display is a timing when a certain presentation may be started (Hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”), the display means is a means for displaying a second display, and the second display is the first display. And a plurality of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as "plural second displays") may be displayed. .

(Appendix A90)
The game console according to appendix A89, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period, and a time of a certain period. According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the period display is changed, and the certain timing is notified during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. Stand.

(Appendix A 91)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A90, wherein the period display is a display in which a B display may be displayed, and the B display is performed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing. A display is displayed, the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A 91)
The game stand according to appendix A89, wherein the first display is a timer display, the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and the timer is displayed according to the passage of time. The game console characterized in that the certain effect is started when at least a part of the display mode of the display changes and the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends.

(Appendix A 92)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A89 to A91, and when the predetermined timing is reached, the predetermined effect may be started, and when the predetermined timing is reached. , The above-mentioned certain production may not be started, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A 93)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A89 to A91, wherein the certain effect is always started at the certain timing.

(Appendix A94)
The game console according to any one of appendices A89 to A93, wherein the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed, and the first display is performed when the movement display is performed. The display position of is changed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A 95)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A94, wherein a display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time, and the first display is a display. After the game is performed, the movement display may be performed before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed.

(Appendix A 96)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A94, wherein a display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time, and at least the first display During the change of a part of display modes, the movement display may be performed.

(Appendix A 97)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A 89 to A 96, wherein the first display is always displayed when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A 98)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A 89 to A 96, characterized in that the first display may be displayed when the second display is displayed, and the game stand.

(Appendix A 99)
The game console according to any one of appendices A89 to A98, wherein the second display is a display under preparation, and the display of the plurality of brothers is a plurality of display under preparation That is, one of the plurality of preparation indications is a first preparation indication, and one indication of the plurality of preparation indications is a second preparation indication, The game stand characterized in that the first in-provision display is a display displayed before the second in-provision display.

(Appendix A100)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A99, wherein the timer display (hereinafter referred to as the “first timer display”) corresponding to the first preparation display is displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. After being displayed and the second in-provision display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") corresponding to the second in-provision display is displayed, and the first timer is displayed. A game console characterized in that a display is displayed prior to the second timer display. Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation display.

(Appendix A 101)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A99, wherein the timer display (hereinafter referred to as the “first timer display”) corresponding to the first preparation display is displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. After being displayed and the second in-provision display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second in-provision display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed.
In some cases, the first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display.

(Appendix A 102)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A 103)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A104)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, The said display means is a means which may display a 1st display, The said 1st display is a display which alert | reports the timing when a certain presentation is started The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, and until the certain effect is started. Prior to the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time, a notice may be given, and the notice may be at least a part of the first display It is a notice that notices that a change of display mode is started, A game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A105)
The game console according to Supplementary Note A104, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a timing when the certain effect may be started in a certain period (hereinafter referred to as “the display”). The game is characterized in that the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. Stand.

(Appendix A106)
The gaming machine according to appendix A105, wherein the period display is a display in which a B display may be displayed, and the B display is performed when the certain effect is started at the certain timing. A display is displayed, the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A107)
The game console according to appendix A104, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”). The game console is characterized in that the certain effect is started when the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is ended.

(Appendix A108)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A104 to A107, and when the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started, and when the certain timing comes, The game console characterized in that the certain effect may not be started.

(Appendix A 109)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A104 to A107, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached. (Appendix A110) The game console according to any one of appendices A104 to A109, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. It is a display which announces that the display of is displayed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A 111)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A104 to A110, and the first display is a display in which movement display may be performed, and when the movement display is performed, the first display is The display position of is changed, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A112)
It is a game stand according to appendix A111, and after the first display is displayed, the movement display is performed before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed. In some cases, it is characterized by a game stand.

(Appendix A 113)
A game stand according to appendix A111, wherein the movement display may be performed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display.

(Appendix A114)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A104 to A113, wherein the notice is a notice display by the first display.

(Appendix A115)
A game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to A114, wherein a change in a display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect starts Before being turned off, a false notice may be made, and even if the false notice is made, a change in display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started.

(Appendix A116)
Supplementary note 104 to A 115, wherein the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game console characterized in that a notice is made to be made before being told.

(Appendix A117)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A118)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Appendix A119)
The gaming machine is provided with a rendering means capable of executing a timer effect, and the timer effect is displayed when the timer display shows a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , “A certain effect”) is configured to be started, and is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed while a big hit game is being performed. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix A120)
It is a game stand according to appendix A119, and the big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games, and the timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix A121)
It is a game stand according to appendix A119, and the big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games, and the note effect is an effect which may be executed across two or more round games. , And a game stand characterized by.

(Appendix A122)
It is a game board according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121, and the timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and to be subtracted from the initial value to indicate the certain time, The display showing the time is the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter referred to as "first timer effect") is the first value as the initial value. The first timer effect may be executed across a first number of round games, and the first timer effect may be across a second number of round games. The second number may be greater than the first number, and the first number may be one or more times.

(Appendix A123)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121, and one round game is configured to end when a first time has elapsed, and the timer display shows an initial value after displaying the initial value. The display configured to indicate the certain time by being subtracted from the initial value, and the display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0, and A game console characterized in that two hours may be displayed, and the second time is shorter than the first time.

(Appendix A 124)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A119 to A123, and the certain effect is started when the timer display is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). It is a certain effect, and the certain effect is an effect that is started when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter referred to as “the second case”), and the first effect The certain effect in the case is effect performed in the first mode (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”), and the certain effect in the second case is performed in the second mode It is an effect (hereinafter referred to as a “second effect”) that may be played, and the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.

(Appendix A125)
A game stand according to appendix A124, wherein the timing at which the second effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. Play table.

(Appendix A 126)
It is a game stand given in appendix A124 or A125, and the first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case, and in the second case, the first effect is A game console characterized in that a timing to be executed is different from a timing to execute the second effect.

(Appendix A 127)
A game stand according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A126, wherein said certain effect is a confirmed effect notifying that a player is given an advantageous benefit.

(Appendix A 128)
The game stand according to appendix A127 which cites any one of the notes A124 to A126, wherein the determined effect is an effect of notifying that a symbol variation display to be a big hit is included in the hold, In the case where the number of big-hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is one, it may be configured to execute one of the first effect and the second effect. If the number of symbol variation displays to be a big hit included in the hold is two or more, it may be configured to execute both the first effect and the second effect A game stand characterized by being.

(Appendix A 129)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A124 to A126, wherein the certain effect is an effect that suggests that the player may be given an advantageous benefit, and the first effect The second effect is more likely to be given a benefit advantageous to the player than the effect, and the first effect informs that the advantage is given to the player. There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") performed as a fixed effect to be performed, and there is a case (hereinafter referred to as "second case") in which the first effect is not the fixed effect. The second effect is a final effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit, and the second effect is executed in the second case than in the first case. A game stand characterized in that it is configured to be easy.

(Appendix A130)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A129, wherein the timer display is displayed during execution of a symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the big hit game is being executed. A game console characterized in that a timer display may be a display showing the certain time.

(Appendix A 131)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A130, wherein the timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third case”), and The game stand characterized in that the certain effect in the case of three is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.

(Appendix A 132)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A119, wherein the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and indicates the certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over. It is comprised so that it may become a display, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A133)
A game console according to appendix A132, wherein said timer display is configured to initiate a display change to indicate said certain time when certain conditions relating to gaming are achieved, said certain Depending on the timing at which the condition is achieved, it may be configured to be a display showing the certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over, and the certain condition is A game console characterized in that it may be configured to display an indication of the certain time during the execution of the big hit game according to the timing achieved.

(Appendix A 134)
In the game stand described in the supplementary note A119, A132 or A133, an effect (hereinafter referred to as "the eleventh effect") indicating the gaming state after the big hit game is over is executed as the certain effect. There may be a case where an effect (hereinafter referred to as the “12th effect”) of notifying that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold is performed as the certain effect. The certain effect may be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time, and the timer display may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. The game machine is characterized in that the eleventh effect is more easily executed than the twelfth effect when the display time is not shown.

(Appendix A135)
The gaming machine is provided with a rendering means capable of executing a timer effect, and the timer effect is displayed when the timer display shows a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , “A certain effect”) is configured to be started, and is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, the big hit It is configured such that an effect (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth effect") may be executed that suggests that the player is given an advantageous benefit during the execution of the game. An effect is an effect that may be performed when the certain effect is performed at least once or more, a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Appendix A136)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A119 to A135, wherein the effect means is a display means.

(Appendix A 137)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A136, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A138)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A137, wherein the predetermined time is a time during which the remaining time of the timer indicates 0.

(Appendix A139)
A game stand according to any one of appendices A119 to A138, wherein the certain effect is an effect that can also be performed at an interval during a big hit game.

(Appendix A140)
The gaming machine is provided with a rendering means capable of executing a timer effect, and the timer effect is displayed when the timer display shows a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. , “A certain effect.” It is an effect configured to start, and at least a timer effect is performed during execution of symbol fluctuation display, and a new symbol fluctuation display is performed after the symbol fluctuation display is finished. The game console may be characterized in that the certain effect is performed during a period when the game is not performed.

(Appendix A 141)
A game console comprising a display means and an operation means, wherein the display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed, and the operation display is a display concerning the operation means. The display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed, and the timer display is a display for giving notice of a timing at which the operation display is displayed, and the timer display is the operation display. That at least a part of the display of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the display of the timer display, and the operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix A 142)
It is a game stand according to appendix A 141, and a first timer display may be displayed as the timer display, and a change in display of at least a part of the first timer display is started, or When the first time elapses as the time, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed, and the second timer display may be displayed as the timer display. When a second time period elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the timer display is started, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed, and the first time may be displayed. The game machine characterized in that the second time is longer than the second time.

(Appendix A143)
The game console according to appendix A141 or A142, comprising a second operation means, wherein the operation means is a first operation means, and the operation display is a first operation display. The display means may be a display on which a second operation display may be displayed, and the second operation display is a display relating to the second operation means. During display, the second operation display may be displayed when a certain time until the operation display is displayed has elapsed.

(Appendix A 144)
Supplementary note A141 through A143, wherein the display mode of the timer display may change when the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A145)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A144, wherein the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display by the timer display is displayed. The display mode of the timer display may change.

(Appendix A146)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A141 to A145, wherein the display means is a means for which a notice display may be displayed, and the notice display indicates the timer notice. It is a display for giving a prior notice, the game stand characterized by the above.

(Appendix A 147)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A141 to 146, and whether or not the big hit symbol aspect is finally determined or the lost symbol aspect is finally determined is displayed when the symbol starts to change The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display, and the big hit determination is a game ball on the starting opening provided on the game board. Is configured to be determined according to the result of a big hit lottery using a random number obtained when the character enters, and the probability (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery A predetermined number, and the jackpot probability does not change according to the display mode of the operation display.

(Appendix B1)
A game console comprising operation means provided at a position where a player can operate, and effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects, wherein the operation means can be in a plurality of states And one of the plurality of states is a first state, and one of the plurality of states is a second state, and one of the plurality of effects. The effect is a first effect, one effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect, and one effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect, the first One of the effects is an effect prompting the operation of the operation means in the first state, and the second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, and the second effect The third effect is not the effect for prompting the operation of the operation means, the third effect is the operation in the first effect. The operation response effect of the means, the third effect is an effect prompting the operation of the operation means in the second state, and the effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns, the plurality of patterns One of the patterns is a first pattern, and one of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern, and the first pattern starts the first effect. The second pattern is a pattern including that the second effect is started later, and the second pattern is a pattern that includes that the third effect is started after the first effect is started In the case where the certain effect by the second pattern is executed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed than when the certain effect by the first pattern is executed. Play table.

(Appendix B2)
The game stand according to appendix B1, wherein one of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect, and the fourth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the third effect The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is performed, and the fourth effect is a symbol variation display in progress A game stand characterized in that it is a suggestive effect regarding the success or failure.

(Appendix B3)
The game console according to appendix B1 or B2, wherein the first pattern starts the second effect even when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. A game console characterized in that the third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

(Appendix B4)
A game stand according to appendix B3, wherein the second effect is started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern. Play table.

(Appendix B5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B4, wherein one of the plurality of effects is the fifth effect, and one of the plurality of patterns is the fifth. The third pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the fifth effect is started, and the fifth effect is the second pattern. It is an effect which urges the operation of the operation means in the state of, and an aspect of the fifth effect and an aspect of the third effect are different aspects.

(Appendix B6)
The game stand according to appendix B5, wherein the third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the third display”) is displayed, and the fifth effect is Includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the fifth display”) is displayed, and the fifth display is the third display and the fifth display. A large, gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix B7)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note B5 or B6, and the third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “the thirteenth display”) is displayed, The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as the “fifteenth display”) is displayed, and the thirteenth display and an effect display surrounding the thirteenth display. And at least one of the fifteenth display and at least one of the fifteenth display and the effect display surrounding the fifteenth display is displayed in the fifteenth color. A game console characterized in that the thirteenth color and the fifteenth color are different colors.

(Appendix B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein one of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is the second pattern. The pattern is not started at the timing when the first effect is started, and the fourth pattern is the pattern where the third effect is started at the timing when the third effect is started in the second pattern. It is a pattern to be played, the game stand characterized by the above.

(Appendix B9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein one of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is the first effect. It is a pattern including a pattern in which a sixth effect is started after being started, the sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, and the first effect is It is an effect for selecting whether the third effect is started or the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed.

(Appendix B10)
A game stand according to appendix B9, wherein the sixth effect is an effect for prompting an operation of the operation means in the first state.

(Appendix B11)
The game stand according to appendix B9 or B10, wherein, when the operation means is not operated in the first effect, the sixth effect is started after the first effect is ended, A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B12)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B11, and the effect means suggests that an effect prompting the operation of the operation means is stocked (hereinafter referred to as "stock effect". The stock effect is an effect capable of stocking an effect prompting the user to operate the operation means once or a plurality of times, and the stock effect is an effect of prompting the operation of the operation means The first pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock effect, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the one stock is reduced in the stock effect. A game console characterized by

(Appendix B13)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, and when the operation means is not operated in the first effect, the second effect after the first effect is ended. The game is characterized by the fact that it is started.

(Appendix B14)
A game console comprising a plurality of operation means provided at a position where a player can operate, and a effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects, wherein one of the effects of the plurality of effects is One of the effects, one of the effects is a second effect, and one of the effects is a third effect, the first effect is The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and the second effect is the effect of urging the operation of the first operation means. The third effect is not the effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, but is the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operation of the second operation means, a certain effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns, and one of the plurality of patterns is a first The pattern, one of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern, and the first pattern starts the second effect after the first effect is started The second pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the first effect is started, and the second pattern is a pattern according to the first pattern. A game stand characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed when the certain effect by the second pattern is executed than when the effect is executed.

(Appendix B14-1)
A game console comprising a plurality of operation means provided at a position where a player can operate, and a effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects, wherein one of the effects of the plurality of effects is One of the effects, one of the effects is a second effect, and one of the effects is a third effect, of the plurality of operation means One of the operation means is a first operation means, one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means, and the first effect is the first operation. The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and the second effect is an operation of the first operation means. And the third effect is the first operation means in the first effect. It is an operation response effect, the third effect is an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, and the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. In the case where the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the first effect is started. Play table.

(Appendix B15)
It is a game stand provided with a display means, and the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter referred to as "variation icon"), and the display means is a display means Means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in the first display area of the display areas in the display area, and the display means is capable of displaying two of the fluctuation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two fluctuation icons") And one of the two variation icons is a first variation icon, one of the two variation icons is a second variation icon, and the second variation icon is The game console is displayed in a display area different from the first display area.

(Appendix B16)
In the game console according to Supplementary Note B15, a movement animation of the second movement icon (hereinafter referred to as a “second movement animation”) may be displayed during the display period of the first movement icon. , A game stand characterized by.

(Appendix B17)
A game stand according to appendix B16, wherein the second change icon may be displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation.

(Appendix B18)
The game console according to Supplementary Note B16 or B17, wherein the size of the second variation icon displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation is at least one of the periods of the movement animation. The game console characterized by being different from the size of the second fluctuation icon in the period of the part.

(Appendix B19)
Supplementary note B16. In the gaming table according to any one of B16 to B18, the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. A game console characterized by

(Appendix B20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B16 to B19, wherein the second variation icon may overlap with the advance notice during at least a part of the second movement animation period. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix B21)
A game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B20, wherein the second change icon is the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. It may overlap, and the game stand characterized by the above.

(Appendix B22)
A game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B21, characterized in that only one of the decorative symbol variation displays is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. Play table.

(Appendix B23)
A game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B22, characterized in that only one mini decoration symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. Play table.

(Appendix B24)
A game stand according to any one of appendices B16 to B23, wherein only one of the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. Is displayed, the game stand characterized by.

(Appendix B25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B24, wherein a movement animation of the first variation icon (hereinafter referred to as "first movement animation") may be displayed. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix B26)
Supplementary note B25, wherein any one of supplementary notes B16 to B24 is cited, wherein the second movement animation may be started after the start of the first movement animation. Play table.

(Appendix B27)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note B25 or B26, wherein any one of supplementary notes B16 to B24 is cited, wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a first display indicating a first jackpot expectation, The movement display of the first display is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a second display indicating a second jackpot expectation. There is a movement display of the second display during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B28)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B25 to B27, wherein any one of supplementary notes B16 to B24 is cited, wherein the movement of the holding icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation. There is provided a display, and movement display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B 29)
Supplementary note B25. In the gaming table according to any one of B28 to B28, the first fluctuation icon is displayed in a display area different from the first display area after the start of the first movement animation. There is a game that is characterized by.

(Appendix B30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B29, wherein the variation icon is not displayed in the first display area during a display period of at least a part of the display period of the two variation icons. Characterized by the game stand.

(Appendix B31)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices B15 to B30, and the number of the fluctuation icons may decrease from 1 to 2 and then decrease to 1 during the period of 1 decorative symbol fluctuation display. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B32)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B31, wherein the number of the fluctuation icons increases from 1 to 2 and then decreases to 1 in the decorative symbol fluctuation display period of 1, after the reduction After being increased to 2, it may be decreased to 1.

(Appendix B33)
The game console according to any one of appendices B15 to B32, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon, and the number of the hold icons in the display period of the two variation icons is A gaming machine characterized by having a number larger than the number of the hold icons before the display of two variation icons.

(Appendix B34)
The game console according to any one of appendices B15 to B33, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a number holding display, and the number of holdings indicated by the number holding display is the two variation icons. It is less than the number of the said pending | holding icons in a display period, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".
FIG. 271 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 271, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  It should be noted that an embodiment may be adopted in which the display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and described above, and the display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be That is, the touch panel provided in the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation or long press operation with the touch panel, or in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is being continuously touched. In addition, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. In addition, in a part of the effects, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less . Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel and the effect is performed by the touch panel, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured to be ineffective in many cases, or may be configured to be less. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 271 is used by enclosing a sphere and circulating the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and using the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere, dispensing the spheres May be implemented by credit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 272, a slot machine (rotary gaming machine) will be described as a game machine applicable to the present invention. Here, FIG. 272 is an appearance perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 272 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 272) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.
In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.
The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of the operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 273 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274 to FIG. 277, an effect example of the balloon display will be described.
In FIG. 274 to FIG. 277, although it is described as a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100, this rendering example can also be applied to the slot machine 1000. FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (k) show the conversational presentation using the balloon display in stages. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 274 through 277 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 274 through 277, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in FIG.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth pattern aa2, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 274 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 274 (b), which is subsequent to FIG. 274 (a), shows a state in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d is started. . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 274 (c) following FIG. 274 (b), the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208d moves from left to right is ended, and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Show the situation. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon and the design of the sunny mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed) Then, after stopping display at the approximate center of the screen, it is possible to display the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark in order from the top of the character string, or even if all the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark are displayed at once. Good.

  In FIG. 274 (d) following FIG. 274 (c), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player operates the chance button 136 It shows a state in which the effect to prompt is performed. Note that either one or both of the button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration time indication h112 or both may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 or overlap the balloon display f1. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 274 (e) continued from FIG. 274 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f2 by the wolf character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d is started, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the balloon display f1 is displayed is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. The movement animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2 You may start later. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 274 (f) continued from FIG. 274 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d moves toward the left is continuously executed, and the balloon display f1 is upward It shows a state in which the moving animation to move to the end is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The moving animation of the balloon display f1 and the moving animation of the balloon display f2 may end simultaneously, or the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the moving animation of the balloon display f2 ends.

  FIG. 274 (g), which is subsequent to FIG. 274 (f), shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left ends and the stop display is performed substantially at the center of the screen. The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the "afternoon weather" character string of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. ing. The face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be partially covered by the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 274 (h) continued from FIG. 274 (g), an erase animation in which the balloon display f1 moves to the left and is erased and an erase animation in which the balloon display f2 is moved and is erased to the right at the same time It shows the started condition. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 274 (i), which is subsequent to FIG. 274 (h), shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are continuously executed. The character strings in the balloon section of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and the patterns indicating the weather are also displayed during the execution of the deletion animation. In addition, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 move, the lower part of the character string “Afternoon weather” and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark that is covered by the balloon display f2 are displayed.

  FIG. 274 (j) following FIG. 274 (i) shows a state immediately before the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 end. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 274 (k) following FIG. 274 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is finished and the balloon displays f1 and f2 are deleted.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 and FIG. 275 to FIG. 277 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, in a conversational effect in which two balloon displays are displayed in stages, an erase animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 are simultaneously erased. In the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and f2, since the display of the balloon part is performed while the movement display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is different while the movement direction of the balloon display f1 and f2 is different, You may be able to entertain yourself. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIGS. 275 (a) to (k) show the staged conversational presentation using the balloon display.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth pattern aa2, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 275 (b) following FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6. Also, from the left end of the effect display area 208d, a moving animation in which a princess character display m3 appears is started. The moving animation in which the princess character display m3 appears is started after the display of the balloon display f1 is started. The moving animation of the princess character display m3 and the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may be started at the same time, or the princess character display m3 may be started before the start of the balloon display f1. The princess character display m3 is a notice display of the change. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the fourth pattern aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the common drawing reservation number aa5, the fourth figure aa6 of the common drawing . The princess character display m3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 and the decoration pattern. The princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon display f1 or the decorative symbol, or may be used as a preview advance notice display.

  In FIG. 275 (c) continued from FIG. 275 (b), the balloon animation f1 appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208d moves from the left to the right and the moving animation ends and the screen is stopped and displayed substantially at the center At the same time, a moving animation in which the character display m3 of the princess appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208d moves from the left to the right is continuously executed. The moving speed of the princess character display m3 is faster than the moving speed of the balloon display f1. The moving speed of the princess character display m3 may be the same as the moving speed of the balloon display f1 or may be slower than the moving speed of the balloon display f1. The princess character display m3 may be stopped and displayed so as to interrupt the moving animation and overlap the balloon display f1 at the center of the screen. The entire princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 275 (d) following FIG. 275 (c), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player operates the chance button 136 While the effect which urges | performs being performed, the state which the deletion animation which the character display m3 of a princess reaches the screen right end and is erase | eliminated is shown is performed. Note that either one or both of the button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration time indication h112, or both may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 or the princess character display m3, It may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display f1 and the character display m3 of the princess.

  In FIG. 275 (e) following FIG. 275 (d), the princess character display m3 is deleted and the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to display a button advance notice h110. The operation animation is displayed in which the balloon display f2 by the キ ャ ラ ク タ character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. It shows the condition that has been In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the display of the balloon display f1 is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, a balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f1. Further, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the moving animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the moving animation of the balloon display f2, or the moving animation of the balloon display f2 You may start after the start of the The moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appears is started after the deletion of the princess character display m3, but may be started before the deletion of the princess character display m3. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 275 (f) following FIG. 275 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d moves toward the left is continuously executed, and the balloon display f1 is upward It shows a state in which the moving animation to move to the end is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The movement animation of the balloon display f1 and the movement animation of the balloon display f2 may end at the same time, or the movement animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the movement animation of the balloon display f2 ends. Good.

  FIG. 275 (g) following FIG. 275 (f) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left ends and the stop display is performed at the approximate center of the screen. The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the "afternoon weather" character string of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. ing. The face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be partially covered by the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 275 (h) continued from FIG. 275 (g), the deletion animation in which the balloon display f1 moves to the left and is deleted and the deletion animation in which the balloon display f2 is moved and is deleted to the right at the same time It shows the started condition. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 275 (i) following FIG. 275 (h) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are continuously executed. The character strings in the balloon section of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and the patterns indicating the weather are also displayed during the execution of the deletion animation. In addition, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 move, the lower part of the character string “Afternoon weather” and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark that is covered by the balloon display f2 are displayed.

  FIG. 275 (j) following FIG. 275 (i) shows a state immediately before the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 end. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 275 (k) following FIG. 275 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends and the balloon displays f1 and f2 are erased.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 and FIG. 274 to FIG. 277 is performed.

  Thus, this example displays the princess character display m3 so as to overlap with the first balloon display f1 of the two balloon displays in the conversational effect of displaying the two balloon displays in stages. In some cases, it is possible to poke off the player's will. In addition, the princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2 displayed at the end of the two balloon displays. In addition, in place of or in parallel with the princess character display m3, the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decorative pattern, the first to overlap the balloon display f1 or the balloon display f2. Four symbols, mini decoration pattern, notice display, prefetch notice display, tutorial display, pseudo link display, reach display, right hit display, left hit display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display , RT display, number of consecutive rotations display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, at least one of abnormal occurrence display May be displayed. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIGS. 276 (a) to 276 (k) show the conversational effects using the balloon display in stages.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth pattern aa2, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 276 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 276 (b) following FIG. 276 (a) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 276 (c) continued from FIG. 276 (b), the balloon animation f1 appeared from the left end of the effect display area 208d was stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen after the movement animation of moving from left to right ended. It shows the state.

  In FIG. 276 (d) following FIG. 276 (c), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, and the player operates the chance button 136 It shows a state in which the effect to prompt is performed. Note that either one or both of the button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration time indication h112 or both may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1 or overlap the balloon display f1. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 276 (e) following FIG. 276 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f2 by the wolf character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d is started, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the display of the balloon display f1 is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, a balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f1. The movement animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2 You may start later. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 276 (f) following FIG. 276 (e), the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208d moves toward the left is continuously executed, and the balloon display f1 is upward It shows a state in which the moving animation to move to the end is ended and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The moving animation of the balloon display f1 and the moving animation of the balloon display f2 may end simultaneously, or the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the moving animation of the balloon display f2 ends.

  In FIG. 276 (g) following FIG. 276 (f), the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left is finished and stopped at approximately the center of the screen so that it partially overlaps the balloon display f1. The balloon display f2 is displayed on the screen, and the princess character display m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of the balloon display f2. The princess character display m3 is displayed so that a putt appears in the center of the screen simultaneously with the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f2. In addition, although the character display m3 of a princess is a notice display of the said fluctuation | variation, you may be used as a prefetch notice display. The princess character display m3 may have a size that overlaps only the balloon display f2 or may have a size that overlaps only the balloon display f1. The character display m3 of the princess may be displayed so as to be lightened and gradually darkened at the time of appearance, or may appear before the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f2, or the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f2 It may appear later. In addition, after the start of the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appears, a moving animation may be performed in which the princess character display m3 appears from the right end of the screen and moves so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the character string “afternoon weather” of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. In addition, a part of the character string of the balloon display f1 and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, and a part of the character string of the balloon display f2 and a part of the image of the cloudy mark are covered by the princess character display m3. . The face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be partially covered by the balloon display f2. In addition, all of the princess character display m3 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 276 (h) following FIG. 276 (g), the character animation m3 of the princess is erased, and the balloon display f1 moves toward the left and is erased and the erasing animation and the balloon display f2 move toward the right It shows a state where an erase animation to be erased is started at the same time. By deleting the princess character display m3, a portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2 covered by the princess character display m3 is displayed. The princess character display m3 may be deleted before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2, or may be deleted after the start of the deletion animation. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 276 (i) following FIG. 276 (h) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are continuously executed. The character strings in the balloon section of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and the patterns indicating the weather are also displayed during the execution of the deletion animation. In addition, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 move, the lower part of the character string “Afternoon weather” and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark that is covered by the balloon display f2 are displayed.

  FIG. 276 (j) following FIG. 276 (i) shows a state immediately before the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 end. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 276 (k) following FIG. 276 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends and the balloon displays f1 and f2 are deleted.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 and FIG. 274 to FIG. 277 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, in a conversational effect in which two balloon displays are displayed in stages, the character display m3 of the princess is such that the two balloon displays overlap with each other in a state where the two balloon displays overlap and are displayed. In some cases, it is possible to poke a player's will by displaying. In addition, instead of the character display m3 of the princess or in parallel, in order to overlap with two balloon displays, a hold display, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, an icon area display, a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, Mini decoration pattern, notice display, preview notice display, tutorial display, pseudo linked display, reach display, right hit display, left hit display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display Display the number of consecutive shots, acquired ball number display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display. May be Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIGS. 277 (a) to 277 (k) show the conversational presentation using the balloon display in stages.

  In the area at the left end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (a), the special figure 1 reserve number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3, the special figure 2 The 4th design aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, and the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. A holding frame UI is displayed in the lower end area of the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI has a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and a tutorial display area tu1. The left area in the holding frame UI is a change icon display area CIS displaying a change icon, and a change icon ad1 displaying a change icon display and a default mode is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. There is. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is the hold icon display area HIS, and the special view 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special view 2 hold icon b1 to b3 are alternately displayed in this order from left to right There is. On the right of the hold icon display area HIS, a tutorial display area tu1 is displayed, and the text "Preparing" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 277 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 277 (a) shows a state where a rectangular frame shaped advance notice display area yk1 is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol display area 208a. In the notice display area yk1, a character string of "attention!" Is displayed, which suggests that the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 277 (c) is displayed. The notice display area yk1 may be always displayed, or a notice display other than the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

  FIG. 277 (b) following FIG. 277 (a) shows a state in the decorative symbol display device 208 where movement animation is started in which a balloon display f1 by the character of the statue appears from the left end of the effect display area 208 d. . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display including a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5, and the fourth drawing aa6 of the common drawing, and the notice display area yk1.

  In FIG. 277 (c) following FIG. 277 (b), the balloon animation f 1 appearing from the left end of the effect display area 208 d is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen after the movement animation of moving from left to right It shows the state. At the same time as the stop display of the balloon display f1, “39.99”, which is the number of seconds at the start of the timer display of the timer advance display TM, is displayed in the special advance notice display area yk1. The timer notice display TM is a notice display used as a notice of the change, and a specific effect is performed when the timer display reaches 0.00. The specific effect may be reach effect, reach effect developed from reach effect, SP reach effect, or temporary stop effect of the jackpot symbol. Further, all of the timer advance notice display TM may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. The timer advance notice display TM may be used as a pre-reading advance notice display.

  FIG. 277 (d) continues from FIG. 277 (c), in which the timer notice display TM is counted down and “34.50” is displayed as the timer display, and the chance button 136 is simulated above the balloon display f1. The button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating that the effect of urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. Note that either one or both of the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration display h112 imitating the chance button 136 may be displayed so as to overlap the preview display area yk1 and the balloon display f1, or the preview display It may be displayed so as to overlap the area yk1 and the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 277 (e) following FIG. 277 (d), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “34.00” is displayed as the timer display, and the player has a chance within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. By pressing the button 136, the button advance display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, and a moving animation in which a balloon display f2 by a brow character appears from the right end of the effect display area 208d is started and the balloon display is displayed. It shows a state in which the moving animation in which f1 moves upward is started. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display including a balloon part that In this example, the balloon displays f1 and f2 are advance notice displays of the variation indicating the big hit reliability. The balloon display f2 displayed by the player operating the chance button 136 after the balloon display f1 is displayed is a display having a higher jackpot reliability than the balloon display f1. Further, a balloon display f2 displayed after the balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f1. The movement animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2, or the start of the movement animation of the balloon display f2 You may start later. Furthermore, the balloon display f1 may be displayed so as to be gradually reduced after the display of the balloon display f2.

  The statements of the balloon displays f1 and f2 displayed in the conversation presentation of the present example are all sentences related to the weather and are related to each other. By relating the sentences of the balloon display f1 and f2, a conversational effect is given a streaminess. In addition, the statement which is not related to the weather may be displayed as the statement of the balloon display f1 and f2. For example, a sentence related to a certain theme may be displayed on the balloon display f1 or f2, a sentence on the balloon display f2 may be responded to the sentence on the balloon display f1 displayed first, or the balloon display f1 or f2 Statements may not be relevant.

  In FIG. 277 (f) following FIG. 277 (e), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “33.50” is displayed as the timer display, and the balloon display f 2 appearing from the right end of the effect display area 208 d is The moving animation moving toward the left is continuously executed, and the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is ended, and the stop display is shown at the approximate center of the screen. In this example, even after the end of the moving animation of the balloon display f1, which is the old display of the two balloon displays, the moving animation of the balloon display f2, which is the new display of the two balloon displays, is continuously executed. . The moving animation of the balloon display f1 and the moving animation of the balloon display f2 may end simultaneously, or the moving animation of the balloon display f1 may end after the moving animation of the balloon display f2 ends.

  In FIG. 277 (g) following FIG. 277 (f), the timer announcement display TM is counted down and “33.00” is displayed as the timer display, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left is The timer is displayed and stopped at approximately the center of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1, and the timer is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of the balloon display f2. A state in which the advance notice display TM is displayed is shown. Note that the timer notice display TM may be displayed so as to overlap only with the balloon display f 1, or may be displayed so as to overlap only with the balloon display f 2, or all of the timer notice display TM may be ballooned. It may be displayed so as to overlap the displays f1 and f2.

  The area in which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed includes a part of the area stopped and displayed immediately before the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is started. The balloon display f2 is stopped so as to overlap with the balloon display f1, and the lower part of the character string “afternoon weather” of the balloon display f1 and the lower part of the pattern of the sunny mark are covered by the balloon display f2. Further, a part of the character string of the balloon display f1 and the face image of the character of the character of the character and a part of the character string of the balloon display f2 are covered by the timer notice display TM. Note that the face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 or the character image of the character “To” may be covered by part of the balloon display f2, and the timer notice display TM is displayed on the balloon display f1 or the balloon display f2. It may be overlapped.

  In FIG. 277 (h) following FIG. 277 (g), the timer announcement display TM is counted down and “28.00” is displayed as the timer display, and the balloon display f 1 moves toward the left. It shows a state in which the erasing animation to be erased and the erasing animation to be erased by moving the balloon display f2 toward the right are started at the same time. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may be started before the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 or may be started after the start of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 277 (i) continued from FIG. 277 (h), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “27.75” is displayed as the timer display, and the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 are performed. Indicates a state where it has been continuously executed.

  In FIG. 277 (j) following FIG. 277 (i), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “27.50” is displayed as the timer display, and the deletion animation of the balloon display f1 and the deletion animation of the balloon display f2 Shows the state just before the end of. The elimination animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends simultaneously. The deletion animation of the balloon display f1 may end before the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2, or may end after the end of the deletion animation of the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 277 (k) following FIG. 277 (j), the timer notice display TM is counted down and “27.25” is displayed as the timer display, and the deletion animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends. The balloon displays f1 and f2 are shown in the erased state.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, may be used as an advance notice of the change, or may be used as a reach effect. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may be prefetched notice displays. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, and when the effect of this example is performed, It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 234 to FIG. 254 and FIG. 274 to FIG. 276 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, in a conversational effect in which two balloon displays are displayed stepwise, after the display start of the balloon display f1 displayed first of the two balloon displays, the balloon display f1 or the balloon display f2 is displayed. The timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap, and the timer notice display TM is displayed even after the end of the display of the balloon display f2 displayed at the end of the two balloon displays, thereby picking up the player's indication There are times when you can. In addition, in place of or in parallel with the timer notice display TM, the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decorative symbol, the fourth design, the mini to overlap two balloon displays. Decorative design, notice display, preview notice display, tutorial display, pseudo linked display, reach display, right hit display, left hit display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, Display at least one of the number of consecutive times display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, abnormality occurrence display It is also good. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  FIG. 277 (l) shows an example in which a character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as "Yoshimune") ym and the advance notice display area yk1 are always displayed in the holding frame UI. The Yoshimune ym may be included in a tutorial effect display, a change display for changing a display mode such as a hold icon, a change icon, or a development candidate display of a development destination, or an effect display of a timer advance notice display. Since Yoshimune ym is always displayed, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that these effect display may be started. In addition, since the advance notice display area yk1 is always displayed in the holding frame UI, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer advance notice display may be started. Note that either Yoshimune yk1 or the advance notice display area yk1 may be displayed at all times. Also, this example can be combined with other presentation examples.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 277.

(A1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 275),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 275 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 275 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 275 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 275 (e) to (h)).
One of the plurality of displays is a display (for example, a princess character display m3),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is a part of the certain display before a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display. It may overlap with at least a part (for example, see FIGS. 275 (b) and (c)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display in front is made to stand out, and the first balloon display overlaps the display with a certain display to make the player's intention In some cases, it is possible to produce an effect that strikes the player, and improve the player's interest.

(A2)
It is the gaming machine described in (a1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 275 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(A3)
The gaming machine according to (a1) or (a2), wherein
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the balloon display and the advance notice display overlap, it is possible to poke off the player's intention, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(A4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 275 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(A5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a4), wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(A7)
The game console according to any one of (a1) to (a6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(A8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a7), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started (see, for example, FIGS. 275 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (a1) to (a9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(B1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 276),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (b) and (c)).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed after the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 276 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (e) to (h)).
One of the plurality of displays is a display (for example, a princess character display m3),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display and a part of the second balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the certain display (see, for example, FIG. 276 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display in front is made to stand out, and the two balloon displays overlap the display with a certain display, and the effect is to poke the player's mind In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(B2)
It is the gaming machine described in (b1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 276 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(B3)
The gaming machine according to (b1) or (b2), wherein
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, by overlapping the two balloon displays and the advance notice display, it is possible to catch the player's intention, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(B4)
The game console according to any one of (b1) to (b3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 276 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(B5)
The game console according to any one of (b1) to (b4), wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(B6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (b1) to (b5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(B7)
The game console according to any one of (b1) to (b6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (b1) to (b7), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (b1) to (b8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIGS. 276 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(B10)
The game console according to any one of (b1) to (b9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(B11)
The game console according to any one of (b1) to (b9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(C1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 277),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 277 (b) and (c)).
One display of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 277 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 277 (e) to (h)).
One of the plurality of displays is a display (for example, timer notice display TM),
In the conversation effect display, after a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the certain display overlap, both a part of the first balloon display and a part of the second balloon display May overlap with at least a part of the certain display (see, for example, FIGS. 277 (c) to (g)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display in the foreground is made to stand out, and at least one of the two balloon displays overlaps with a certain display. In some cases, it is possible to produce an effect that strikes the player, and improve the player's interest.

(C2)
It is the gaming machine described in (c1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 277 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(C3)
It is a game console according to (c1) or (c2),
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the balloon display and the advance notice display overlap, it is possible to poke off the player's intention, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(C4)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 277 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(C5)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c4), wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(C6)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(C7)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(C8)
(C1) to (c7), wherein the game console is any one of
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(C9)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIGS. 277 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(C10)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(C11)
The game console according to any one of (c1) to (c9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(D1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 274),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 274 (e)).
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (e) to (h)).
In the conversation effect display, after a part of the first balloon display is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the second balloon display, the state is canceled and one of the first balloon display The part may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 274 (i)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display on the near side is made conspicuous, and the first after the overlap due to the second balloon display on the near side is eliminated By displaying a part of the balloon display, the player may be able to enjoy the afterglow of the first balloon display, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

(D2)
It is the gaming machine described in (d1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 274 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(D3)
The gaming machine according to (d1) or (d2), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 274 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(D4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d3), wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(D5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d4), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(D6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d5), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(D7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d6), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(D8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d7), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIGS. 274 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(D9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d8), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(D10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (d1) to (d8), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(E1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display (for example, the conversation effect shown in FIG. 274),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (b) and (c)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (e) to (g)).
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 274 (e)).
The display means displays a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first moving animation” (for example, moving animation of the balloon display f1 shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (k)). It is a possible means,
The display means displays a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation” (for example, moving animation of the balloon display f2 shown in FIGS. 274 (h) to (k)). It is a possible means,
The direction in which the first balloon display moves in the first movement animation (for example, the left direction) is the direction in which the second balloon display in the second movement animation moves (for example, the right direction) Different directions (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (h) to (k)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while emphasizing the relevance of the two balloon displays, the second balloon display on the near side is made to stand out, and the movement direction of the two balloon displays is different. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(E2)
It is the gaming machine described in (e1),
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving (see, for example, FIG. 274 (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it is possible to make the player observe the overlapping state of the two balloon displays, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(E3)
It is the gaming machine described in (e2),
The first movement animation is an animation displayed before the first balloon display is erased (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (h) to (k)).
The second movement animation is an animation displayed before the second balloon display is erased (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (h) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, in the animation for erasing the two balloon displays, the movement direction of the two balloon displays is different, so that it is possible to perform the effect of punishing the player's mind, thereby improving the player's interest There is a possibility.

(E4)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e3), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "morning weather"),
The second balloon display is a display including characters (for example, "the weather for lunch"),
A part of characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 274 (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(E5)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e4), wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(E6)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e5), wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. Small (see, for example, FIG. 242 (e)),
A game stand characterized by
(E7)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e6), wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(E8)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e7), wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a display of the name of the character (for example, a character string of "ten"),
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(E9)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e8), wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIGS. 274 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by
(E10)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(E11)
The game console according to any one of (e1) to (e9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.
(Appendix a1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a display,
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display is a part of the certain display before a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display. May overlap with at least a part,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a3)
The gaming machine according to the appendix a1 or a2
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a3.
The first balloon display is a display including characters,
The second balloon display is a display including characters,
A part of the characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. small,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a6, wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a7, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character,
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a name display of a character,
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a8, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a display,
In the conversation effect display, a part of the first balloon display and a part of the second balloon display may overlap at least a part of the certain display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note b1 or b2,
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
The first balloon display is a display including characters,
The second balloon display is a display including characters,
A part of the characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b4,
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. small,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b6, wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character,
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a name display of a character,
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
Equipped with operating means,
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b10)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b11)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a display,
In the conversation effect display, after a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the certain display overlap, both a part of the first balloon display and a part of the second balloon display May overlap with at least a portion of the display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c2)
The game console described in the appendix c1,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c3)
The gaming machine according to the appendix c1 or c2, wherein
The certain display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c4)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c3, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters,
The second balloon display is a display including characters,
A part of the characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c5)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c4, wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c5, wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. small,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c6, wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c8)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c7, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character,
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a name display of a character,
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c9)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c8, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c11)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
In the conversation effect display, after a part of the first balloon display is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the second balloon display, the state is canceled and one of the first balloon display Department may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d1 or d2, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters,
The second balloon display is a display including characters,
A part of the characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d3, wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. small,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d5, wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d6, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character,
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a name display of a character,
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d7, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as "first moving animation"),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation”),
The direction in which the first balloon display moves in the first movement animation is a direction different from the direction in which the second balloon display in the second movement animation moves.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e3)
It is a game console described in appendix e2,
The first movement animation is an animation displayed before the first balloon display is erased,
The second movement animation is an animation that is displayed before erasing the second balloon display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e3, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters,
The second balloon display is a display including characters,
A part of the characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e4, wherein
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e5, wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. small,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e6, wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e7, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character,
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a name display of a character,
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e8, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the examples, the modifications, the various examples, the supplementary notes, and the like described above, the configuration requirements may be changed to another embodiment, an example, and The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, the examples, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. are other embodiments, examples, or modifications. Even if applied to examples and various examples and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Moreover, when the content of a game can be further expanded by applying the content described in one structure among the plurality of structures described in any of the above-mentioned embodiments to the structure of another example. There is.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine typified by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed type game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 160 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 1st special view display device 214 2nd special view display device 227 Opening for increasing the number of meters 228 Opening for common drawing start 230 1st special view start Mouth 232 second special figure starting mouth 234, 235 variable winning opening 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 418 various lamps 500 second sub-control unit

Claims (11)

It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a conversation effect display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display,
The first balloon display is one balloon display of the conversation effect display, and
The second balloon display is another balloon display of the conversation presentation display,
In the conversation effect display, the second balloon display is started to be displayed later than the first balloon display,
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as "first moving animation"),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation”),
The direction in which the first balloon display moves in the first movement animation is a direction different from the direction in which the second balloon display in the second movement animation moves.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
In the conversation presentation display, a part of the first balloon display that has finished moving is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display that has finished moving.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein
The first movement animation is an animation displayed before the first balloon display is erased,
The second movement animation is an animation that is displayed before erasing the second balloon display.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including characters,
The second balloon display is a display including characters,
A part of the characters of the first balloon display is overlapped with a part of the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The reliability of the second balloon display is higher than the reliability of the first balloon display,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The size of the first balloon display displayed after the display start of the second balloon display is larger than the size of the first balloon display displayed before the display start of the second balloon display. small,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein
The second balloon display sentence is a sentence that may be related to the first balloon display sentence,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is:
The first balloon display is a display including a character,
The character of the first balloon display is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
The first balloon display is a display including a name display of a character,
The name display of the first balloon display character is not overlapped with the second balloon display,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by